Wrxsti

Black plate (1,1)
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, we recommend
that you contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased
your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
NOTE: “SUBARU dealer” means an authorized SUBARU dealer
and/or repairer.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C Copyright 2016 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual uses recycled paper.
一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 9/ 1

Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Black plate (3,1)
Warranties How to use this Owner’s Chapter 4: Climate control

0
Manual This chapter informs you how to operate
All warranty information, including details the climate control.
of coverage and exclusions, is in the & Using your Owner’s Manual Chapter 5: Audio
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please Before you operate your vehicle, carefully This chapter informs you how to operate
read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and your audio system.
extend the service life of your vehicle, Chapter 6: Interior equipment
follow the instructions in this manual. This chapter informs you how to operate
Failure to observe these instructions may interior equipment.
result in serious injury and damage to your Chapter 7: Starting and operating
vehicle. This chapter informs you how to start and
This manual is composed of fourteen operate your SUBARU.
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief Chapter 8: Driving tips
table of contents, so you can usually tell at This chapter informs you how to drive your
a glance if that chapter contains the SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
information you want. plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
This chapter informs you how to use the
engine overheating.
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 10: Appearance care
Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
This chapter informs you about the opera-
scheduled maintenance and informs you
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to keep your SUBARU running
how to use the instruments and other
properly.
switches.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)
Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION & Abbreviation list

This chapter informs you about dimension You may find several abbreviations in this
and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
Chapter 13: Supplement which injury or damage to your tions are shown in the following list.
This chapter informs you of supplemen- vehicle, or both, could result if the
tary information complied with some caution is ignored. Abbreviation Meaning
countries’ requirements. A/C Air conditioner
Chapter 14: Index NOTE Automatic locking retractor/
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in ALR/ELR Emergency locking retractor
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
this manual. You can use it to quickly find tions how to make better use of your ABS Anti-lock brake system
something you want to read. vehicle. ALR Automatic locking retractor
& Safety warnings AWD All-wheel drive
& Safety symbol
You will find a number of WARNINGs, C.DIFF/ Driver’s control center differ-
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. DCCD ential
These safety warnings alert you to poten- CVT Continuously variable trans-
tial hazards that could result in injury to mission
you or others. CVTF Continuously variable trans-
Please read these safety warnings as well mission fluid
as all other portions of this manual care- EBD Electronic brake force distri-
fully in order to gain a better understand- bution
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle ELR Emergency locking retractor
safely. GPS Global positioning system
WARNING INT Intermittent
LED Light emitting diode
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could You will find a circle with a slash through it LHD Left-hand drive
result if the warning is ignored. in this manual. This symbol means “Do LSD Limited slip differential
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context. MPW Maximum permissible weight
MT Manual transmission

Black plate (5,1)
Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when 0

OBD On-board diagnostics
driving
These are some of the symbols you may
Rear MPAW Maximum permissible rear see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag
axle weight
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
RHD Right-hand drive “Warning and indicator lights” F24. WARNING
RON Research octane number
Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle should
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
SRS Supplemental restraint sys- WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other-
tem wise, the possibility of serious
SUBARU Rear Vehicle De- injury becomes greater in the
SRVD tection CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci-
SVM Side View Monitor dent.
Read these instructions care- . To obtain maximum protection in
fully the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
Battery fluid contains sulfuric does not do away with the need
acid
to fasten seatbelts. In combina-
tion with the seatbelts, it offers
Keep children away the best combined protection in
case of a serious accident.
Keep flames away Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
Prevent explosions vehicle has the SRS airbag.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (6,1)
. The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety restraint device or in a seatbelt.
considerable speed and force. The SRS airbag deploys with
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING considerable speed and force
position when the SRS airbag and can injure or even kill chil-
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or dren, especially if they are 12
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is years of age and under or 1.5 m
needs enough space for deploy- moving. The passenger cannot (4 feet 11 inches) tall or less and
ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a are not restrained or improperly
sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will restrained. Because children are
seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen- lighter and weaker than adults,
wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi- their risk of being injured from
maintaining full vehicle control cle. deployment is greater.
and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in-
move the seat as far back as fants and small children should
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR
back in the seat. seat in an infant or a child
restraint system which is appro-
For instructions and precautions, carefully priate for the child’s age, height
read the following sections. and weight. If a child is too big for
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- a child restraint system, the child
belts” F1-14. should sit in the REAR seat and
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts.
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
System airbag)” F1-38. children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children aged 12 and under
or 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or
less in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child

Black plate (7,1)
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the CHILD can occur. belts” F1-14.
0
. Always turn the child safety locks . For the child restraint system, refer to
to the “LOCK” position when “Child restraint systems” F1-22.
children sit on the rear seat. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
Serious injury could result if a “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
child accidentally opens the door System airbag)” F1-38.
and falls out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-24. & Engine exhaust gas (carbon
. Always lock the passengers’ win- monoxide)
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle. WARNING
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
operating the power window. Re- Engine exhaust gas contains
fer to “Windows” F2-24. carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
. Never leave unattended children,
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure . Always properly maintain the en-
themselves or others through gine exhaust system to prevent
inadvertent operation of the ve- engine exhaust gas from enter-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, ing the vehicle.
the temperature in a closed ve- . Never run the engine in a closed
hicle could quickly become high space, such as a garage, except
enough to cause severe or pos- for the brief time needed to drive
A) AIRBAG sibly fatal injuries to them. the vehicle in or out of it.
. When leaving the vehicle, close . Avoid remaining in a parked
WARNING all windows and lock all doors. vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
. NEVER use a rearward facing For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
child restraint on a seat pro- read the following sections. lation fan to force outside air into
tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)
the vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the after taking any medications that can
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
or other obstructions to ensure Please don’t drink and drive. you have a medical condition that requires
that the ventilation system al- you to take drugs, please consult with
ways works properly. Drunken driving is one of the most your doctor.
. If at any time you suspect that frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- Never drive if you are under the influence
exhaust fumes are entering the hol affects all people differently, you may of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
vehicle, have t he probl em have consumed too much alcohol to drive own health and well-being, we urge you
checked and corrected as soon safely even if the level of alcohol in your not to take illegal drugs in the first place
as possible. If you must drive blood is below the legal limit. The safest and to seek treatment if you are addicted
under these conditions, drive thing you can do is never drink and drive. to those drugs.
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid closed while
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle. WARNING WARNING
There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can reaction will be delayed and your
& Drinking and driving delay your reaction time and impair perception, judgment and attentive-
your perception, judgment and at- ness will be impaired. If you drive
WARNING tentiveness. If you drive after taking when tired or sleepy, your, your
them, it may increase your, your passengers’ and other persons’
Drinking and then driving is very passengers’ and other persons’ risk
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- chances of being involved in a
of being involved in a serious or serious accident may increase.
stream delays your reaction and fatal accident.
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after Please do not continue to drive but
If you are taking any drugs, check with instead find a safe place to rest if you
drinking – even if you drink just a your doctor or pharmacist or read the
little – it will increase the risk of are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
literature that accompanies the medication should make periodic rest stops to refresh
being involved in a serious or fatal to determine if the drug you are taking can
accident, injuring or killing yourself, yourself before continuing on your journey.
impair your driving ability. Do not drive When possible, you should share the
your passengers and others. In

Black plate (9,1)
driving with others. & Car phone/cell phone and & Driving with pets 0
driving Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
& Modification of your vehicle driving and distract your attention from
CAUTION driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
CAUTION unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
Do not use a car phone/cell phone around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
Your vehicle should not be modified. while driving; it may distract your your passengers. Besides, the pets can
Modification could affect its perfor- attention from driving and can lead be hurt under these situations. It is also for
mance, safety or durability, and may to an accident. If you use a car their own safety that pets should be
even violate governmental regula- phone/cell phone, pull off the road properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor- and park in a safe place before strain a pet with a special traveling
mance problems resulting from using your phone. In some coun- harness which can be secured to the rear
modification may not be covered tries, only hands-free phones may seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
under warranties. legally be used while driving. which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
NOTE handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
& Driving vehicles equipped in the front passenger’s seat. For further
This vehicle is equipped with a function with navigation system information, consult your veterinarian,
that will record certain vehicle data in
local animal protection society or pet
the event the vehicle is operated or
WARNING shop.
maintained in a manner that exceeds or
varies from routine normal use. Do not allow the monitor to distract & Tire pressures
That data may be used as a means of your attention from driving. Also, do
determining whether or not a vehicle not operate the controls of the Check and, if necessary, adjust the
condition is eligible for repair under navigation system while driving. pressure of each tire (including the spare)
warranty. The loss of attention to driving at least once a month and before any long
could lead to an accident. If you journey.
wish to operate the controls of the Check the tire pressure when the tires are
navigation system, first take the cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
vehicle off the road and stop it in a tire pressures to the values shown on the
safe place. tire placard.
For detailed information, refer to “Tires
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)
and wheels” F11-34. General information EU Battery directive 2006/66/

EC
WARNING & Gear shift indicator (Europe
Driving at high speeds with exces- and Australia models) Followings are the symbol of EU Battery
sively low tire pressures can cause Directive 2006/66/EC.
the tires to deform severely and to CAUTION This directive applies to the collection of
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- batteries, recycling of disposed batteries
crease in temperature could cause The indication of the gear shift
indicator is only a guideline for and accumulators, and batteries not dis-
tread separation, and destruction of posed of in landfills because they could be
the tires. The resulting loss of driving more fuel-efficiently. The
indicator does not inform the driver hazardous to the environment.
vehicle control could lead to an
accident. about safe shift operation timing. In your vehicle, there are some batteries
The driver has the responsibility for that do not have the 2006/66/EC EU
suitable shift operation depending Battery directive symbol.
on the traffic conditions or driving
conditions (e.g., overtaking or driv- Please check and obey all local laws and
ing on an uphill slope). regulations for the disposal of batteries or
accumulations.
This indicator supports the driver to drive
more fuel-efficiently. The vehicle system
determines the shift operation timing
depending on the driving conditions, and
informs the driver by the indicator on the
combination meter. For details, refer to
“Gear shift indicator” F3-33.
NOTE
Usually, the gear shift indicator is a
guideline for driving more fuel-effi-
ciently, and it also operates to prevent
a possible engine stall at a low engine
speed.

Black plate (11,1)
The following devices utilize batteries that

do not have the symbol:
Noise levels inside the vehi- 0
cle (Customs Union Regula-
tion)
TR CU 018/2011
(TECHNICAL REGULATION OF THE
CUSTOMS UNION, On Safety of
Wheeled Vehicles),
Attachment No. 3: Section 2
(Requirements for vehicles concerning
their interior noise):
Table 2.1: Remarks: No. 3,
The noise level measured during accel-
eration may reach up to 81 dBA as
. Keys (if equipped): CR1620 maximum.
. Access keys (if equipped): CR2032 This vehicle may not be used for public
purposes (as taxis, for example).

Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Supplement 13
Index 14
一般Model "A1270GE-A" Edited: 2015/ 9/ 1

Black plate (14,1)
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-12)
Illustrated index 2) Front wiper (page 3-107)
3) Headlight (page 3-93)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-47)
5) Sunroof (page 2-30)
6) Door locks (page 2-4)
7) Outside mirror (page 3-112)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-36)
9) Flat tires (page 9-5)
10) Tire chains (page 8-10)
11) Fog light (page 3-103)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
13) Towing hook (page 9-13)

Black plate (15,1)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-114)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-24)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Trunk lid (page 2-27)
6) Towing hook (page 9-13)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)
14
1) Anchor bars for ISOFIX child restraint
& Interior system (page 1-35)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-14)
! Passenger compartment area
3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-10)
5) Warning labels for child restraint system
(page 1-25)
6) SOS button for ERA-GLONASS system
A) AIRBAG
*: NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
NOTE
ERA-GLONASS will be available in
Russia, Kazakhstan and Belarus. As
of February 2016, the service is only
available in Russia. Refer to the Own-
er’s Manual supplement for the ERA-
GLONASS system.

Black plate (17,1)
15
1) Center console (page 6-5)
(STI)
2) Seat heater (page 1-9) 0
3) Cup holder (page 6-5)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-41)
5) Power windows (page 2-24)
7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-112)
8) Glove box (page 6-4)
9) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
10) Shift lever (page 7-12)
11) SI-DRIVE (page 7-25)
12) Driver’s Control Center Differential
(DCCD) (page 7-15)
The illustration above is a typical example for left-hand drive models. For right-hand drive
models, the locations of some switches/levers are different from those shown in the
illustration.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)
16
(Except STI) 1) Center console (page 6-5)

2) Seat heater (page 1-9)
3) Cup holder (page 6-5)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-41)
5) Power windows (page 2-24)
7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-112)
8) Glove box (page 6-4)
9) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
10) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-12)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-20)
The illustration above is a typical example for left-hand drive models. For right-hand drive
models, the locations of some switches/levers are different from those shown in the
illustration.

Black plate (19,1)
17
1) Illumination brightness control
& Instrument panel (page 3-100) 0
2) Headlight beam leveler (page 3-101)
! Left-hand drive models
3) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-27)
4) Combination meter (page 3-9)
5) Multi function display (page 3-47)
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
7) Multi function display control switch
(page 3-47)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-115)
11) Horn (page 3-116)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-38)
13) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-36)
14) Fuse box (page 11-46)
15) Hood lock release knob (page 11-12)
16) TPMS set switch (page 7-38)
17) SRVD OFF switch (page 7-48)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)
18
1) Multi function display (page 3-47)
! Right-hand drive models 2) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
3) Multi function display control switch
(page 3-47)
4) Audio (page 5-1)
5) Climate control (page 4-1)
6) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-115)
7) Combination meter (page 3-9)
8) Horn (page 3-116)
10) Hood lock release knob (page 11-12)
12) SRVD OFF switch (page 3-36)
13) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-100)
14) Headlight beam leveler (page 3-101)
15) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-27)
16) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-36)
17) TPMS set switch (page 7-38)
18) Seat position memory switch (page 1-5)
A: Models without access key

B: Models without memory function
C: Models with memory function

Black plate (21,1)
19
1) Audio control buttons (page 5-39)
& Steering wheel 2) Cruise control (page 7-45) 0
3) Shift paddle (page 7-22)
4) Hands-free switches (page 5-47)/Voice
command system (page 5-62)
5) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-36)
7) Horn (page 3-116)
8) SI-DRIVE switches (if equipped)
(page 7-27)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)
20
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-107)
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 2) Mist (page 3-107)
! Type A 3) Windshield washer (page 3-110)
4) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-109)/Sensor sensitivity control
(page 3-108)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-105)
6) Light control switch (page 3-92)
7) Fog light switch (page 3-103)
8) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-93)
9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-95)
10) Turn signal (page 3-99)

Black plate (23,1)
21
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-107)
! Type B 2) Mist (page 3-107) 0
3) Windshield washer (page 3-110)
4) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-109)/Sensor sensitivity control
(page 3-108)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-105)
6) Light control switch (page 3-92)
7) Fog light switch (page 3-103)
8) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-93)
9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-95)
10) Turn signal (page 3-99)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (24,1)
22
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
& Combination meter 2) Multi information display (page 3-36)
! Except U.K. models 3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-33)
4) Speedometer (page 3-9)
5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-12)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

Black plate (25,1)
23
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
! U.K. models 2) Multi information display (page 3-36) 0
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-33)
4) Speedometer (page 3-9)
5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-12)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (26,1)
24
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page Brake system warning 3-25 High beam indicator 3-33
light light
Seatbelt warning light 3-14 Vacuum pump system High Beam Assist in-
warning light (except 3-26 dicator light (green) 3-34
STI)
SRS airbag system 3-17 High Beam Assist
warning light warning indicator (yel- 3-34
Door open warning 3-26
light low)
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indi- 3-17 Automatic headlight
cator (if equipped) AWD warning light beam leveler warning 3-27
(if equipped) 3-27 light (models with LED
Front passenger’s headlights)
frontal airbag OFF in- 3-17
dicator (if equipped) Power steering warn- 3-27 Front fog light indicator
ing light (except STI) light (if equipped) 3-34
Malfunction indicator
light (Check Engine 3-18 Hill start assist warn-
light) ing light/Hill start assist 3-26 Rear fog light indicator 3-34
OFF indicator light light (if equipped)
Charge warning light 3-18 Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/ Access key warning 3-28
Vehicle Dynamics 3-22 light (if equipped)
Oil pressure warning 3-19 Control operation indi-
light cator light Immobilizer indicator
light 3-32
Engine low oil level Vehicle Dynamics
warning indicator 3-19 Control OFF indicator 3-24
(except STI) light Headlight indicator
light 3-34
AT OIL TEMP warning Turn signal indicator 3-33
light (CVT models) 3-19 lights Cruise control indica- 3-34
tor
Rear differential oil LED headlight warning
temperature warning 3-20 light (if equipped) 3-28
light (STI) Cruise control set in- 3-34
dicator
ABS warning light 3-22

Black plate (27,1)
25
Mark Name Page Mark Name Page 0

Traction mode indica- Driver’s control center
tor 3-24 differential indicator 3-35
(STI)
Low fuel warning light 3-26 REV indicator light 3-36

(STI)
Low tire pressure SUBARU Rear Vehi-
warning light (if 3-20 cle Detection warning 3-36
equipped) indicator (if equipped)
Windshield washer SUBARU Rear Vehi-
fluid warning indicator 3-26 cle Detection OFF in- 3-36
dicator (if equipped)
Sport (S) mode indi- 3-32
cator (if equipped)
Intelligent (I) mode in- 3-32

dicator (if equipped)
Sport Sharp (S#)

mode indicator (if 3-32
equipped)
Shift-up indicator light
(STI without gear shift 3-33
indicator models)
Driver’s control center
differential auto indi- 3-34
cator (STI)
Auto [+] mode indica- 3-35

tor (STI)
Auto [−] mode indica- 3-35

tor (STI)

Black plate (28,1)
26
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. We
recommend that you contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the
settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-47.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Keyless access*1 Automatic locking*2 Operation/Non-operation Operation
Automatic locking operation period*2 Can be set in range from 20s to 60s 30 seconds
Door unlock selection function (driver’s Driver’s door only/All doors All doors*2/Driver’s
door unlock) door only*3
Hazard warning flashers*4 Operation/Non-operation Operation
Volume level of the audible signal Can be set in volume level from 5 to 7 Volume level 5
Remote keyless entry system Automatic locking*2 Operation/Non-operation Operation
*2
Automatic locking operation period Can be set in range from 20s to 60s 30 seconds
Door unlock selection function (including Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
models with keyless access function)*2
Hazard warning flashers*4 Operation/Non-operation Operation
*2
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system*4 Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15
defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map lights OFF OFF/10s/20s/30s 30 seconds
delay timer
Map lights for models with a sunroof
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights*1 Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/ Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal
off headlights
Automatic rain sensing windshield wiper*1 Automatic adjusting mode of wiper timing Rain-sensing mode/ Rain-sensing mode
vehicle speed interlocking mode

Black plate (29,1)
27
Item Function Possible settings Default setting 0

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation
Headlight off delay setting Operation of timer OFF/30s/60s/90s 30 seconds
High Beam Assist*1 High Beam Assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Emergency Stop Signal Emergency stop signal function Operation/Non-operation Operation
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Not applicable to models with double locking system
*3
:Not applicable to models without double locking system
*4
: The settings can be changed by the customer using the multi function display.

Black plate (1,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2 Safety precautions ............................................. 1-22
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-23
Power seat (driver’s seat – if equipped) ............... 1-5 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-25
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-7 Installing child restraint systems with
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-9 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-34
Rear seats........................................................... 1-10
Installation of child restraint systems using
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-11 ISOFIX anchor bars.......................................... 1-35
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-12 Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-37
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-14 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-14 System airbag)................................................ 1-38
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-16 SRS airbags and shoulder restraints for driver,
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking front passenger, and window-side rear
Retractor (ALR/ELR) (if equipped) ..................... 1-16 passengers...................................................... 1-38
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-16 Components ...................................................... 1-41
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-17 SRS frontal airbag ............................................. 1-44
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-56
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-20 SRS airbag system monitor................................ 1-65
System monitors ................................................ 1-21 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-66
System servicing................................................ 1-21 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-67
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-22
Child restraint systems...................................... 1-22
Applications for Australia models ....................... 1-22

Black plate (32,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
Front seats used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
WARNING sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Never adjust the seat while driv- serious internal injury or death.
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury. . The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are not in the
sure that cargo, the hands and proper position when the SRS
feet of rear seat passengers are airbag deploys could suffer very
clear of the adjusting mechan- serious injuries. Because the
ism. SRS airbag needs enough space
. After adjusting the seat, push it for deployment, the driver should
slightly to make sure it is se- always sit upright and well back WARNING
curely locked. If the seat is not in the seat as far from the steer- Put children aged 12 and under or
securely locked, it may move or ing wheel as practical while still 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or less in
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control the REAR seat properly restrained
properly. and the front passenger should at all times in a child restraint device
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well priate for the child’s age, height and
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. weight. The SRS airbag deploys with
accident. considerable speed and force and
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- can injure or even kill children,
straint when the occupant sits especially if they are 12 years of
well back and upright in the seat. age and under or 1.5 m (4 feet 11
To reduce the risk of sliding inches) tall or less and are not
under the seatbelt in a collision, restrained or improperly restrained.
the front seatbacks should be Because children are lighter and
always used in the upright posi- weaker than adults, their risk of
tion while the vehicle is running. being injured from deployment is
If the front seatbacks are not greater.

Black plate (33,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-3
Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing
1
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- WARNING WARNING
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau- To prevent the passenger from slid- Do not let rear passengers rest their
tions concerning child restraint sys- ing under the seatbelt in the event of feet between the front seatback and
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- a collision, observe the following seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
tems” F1-22. precautions: improper operation of the following
. Keep the seatback in the upright systems and could result in serious
position while the vehicle is in injury.
motion. . Occupant detection system (if
. Do not place objects such as equipped)
cushions between the passenger . SRS side airbag
and the seatback. . Seat heater (if equipped)
Otherwise, the risk of sliding under . Power seat (if equipped)
the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
up over the abdomen will increase,
and both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)
& Manual seat ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat cushion height adjustment
(driver’s seat)
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
the desired position. Then release the seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
lever and try to move the seat back and rises.
forth to make sure that it is securely locked The seatback placed in a reclined position The height of the seat can be adjusted by
into place. can spring back upward with force when moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
the lever is pulled. While operating the up and down.
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.

Black plate (35,1)
& Power seat (driver’s seat – if ! Memory function (if equipped) adjusting mechanism. 1
equipped) . When any unusual conditions or
WARNING malfunctions occur during the
retrieval of the seat position, stop
. Never adjust the seat while driv- the retrieval of the seat position
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con- by performing any of the follow-
trol and personal injury. ing procedures.
. Before adjusting the seat, make – Operate any of the power seat
sure that cargo or the hands and switches
feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechan- – Press the “SET” button
ism. – Press button “1” or “2”
. Never retrieve the seat position
while driving to avoid loss of Some of your desired seat positions can
vehicle control and personal in- be registered. Register the seat position
1) Seat position forward/backward con- jury. with button “1” or “2” or each of the access
trol switch keys (if equipped) and retrieve the seat
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
. Perform the seat position retrie- position.
move the control switch forward or val before driving. Be sure to
backward. During forward/backward ad- confirm that the select lever is The following seat positions can be
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust in the “P” position (CVT models) registered.
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion or that the shift lever is in the . Forward/backward position of the seat
height. neutral position (MT models), . Angle of seatback
2) Seat cushion angle control switch and that the parking brake is
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up . Angle of seat cushion
applied, when adjusting the seat
or push down the front end of the control . Height of seat
position. Do not drive until the
switch.
retrieval of the seat position is
3) Seat height control switch ! Registration of seat position with
complete.
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push button “1” or “2”
down the rear end of the control switch. . When retrieving a registered seat
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control position, make sure the hands, 1. Adjust the seat position under the
switch feet and possessions of rear seat following conditions.
To adjust the angle of the seatback, passengers are clear of the seat . The parking brake is applied.
move the control switch. . The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (36,1)
“OFF” position. neutral position (MT models). involving serious injury or death.
. The select lever is in the “P” position
(CVT models) or the shift lever is in the
neutral position (MT models).
2. While holding the access key and 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ” position.
button of the access key.
2. While the select lever is in the “P”
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press position (CVT models) or the shift lever is
and hold the desired button “1” or “2”. A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered. in the neutral position (MT models) and
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position then the parking brake is applied, press
! Retrieval of seat position regis- button “1” or “2”.
is registered. tered with button “1” or “2”
! Registration of seat position with A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
each access key (if equipped) WARNING registered position.
1. Adjust the seat position under the When the seat moves to the registered
Be sure to press the correct button position, a chirp will sound.
following conditions. to retrieve your registered seat
. The parking brake is applied. position. If the seat position is not
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/ optimum for you, it may adversely
“OFF” position. affect your driving and may reduce
. The select lever is in the “P” position the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
(CVT models) or the shift lever is in the That could result in an accident

Black plate (37,1)

NOTE ! Clearing the registered seat
3. Open the driver’s door.
1
. If a new position is registered for the A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the position with access key (if
same button, the previously registered registered position. equipped)
seat position is deleted. When the seat moves to the registered 1. Close the driver’s door.
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the position, a chirp will sound. 2. While holding the access key and
registered seat position is not deleted.
pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ”
. When the button “1” or “2” is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
NOTE button on the access key.
driver’s door is opened, the registered . If the registered seat position cannot A chirp will sound, and the registered seat
seat position can be retrieved even if be retrieved after performing the pre- position will be cleared.
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or vious procedures, try the following
“OFF” position. procedures. & Head restraint adjustment
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
! Retrieval of the seat position driver’s door. WARNING
registered with access key (if (2) Press the “ ” button on the
equipped) access key or the door lock button . Never drive the vehicle with the
to lock the doors. head restraints removed because
1. Hold the registered access key.
(3) Perform the prior procedures they are designed to reduce the
again. risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
. If the keyless access function is
from the rear. Also, never install
disabled, the seat position cannot be
the head restraints the opposite
retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
way round. Doing so will prevent
handle. However, the seat position can
the head restraints from func-
still be retrieved by pressing the “ ”
tioning as intended. Therefore,
button on the access key. For informa-
when you remove the head re-
tion about how to enable/disable the
straints, you must reinstall all
keyless access function, refer to “Dis-
head restraints correctly to pro-
abling keyless access function” F2-15.
tect vehicle occupants.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key, the previously regis- . All occupants, including the dri-
tered seat position is deleted. ver, should not operate a vehicle
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
the “ ” button or gripping the door handle. head restraints are placed in their
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (38,1)
proper positions in order to mini- To lower: NOTE

mize the risk of neck injury in the Push the head restraint down while When the head restraint cannot be
event of a crash. pressing the release button on the top of pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
the seatback. cient clearance between the head re-
The head restraints for the driver’s seat To remove: straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
and front passenger’s seat are adjustable While pressing the release button, pull out then perform the installation and re-
in the following ways. the head restraint. moval tasks.
! Head restraint height adjustment To install: ! Head restraint angle adjustment
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
1) Head restraint
The angle of the head restraint can be
2) Release button
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
Each head restraint should be adjusted so ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
that the center of the head restraint is head restraint to a position where the back
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. of your head is as close to the head
Each head restraint should be adjusted so restraint as possible.
To raise: that the center of the head restraint is To tilt:
Pull the head restraint up. closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.

Black plate (39,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater 1-9
To return: Seat heater (if equipped) can cause battery discharge.

1
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will The seat heater is equipped in the front
automatically return to the fully upright seats.
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle. The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater Type A
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the vehicle’s interior is
warmed enough or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the seat heater.
Type B
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (40,1)
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
Rear seats
1) HIGH/(HI) – Rapid heating

2) LOW/(LO) – Normal heating WARNING
3) Off
A) Left-hand side WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo
B) Right-hand side higher than the top of the seatback
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LOW” injure passengers in the event of a
(“LO”) or “HIGH” (“HI”) position on the straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident.
switch, as desired, depending on the
temperature. put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
Selecting the “HIGH” (“HI”) position will or seat cushions. If you do so, the
cause the seat to heat up quicker. risk of sliding under the lap belt and
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the of the lap belt sliding up over the
opposite side of the current position. abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
The indicator located on the switch illumi- death.
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.

Black plate (41,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-11
& Head restraint adjustment ! Rear windows side seating position 1

Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head CAUTION
restraints.
The head restraint is not intended to
WARNING be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraint to the extended posi-
head restraints removed because tion.
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re- 1) Head restraint
straints, you must reinstall all 2) Release button
head restraints to protect vehicle To raise:
occupants.
Pull the head restraint up.
. All occupants, including the dri- To lower:
ver, should not operate a vehicle
Push the head restraint down while
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
pressing the release button on the top of
head restraints are placed in their
the seatback.
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the To remove:
1) When not used (retracted position) While pressing the release button, pull out
event of a crash.
2) When used (extended position) the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
restraint.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
When the seats are not occupied, lower When the rear center seating position is
the head restraints to improve rearward not occupied, lower the head restraint to
visibility. improve rearward visibility.
! Rear center seating position
& Folding down the rear seat-
CAUTION back
The head restraint is not intended to WARNING
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the . When you fold down the seat-
head restraint to the extended posi- back, check that there are no
tion. passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
1) Head restraint a risk of injury or property da-
2) Release button mage if the seatback suddenly
To raise: folds down.
Pull the head restraint up. . Never allow passengers to ride
To lower: on the folded rear seatback or in
the trunk. Doing so may result in
Push the head restraint down while
serious injury or death.
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback. . Secure all objects and especially
To remove: long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
While pressing the release button, pull out
inside the vehicle and causing
the head restraint.
serious injury during a sudden
To install: stop, a sudden steering maneu-
1) Incorrect (retracted position) Install the head restraint into the holes that
2) Correct (extended position)
ver or a rapid acceleration.
restraint.

Black plate (43,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-13
WARNING 1
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
Lock release knob behind the securing hook for
1) Unlocked the seatback.
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
CAUTION
WARNING Do not hang luggage etc. on the
securing hook. The possibility ex-
When you return the seatback to its ists that the seatback may not be
original position, check that the able to be fixed firmly in place. This
unlocking marker on the lock re- could lead to unexpected accidents.
lease knob is not visible. Also,
shake the seatback to confirm that
1. Lower the head restraints.
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in 1) Securing hook
place, the seatback may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the trunk, which could cause
serious injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
Release knob Lock release knob
. All belts should fit snugly in order
1) Unlocked
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock 2) Locked
to provide full restraint. Loose
release knob then fold the seatback down. A) Unlocking marker in red fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks . Each seatbelt is designed to
into place and make sure that the unlock- support only one person. Never
ing marker on the lock release knob is no use a single belt for two or more
longer visible. persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. Also, be sure to
replace seatbelt assemblies that
show signs of severe fraying or
having been cut. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even

Black plate (45,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-15
if damage is not obvious. their risk of being injured from ! Infants or small children 1
. When replacing a seatbelt, the deployment is greater. Use a child restraint system that is
new seatbelt must be type-ap- Secure ALL types of child re- suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
proved and intended for installa- straint devices (including for- restraint systems” F1-22.
tion in the same position as the ward facing child seats) in the ! Children
replaced seatbelt. REAR seats at all times.
If a child is too big for a child restraint
. When wearing the seatbelt, insert NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD system, the child should sit in the rear seat
the tongue plate into the correct OR REARWARD FACING CHILD and be restrained using the seatbelts.
buckle. Otherwise, in an acci- SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. According to accident statistics, children
dent, serious injury or death DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN- are safer when properly restrained in the
could result. JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD rear seating positions than in the front
. Do not fasten your seatbelt with a BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD seating positions. Never allow a child to
child on your knees. Otherwise, TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR- stand up or kneel on the seat.
in an accident, serious injury or BAG.
death could result. According to accident statistics, Seatbelts are designed under the as-
children are safer when properly sumption that adult-sized occupants will
. Put children aged 12 and under use them. If the shoulder portion of the
or 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seatbelt crosses the face or neck, move the
less in the REAR seat properly child closer to the belt buckle to help
restrained at all times in a child ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
restraint device or in a seatbelt, be taken to securely place the lap belt as
whichever is appropriate for the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-22. low as possible on the hips and not on the
child’s age, height and weight. child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
The SRS airbag deploys with belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
considerable speed and force restraint system should be used. Never
and can injure or even kill chil- place the shoulder belt under the child’s
dren, especially if they are 12 arm or behind the child’s back.
years of age and under or 1.5 m
(4 feet 11 inches) tall or less and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)
! Expectant mothers & Emergency Locking Retrac- extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
tor (ELR) will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
All seatbelts in the vehicle have an retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). and the ELR mode is restored.
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor For models with ALR/ELR seatbelts, when
locks automatically during a sudden stop, securing a child restraint system on the
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly rear seats by using a seatbelt in the
out of the retractor. forward-facing direction, the seatbelt must
be changed over to the Automatic Locking
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ Retractor (ALR) mode. For instructions on
Emergency Locking Retrac- how to install the child restraint system
tor (ALR/ELR) (if equipped) using a seatbelt, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with seatbelt” F1-28.
Expectant mothers also need to use the For some models, each rear passenger’s
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Re- When the child restraint system is re-
for specific recommendations. The lap belt tractor/Emergency Locking Retractor moved, make sure that the retractor is
should be worn securely and as low as (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Re- restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
possible over the hips, not over the waist. tractor/Emergency Locking Retractor nor- tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
mally functions as an Emergency Locking belt to retract fully.
Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ELR has an
additional locking mode, “Automatic Lock- & Seatbelt warning light
ing Retractor (ALR) mode”, intended to and chime
secure a child restraint system.
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
First check if the ALR mode is equipped chime” F3-14.
for the seatbelts of the vehicle. If the ALR
mode is equipped, the seatbelts function
as follows.
When a seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be

Black plate (47,1)
& Fastening the seatbelt If you do so, the risk of sliding has been closed up in sunny weath- 1
under the lap belt and of the lap er; they could burn an occupant. Do
WARNING belt sliding up over the abdomen not touch such hot parts until they
will increase, and both can result cool.
. Never use a belt that is twisted or in serious internal injury or
reversed. In an accident, this can death. ! Front seatbelts
increase the risk or severity of
injury. 1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli- Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
sion, this spreads the force of the upright position. Move the seatback as far
lap belt over stronger hip bones from the steering wheel as practical while
instead of across the weaker still maintaining full vehicle control.
abdomen.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- back to the upright position. Move the seat
straint when the occupant sits as far back as possible.
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding 2. Sit well back in the seat.
under the seatbelt in a collision, 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
the front seatbacks should be belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
always used in the upright posi- WARNING the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
tion while the vehicle is running. return the belt slightly and pull it out more
If the front seatbacks are not Never place the shoulder belt under slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
used in the upright position in a the arm or behind the back. If an let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
collision, the risk of sliding under accident occurs, this can increase strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
the lap belt and of the lap belt the risk or severity of injury.
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death. CAUTION
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
and seatbacks or seat cushions. become very hot in a vehicle that
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING

belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
1. Push the button on the buckle.
down.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to avoid the
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
it is locked in place.
the shoulder belt. Before closing the door, make sure that
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible the belts are retracted properly to avoid
on your hips, not on your waist. catching the belt webbing in the door.

Black plate (49,1)

! Rear seatbelts
1. Sit well back in the seat.
1. Push the button on the buckle.
1
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to avoid the
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle, Before closing the door, make sure that
return the belt slightly and pull it out more the belts are retracted properly to avoid
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, catching the belt webbing in the door.
let the belt retract slightly after giving a & Seatbelt maintenance
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly To clean the seatbelts, use lukewarm
again. water with mild soap. Do not use the
seatbelts until they are dry. Never bleach
or dye the belts because this could
seriously affect their strength.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible including the webbing and all hardware
on your hips, not on your waist. periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
! Unfastening the seatbelt Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle oils, chemicals and particularly
until you hear a click. battery acid.
NOTE . Never attempt to make modifica-
The center seatbelt buckle is marked tions or changes that will prevent
as “CENTER”. the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.

Black plate (50,1)
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
Front seatbelt pretensioners effectively restrains the seat occupant. event that a pretensioner is activated,
we recommend that you have the
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, seatbelt retractor assemblies, which
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- an operating noise will be heard and a are equipped with seatbelt preten-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The small amount of smoke will be released. sioners, replaced with genuine
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be These occurrences are normal and not SUBARU parts by your authorized
activated in the event of an accident harmful. This smoke does not indicate a SUBARU dealer. When using a seatbelt
involving moderate to severe frontal colli- fire in the vehicle. equipped with a load limiter, it is
sions.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been installed in the front seating position.
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains . If either front seatbelt does not
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot retract or cannot be pulled out due to
be pulled out and retracted and therefore a malfunction or activation of the
must be replaced. pretensioner, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
NOTE as possible.
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- . If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
signed to be activated in minor frontal bly or surrounding area has been
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in damaged, we recommend that you
roll-over accidents. contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
. The seatbelt pretensioners and SRS as possible.
frontal airbags operate simultaneously. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
In models with front passenger’s occu- you to explain to the buyer that it has
Front seatbelt pretentioner
pant detection system, even if the front seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
The pretensioner sensor also serves as passenger’s SRS frontal airbag does buyer to the contents of this section.
follows. not operate as the front passenger’s
. SRS frontal airbag sensor seat is not occupied, the seatbelt WARNING
pretensioner for the front passenger’s
If the SRS frontal airbag sensors detect a seat will operate in combination with . To obtain maximum protection,
certain predetermined amount of force the driver’s SRS frontal airbag/seatbelt the occupants should sit in an
during a frontal collision, any seatbelt pretensioner. upright position with their seat-
which has a seatbelt pretensioner is . Pretensioners are designed to func- belts properly fastened. Refer to
quickly drawn in by the pretensioner to tion on a one-time-only basis. In the “Seatbelts” F1-14.
take up the slack so that the belt more

Black plate (51,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-21
. Do not modify, remove or strike Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a CAUTION 1

the seatbelt retractor assemblies seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
equipped with seatbelt preten- system warning light will illuminate. For The sensors and SRS airbag control
sioners or the surrounding area. details, refer to “SRS airbag system modules are located in the following
This could result in accidental monitor” F1-65. locations.
activation of the seatbelt preten- . Front sub sensors: on both the
sioners or could make the sys- & System servicing right and left side at the front of
tem inoperative, possibly result- the vehicle
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt WARNING
pretensioners have no user-ser- . Side airbag sensors: on both
viceable parts. For required ser- . When discarding a seatbelt re- center pillars
vicing of seatbelt retractors tractor assembly or scrapping . Curtain airbag sensors: on both
equipped with seatbelt preten- the entire vehicle damaged by a rear wheel houses
sioners, we recommend that collision, we recommend that . Satellite safing sensor: under the
you consult your nearest you consult your SUBARU deal- rear center seat
SUBARU dealer. er.
. SRS airbag control module (in-
. When discarding seatbelt retrac- . Tampering with or disconnecting cluding the impact sensors): un-
tor assemblies equipped with the system’s wiring could result der the center of the instrument
seatbelt pretensioners or scrap- in accidental activation of the panel
ping the entire vehicle due to seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the If you need service or repair in those
collision damage or for other
system inoperative, which may areas or near the front seatbelt
reasons, we recommend that
result in serious injury. Do not retractors, have the work performed
you consult your SUBARU deal-
use electrical test equipment on by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
er.
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
& System monitors systems. For required servicing
A diagnostic system continually monitors of the seatbelt pretensioner, we
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner recommend that you consult
while the vehicle is being driven. The your nearest SUBARU dealer.
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
NOTE Child restraint systems Children could be endangered in an

If the front part of the vehicle is accident if their child restraints are not
damaged in an accident to the extent & Applications for Australia properly secured in the vehicle. When
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not models installing the child restraint system, care-
operate, we recommend that you con- fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as According to accident statistics, children
for the instructions of the child restraint
possible. are safer when properly restrained in the
system.
rear seating positions than in the front
& Precautions against vehicle & Safety precautions seating positions.
modification
We recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer if you want to install any
accessory parts to your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
Lock release knob
. Installation of a tire of different Infants and small children aged 12 and 1) Unlocked
size and construction from the under or 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or 2) Locked
tires specified on the vehicle less should always be placed in an infant A) Unlocking marker in red
placard attached to the driver’s or child restraint system in the rear seat
door pillar or specified for indivi- while riding in the vehicle. You should use
dual vehicle models in this Own- an infant or child restraint system that is WARNING
er’s Manual. appropriate for the child’s age and size. All
Before installing a child restraint
child restraint systems are designed to be
system, check that the unlocking
secured in the vehicle seats.
marker on the seatback lock release

Black plate (53,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-23
knob cannot be seen to confirm that & Where to place a child re- 1
the rear seatback is securely locked straint system
in position. If the rear seatback is The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
not locked securely, serious injury dations on where to place a child restraint
may result. system in your vehicle.
WARNING
. Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow
a child to stand up, or to kneel on
any seat. Unrestrained children Left-hand drive models
WARNING will be thrown forward during
sudden stop or in an accident
Never let a passenger hold a child and can be injured seriously.
on his or her lap or in his or her . Never allow a child to stand up,
arms while the vehicle is moving. or to kneel on the front passen-
The passenger cannot protect the ger’s seat, or never hold a child
child from injury in a collision, on your lap or in your arms. The
because the child will be caught SRS airbag deploys with consid-
between the passenger and objects erable force and can injure or
inside the vehicle. even kill the child.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (54,1)
. ISOFIX anchor bars

WARNING
. Top tether anchorages
. Secure ALL types of child re-
Some types of child restraints might not be
straint devices (including for-
able to be secured firmly due to projection
ward facing child seats) in the
of the seat cushion.
REAR seats at all times. The SRS
In this seating position, you should use airbag deploys with considerable
only a child restraint system that has a speed and force and can injure or
bottom base that fits snugly against the even kill children, especially if
contours of the seat cushion and can be they are 12 years of age and
securely retained using the seatbelt. under or 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches)
C: Rear seat, center seating position tall or less and are not restrained
Do not install a child restraint system or improperly restrained. Be-
Right-hand drive models
(including a booster seat). cause children are lighter and
A: Front passenger’s seat weaker than adults, their risk of
Do not install a child restraint system being injured from deployment is
(including a booster cushion) due to the greater. According to accident
hazard to children posed by the passen- statistics, children are safer
ger’s airbag. when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
B: Rear seat, window-side seating front seating positions.
positions
. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD
Recommended positions for all types of
OR REARWARD FACING CHILD
child restraint systems.
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSEN-
In these positions, the following equip- GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
ment is provided for installing a child SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
restraint system. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
seatbelts THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- . Never install a child restraint
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- system in the front passenger’s
belts (if equipped) seat. The force of the rapid

Black plate (55,1)
deployment of the front passen- & Choosing a child restraint 1

ger’s SRS frontal airbag can system
cause death or serious injury to
the child in the event of an
accident.
! Warning label
WARNING
. Warning labels are located on
both sides of the front passen-
ger’s sun visor. The warning
label indicates that it is forbidden
to install a rearward facing child
restraint system in the front pas- Choose a child restraint system that is
senger’s seat. appropriate for the child’s size and age to
. NEVER use a rearward facing provide the child with proper protection.
child restraint on a seat pro- Also it is important that the child restraint
tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in system meets safety standards applicable
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS to your country.
INJURY to the CHILD can occur. In most European countries, child restraint
systems must meet the requirement of
ECE regulation No. 44. It can be identified
by looking for the approval label on the
A) AIRBAG child restraint system or the manufac-
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and the system.
According to the ECE regulation No. 44,
child restraint systems are classified into
the following five “mass groups”.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)
Group 0: for children of a mass less than Child restraint suitability for each seating position (Europe)
10 kg Front seating position:
Group 0+: for children of a mass less than Mass group Suitability
13 kg 0 – up to 10 kg 6
Group I: for children of mass from 9 to 18 0 – up to 13 kg
+
6
kg
I – 9 to 18 kg 6
Group II: for children of mass from 15 to
25 kg II – 15 to 25 kg 6
Group III: for children of mass from 22 to III – 22 to 36 kg 6
36 kg
6: Not suitable for child restraint system.
For European countries, refer to the
following table for the recommended child
restraint system.

Black plate (57,1)

Child restraint suitability for each seating position (Europe)
Rear seating position: 1
Mass group Suitability
Outboard Center
0 – up to 10 kg L1 or U 6
0+ – up to 13 kg L1 or U 6
I – 9 to 18 kg L2 or UF 6
II – 15 to 25 kg L3, L4 or UF 6
III – 22 to 36 kg L3, L4 or UF 6
U: Suitable for universal category child restraint system.

UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
6: Not suitable for child restraint system.
L1: Childseat SUBARU Baby Safe Plus
L2: Childseat SUBARU Duo plus
L3: Childseat SUBARU Kid Plus
L4: Childseat SUBARU Kidfix XP
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)
Child restraint suitability for each seating position (Europe) & Installing child restraint sys-
Mass group Size class Fixture Vehicle ISOFIX positions tems with seatbelt
Front Rear Rear
Passenger Outboard Center WARNING
F ISO/L1 NA 6 NA
Carrycot . Child restraint systems and seat-
G ISO/L2 NA 6 NA belts can become hot in a vehicle
0 – up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 NA IL1 NA that has been closed up in sunny
E ISO/R1 NA IL1 NA
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
0 – up to 13 kg
+
D ISO/R2 NA IL1 NA system before you place a child
C ISO/R3 NA IL1 NA in it.
D ISO/R2 NA IL1 NA . Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
C ISO/R3 NA IL1 NA
Unsecured child restraint sys-
I – 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 NA IUF NA tems can be thrown around in-
B1 ISO/F2X NA IL2 or IUF NA side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
A ISO/F3 NA IUF NA
strike and injure vehicle occu-
II – 15 to 25 kg NA IL3 NA pants as well as result in serious
III – 22 to 36 kg NA IL3 NA injuries or death to the child.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category that are approved for
use in the mass group.
6: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in the mass group and/or this size
class.
NA: There is no ISOFIX system.
IL1: Childseat G 0/1S ISOFIX and Childseat G 0/1S ISOFIX base
IL2: Childseat SUBARU Duo plus
IL3: Childseat SUBARU Kidfix XP

Black plate (59,1)
. When you install a child restraint NOTE

If the ALR is equipped for the seatbelt,
refer to “Models with ALR” F1-32.
1
system, follow the manufac- . If using the lock-off lever or the
turer’s instructions supplied with locking clip is recommended by the
it. After installing the child re- NOTE manufacturer’s instructions supplied
straint system, check to ensure . For details about the ELR, refer to with the child restraint system, use
that it is held securely in posi- “Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)” the lever or clip to secure the child
tion. If it is not held tight and F1-16. restraint system.
secure, the danger of your child . For details about the ALR, refer to . For models with ALR: If using ALR
or other passengers suffering “Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- mode is not recommended by the
personal injury in the event of gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)” manufacturer’s instructions supplied
an accident may be increased. F1-16. with the child restraint system, do not
use ALR mode.
! Installing a rearward facing child
! Preparation for installing child re- restraint
straint system
First check if the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) is equipped for the
seatbelts of the vehicle according to the
following procedure.
1. Draw out the seatbelt completely.
2. Retract the seatbelt even slightly and
try to draw out the seatbelt again.
3. If the seatbelt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended, it indicates that
an ALR is equipped for the seatbelt.
When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the 1. Place the child restraint system in the
ALR mode is canceled and the Emer- 1) Locking clip rear seating position.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode is 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
restored. or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
If the ALR is not equipped for the seatbelt,
manufacturer.
refer to “Models without ALR” F1-30.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)
until you hear a click. press the release button on the seatbelt system is to be installed.
buckle. 2. Place the child restraint system on the
seat.
WARNING
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
! Installing forward facing child re-

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. straint
! Models without ALR 3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
manufacturer.
5. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured. 1. Remove the head restraint of the rear
6. To remove the child restraint system, seating position where the child restraint

Black plate (61,1)
equipped with a lock-off (a seatbelt locking

feature), secure the child restraint system
1
using a locking clip.
1) Lock-off lever 1) Lock-off lever
5. Release the child restraint system 7. Lock the child restraint system lock-off
lock-off lever and pass the shoulder belt lever to fix the shoulder belt.
through the lock-off lever. 9. Before having a child sit in the child
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. At this restraint system, try to move it back and
time, to secure the child restraint system forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
more firmly, apply your weight to push it secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
down into the seat cushion as you tighten be more firmly secured by pushing it down
the seatbelt. into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
1) Locking clip
8. If your child restraint system is not
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (62,1)
! Models with ALR NOTE

If using ALR mode is not recom-
mended by the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions supplied with the child restraint
system, use the lock-off lever or the
locking clip instead of using ALR
mode.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

1) Lock-off lever or around the child restraint system
manufacturer.
1. Remove the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed.
2. Place the child restraint system on the
seat.
1) Locking clip

Black plate (63,1)
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt. press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
1
6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from completely. The belt will return to the
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ELR mode.
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind NOTE
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, When the child restraint system is no
clicks will be heard which indicate the longer in use, remove it and restore the
retractor functions as ALR. ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
9. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchorage and tighten the top
tether. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-37.
7. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check that it is
firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint
can be more firmly secured by pushing it
down into the seat cushion and then
tightening the seatbelt.
8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning). 10. To remove the child restraint system,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)
& Installing a booster seat seating position and sit the child on it. The WARNING
child should sit well back on the booster
seat. . Never use a belt that is twisted or
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through reversed. In an accident, this can
or around the booster seat and the child increase the risk or severity of
following the instructions provided by its injury to the child.
manufacturer. . Never place the shoulder belt
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle under the child’s arm or behind
until you hear a click. Take care not to the child’s back. If an accident
twist the seatbelt. occurs, this can increase the risk
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned or severity of injury to the child.
across the center of child’s shoulder and . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
that the lap belt is positioned as low as order to provide full restraint.
possible on the child’s hips. Loose fitting belts are not as
1. Remove the head restraint of the rear effective in preventing or redu-
seating position where the child restraint cing injury.
system is to be installed. . Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
High-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
5. To remove the booster seat, press the
shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
result in neck injury during sud-
allow the belt to retract.
den braking or in a collision.
2. Place the booster seat in the rear

Black plate (65,1)
& Installation of child restraint the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
1
systems using ISOFIX an- indicate the positions of the ISOFIX
chor bars anchor bars.
The ISOFIX anchor bars allow you to

install a child restraint system only on the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
For each window-side seating position, Type A
Your vehicle is equipped with ISOFIX two anchor bars are provided.
anchor bars that allow an approved
ISOFIX child restraint system to be in-
stalled on the rear seat without use of a
seatbelt.
Type B
You will find the marks “ ” at the bottom of 1. Open the covers.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (66,1)
child restraint system to the anchor bars. The inserting aids make it easier to fit
When the connectors are fastened, make the child restraint system with ISOFIX
sure that the adjacent seatbelts are not and avoid damage to the seat.
caught.
2. Remove the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed.
4. Before seating a child in the child
1) Inserting aid
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
NOTE held securely in position.
If your child restraint system is pro- 5. If the child restraint system requires a
vided with inserting aids, clip them to top tether, latch the hook onto the top
the two ISOFIX anchor bars (or put tether anchorage and tighten the top
them between seatback and seat cush- tether. For additional instructions, refer to
ion at the two ISOFIX fastening points) “Top tether anchorages” F1-37.
before connecting the child restraint
system. For further information, refer to the in-
Position the two connectors just in struction manual supplied by the child
front of the two inserting aids. Then restraint system manufacturer.
3. While following the instructions sup- insert the two connectors into the
plied by the child restraint system manu- inserting aids to connect the connec-
facturer, connect the connectors of the tors to the anchor bars.

Black plate (67,1)
CAUTION vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-
1
When you install a child restraint able.
system, follow the manufacturer’s ! Anchorage location
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system, Anchorages are installed as shown in the
check to ensure that it is held following illustration.
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
NOTE
Before installing a child restraint sys-
tem, ask the manufacturer of the sys-
tem to confirm that it is one approved
for your vehicle.
& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is provided with two or three
top tether anchorages so that a child
restraint system having a top tether can
be installed in the rear seat. When
installing a child restraint system using 1) For left seat
top tether, proceed as follows, while 2) For center seat (if equipped)
observing the instructions by the child 3) For right seat
restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! To hook the top tether *SRS airbag (Supplemental The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
Restraint System airbag) and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- tensioners” F1-20.
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the WARNING
vehicle’s seatbelts.
. To obtain maximum protection in
& SRS airbags and shoulder the event of an accident, the
restraints for driver, front driver and all passengers must
passenger, and window-side always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
rear passengers designed only to be a supple-
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplement to the primary protection
1. Open the cover and attach the top mental restraint system to supplement the provided by the seatbelt. It does
tether hook to the appropriate upper seatbelts for the front seats and rear not eliminate the need to fasten
anchorage. window-side seating positions. seatbelts. In combination with
2. Tighten the top tether securely. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) the seatbelts, it offers the best
consists of two to seven airbags. The combined protection in case of a
We recommend that you contact your configurations are as follows. serious accident.
SUBARU dealer if you have any question . Frontal airbags for driver and front
regarding the installation of a child re- Not wearing a seatbelt increases
passenger the chance of severe injury or
straint system.
. Knee airbag for driver death in a crash even when the
. Side airbags for driver and front vehicle has the SRS airbag.
passenger For instructions and precautions
. Curtain airbags for driver, front pas- concerning the seatbelt system,
senger and window-side rear passengers refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14.
These SRS airbags are designed only . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
as a supplement to the primary protec- close to the SRS airbag. Because
tion provided by the seatbelt. the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than

Black plate (69,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-39
the blink of an eye – and force to move the seat as far back as restraint device or in a seatbelt, 1
protect in high speed collisions, possible and sit upright and well whichever is appropriate for the
the force of an airbag can injure back in the seat. child’s age, height and weight.
an occupant whose body is too . Do not place any objects over or The SRS airbag deploys with
close to SRS airbag. near the SRS airbag cover or considerable speed and force
It is also important to wear your between you and the SRS airbag. and can injure or even kill chil-
seatbelt to help avoid injuries If the SRS airbag deploys, those dren, especially if they are 12
that can result when the SRS objects could interfere with its years of age and under or 1.5 m
airbag contacts an occupant not proper operation and could be (4 feet 11 inches) tall or less and
in proper position such as one propelled inside the vehicle and are not restrained or improperly
thrown forward during pre-acci- cause injury. restrained. Because children are
dent braking. lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
Even when properly positioned, deployment is greater.
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor Secure ALL types of child re-
injury such as abrasions and straint devices (including for-
bruises to the face or arms ward facing child seats) in the
because of the SRS airbag de- REAR seats at all times.
ployment force. According to accident statistics,
. The SRS airbags deploy with children are safer when properly
considerable speed and force. restrained in the rear seating
Occupants who are out of proper positions than in the front seat-
position when the SRS airbag ing positions.
deploys could suffer very serious For instructions and precautions
injuries. Because the SRS airbag concerning the child restraint
needs enough space for deploy- WARNING system, refer to “Child restraint
ment, the driver should always systems” F1-22.
sit upright and well back in the . Put children aged 12 and under . NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD
seat as far from the steering or 1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or OR REARWARD FACING CHILD
wheel as practical while still less in the REAR seat properly SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.
maintaining full vehicle control restrained at all times in a child DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-
and the front passenger should
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)
JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD NOTE

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR- you to explain to the buyer that it is
BAG. equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
. Never allow a child to stand up or the buyer to the applicable section in
kneel on the front passenger’s this Owner’s Manual.
seat, or never hold a child on . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
your lap or in your arms. The supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
SRS airbag deploys with consid- of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
erable force and can injure or details about restarting of the engine,
even kill the child. refer to “If your vehicle is involved in
an accident” F9-19.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.

Black plate (71,1)
& Components The SRS airbags are stowed in the

1
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
steering pad.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar and rear pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
lower cover.
1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS knee airbag
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

2) SRS airbag system warning light
3) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
4) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
[Russia models])
5) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
6) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module*
sensor*
8) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
11) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
12) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
13) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
14) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
left-hand side)
16) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)*
17) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
Left-hand drive models 18) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
19) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
20) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
21) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
*: If equipped

Black plate (73,1)
1) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
2) SRS airbag system warning light 1
3) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
4) Airbag control module (including impact
sensors)
5) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
control module*
sensor*
8) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
10) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
11) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
left-hand side)
13) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
14) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
right-hand side)
16) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)*
17) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
18) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
Right-hand drive models hand side)
19) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
20) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
21) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
*: If equipped
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)
& SRS frontal airbag

WARNING
Warning labels are located on both
sides of the front passenger’s sun
visor. Carefully read the description
in “Warning label” F1-25.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The driver’s knee airbag is stowed under
the steering column. The passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the
top of the dashboard under an “SRS WARNING
AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
the following components deploy. IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
. SRS frontal airbag for driver RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
. Knee airbag for driver CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
A) AIRBAG
A warning label as shown above is
attached to the sun visor.
This warning label means “ Extreme
Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing
child restraint on a seat protected by an

Black plate (75,1)
airbag in front of it!”.

1
WARNING WARNING
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
Never allow a child to stand up or your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
kneel on the front passenger’s seat. with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
The SRS airbag deploys with con- injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
siderable force and can injure or suffer very serious injuries. Be-
even kill the child. cause the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that . The key must not be attached to
can result when the SRS airbag heavy, sharp or hard acces-
WARNING
contacts an occupant not in proper sories, or another key. If the knee Do not attach accessories to the
position such as one thrown toward airbag deploys, those objects windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
the front of the vehicle during pre- could interfere with its proper ror over the inside rear view mirror.
accident braking. operation and could be propelled If the SRS airbag deploys, those
inside the vehicle and cause objects could become projectiles
injury. that could seriously injure vehicle
. Do not put any objects under the occupants.
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag ! Occupant detection system (if
deploys, those objects could in- equipped)
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the The occupant detection sensor is installed
vehicle and cause injury. under the seat upholstery and monitors
the physique and posture of the front
passenger. The occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
ployed or not from the physique and
posture of the front passenger.
WARNING The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
. Do not put any objects over the airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
steering wheel pad and dash- airbag deploys. This is normal.
board. If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, these objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.

Black plate (77,1)
system checked by your SUBARU dealer. sory power outlet and placed on the 1
. If the SRS airbag system warning light front passenger’s seat or used by
does not illuminate, check that the front the person sitting in the front pas-
passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
indicators work properly. For details about tion of the occupant detection sys-
the indicators, refer to “Front passenger’s tem. If the occupant detection sys-
frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators” F3- tem warning light illuminates or
17. If the indicators do not work properly, operates erratically when using an
do not allow anyone to sit on the front electronic device in the vehicle, at
passenger’s seat. We recommend that first try to relocate that device to
you have the system checked by your avoid it creating any interference. If
SUBARU dealer. the device continues to cause inter-
ference, the use of that device in the
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON Also, if luggage or electronic devices are vehicle should be discontinued.
indicator placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF may adversely affect the ability of the
indicator occupant detection system. This may
prevent the front passenger’s frontal air-
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is bag ON and OFF indicators from working
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of properly. Check that the indicators work
the occupant detection system. If the seat properly.
cushion is wet, do not use the front When the OFF indicator turns off and the
passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
the seat immediately, let the seat dry ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
naturally and then check the SRS airbag collision. Remove luggage and electronic
system warning light as follows. devices from the front passenger’s seat.
. If the SRS airbag system warning light
illuminates, continue to dry the seat until CAUTION
the warning light turns off. If the SRS
airbag system warning light stays on even Electrical devices, such as cell
when the seat has dried, do not allow phones, laptops, portable music
anyone to sit on the front passenger’s players, or electronic games, espe-
seat. We recommend that you have the cially when connected to the acces-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)
! Technical information ! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- seat with the head restraint re-
bag for models with occupant de- moved.
tection system . Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
CAUTION seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your ve-
Observe the following precautions. hicle.
Failure to do so may prevent the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag . Do not put sharp object(s) on the
from functioning correctly or cause seat or pierce the seat uphols-
the system to fail. tery.
. Do not apply any strong impact . Do not place a magnet near the
to the front passenger’s seat seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
such as by kicking. retractor.
. Do not let rear passengers rest . Do not use front seats with their
their feet between the front seat- backward-forward position and
back and seat cushion. seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
. Do not spill liquid on the front not locked securely, adjust them
passenger’s seat. If liquid is again. For adjusting procedure,
spilled, wipe it off immediately. refer to “Manual seat” F1-4
. Do not remove or disassemble (models equipped with manual
the front passenger’s seat. seats only).
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
than a genuine SUBARU acces- passenger’s occupant detection system
sory or an equivalent under the have failed, the SRS airbag system
front passenger’s seat. warning light will illuminate. We recom-
mend that you have the system inspected
. Do not place anything (shoes,
by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the
umbrella, etc.) under the front
SRS airbag system warning light illumi-
passenger’s seat.
nates.
. Do not use the front passenger’s

Black plate (79,1)
. The system is being checked after the

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the front ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
CAUTION 1
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag system. position. When the front passenger’s seat is
We recommend that you have your . The front passenger’s occupant detec- occupied by an infant in an appro-
vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. tion system is malfunctioning. priate child restraint system, ob-
Do not use the front passenger’s seat serve the following precautions.
while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU WARNING Failure to do so may interfere with
dealer or another service center. the proper operation of the occu-
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR pant detection system, activating
NOTE REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT the front passenger’s SRS frontal
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT airbag even though that seat is
and SRS curtain airbag are not con- EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN- occupied by the infant in the child
trolled by the SRS frontal airbag sys- GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS restraint system.
tem. DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it
in the REAR seat in a correct . Do not place any article (includ-
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and manner. Also, it is strongly recom- ing electronic devices) on the
OFF indicators (if equipped) mended that any forward facing seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag child seat or booster seat be in-
ON and OFF indicators” F3-17. stalled in the REAR seat, and that . Do not place more than one
even children who have outgrown a infant in the child restraint sys-
! Conditions in which front passen- tem.
child restraint system be also
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
seated in the REAR seat. This is
activated (models with occupant
because children sitting in the front
detection system)
passenger’s seat may be killed or
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag severely injured should the front
will not be activated when any of the passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
following conditions are met regarding the ploy. REAR seats are the safest
front passenger’s seat: place for children.
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)
! If the front passenger’s frontal If the ON indicator still remains illuminated your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
airbag ON indicator illuminates while the OFF indicator turns off after Even if the system has passed the
and the OFF indicator turns off taking relevant corrective actions de- dealer inspection, it is recommended
even when an infant or a small scribed above, relocate the child restraint that on subsequent trips the child/
child is in a child restraint sys- system to the rear seat. We recommend small adult always take the rear seat.
tem (including booster seat) that you immediately contact your Children who have outgrown a child
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ restraint system should always wear the
“OFF” position. NOTE seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
2. Remove the child restraint system is deactivated or activated.
When a child who has outgrown a child
from the seat. restraint system or a small adult is ! Conditions in which front passen-
3. By referring to the child restraint seated in the front passenger’s seat, ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
manufacturer’s recommendations as well the SRS frontal airbag system may or (models with occupant detection
as the child restraint system installation may not activate the front passenger’s system)
procedures in “Child restraint systems” SRS frontal airbag depending on the The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
F1-22, correctly install the child restraint occupant’s seating posture. Children will be activated for deployment upon
system. should always wear a seatbelt when impact when any of the following condi-
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” sitting in the seat irrespective of tions are met regarding the front passen-
position and make sure that the front whether the airbag is deactivated or ger’s seat.
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator activated. If the front passenger’s SRS . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. frontal airbag is activated (the ON . When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
indicator remains illuminated while are placed on the seat.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated the OFF indicator turns off), take the
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions.
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the seat other than the occupant.
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant. If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off
sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
moving the seat back and forth (models small adult in the rear seat. We recom-
with manual seat only). mend that you immediately contact

Black plate (81,1)
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
1
the ON indicator turns off even ing the system check, both indicators turn
when the front passenger’s seat off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
is occupied by an adult should illuminate while the OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incor- remains off.
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the We recommend that you immediately
seatback to the upright position, sit up contact your SUBARU dealer for an
straight in the center of the seat cushion, inspection.
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)
! Operation The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
If the front sub sensors located on both the
right and left sides at the front of the
vehicle and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a certain
predetermined amount of force during a
frontal collision, the control module sends
signals to the frontal airbag modules
instructing them to inflate the SRS frontal
airbags. Then both airbag modules pro-
duce gas, which instantly inflates driver’s
and passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. The
knee airbag is also inflated in combination
with the SRS frontal airbags.
After deployment, the SRS airbags im-
mediately start to deflate so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time
required from detecting impact to the
deflation of the SRS airbag after deploy-
ment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
If the vehicle is equipped with the occu-
pant detection system for the front pas-
senger’s seat, the SRS system detects
whether the front passenger’s seat is
A) Driver’s side occupied by a passenger or not. If the
B) Passenger’s side seat is not occupied, the system does not
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. inflate the front passenger’s SRS airbag.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident

Black plate (83,1)
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
those situations.
The SRS airbag is designed to function on
similar in fashion and magnitude to the
collision described above.
1
and will not interfere with the driver’s a one-time-only basis.
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, level of force experienced in the passen-
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and ger compartment during a collision. That
some smoke will be released. These level differs from one type of collision to
occurrences are normal result of the another, and it may have no bearing on
deployment. This smoke does not indicate the visible damage done to the vehicle
a fire in the vehicle. itself.
CAUTION ! When will the SRS frontal airbag

most likely deploy?
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The SRS frontal airbag (and also the knee

airbag) is designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe frontal collision. It is not designed
to deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
because the necessary protection can be A head-on collision against a thick con-
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is crete wall at a vehicle speed of 20 to 30
not designed to deploy in most side or rear km/h (12 to 19 mph) or higher activates
impacts or in most roll-over accidents the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal
because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag will also be activated when the
airbag would not help the occupant in vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)
! At what other times might the plunges into a deep ditch, is severely
SRS frontal airbag deploy? impacted or knocked hard against an
obstacle on the road such as a curb).
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated

when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in
the undercarriage area from the road
surface (such as when the vehicle

Black plate (85,1)
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
! When is the SRS frontal airbag unlikely to deploy? telephone pole or sign pole. 1
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS frontal
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS frontal
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)
! When will the SRS frontal airbag in a low-speed frontal collision. & SRS side airbag and SRS
not deploy? curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat).
2) Second impact In a moderate to severe side impact
In an accident where the vehicle is collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted more than once, the SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag deploys only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession, For Russia models, in a rollover, SRS
once the SRS frontal airbag is activated curtain airbags on both sides of the
on the first impact, it will not be activated vehicle deploy between the occupants
on the second. and the side windows and supplement
the seatbelts by reducing the impact on
The SRS frontal airbag is not designed to the occupant’s head.
deploy in most cases if the vehicle is
struck from the side or from behind, or if it
rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved

Black plate (87,1)
WARNING door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than
1
The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of
curtain airbag are designed only to a side impact collision. However,
be a supplement to the primary the force of SRS side airbag
protection provided by the seatbelt. deployment may cause injuries
They do not do away with the need if your head or other parts of the
to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor- body are too close to the SRS
tant to wear your seatbelt to help side airbag.
avoid injuries that can result when . Since your vehicle is equipped
an occupant is not seated in a with SRS curtain airbags, do not
proper upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. The curtain airbag on each
side of the cabin is stored in the WARNING
roof side (between the front pillar Do not rest your arm on either front
and a point over the rear seat), door or its internal trim. You could
and it provides protection by be injured in the event of SRS side
deploying rapidly (faster than airbag deployment.
the blink of an eye) in the event
of a side impact. For Russia
models, the SRS curtain airbags
also deploy in the event of a
rollover. However, the force of
its deployment may cause inju-
ries if your head is too close to it.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)
back. In the event of an accident,

the force of the SRS side airbag
WARNING
deployment could injure the child . Do not attach accessories to the
seriously because his/her head door trim or near either SRS side
or arms or other parts of the airbags and do not place objects
body are too close to the SRS near the SRS side airbags. In the
side airbag. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
the front and rear passenger’s pelled dangerously toward the
seat facing the side window. In vehicle’s occupants and cause
the event of an accident, the injuries.
force of the SRS curtain airbag . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
deployment could injure the child phone or any other accessory to
seriously because his/her head is a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
close to the SRS curtain airbag. pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING . Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
. Never allow a child to kneel on near the side windows. If such
the front passenger’s seat facing items are present when the SRS
the side window or to wrap his/ curtain airbags deploy, they
her arms around the front seat- could be thrown through the

Black plate (89,1)
passenger compartment and

cause serious injuries. They
cover exclusively designed for
use with the SRS airbag. Even
SRS curtain airbag deploy independently
of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
1
could also prevent proper opera- when using a genuine SUBARU frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
tion of the SRS curtain airbags. seat cover, the SRS side airbag instrument panel.
system may not function nor-
An impact sensor, which senses impact
mally if the seat cover is not
force, is located in each of the left and
installed correctly.
right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
Another impact sensor, which also senses
! Operation impact force, is located under the rear
center seat (satellite safing sensor).
The frontal impact sensor (all models) and
rollover sensor (Russia models) are lo-
cated inside the airbag control module
which is located under the center of the
instrument panel.
If one of the center pillar impact sensors
and the satellite safing sensor that is
WARNING located under the rear center seat to-
gether sense an impact force above a
. Do not put any kind of clothes or predetermined level in a side collision, the
other objects over either front control module causes both the SRS side
seatback and do not attach labels The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag and SRS curtain airbag on the
or stickers to the front seat sur- airbag can function only when the ignition impacted side to inflate regardless of
face on or near the SRS side switch is in the “ON” position. whether the rear wheel house impact
airbag. They could prevent prop- sensor on the same side senses an
er deployment of the SRS side The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS impact.
airbag, reducing protection avail- side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
If one of the rear wheel house impact
able to the front seat’s occupant. deploy independently of each other since
sensors and the satellite safing sensor
each has its own impact sensor. There-
. Do not install a seat cover unless fore, they may not both deploy in the same
that is located under the rear center seat
it is a genuine SUBARU seat together sense an impact force above a
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
predetermined level in a side collision, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (90,1)
control module causes only the SRS CAUTION airbags are also designed to deploy when
curtain airbag on the impacted side to the vehicle is in an extremely inclined
inflate. Do not touch the SRS side airbag state such as during a rollover. They are
system components around the not designed to deploy in most lesser
For Russia models, if the rollover sensor inclined states.
detects a vehicle rollover, the control front seat seatback with bare hands
module inflates the SRS curtain airbags right after deployment. Doing so can The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
on both sides. At this time, the driver’s and cause burns because the compo- airbag deployment depend on the level of
front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners nents can be very hot as a result of force experienced in the passenger com-
also operate simultaneously. deployment. partment during a side impact collision.
After deployment, do not touch any That level differs from one type of collision
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag to another, and it may have no bearing on
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the the visible damage done to the vehicle
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear itself.
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
an eye. The SRS curtain airbag remains very hot as a result of deployment.
inflated for a while following deployment
then slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to deploy in the event
airbag deploy even when no one occupies of an accident involving a moderate to
the seat on the side on which an impact is severe side impact collision. They are not
applied. designed to deploy in most lesser side
impact. Also, they are not designed to
When the SRS side airbag and SRS deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud because SRS side airbag and SRS
inflation noise will be heard and some curtain airbag deployment would not help
smoke will be released. These occur- the occupant in those situations.
rences are a normal result of the deploy- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire airbag are designed to function on a one-
in the vehicle. time-only basis.
For Russia models, the SRS curtain

Black plate (91,1)
! When will the SRS side airbag ! When will the SRS curtain airbag 1
and SRS curtain airbag most most likely deploy? (Russia
likely deploy? models)
A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag.
1) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

2) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (92,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

! When is the SRS side airbag unlikely to deploy? side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
might not necessarily require SRS side
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (93,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
! When is the SRS curtain airbag unlikely to deploy? side-on impact. 1
Except Russia models impact in an area outside the vicinity of
similar object.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (94,1)
Russia models 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
similar object.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (95,1)
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
! When will the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
1
and SRS curtain airbag not de- The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
ploy? airbag are not designed to deploy in most on the second.
cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- & SRS airbag system monitor
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
SRS airbag system warning light

1) First impact A diagnostic system continually monitors
2) Second impact
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
A) SRS curtain airbag
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
B) SRS side airbag
while the vehicle is being driven. The
In an accident where the vehicle is struck SRS airbag system warning light will show
from the side more than once, the SRS normal system operation by illuminating
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy for approximately 6 seconds when the
only once on the first impact. ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Example: In the case of a double side
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision impact collision, first with one vehicle and
with another vehicle (moving or station- immediately followed by another from the
ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (96,1)
The following components are monitored – Left-hand side very minor collision or not inflate in
by the indicator. . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear a severe collision), which may in-
. Front sub sensor center seat) crease the risk of injury.
– Right-hand side . Seatbelt pretensioner
– Left-hand side – Driver’s side
. Airbag control module (including im- – Front passenger’s side & SRS airbag system servicing
pact sensor [all models] and rollover . All related wiring
sensor [Russia models]) WARNING
. Frontal airbag module WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
– Driver’s side
If the warning light exhibits any of ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
– Front passenger’s side the following conditions, there may cle damaged by a collision, we
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt recommend that you consult
. Side airbag sensor pretensioners and/or SRS airbag your SUBARU dealer.
– Center pillar right-hand side system. . The SRS airbag has no user-
– Center pillar left-hand side . Flashing or flickering of the warn- serviceable parts. Do not use
. Side airbag module ing light electrical test equipment on any
– Driver’s side circuit related to the SRS airbag
. No illumination of the warning
– Front passenger’s side light when the ignition switch is system. For required servicing of
. Front passenger’s occupant detection first turned to the “ON” position the SRS airbag, we recommend
sensor (if equipped) that you consult your nearest
. Continuous illumination of the
. Front passenger’s occupant detection SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
warning light or disconnecting the system’s
control module (if equipped)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Illumination of the warning light wiring could result in accidental
ger’s side – if occupant detection system while driving inflation of the SRS airbag or
is equipped) We recommend that you have the could make the system inopera-
. Curtain airbag sensor system checked immediately by tive, which may result in serious
your nearest SUBARU dealer. Un- injury.
– Rear wheel house right-hand side
– Rear wheel house left-hand side less checked and properly repaired,
the seatbelt pretensioners and/or
. Curtain airbag module
SRS airbags will operate improperly
– Right-hand side (e.g. SRS airbags may inflate in a

Black plate (97,1)
CAUTION In the event that the SRS airbag system & Precautions against vehicle 1
is deployed, we recommend that you modification
If you need service or repair in areas have the system replaced with genuine
indicated in the following list, we SUBARU parts at an authorized WARNING
recommend that you have the work SUBARU dealer.
performed by an authorized To avoid accidental activation of the
SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag NOTE system or rendering the system
control module, impact sensors In the following cases, we recommend inoperative, which may result in
and airbag modules are stored in that you contact your SUBARU dealer serious injury, no modifications
the following areas. as soon as possible. should be made to any components
. Under the center of the instru- . The front part of the vehicle was or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
ment panel involved in an accident in which the This includes the following modifi-
SRS frontal airbags did not deploy. cations.
. On both the right and left sides at . The pad of the steering wheel, the
the front of the vehicle cover over the front passenger’s fron- . Installation of custom steering
. Steering wheel and column and tal airbag, or either roof side (from the wheels
nearby areas front pillar to a point over the rear seat) . Attachment of additional trim
. Bottom of the steering column is scratched, cracked, or otherwise materials to the dashboard
and nearby areas damaged. . Installation of custom seats
. The center pillar, rear wheel house
. Top of the dashboard on front . Replacement of seat fabric or
or rear sub frame, or an area near these
passenger’s side and nearby leather
parts, was involved in an accident in
areas . Installation of additional fabric or
which the SRS side airbag and SRS
. Each front seat and nearby area curtain airbag did not deploy. leather on the front seat
. Inside each center pillar . The fabric or leather of either front . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
. In each roof side (from the front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise crophone or any other accessory
pillar to a point over the rear seat) damaged. to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
. The rear part of the vehicle was rear pillar, the windshield, a side
. Between the rear seat cushion involved in an accident. window, an assist grip, or any
and rear wheel house on each other cabin surface that would be
side near a deploying SRS curtain
. Under the rear center seat airbag.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)
. Installation of additional electri- er’s Manual.

cal/electronic equipment such as . Attachment of any equipment
a mobile two-way radio on or (side steps or side sill protectors,
near the SRS airbag system etc.) to the side body other than
components and/or wiring is not genuine SUBARU accessory
advisable. This could interfere parts specially designed for
with proper operation of the SRS side airbags, or parts that
SRS airbag system. match the quality of genuine
SUBARU accessory parts spe-
cially designed for SRS side air-
CAUTION bags.
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications We recommend that you always consult
can interfere with proper operation your SUBARU dealer if you want to install
of the SRS airbag system. any accessory parts on your vehicle.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) to the
front end other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts or
parts that match the quality of
genuine SUBARU accessory
parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-

Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 PIN Code Access (models with “keyless

Key number plate ................................................ 2-2 access with push-button start system”) ....... 2-17 2
Technical information for Europe models ............. 2-2 Registering a PIN code ...................................... 2-17
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3 Unlocking .......................................................... 2-18
Immobilizer indicator light ................................... 2-3 Remote keyless entry system........................... 2-18
Key replacement ................................................. 2-3 Locking and unlocking doors ............................. 2-19
Technical information for Europe models ............. 2-4 Opening trunk lid............................................... 2-20
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4 Headlight off delay setting (if equipped).............. 2-21
Locking and unlocking from the outside with Technical information......................................... 2-21
key ................................................................... 2-4 Double locking system (if equipped) ............... 2-22
Locking from the outside without key .................. 2-5 To set double locking system............................. 2-22
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5 To cancel double locking system ....................... 2-23
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6 In an emergency ................................................ 2-23
Power door locking switch................................. 2-6 If a battery goes dead ........................................ 2-23
Key lock-in prevention function (except models To reset double locking system.......................... 2-23
with double locking system) .............................. 2-7 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-24
Keyless access with push-button start Windows............................................................. 2-24
system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-7 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-25
Safety precautions .............................................. 2-8 Power window operation by passengers............. 2-27
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access” Initialization of power window ............................ 2-27
entry function................................................... 2-11
Trunk lid ............................................................. 2-27
Warning chimes and warning indicator ............... 2-14
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-28
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-15
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-28
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-16
Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-28
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-16
Technical information for Europe models ............ 2-16 Sunroof (if equipped) ........................................ 2-30
Sunroof switches............................................... 2-31
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-32

Black plate (102,1)
2-2 Keys and doors/Keys
Keys CAUTION relevant to each country (e.g., a copy of

the original Declaration of Conformity and
NOTE Do not attach a large key holder or the CE marking are required for the EU).
key case to the key. If it bangs
For models with “keyless access with against your knees while you are
push-button start system”, refer to driving, it could turn the ignition
“Keyless access with push-button start switch from the “ON” position to the
system” F2-7. “ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
For information on making replacement
1) Key (main) keys, refer to “Key replacement” F2-3.
2) Key (sub)
3) Key number plate & Technical information for
Your vehicle has two or three keys and a Europe models
key number plate. These devices comply with the essential
All keys provided for your vehicle fit all requirements and provisions such as the
locks on your vehicle. Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
. Ignition switch Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC.
. Driver’s door Requirements and provisions differ de-
pending on the country.
. Glove box (if equipped)
See chapter 13 to confirm the information

Black plate (103,1)
Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-3
Immobilizer “Ignition switch (models without push- & Immobilizer indicator

button start system)” F3-4. light
The immobilizer system is designed to CAUTION Refer to “Immobilizer indicator light” F3- 2
prevent an unauthorized person from 32.
starting the engine. Only keys registered . Do not place the key under direct
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can sunlight or anywhere it may
be used to operate your vehicle. This become hot. & Key replacement
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft . Do not get the key wet. If the key Your key number plate will be required if
guaranty. gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth you ever need a replacement key made.
For models with “keyless access with immediately. Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
push-button start system”: . Do not modify or remove the before it can be used. The maximum
If you press the push-button ignition system. If modified or removed, number of keys that can be registered
switch when carrying an unregistered the proper operation of the sys- for use with one vehicle is as follows.
access key, the switch will not turn to the tem cannot be guaranteed.
“ON” position and the engine will not start. . Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
For models without “keyless access NOTE . Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”: . To protect your vehicle from theft, with push-button start system”)
Even if an unregistered key fits into the please pay close attention to the fol-
ignition switch and can be turned to the One key that has already been registered
lowing security precautions.
“START” position, the engine will auto- is required in order to register a new key.
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
matically stop after several seconds. tended with its keys inside. If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
If the engine does not start, perform either – Before leaving your vehicle, remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
of the following procedures. close all windows and the sunroof, immobilizer system. For security reasons,
. Perform the procedure described in and lock the doors. the lost key’s ID code should be erased
“Starting engine” F9-18 (models with – Do not leave spare keys or any from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
“keyless access with push-button start record of your key number in the ID code, all keys that will be used are
system”). vehicle. required.
. Pull out the key once before trying . The vehicle has a maintenance-free For details about new key registration and
again (models without “keyless access type immobilizer system. erasing the lost key’s ID code, we
with push-button start system”). Refer to recommend that you contact your
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (104,1)
2-4 Keys and doors/Door locks
SUBARU dealer. Door locks switch (models without keyless access

with push-button start system) or turn
& Technical information for & Locking and unlocking from off the ignition switch (models with
Europe models the outside with key keyless access with push-button start
system).
This device complies with the essential
requirements and other relevant provi- 2. Close the doors except for the
sions of the Radio and Telecommunica- driver’s door.
tions Terminal Equipment Directive
1999/5/EC. A copy of the original Declara-
tion of Conformity and the CE marking are
found in the chapter 13.
! Models without double locking

system
To lock the driver’s door from the outside 1) Lock
with the key, turn the key toward the front. 2) Unlock
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the 3. Push the lock side of the power door
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open locking switch that is located on the
an unlocked door. driver’s door.
4. Close the driver’s door and insert the
NOTE key. Turn the key forward to lock the
Only the driver’s door can be locked driver’s door.
from the outside using the key.
To lock the doors, refer to the following
procedure.
1. Remove the key from the ignition

Black plate (105,1)
Keys and doors/Door locks 2-5
! Models with double locking system & Locking from the outside ! Models with double locking system
To lock the doors from the outside with the without key It is not possible to place the lock lever on
key, turn the key toward the front. To the driver’s door in the locking position 2
unlock the doors, turn the key toward the while the driver’s door is open. The door
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open lock levers function only when the driver’s
an unlocked door. door is securely closed and the double
! Models with “keyless access with locking system is not set.
push-button start system”
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.

2) Close the door while holding the handle
pulled.
To lock the front door from the outside
without the key, rotate the lock lever
forward and hold the outside door handle
pulled while closing the door.
NOTE
The mechanical key is directional. If the Always make sure that all doors are
1) Unlock
key cannot be inserted, change the locked before leaving your vehicle. 2) Lock
direction that the grooved side is
facing and insert it again. NOTE To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
Make sure that you do not leave the key lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
inside the vehicle when locking the the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
doors from the outside without the key.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)
2-6 Keys and doors/Power door locking switch
Pull the inside door handle to open an *: The battery drainage prevention function Power door locking switch
unlocked door. affects only the map lights on models with the
sunroof, and only when the map light switches
Always make sure that all doors are
closed before starting to drive. are in the OFF position. The map lights on
models without the sunroof do not turn off
! Models with double locking system automatically, so push the light switches manu-
If the double locking system is activated, ally to turn them off.
the door will not be unlocked even when
you move the door lock lever rearward. The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. We recommend that
& Battery drainage prevention you contact your SUBARU dealer to
function change the setting.
If a door is not completely closed, the
interior lights will remain illuminated as a NOTE
result. However, several lights will auto- . The factory setting (default setting) 1) Lock
matically be turned off by the battery for this function is set as “operational”. 2) Unlock
drainage prevention function to prevent . When leaving the vehicle, please
the battery from discharging. The following make sure that all doors are completely All doors can be locked and unlocked by
interior lights will be affected by this closed. the power door locking switch located at
function. . For models with the push-button the driver’s side door.
ignition switch, the battery drainage To lock the doors, push the front side of
Item Switch Automatically turning prevention function does not operate
position off the switch.
while the ignition switch is in “ACC” or To unlock the doors, push the rear side of
Map lights* OFF* Approximately 20 “ON” position. the switch.
minutes later . For models without the push-button
Dome light DOOR Approximately 20 ignition switch, the battery drainage NOTE
minutes later prevention function does not operate With a vehicle that has a double locking
Ignition Approximately 20 while the key is in the ignition switch. system, pushing the unlocking position
switch light — minutes later
of the power door locking switch has
Approximately 20 no effect when the double locking
Trunk light — minutes later system is activated.

Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system 2-7
& Key lock-in prevention func- ! Behavior with key lock-in preven- Keyless access with push-
tion (except models with tion function operational button start system (if
double locking system) With the driver’s door open, the doors are equipped) 2
This function prevents the doors from automatically kept unlocked even if the
being locked under the following condi- front side of the power door locking switch
tions. is pressed.
. The key is still in the ignition switch ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
(models without “keyless access with tion function non-operational
push-button start system”) . If the lock lever is turned to the front
. The ignition switch is in the “ON” (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
position (models with “keyless access with open and the driver’s door is then closed,
push-button start system”) the driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
This function’s operational/non-opera-
driver’s door from the outside of the
tional setting can be changed by a
vehicle, the door is locked.
SUBARU dealer. We recommend that
you contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
1) Access key (main)
NOTE 2) Access key (sub)
When leaving the vehicle, make sure 3) Key number plate
that you are holding the key before The vehicle has two or three access keys
locking the doors. and a key number plate. For details about
the key number plate, refer to “Key
number plate” F2-2.
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
unlocking the trunk
. Starting and stopping the engine
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)
2-8 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
Locking and unlocking by the remote & Safety precautions

keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key. WARNING
For the engine starting procedure, refer to
“Starting and stopping engine (models If you wear an implanted pacemaker
with push-button start system)” F7-9. or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 22 cm (8.7 in) away from the
A mechanical key is attached to each
transmitting antennas installed on
access key. The mechanical key is used
the vehicle.
for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
adversely affect the operation of
(for some models)
implanted pacemakers and im-
1) Release button planted defibrillators.
You cannot unlock the glove box without 2) Mechanical key
using the mechanical key. You can keep If you wear electric medical equip-
the glove box locked when you leave your While pressing the release button of the ment other than an implanted pace-
vehicle and the access key (with the access key, take out the mechanical key. maker or an implanted defibrillator,
mechanical key removed) at a parking before using the keyless access
facility. with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for more information.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-
tem”

Black plate (109,1)
. The keyless access with push- CAUTION

button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre- . Never leave or store the access
quency* in addition to the radio key inside the vehicle (e.g., on 2
waves used for the remote key- the instrumental panel, inside the
less entry system. The radio glove box, on the seat, in the
waves are periodically output door pocket or on the rear shelf)
from the antennas installed on or within 2 m (6.6 ft) around the
the vehicle as shown in the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
following illustrations. access key may be locked inside
* Radio frequency: 134.2 kHz the vehicle, or the battery may
discharge rapidly. Note that the
push-button ignition switch may
not turn on in some cases de-
pending on the location of the
access key.
. The access key contains electro-
nic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
– Although you can replace the
battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
1) Antenna risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
– Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it off immediately and let
it dry completely.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)
– Do not apply strong impacts the access key is pressed, radio may not be possible to lock or unlock
to the access key. waves are sent and may affect the doors or start the engine.
– Keep the access key away the operation of the airplane. – When operating near a facility
from magnetic sources. When you carry the access key where strong radio waves are trans-
in a bag on an airplane, take mitted, such as a broadcast station
– Never leave the access key in measures to prevent the buttons and power transmission lines
direct sunlight or anywhere of the access key from being – When products that transmit
that may become hot, such pressed. radio waves are used, such as an
as on the dashboard. It may
access key or a remote transmitter
damage the battery or cause
key of another vehicle
circuit malfunctions. NOTE – When carrying the access key of
– Do not wash the access key in . The operational/non-operational your vehicle together with an ac-
an ultrasonic washer. setting for the keyless access function cess key or a remote transmitter of
– Do not leave the access key in can be changed. For the setting proce- another vehicle
humid or dusty locations. dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac- – When the access key is placed
Doing so may cause malfunc- cess function” F2-15. The setting can near wireless communication
tions. also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. equipment such as a cell phone
For more details, we recommend that – When the access key is placed
– Do not leave the access key
you contact a SUBARU dealer. near a metallic object
near personal computers or
. For detailed information about the
home electric appliances. – When metallic accessories are
operation method for the push-button
Doing so may cause the ac- attached to the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess key to malfunction, re-
cess function is switched to the non- – When carrying the access key
sulting in battery discharge. with electronic appliances such as
operational mode, refer to “Access key
. If the access key is dropped, the – if access key does not operate a laptop computer
integrated mechanical key inside properly” F9-17. – When the battery of the access
may become loose. Be careful . The keyless access with push-but- key is discharged
not to lose the mechanical key. ton start system uses weak radio . The access key is always commu-
. When you carry the access key waves. The status of the access key nicating with the vehicle and is con-
on an airplane, do not press the and environmental conditions may in- tinuously using the battery. Although
button of the access key while in terfere with the communication be- the life of the battery varies depending
the airplane. When any button of tween the access key and the vehicle on the operating conditions, it is ap-
under the following conditions, and it proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery

Black plate (111,1)
becomes fully discharged, replace it status” F3-7. (16 to 32 in) from the respective door
with a new one. (2) Open and close the driver’s handles and the trunk ornament.
. If an access key is lost, it is door.
recommended that the remaining ac- (3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- 2
cess key be reregistered. For reregis- onds.
tration of an access key, we recom-
mend that you contact a SUBARU When the steering is locked, the initi-
dealer. alization is completed.
. For a spare access key, we recom-
mend that you contact a SUBARU & Locking and unlocking with
dealer. “keyless access” entry func-
. Up to 7 access keys can be regis- tion
tered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate ! Operating ranges
supplied with the access key. It is
1) LED indicator
necessary for vehicle repair and addi-
tional registration of access keys. When the access key is within either of the
. Do not leave the access key in the operating ranges of the front doors, the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such LED indicator on the access key flashes.
as the door pocket, dashboard and the When the keyless access functions are
rear shelf. Vibrations may damage the disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
key or turn on the switch, possibly unless a button on the access key is
resulting in a lockout. pressed.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- ! Operating range tips
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re- . Locking by using the keyless access
quired to start the engine. In this case, function can be operated only by the door
perform the following procedure to 1) Antenna lock sensor in the operating range in
initialize the steering lock.
2) Operating range which the access key is detected.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition The operating ranges of the door locking/ . Unlocking by using the keyless access
switch to the “OFF” position. For unlocking functions and trunk lid unlocking function can be operated only by the door
details, refer to “Switching power function are approximately 40 to 80 cm handle in the operating range in which the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)
access key is detected. broadcast station or an area where wire- lock sensor is touched with a gloved hand,
. If the access key is placed too close to less equipment is used), or while talking the door lock may not be operated.
the vehicle body, the keyless access on a cell phone, the operating ranges may . When performing the locking proce-
function may not operate properly. If it be reduced, or the keyless access func- dure too quickly, locking may not have
does not operate properly, repeat the tion may not operate. been completed. After locking the doors, it
operation from further away. In such a case, perform the procedure is recommended to pull the REAR door
. If the access key is placed near the described in “Locking and unlocking” F9- handles to confirm that the doors have
ground or in an elevated location from the 17. been locked.
ground, even if it is in the indicated . When an access key is in the operating . It is not possible to lock the doors when
operating range, the keyless access func- range, if the door handle becomes wet one of the doors is open. Close all of the
tion may not operate properly. due to exposure to a significant amount of doors and lock the doors.
. When the access key is within the water when the vehicle is washed or . Within 3 seconds after locking the
operating range, it is possible for anyone, during heavy rain, the doors may be doors by using the keyless access func-
even someone who is not carrying the locked or unlocked. tion, it is not possible to unlock the doors
access key, to operate the keyless access . The keyless access function may not by using the keyless access function.
function. Note that locking and unlocking operate properly depending on the status . When locking, be sure to carry the
can be operated only by the door handle, of the access key and the radio wave access key to prevent locking the access
door lock sensor or trunk lid opener button conditions around the vehicle. In such a key in the vehicle.
in the operating range in which the access case, perform the procedure described in . The setting of the hazard warning
key is detected. “Locking and unlocking” F9-17. flasher operation and the volume of the
. It is not possible to lock the doors using ! How to use keyless access func- audible signal can be changed by your
the keyless access function when the tions SUBARU dealer. We recommend that you
access key is inside the vehicle. However, contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
depending on the status of the access key ! Keyless access function tips
. The setting of the hazard warning
and the environmental conditions, the . When you lock the doors using the flasher operation can also be changed
access key may be locked inside the keyless access function, turn the push- by operating the multi function display. For
vehicle. Before locking, make sure that button ignition switch off. It is not possible details, refer to “Hazard warning flasher
you have the access key. to lock the doors using the keyless access setting” F3-85.
. When the battery of the access key is function when the push-button ignition
discharged, or when operating it in a switch is on the “ACC” or “ON” position.
location with strong radio waves or noise Refer to “Switching power status” F3-7.
(e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, . If the door handle is gripped or the door

Black plate (113,1)
! Unlocking ! Opening trunk ! Locking
Carry the access key, and grip either of 1) Trunk lid opener button 1) Door lock sensor (above and below)
the front door handles. Carry the access key, and press the trunk Carry the access key, close all doors and
Models without double locking system: lid opener button. Only the trunk lid will be the trunk lid, and touch the door lock
All doors will be unlocked. Also, the unlocked and opened. sensor on the door handle. All doors will
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. The hazard warning flashers will flash be locked. Also, the hazard warning
twice. flashers will flash once.
Models with double locking system:
. When gripping the driver’s door handle:
Only the driver’s door will be unlocked.
. When gripping the front passenger’s
door handle: All doors will be unlocked.
Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (114,1)
NOTE the access key battery and the vehicle ! Automatic locking (except models
battery. with double locking system)
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors, if you touch the If any of the doors was not opened within
Case 1: When the keyless access func- 30 seconds after unlocking, they will be
door lock sensor once more to attempt tion and the remote keyless entry system
the lock operation without first unlock- automatically locked again.
have not been used for 2 weeks or longer
ing the doors, nothing will happen, while all doors are locked The function’s operational/non-operational
even if the door lock sensor is touched. setting and the time until automatic locking
In this case, perform the unlocking Case 2: When the access key has been takes place can be changed by a
operation once first. You can then left in the operating range for 10 minutes SUBARU dealer. For more details, we
touch the door lock sensor to lock the or longer while all doors are locked recommend that you contact a SUBARU
doors. dealer.
! Recovery from power saving
! Door unlock selection function mode The setting and the time can also be
The door unlock selection function makes When one of the following is operated, the changed by operating the multi function
it possible to unlock the driver’s door keyless access function will be recovered. display. For details, refer to “Security
without unlocking any other doors. Case 1: Relocking” F3-86.
The operational/non-operational setting . Unlock the doors by operating any
for this function can be changed by a procedure other than gripping the front & Warning chimes and warning
SUBARU dealer. passenger’s door handle indicator
Operational: Only the driver’s door will be . Lock or unlock the doors The keyless access with push-button start
unlocked. . Open a door and then close it system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning indicator
Non-operational: All doors will be un- Case 2: on the combination meter in order to
locked. . Unlock the doors by gripping the door minimize improper operations and help
handle protect your vehicle from theft.
For the factory setting (default setting),
refer to “Function settings” F26. . Lock the doors by touching the door For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
lock sensor warning indicator of the keyless access
For further details, we recommend that
you consult a SUBARU dealer. . Lock or unlock the doors by using the with push-button start system” F3-28.
remote keyless entry system
! Power saving function . Lock or unlock the doors by using the
The keyless access function will be power door locking switch
disabled in the following cases to protect . Open either of the front doors

Black plate (115,1)
& Disabling keyless access keyless access functions under the

function following conditions.
– When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of 2
WARNING
time
If you wear an implanted pacemaker – When the keyless access func-
or an implanted defibrillator, operate tions are not going to be used
the driver’s door to disable the
keyless access function. Otherwise, ! Disabling functions
the operation of an implanted pace- ! By operating the access key
maker or implanted defibrillator may
be affected by the radio waves from If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
the transmitter antenna. Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access 3. Press and hold the “ ” button and
When the vehicle is not going to be used key. For details about registering a PIN “ ” button on the access key simulta-
for a long time, or when you choose not to code, refer to “Registering a PIN code” neously for more than 5 seconds.
use the keyless access function, the F2-17.
keyless access function can be disabled. 1. Open the driver’s door. A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, we
recommend that you contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
F9-18.
. We recommend that you disable the 2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (116,1)
! By operating the driver’s door 7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is – When disabling by operating the
performed, close and open the driver’s driver’s door: a chirp will not be
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door once. heard
door.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is – When disabling by operating the
performed, close the door. A chirp sound access key: a chirp will be heard
will be heard for 2 seconds, and the
functions will be disabled. & When access key does not
operate properly
NOTE Refer to “Access key – if access key does
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door not operate properly” F9-17.
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not & Replacing battery of access
be disabled. key
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
! Enabling functions
F11-57.
When the procedure to disable the func-
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the tions is performed again, a chirp sound will & Technical information for
power door locking switch. be heard, and the functions will be Europe models
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is enabled.
. This device complies with the essential
performed, open the driver’s door. NOTE requirements of the Radio and Telecom-
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is . The keyless access function will be munications Terminal Equipment Directive
performed, push the rear side (unlock enabled only if you perform the proce- 1999/5/EC. A copy of the original Declara-
side) of the power door locking switch dure in the same manner you disabled tion of Conformity and the CE marking are
twice while the door is open. the function (for example, when dis- found in chapter 13.
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is abling by operating the driver’s door, . Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION de-
performed, close and open the driver’s the function will not be enabled even if clares that this 13CZY/14AHB is in com-
door twice. you operate the access key). pliance with the essential requirements
6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is . Press the push-button ignition and other relevant provisions of Directive
performed, push the rear side (unlock switch if you do not know the proce- 1999/5/EC.
side) of the power door locking switch dure in which the keyless access
twice while the door is open. function was disabled.

Black plate (117,1)
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”) 2-17
PIN Code Access (models & Registering a PIN code ! Registration

with “keyless access with ! Preparation For example, to register “32468” as the
push-button start system”) 1. Turn off the ignition switch.
PIN code, perform the following proce- 2
dure.
2. Close all doors and the trunk lid.
1. Press the trunk lid opener button three
3. Press and hold the “ ” button on the
times.
access key. Then all doors and the trunk
lid will be locked. 2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk lid opener button twice.
4. While pressing the “ ” button, press
and hold the trunk lid opener button within 3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
5 seconds after completing step 3. press the trunk lid opener button four
times.
5. Press and hold the above buttons for
more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will 4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
sound. press the trunk lid opener button six times.
6. Release the “ ” button and the trunk 5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
lid opener button. press the trunk lid opener button eight
times.
7. Press the “ ” button on the access key
1) Trunk lid opener button 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
while the chirp sounds. Then the chirp will
When all doors are locked, you can unlock stop and the preparation is complete. approximately 30 seconds after the buz-
them without a key by operating the trunk zer starts sounding intermittently.
lid opener button. 7. All doors and the trunk lid that has
NOTE been unlocked will be locked. Then the
You need to register a PIN code to your If you do not press the “ ” button on PIN code will be registered.
vehicle before using this function. the access key, the chirp will sound for
30 seconds. In this case, the prepara-
NOTE tion for registering a PIN code does not NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the complete even if the chirp stops. . To register “0” as a PIN code, press
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It the trunk lid opener button on the trunk
is recommended that a 5-digit security lid ten times.
code (PIN code) is registered. . Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (118,1)
2-18 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
another person, confirm that the PIN – when you want to change the PIN Remote keyless entry system
code has not been changed or deleted. code
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code. & Unlocking The remote transmitter can be used within
a distance of approximately 1.0 m (3.2 ft)
. If you make an error during the Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis- of the vehicle. It can be used to lock and
registration procedure, press the “ ” tration”. unlock all of the doors and to open the
button on the access key. Then, start
NOTE trunk lid.
over from the procedure described in
“Preparation”. . You cannot unlock by PIN Code The system’s operable distance will be
. To protect your vehicle from theft, Access in the following cases. shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
you cannot register a string of the – when the access key is within the equipment emitting strong radio waves
same five numbers together, such as operating ranges such as a power plant, broadcast station,
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – when the ignition switch is in the TV tower, or remote controller of home
. Do not register your vehicle license “ACC” or “ON” position electronic appliances.
plate number or simple numbers such . If you make an operation error
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. during the unlocking procedure, start CAUTION
Doing so will increase the risk of over with the unlocking procedure after
vehicle theft. . When you carry the remote trans-
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. When you try to register “22222”, mitter on an airplane, do not
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a press the button of the remote
the registered PIN code will be deleted.
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes transmitter while in the airplane.
You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
are entered five times continuously. If When any button of the remote
Code Access until a new code is
this occurs, you cannot unlock the transmitter is pressed, radio
registered.
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
. After registering a new PIN code, waves are sent and may affect
minutes. the operation of the airplane.
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code. When you carry the remote trans-
. The PIN code cannot be deleted mitter in a bag on an airplane,
while the keyless access function is take measures to prevent the
disabled by operating the access key. buttons of the remote transmitter
. Reregister the PIN code in the from being pressed.
following case. . Do not expose the transmitter to
– when you forget the PIN code shocks.

Black plate (119,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-19
. Do not take the transmitter apart. “Hazard warning flasher setting” F3- ! Unlocking
. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it 85. Press the unlock button on the access
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth key/transmitter near the vehicle. 2
immediately.
! Models without door unlock
selection function
NOTE Models without double locking system:
. Before leaving the vehicle, make All doors will be unlocked. Also, the
sure that the doors are locked. hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
. If any of the doors is open, this
Models with double locking system:
function does not operate.
. For models with “keyless access 1. Only the driver’s door will be unlocked.
with push-button start system”, when Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash
the lock button on the access key is twice.
pressed while the access key is placed 2. If you press the unlock button again
too close to the vehicle body, unlock- Access key within 5 seconds of unlocking the driver’s
ing by the keyless access functions door, all of the other doors will be
may not work. In such a case, the unlocked.
functions will recover by unlocking
using the remote keyless entry system. ! Models with door unlock selec-
tion function
& Locking and unlocking doors
NOTE
NOTE . For security reasons, confirm the
The setting of the hazard warning setting is set as “operational” or “non-
flasher operation can be changed by operational”.
your SUBARU dealer. We recommend . For models with “keyless access
that you contact your SUBARU dealer with push-button start system”, the
for details. Also, the setting of the door unlock selection function can be
hazard warning flasher operation can Remote transmitter set for both the keyless access func-
be changed by operating the multi 1) Lock button tion and the remote keyless entry
function display. For details, refer to 2) Unlock button system. For the method of setting the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (120,1)
2-20 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
door unlock selection function of the . If any of the doors is not fully closed, Relocking” F3-86.
keyless access function, refer to “Door the hazard warning flashers will flash
unlock selection function” F2-14. five times (the outside warning chime
& Opening trunk lid
The door unlock selection function makes also sounds five times for models with
it possible to unlock the driver’s door “keyless access with push-button start
without unlocking any other doors. The system”) to alert you that the doors are
operational/non-operational setting for this not properly closed.
function can be changed by a SUBARU . For models with “keyless access
dealer. with push-button start system”, the
front door will be unlocked if you grip
Operational: Only the driver’s door will be the front door handle while an access
unlocked. If you press the unlock button key is in the operating range. Pull the
again within 5 seconds of unlocking the REAR door handle to make sure that
driver’s door, all of the other doors will be the doors have been locked.
unlocked.
! Automatic locking (except models
Non-operational: All doors will be un- with double locking system) Access key
locked.
When the unlock button is pressed, all of
For further details, we recommend that the doors will be automatically locked 30
you consult a SUBARU dealer. seconds later unless any one of the four
doors is opened during that period.
! Locking
Pressing the lock button on the access The automatic locking function’s opera-
key/transmitter locks all doors. When tional/non-operational setting and the
leaving the vehicle, pull the REAR door setting for the locking time period (the
handle to make sure that the doors have time period after which locking takes
been locked. place) can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. We recommend that you contact
NOTE the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
. The remote keyless entry system
The setting and the time can also be
does not operate when the key is Remote transmitter
changed by operating the multi function
inserted in the ignition switch or when
display. For details, refer to “Security Press the “ ” button to open the trunk
any of the doors is not fully closed.

Black plate (121,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-21
lid. At this time, the hazard warning lights NOTE munications Terminal Equipment Directive
flash twice. . If the ignition switch is set to the 1999/5/EC. A copy of the original Declara-
“ON” position, the headlight flasher is tion of Conformity and the CE marking are
& Headlight off delay setting (if set to the “OFF” position, or the light found in the chapter 13. 2
equipped) control switch is set to a position other
The headlight off delay setting turns on the than the “AUTO” or “OFF” position, the
headlights, etc. for smooth exiting from the headlights and exterior lights will turn
vehicle at night or in a dark place. off.
. If the driver’s door is not opened
NOTE and closed, these lights will turn off in 3
The factory setting (default setting) of minutes.
the operation duration of the headlights
and the exterior lights is 30 seconds. & Technical information
This setting can be changed to OFF (no The trade, model and supplier’s names of
operation), 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or this device are as follows.
90 seconds at SUBARU dealers. For
more details, we recommend that you Models with tire pressure monitoring
contact a SUBARU dealer. system:
. Equipment’s trade name: SUBARU
When the ignition switch is turned off and
. Equipment’s model name: TWB1G762/
the light control switch is in the “AUTO” or
TB1G077
“OFF” position, if the headlight flasher is
set to the “ON” position, the headlight low . Supplier’s name: ALPS ELECTRIC
beams and some exterior lights will Models without tire pressure monitoring
illuminate. system:
The headlights and exterior lights will . Equipment’s trade name: SUBARU
illuminate for 30 seconds after the driver’s . Equipment’s model name: TF001
door is closed or until the door locking . Supplier’s name: Calsonic Kansei
operation using the lock button on the
transmitter or the lock sensor on the door For Europe:
handle is performed two times succes- This device complies with the essential
sively. requirements of the Radio and Telecom-

Black plate (122,1)
2-22 Keys and doors/Double locking system
Double locking system (if & To set double locking system ! Setting system using remote trans-
equipped) mitter
! Setting system using key
1. Remove the key from the ignition
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch (models without “keyless access
The double locking system is an anti-theft
switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)/turn the
system. It operates when the doors are
with push-button start system”)/turn the push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
locked using the key or remote transmitter.
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF” position (models with “keyless access with
While this system is operating, the power
position (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) and have all
door locking switch and door lock levers
push-button start system”) and have all occupants get out of the vehicle.
inside the cabin cannot be used to unlock
occupants get out of the vehicle.
the doors. 2. Close all of the doors securely.
2. Close all of the doors securely.
3. Press the “ ” button on the access key
WARNING or “ ” button on the transmitter. The
hazard warning flashers will flash once
Never set the double locking system and the double locking system will be set.
while passengers are inside the All of the doors will be locked.
vehicle. With the system set, people
in the vehicle would not be able to
open the doors from the inside. The NOTE
result could be serious injuries or For models with the keyless access
death. function, it is possible to set the double
locking system by touching the door
lock sensor.
3. Insert the key into the key cylinder of

the driver’s door, then turn it in the locking
direction to set the double locking system.
All of the doors will be locked.

Black plate (123,1)
Keys and doors/Double locking system 2-23
& To cancel double locking ! Canceling system using remote direction.

system transmitter . Break one of the windows and climb
Press the “ ” button on the access key or out through the window opening.
! Canceling system using key 2
“ ” button on the transmitter. The hazard
warning flashers will flash twice and the & If a battery goes dead
double locking system will be canceled. If the double locking system cannot be
The driver’s door will be unlocked. canceled because the vehicle battery or
transmitter battery has gone dead or
NOTE because of a blown fuse or other electrical
For models with the keyless access problem, insert the key into the key
function, it is possible to cancel the cylinder of the driver’s door and turn it in
double locking system by gripping the the unlocking direction.
door handle.
& To reset double locking sys-
& In an emergency tem
If you become trapped inside the vehicle The double locking system must be reset
Insert the key into the key cylinder of the owing to an accident or some other when the vehicle battery has been tem-
driver’s door, then turn it in the unlocking unexpected circumstance, unlock the porarily disconnected for replacement or
direction to cancel the double locking doors using one of the following methods. charging. To reset the system, turn the key
system. All of the doors will be unlocked. . Remove the key from the ignition once in the unlocking direction or press
switch, then press the “ ” button on the the “ ” button on the access key or “ ”
transmitter (models without keyless ac- button on the transmitter. The double
cess function). locking system will then operate normally.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch off, NOTE
then press the “ ” button on the access
key (models with keyless access func- For models with the keyless access
tion). function, it is possible to reset the
double locking system by gripping the
. Set the ignition switch to the “ON”
door handle.
position and open the driver’s window.
Insert the key into the key cylinder of the
driver’s door and turn it in the unlocking

Black plate (124,1)
2-24 Keys and doors/Child safety locks
Child safety locks Windows procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power
window.
WARNING
The power windows operate only when
To avoid serious personal injury the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
caused by accidental, child’s mis-
chief, or improper operation, the
driver is responsible for obeying
the following instructions without
exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
Each rear door has a child safety lock. being caught in the window.
When the child safety lock lever is in the . Do not allow children to operate
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be the power windows. Closing a
opened from inside. The door can only power window on someone can
be opened from the outside. cause death or serious injury.
The driver is responsible for
WARNING
instructing children not to oper-
Always turn the child safety locks to ate the power windows.
the “LOCK” position when children . Always lock the passengers’ win-
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury dows using the lock switch when
could result if a child accidentally children are riding in the vehicle.
opens the door and falls out. . Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this

Black plate (125,1)
Keys and doors/Windows 2-25
& Power window operation by ! Operating the window This switch also has a one-touch auto up
driver function that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
! Driver’s side power window Pull the switch up until it clicks and release 2
switches it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, push the switch down
lightly.
NOTE
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the one-
touch auto up/down function will be
deactivated. Initialize the power win-
1) Automatically open/close dow to reactivate the one-touch auto
2) Open/close up/down function. Refer to “Initializa-
tion of power window” F2-27.
To open: . When the following operations are
The illustration above is for left-hand drive Push the switch down lightly and hold it. performed, the power window breaker
models. The location of item No. 2 (for The window will open as long as the will operate and it may not be possible
driver’s window) and No. 3 (for front switch is held. to open or close the window.
passenger’s window) for right-hand drive This switch also has a one-touch auto – After the driver’s window is fully
models is the opposite of that shown here. down feature that allows the window to be closed or fully opened, the switch is
1) Lock switch opened fully without holding the switch. continuously operated in the same
2) For driver’s window Push the switch down until it clicks and direction for a few seconds.
3) For front passenger’s window release it, and the window will fully open. – After the windows for three or
4) For rear left window To stop the window halfway, pull the more seats are fully closed or fully
5) For rear right window switch up lightly. opened, each switch is continu-
All door windows can be controlled by the ously operated in the same direc-
power window switch cluster at the driver To close: tion simultaneously for a few sec-
side door. Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The onds.
window will close as long as the switch is
held. In this case, after the breaker recovers,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (126,1)
2-26 Keys and doors/Windows
be sure to initialize the power windows. NOTE ! Locking the passengers’ windows
If they are not initialized, the one-touch . If a window detects an impact simi-
auto up/down function will not operate. lar to that caused by trapping an object
Refer to “Initialization of power win- (for example, when the vehicle encoun-
dow” F2-27. ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
! Off delay function . The window cannot be operated for
Even when the ignition switch is turned to a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, the driver ment function operates.
can open or close all the windows for . If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
approximately 40 seconds. However, after nected due to situations such as
the driver’s door or front passenger’s door battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
is opened, none of the windows can be entrapment function is deactivated.
opened or closed. Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re- 1) Lock
NOTE fer to “Initialization of power window” 2) Unlock
While the indicator light on the switch F2-27.
is illuminated, it may be possible to To lock:
While closing with the one-touch auto up Press the lock switch. When the lock
open or close the driver’s window. function, if the window senses a substan- switch is in the lock position, the passen-
! Anti-entrapment function tial enough object trapped between the gers’ windows cannot be opened or
window and the window frame, it auto- closed.
CAUTION matically moves down slightly and stops. To unlock:
Press the lock switch again to cancel the
. Never attempt to test this func- passengers’ window locking.
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.

Black plate (127,1)
Keys and doors/Trunk lid 2-27

! Anti-entrapment function
& Power window operation by Trunk lid
passengers Refer to “Anti-entrapment function” F2-
26.
! Passenger’s side power window WARNING 2
switches & Initialization of power win-
dow . To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due always keep the trunk lid closed
to situations such as battery or fuse while driving.
replacement, the following functions will
be deactivated. . Help prevent young children,
adults or animals from locking
. One-touch auto up/down function
themselves in the trunk. On hot
. Anti-entrapment function or sunny days, the temperature
Initialize the power window using the in the trunk could quickly be-
following procedure to reactivate these come high enough to cause
functions. Perform the following procedure death or serious heat-related in-
for each of the doors that have the one- juries including brain damage to
touch auto up/down function. anyone locked inside, particu-
Each passenger window can be controlled larly for small children.
1. Close the door.
by the power window switch located on 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” . When leaving the vehicle, close
the door. position. all windows and lock all doors.
! Operating the window Also make certain that the trunk
3. Open the window of the door that you
is closed.
Refer to “Operating the window” F2-25. closed in step 1 halfway by pushing down
! Off delay function the power window switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch of the
Even when the ignition switch is turned to door that you closed in step 1 and close
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, any pas- the window completely. Continue pulling
senger can open or close the windows for up the switch for approximately 1 second
approximately 40 seconds. However, after after the window is closed completely.
the driver’s door or front passenger’s door
is opened, none of the windows can be
opened or closed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (128,1)
2-28 Keys and doors/Trunk lid
& To open and close the trunk & To open the trunk lid from handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid from outside inside lid.
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to “Open-
ing trunk” F2-13 or “Opening trunk lid”
F2-20.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, refer to
“Opening trunk lid” F2-20.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
The type of handle differs depending on
trunk lid down until the latch engages. Press the trunk lid opener switch for more the model.
than 1 second.
NOTE To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
Do not leave your valuables in the NOTE pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
trunk when you leave your vehicle. The trunk lid will not open when the arrow on the handle. This operation
select lever is in a position other than unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
the “P” position (CVT models) or the lid.
vehicle is moving. The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
& Internal trunk lid release exposed to ambient light even for a short
handle time.
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from WARNING
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the Never allow any child to get in the
handle allows them to open the lid. The trunk and play with the release

Black plate (129,1)
Keys and doors/Trunk lid 2-29
handle. If the driver starts the vehi- ! Inspection

cle without knowing that a child is Perform the following steps at least twice
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
a year to check the release handle for 2
correct operation.
child could fall out and be killed or 1. Open the trunk lid.
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook This places the latch in the locked posi-
to fasten straps or ropes to tion.
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle. 2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
If the cargo hits the handle while blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
the vehicle is being driven, the blade from the slit aperture of the lock
handle may be pulled and the assembly fully to the end until you hear a
trunk lid may open. That may click.
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)
2-30 Keys and doors/Sunroof
If the latch is not released, contact your Sunroof (if equipped) sons and never allow an unat-
SUBARU dealer. tended child to remain in the
In that case, use the key to release the vehicle. Failure to follow this
latch, then close the trunk lid. WARNING procedure could result in injury
Also, if the movement of the release to a child operating the sunroof.
handle feels restricted or not entirely Never let anyone’s hands, arms, . Never try to check the anti-en-
smooth during operation, or the handle head or any objects protrude from trapment function by deliberately
and/or handle base is cracked, contact the sunroof. A person could be placing part of your body in the
your SUBARU dealer. seriously injured if any of the follow- sunroof.
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly.
. The vehicle turns sharply. CAUTION
. The vehicle is involved in an . Do not sit on the edge of the open
accident. sunroof.
. Body parts protruding from the . Do not operate the sunroof if
vehicle are struck by outside falling snow or extremely cold
objects. conditions have caused it to
To avoid serious personal injury freeze shut.
caused by accidental, child’s mis- . Do not touch the moving parts of
chief, or improper operation, the the sunroof while the sunroof is
driver is responsible for obeying operating.
the following instructions without . If the sunroof does not close, we
exception. recommend that you have the
. Before closing the sunroof, make system checked by a SUBARU
sure that no one’s hands, arms, dealer.
head or other objects will be
accidentally caught in the sun- The sunroof has both tilting and sliding
roof. functions.
. Always carry the key when you The sunroof operates only when the
leave the vehicle for safety rea- ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Black plate (131,1)
Keys and doors/Sunroof 2-31
& Sunroof switches pletely. Pressing the switch continuously rear side of the switch again to open the
may cause damage to the sunroof. sunroof completely.
! Tilting sunroof
NOTE To close: 2
One-touch operation does not take Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
place when the sunroof is lowered. switch. To stop the sunroof at a selected
Press the switch continuously to lower mid-way position while opening or closing
the sunroof. it, momentarily press the front side or rear
side of the switch.
! Sliding sunroof
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the sunroof to prevent drops of
water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
1) Raise Driving with the sunroof fully open can
2) Lower cause an annoying sound to be gener-
The tilting function is activated only when ated at high speeds. If this occurs, use
the sunroof is fully closed. the sunroof at the midway stop posi-
tion when the sunroof is opened.
To raise:
Press and hold the rear side of the “UP/ ! Anti-entrapment function
DOWN” switch for a short time. The 1) Open When the sunroof senses a substantial
sunroof raises completely. 2) Close enough object trapped between its glass
Tilt down the sunroof completely before and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
To lower: automatically moves back to the fully open
performing the sliding operation.
Press and hold the front side of the “UP/ position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
To open:
DOWN” switch until the preferred position ment function may also be activated by a
has reached. Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch. The sun shade will also be opened strong shock on the sunroof even when
Release the switch after the sunroof has together with the sunroof. The sunroof will there is nothing trapped.
been raised or has been lowered com- stop once at a midway position. Press the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)
2-32 Keys and doors/Sunroof
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
sunroof fully opened.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the sunroof is
closed.
If the sunroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.

Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch (models without push- Seatbelt warning light and chime ....................... 3-14
button start system)......................................... 3-4 Rear seatbelt indicator light and chime (if
LOCK.................................................................. 3-4 equipped) ........................................................ 3-16
ACC.................................................................... 3-5 SRS airbag system warning light........................ 3-17
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF 3
ON...................................................................... 3-5
START ................................................................ 3-5 indicators (if equipped) .................................... 3-17
Key reminder chime (if equipped) ........................ 3-5 Malfunction indicator light (Check Engine
light) ............................................................... 3-18
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-6
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-18
Push-button ignition switch (models with Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-19
push-button start system) ............................... 3-6
Engine low oil level warning indicator (except
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6 STI) ................................................................. 3-19
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6 AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-19
Switch location ................................................... 3-7 Rear differential oil temperature warning light
Switching power status ....................................... 3-7 (STI) ................................................................ 3-20
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-8 Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped) ...... 3-20
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-8 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-22
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-9 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-9 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-22
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/
movement upon turning on the ignition Traction mode indicator light............................ 3-24
switch............................................................... 3-9 Brake system warning light (red)........................ 3-25
Speedometer....................................................... 3-9 Vacuum pump system warning light (yellow)
Odometer........................................................... 3-10 (except STI) ..................................................... 3-26
Double trip meter ............................................... 3-10 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-26
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11 Windshield washer fluid warning indicator.......... 3-26
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-11 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-12 indicator light .................................................. 3-26
ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-12 Door open warning light .................................... 3-26
REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)................. 3-13 All-Wheel Drive warning light (if equipped) ......... 3-27
Power steering warning light (except STI)........... 3-27
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-14
Initial illumination for system check .................... 3-14

Black plate (6,1)
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Multi information display .................................. 3-36
(models with LED headlights) ........................... 3-27 Basic operation ................................................. 3-37
LED headlight warning light (if equipped)............ 3-28 Welcome screen ................................................ 3-37
Warning chimes and warning indicator of the Good-bye screen ............................................... 3-38
keyless access with push-button start system (if Warning screen ................................................. 3-38
equipped)......................................................... 3-28
Basic screens.................................................... 3-43
Immobilizer indicator light .................................. 3-32
Menu screens .................................................... 3-44
SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped).......................... 3-32
Shift-up indicator (STI without gear shift indicator Multi function display ........................................ 3-47
models)............................................................ 3-33 Basic operation ................................................. 3-48
Select lever/gear position indicator (if Welcome screen ................................................ 3-48
equipped)......................................................... 3-33 Date screen ....................................................... 3-48
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-33 Ending screen ................................................... 3-49
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-33 Self-check screen .............................................. 3-49
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if Interruption screen ............................................ 3-50
equipped)......................................................... 3-34 Basic screens.................................................... 3-51
High Beam Assist warning indicator (yellow) (if Selection screen ................................................ 3-57
equipped)......................................................... 3-34 Date and time settings ....................................... 3-61
Cruise control indicator ...................................... 3-34 Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-69
Cruise control set indicator ................................ 3-34 Screen settings.................................................. 3-71
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-34 Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-80
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-34 Driving history registration................................. 3-84
Rear fog light indicator light (if equipped) ........... 3-34 Car settings....................................................... 3-85
Driver’s control center differential auto indicator Initialize............................................................. 3-89
(STI)................................................................. 3-34 Light control switch........................................... 3-92
Driver’s control center differential indicator and Headlights ......................................................... 3-93
warning (STI).................................................... 3-35
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-95
REV indicator light (STI) ..................................... 3-36
High Beam Assist function (if equipped)............. 3-95
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection warning
indicator (if equipped) ...................................... 3-36 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-98
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection OFF indicator (if Daytime running light system (if equipped)......... 3-99
equipped)......................................................... 3-36 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-99
One-touch lane changer ..................................... 3-99

Black plate (7,1)
1
Illumination brightness control ....................... 3-100 Headlight washer (if equipped)....................... 3-111
Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) .............. 3-100 Mirrors .............................................................. 3-111
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with Inside mirror..................................................... 3-111
LED headlights).............................................. 3-100 Auto-dimming mirror (if equipped).................... 3-112
Manual headlight beam leveler (models without Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-112
LED headlights).............................................. 3-101 Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-114
Fog light switch................................................ 3-103 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-115
Front fog light switch (if equipped) ................... 3-103
Horn .................................................................. 3-116
Rear fog light switch (if equipped) .................... 3-104
Wiper and washer ............................................ 3-105
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............. 3-107

Black plate (138,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)
Ignition switch (models with- against your knees while you are long time with the ignition switch in the
driving, it could turn the ignition “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
out push-button start sys-
switch from the “ON” position to the battery to go dead.
tem) “ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby . If the ignition switch will not move
stopping the engine. Also, if the key from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
WARNING is attached to a keyholder or to a position, turn the steering wheel
large bunch of other keys, centrifu- slightly to the left and right as you turn
. Never turn the ignition switch to gal force may act on it as the vehicle the ignition switch.
“LOCK” while the vehicle is moves, resulting in unwanted turn-
being driven or towed because ing of the ignition switch. & LOCK
that will lock the steering wheel, The key can only be inserted or removed
preventing steering control. And in this position. The ignition switch will lock
when the engine is turned off, it the steering wheel when you remove the
takes a much greater effort than key.
usual to steer.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ways remove the key from the as you turn the key.
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows or other con-
trols or even make the vehicle The ignition switch has four positions:
move. LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running.
key case to either key. If it bangs . Using electrical accessories for a The key can be turned from the “ACC” to
“LOCK” position only when the select

Black plate (139,1)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system) 3-5
lever is in the “P” position (CVT models) “START” position and again try to start
and the key is pushed in while turning it your engine.
(all models).
NOTE
& ACC The engine may not start in the follow-
In this position the electrical accessories
ing cases: 3
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
. The key is near another key that
& START contains an immobilizer transponder.
The engine is started in this position. The . The key is near or touching another
starter cranks the engine to start it. When transmitter.
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to & Key reminder chime (if
the “ON” position. . The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
equipped)
CAUTION The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
Do not turn the ignition switch to the switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
“START” position while the engine
is running. The chime stops under the following
conditions.
As your vehicle is equipped with an . when the ignition switch is turned to the
immobilizer system, if you fail to start the “ON” position
engine with a registered key, pull out the . when the key is removed from the
key once, (at this time, the immobilizer ignition switch
indicator light blinks) and then insert the . when the driver’s door is closed
key in the ignition switch and turn it to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
& Ignition switch light Push-button ignition switch . Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
For easy access to the ignition switch in (models with push-button the glass, it may be possible to switch
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- start system)
nates when the driver’s door is opened or the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
when the driver’s door is unlocked using & Safety precautions following places. It may become im-
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-8. possible to operate the push-button
The light remains illuminated for several ignition switch and the engine start.
tens of seconds and then gradually turns & Operating range for push- – On the instrument panel
off under the following conditions. button start system – On the floor
. when the driver’s door is closed – Inside the glove box
. when the doors are unlocked using the – Inside the door trim pocket
remote keyless entry transmitter – On the rear seat
The light turns off immediately under the – On the rear shelf
following conditions. – Inside the trunk
. when the ignition switch is turned to the . When operating the push-button
“ON” position ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
. when all doors are locked using the
perform the procedure described in
remote keyless entry transmitter
“Access key – if access key does not
operate properly” F9-17. In such a
case, replace the battery immediately.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access
1) Antenna key” F11-57.
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the an-
tennas inside the vehicle, the push-
button ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.

Black plate (141,1)
Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system) 3-7
& Switch location & Switching power status CAUTION

The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed. . When the push-button ignition
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the switch is left in “ON” or “ACC”
for a long time, it may result in
driver’s seat.
vehicle battery discharge. 3
2. Shift the shift lever in neutral (MT
models) or the select lever in the “P” . Do not spill drinks or other
position (CVT models). liquids on the push-button igni-
3. Press the push-button ignition switch tion switch. It may cause a mal-
without depressing the clutch pedal (MT function.
models) or the brake pedal (CVT models). . Do not touch the push-button
Every time the button is pressed, the ignition switch with a hand soiled
power is switched in the sequence of with oil or other contaminants. It
Left-hand drive models
“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. The may cause a malfunction.
operation indicator on the push-button . If the push-button ignition switch
ignition switch illuminates or turns off as does not operate smoothly, stop
shown in the following chart. the operation. We recommend
that you contact a SUBARU deal-
Power er immediately.
Indicator color Operation
status . If the push-button ignition switch
OFF Turned off Power is turned off. does not illuminate even when
The following sys-
the instrument panel illumination
tems can be used: is turned on, we recommend that
ACC Orange audio and acces- you have the vehicle inspected at
sory power outlet. a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is
stopped) sun for a long time, the surface of
Right-hand drive models ON All electrical sys- the push-button ignition switch
Turned off tems can be used.
1) Operation indicator (while engine is
may get hot. Be careful not to
2) Push-button ignition switch running) burn yourself.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (142,1)
3-8 Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
NOTE & When access key does not Hazard warning flasher
. In CVT models, the push-button operate properly
ignition switch cannot be switched to Refer to “Access key – if access key does
“OFF” when the select lever is in a not operate properly” F9-17.
position other than “P”.
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition The hazard warning flasher is used to
switch while turning the steering wheel warn other drivers when you have to park
left and right. your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
! Battery drainage prevention func- ignition switch in any position.
tion
When the push-button ignition switch is To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
left in “ON” or “ACC” for approximately 1 press the hazard warning button on the
hour, the push-button ignition switch will instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
be automatically switched to “OFF” to press the button again.
prevent the battery from going dead. (In
CVT models, this function is activated
NOTE
when the select lever is in the “P” . When the hazard warning flasher is
position.) on, the turn signals do not work.

Black plate (143,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9
. If you depress the brake pedal Meters and gauges & Canceling the function for
suddenly, the hazard warning flasher meter/gauge needle move-
may blink rapidly. For details, refer to NOTE ment upon turning on the
“Emergency Stop Signal” F7-31. ignition switch
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on It is possible to activate or deactivate the 3
the combination meter. You will find movement of the meter needles and
their indications hard to see if you wear gauge needles that takes place when the
polarized glasses. ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. To change the setting, perform
& Combination meter illumina- the procedures described in “Gauge Initial
Movement” F3-46.
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the & Speedometer
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the The speedometer shows the vehicle
following sequence. speed. The digital speedometer can be
also displayed on the multi information
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter display.
needles, gauge needles illuminate.
! Speed warning chime (if equipped)
2. Meter and gauge indications each
show MAX position. When the speed is over approximately
120 km/h (75 mph), a chime sounds.
3. Meter and gauge indications each
show MIN position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
NOTE
This sequence of operations may not
take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)
3-10 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
& Odometer & Double trip meter Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
trip knob.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
and keep the knob pressed for more than
2 seconds.
1) Trip knob 1) Trip knob
CAUTION
This meter displays the odometer when This meter displays the two trip meters
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” To ensure safety, do not attempt to
The odometer shows the total distance position. change the function of the indicator
that the vehicle has been driven. The trip meter shows the distance that the during driving, as an accident could
vehicle has been driven since you last set result.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition it to zero.
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light If you press the trip knob when the ignition NOTE
up. If you do not press the trip knob within switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” If the connection between the combina-
10 seconds of illumination of the od- position, the odometer/trip meter will light tion meter and battery is broken for any
ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter up. It is possible to switch between the A reason such as vehicle maintenance or
will turn off. trip meter and B trip meter indications fuse replacement, the data recorded on
Also, if you open and close the driver’s while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If the trip meter will be lost.
door within 10 seconds of illumination of you do not press the trip knob within 10
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip seconds of illumination of the odometer/
meter will turn off. trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.

Black plate (145,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-11
& Tachometer & Fuel gauge the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
The tachometer shows the engine speed you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10
in thousands of revolutions per minute. seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the
CAUTION “E” position and the dial and needle will
turn off. 3
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red NOTE
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
1) Low fuel warning light
NOTE The fuel gauge shows the approximate
To protect the engine/transmission amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
while the select lever is in the “P” or When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“N” position (CVT models) or the shift “OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge
lever is in the neutral position (MT shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
models), the engine is controlled so fuel.
that the engine speed may not become
The gauge may move slightly during . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel gauge.
depressed hard.
level movement in the tank. This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
vehicle.
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
. When you have refueled, the fuel
position, the fuel gauge’s dial will illumi-
gauge indicates the amount in the fuel
nate and the needle will indicate the
tank after starting the engine. Also, it
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
may take some time until the fuel
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating gauge indication stabilizes.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (146,1)
3-12 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
. The gauge indicates only an approx- & Temperature gauge CAUTION

imate amount of fuel remaining in the
tank. Use this indication only as a If the pointer exceeds the normal
guide. operating range, safely stop the
. If you refuel while the ignition switch vehicle as soon as possible.
is in the “ON” position, the fuel gauge Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
may not indicate the correct amount of 12.
the fuel in the fuel tank.
. If the refuel amount is less than
approximately 15 liters (4.0 US gal, 3.3
Imp gal), it may take some time until the
& ECO gauge
fuel gauge indication stabilizes.
1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge The unit displayed varies depending on the
models.
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the The ECO gauge shows the difference
engine coolant at this temperature range between the current rate of fuel consump-
and high revving operation when the tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
engine is not warmed up enough should tion since the trip meter was last reset.
be avoided. The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Black plate (147,1)
Instruments and controls/REV indicator light and buzzer (STI) 3-13
REV indicator light and buz- ever the engine speed enters the red
Needle position
zone of the tachometer.
Displayed unit
“+” side “-” side
zer (STI)
To change the REV indicator light settings,
l/100km Poorer Better perform the procedures described in “REV
settings (STI)” F3-46.
km/l
Better Poorer 3
MPG
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 1 km (0.6 mile).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
1) REV indicator light
The REV alarm system has the following
functions.
. When the engine speed reaches the
level that was previously set, the REV
indicator light illuminates to inform you. At
this time, a buzzer also sounds if the
buzzer setting is activated.
. Whenever the engine speed enters the
red zone of the tachometer, the REV
indicator light flashes.
NOTE
Even if the REV alarm system is not set,
the REV indicator light will flash when-

Black plate (148,1)
3-14 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Warning and indicator lights : Charge warning light : LED headlight warning light (if
equipped)
: Oil pressure warning light
& Initial illumination for system : Automatic headlight beam leveler
check : REV indicator light (STI) warning light (models with LED head-
Several of the warning and indicator lights : AT OIL TEMP warning light lights)
illuminate when the ignition switch is (CVT models) : Traction mode indicator light
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the : Rear differential oil temperature warn- : High Beam Assist indicator light (if
bulbs. ing light (STI) equipped)
Apply the parking brake and turn the : Low tire pressure warning light (if If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For equipped) burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
the system check, the following lights : ABS warning light corresponding system.
illuminate and then turn off after several We recommend that you consult your
seconds or after the engine has started. : Brake system warning light authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
: Seatbelt warning light : Low fuel warning light
(The driver’s seatbelt warning light and & Seatbelt warning light
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start and chime
the front passenger’s seatbelt warning
assist OFF indicator light
light turn off only when each seatbelt is
fastened.) : Door open warning light
NOTE
If your seatbelt warning device does
: SRS airbag system warning light : AWD warning light (if equipped) not operate as described below, it may
be malfunctioning. We recommend that
: Rear seatbelt indicator light (if : Power steering warning light (except
you have the device inspected and, if
equipped) STI)
necessary, repaired by the nearest
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning SUBARU dealer.
indicator light (if equipped) light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light ! Seatbelt warning for driver’s seat
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
indicator light (if equipped) : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica- warning device for the driver’s seat.
tor light
: Malfunction indicator light
(Check Engine light)

Black plate (149,1)
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-15
sounding for 5 seconds followed by a 1- ! Seatbelt warning for front passen-

second pause. If the seatbelt is fastened ger’s seat (if equipped)
at this time, the warning light will turn off Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
and the buzzer will stop sounding imme- warning device for the front passenger’s
diately. seat.
This condition will continue for approxi- 3
mately 108 seconds. If the driver’s seat-
belt is still not fastened when the 108-
second period has elapsed, the warning
light will stop flashing and the buzzer will
stop sounding. The warning light, how-
ever, will remain illuminated continuously
unless the seatbelt is fastened.
Driver’s warning light
This device causes the seatbelt warning
light on the combination meter to illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned to
“ON” to remind the driver to wear the
seatbelt. Front passenger’s warning light
If the vehicle is driven at a speed no With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
higher than approximately 20 km/h (12.5 position, this device reminds the front
mph) with the driver’s seatbelt not fas- passenger to fasten his/her seatbelt by
tened, the warning light will illuminate illuminating a warning light as shown in
continuously. the illustration.
If the vehicle subsequently reaches a If the vehicle is driven at a speed no
speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5 higher than approximately 20 km/h (12.5
mph) with the driver’s seatbelt not fas- mph) with the front passenger’s seatbelt
tened, the warning light will start a not fastened, the warning light(s) corre-
repeated cycle consisting of 5 seconds sponding to the unfastened seatbelt(s) will
of flashing followed by 1 second of steady illuminate continuously.
illumination. At the same time, a buzzer
If the vehicle subsequently reaches a
will start a repeated cycle consisting of
speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (150,1)
mph) with the front passenger’s seatbelt If the driver’s seatbelt and/or the front 30 seconds have elapsed after the vehicle
not fastened, the warning light(s) will start passenger’s seatbelt is still not fastened started moving or the rear seatbelts have
a repeated cycle consisting of 5 seconds when the 108-second period has elapsed, been fastened, the indicator light turns off.
of flashing followed by 1 second of steady the warning light(s) will stop flashing and If rear passengers unfasten the seatbelts
illumination. the buzzer will stop sounding. The warn- while driving, the indicator light will illumi-
At the same time, a buzzer will start a ing light(s), however, will remain illuminate and the buzzer will start sounding.
repeated cycle consisting of sounding for nated continuously unless the corre- The buzzer will continue operating for 30
5 seconds followed by a 1-second pause. sponding seatbelt(s) is fastened. seconds unless the rear seatbelts have
If either the driver’s or front passenger’s been fastened. The buzzer will not oper-
unfastened seatbelts is fastened at this & Rear seatbelt indicator light ate when the vehicle is not moving or the
time, the warning light corresponding to and chime (if equipped) vehicle speed is below approximately 10
that seatbelt will immediately turn off but km/h (6 mph).
the buzzer will continue operating unless
the remaining seatbelt is fastened. NOTE
The indicator light will illuminate in the
NOTE following cases regardless of whether
. If the driver’s and front passenger’s there are no passengers in the rear
seatbelts are not fastened simulta- seat.
neously (if one seatbelt is fastened . Any of the rear doors is opened or
significantly earlier or later than the closed.
other), the buzzer may sound longer . You turn the ignition switch to the
(10 seconds maximum). “ON” position within 30 minutes after
. The occupant detection system of any of the rear doors was opened or
the front passenger’s seat detects if the closed.
seat is occupied by a passenger. How- 1) Rear seat (left position) . You turn the ignition switch to the
ever, if there is an object on the seat, 2) Rear seat (center position) “ON” position within 30 minutes after
the seatbelt warning system may be 3) Rear seat (right position) you turned it to the “LOCK”/“OFF” or
activated even the seat is not occupied. “ACC” position.
. If you use a cushion on the front This indicator light is located as shown in
passenger’s seat, there is the possibi- the illustration. The indicator light will turn off if any of
lity that the occupant detection system This indicator light illuminates when the the following actions was performed.
cannot detect the passenger. ignition switch is in the “ON” position and . The rear seatbelts have been fas-
any rear seatbelts are not fastened. Once

Black plate (151,1)
tened (the tongue plate of the corre- . No illumination of the warning the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
sponding seatbelts has been inserted light when the ignition switch is When the ignition switch is turned to the
into the buckle). first turned to the “ON” position “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
. The vehicle has been driven more . Continuous illumination of the indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for 30 seconds or warning light which time the system is checked. Follow-
longer. ing the system check, both indicators turn 3
. Illumination of the warning light
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
while driving
& SRS airbag system indicators illuminates depending on the
warning light status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the frontal airbag
For details about the SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal system monitoring.
warning light, refer to “SRS airbag system airbag ON and OFF indica-
monitor” F1-65. tors (if equipped) If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
WARNING ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the warning light exhibits any of If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
the following conditions, there may is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
be a malfunction in the seatbelt airbag ON indicator will remain off while
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag the OFF indicator will illuminate.
system. We recommend that you
have the system checked immedi- With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
ately by your nearest SUBARU deal- position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
er. Unless checked and properly tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners neously even after the system check
and/or SRS airbags will operate period, the system is malfunctioning. We
improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may recommend that you contact your
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
inflate in a very minor collision or indicator
not inflate in a severe collision), spection.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
which may increase the risk of indicator
injury.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- and OFF indicators show you the status of
ing light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)
& Malfunction indicator CAUTION . Reduce vehicle speed.

light (Check Engine . Avoid hard acceleration.
light) If the malfunction indicator light . Avoid steep uphill grades.
illuminates while you are driving, . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
we recommend that you have your ble.
! Models equipped with OBD system vehicle checked/repaired by your
Vehicles sold in Europe are equipped with SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- The malfunction indicator light may stop
an enhanced on-board diagnostics sys- ble. Continued vehicle operation blinking and illuminate steadily after sev-
tem called OBD that monitors the perfor- without having the emission control eral driving trips. We recommend that you
mance of the vehicle’s emission control system checked and repaired as have your vehicle checked by an author-
system. necessary could cause serious da- ized SUBARU dealer immediately.
Vehicles sold in some countries outside mage, which may not be covered by ! Models NOT equipped with OBD
Europe may be equipped with the OBD your vehicle’s warranty. system
system. We recommend that you ask your
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates
SUBARU dealer to ascertain whether your ! If the light illuminates steadily when the engine is running, it may indicate
vehicle has the OBD system.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving that there is a problem somewhere in the
The OBD system helps to protect the or does not turn off after the engine starts, engine control system.
environment by ensuring that emissions an emission control system malfunction If the light illuminates while driving or does
are at acceptable levels for the life of the has been detected. not turn off after the engine starts, we
vehicle. recommend that you contact your nearest
We recommend that you have your
SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates vehicle checked by an authorized
steadily or blinks while the engine is SUBARU dealer immediately.
running, it may indicate that there is a
& Charge warning light
problem or potential problem somewhere ! If the light is blinking
If this light illuminates when the engine is
in the emission control system and that If the light is blinking while driving, an running, it may indicate that the charging
service is required. The OBD system also engine misfire condition has been de- system is not working properly.
assists your service technician in properly tected which may damage the emission
diagnosing any malfunction. control system. If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
To prevent serious damage to the emis- engine at the first safe opportunity and
sion control system, you should do the check the alternator belt. If the belt is
following:

Black plate (153,1)
loose, broken or if the belt is in good & Engine low oil level – when the vehicle has continu-
condition but the light remains illuminated, warning indicator ously accelerated and decelerated
we recommend that you contact your (except STI) – when the vehicle is continuously
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. turned
This indicator appears when the engine oil – when the vehicle is driven on a
& Oil pressure warning level decreases to the lower limit. road that alternates continuously 3
light If the indicator appears while driving, park between uphill and downhill
If this light illuminates when the engine is the vehicle in a safe and level location,
running, it may indicate that the engine oil and then check the engine oil level. When & AT OIL TEMP warning
pressure is low and the lubricating system the engine oil level is not within the normal light (CVT models)
is not working properly. range, refill with engine oil as soon as
possible. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-16. If this light illuminates when the engine is
If the light illuminates while driving or does running, it may indicate that the transmis-
If the indicator does not disappear after
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the sion fluid temperature is too hot.
refilling the engine oil, or the indicator
engine at the first safe opportunity and appears even though the engine oil level If the light illuminates while driving, im-
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is is within the normal range, we recommend mediately stop the vehicle in a safe
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is that you have the vehicle checked by a location and let the engine idle until the
at the proper level but the light remains SUBARU dealer. warning light turns off.
illuminated, we recommend that you con-
tact your nearest SUBARU dealer imme- NOTE ! Transmission control system warn-
diately. . After replacing or adding engine oil, ing
For details about checking the oil level or if the engine oil level is within the If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
adding the engine oil, refer to “Engine oil” normal range when restarting the en- after the engine has started, it may
F11-16. gine on a level surface, the warning indicate that the transmission control
indicator will be off. system is not working properly. We re-
CAUTION . The warning indicator may appear commend that you contact your nearest
temporarily in the following conditions SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
because a low oil level may be detected
oil pressure warning light on. This
as a result of significant oil movement
may cause serious engine damage.
in the engine.
– when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)
& Rear differential oil NOTE itoring system (TPMS)” F11-34.

temperature warning . If the tire pressures are not correct Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
light (STI) and/or the tires are not all the same should be checked monthly when cold
size and brand, the rear differential will and inflated to the inflation pressure
CAUTION be heavily loaded when the vehicle is recommended by the vehicle manufac-
driven, resulting in an abnormally high turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
Reduce the vehicle speed and park oil temperature. pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
the vehicle in a safe location as . The rear differential oil will deterio- a different size than the size indicated on
soon as possible if the R.DIFF TEMP rate if its temperature increases en- the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
warning light illuminates. Sustained ough for the rear differential oil tem- sure label, you should determine the
driving with this light on can cause perature warning light to illuminate. It is proper tire inflation pressure for those
the rear differential and other parts advisable to have the rear differential tires.)
of the powertrain to be damaged. oil replaced as soon as possible.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
If this light illuminates when the engine is & Low tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
running, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
warning light (if a low tire pressure telltale when one or
At this time, the driver’s control center
equipped) more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
differential will automatically cancel the When the ignition switch is turned to the
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
current torque-distribution ratio setting and “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
stop and check your tires as soon as
adopt its minimum ratio. ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
possible, and inflate them to the proper
seconds to check that the tire pressure
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
properly. If the system functions normally
nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
and the tire pressure of all four wheels is
several minutes. After the light turns off, reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
appropriate for the selected TPMS mode,
you can start driving. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
the warning light will turn off. The TPMS
If the light does not turn off, we recom- stopping ability.
mode should be changed according to the
mend that you contact the nearest specified pressure shown on the tire Please note that the TPMS is not a
SUBARU dealer for service. inflation pressure label. For how to change substitute for proper tire maintenance,
a mode and information about the mode to and it is the driver’s responsibility to
be selected, refer to “Tire pressure mon- maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level

Black plate (155,1)
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
pressure telltale. the TPMS is unable to monitor all
Your vehicle has also been equipped with If this light does not illuminate four road wheels. We recommend
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate briefly after the ignition switch is that you contact your SUBARU deal-
when the system is not operating properly. turned ON or the light illuminates er as soon as possible for tire and
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- steadily after blinking for approxi- sensor replacement and/or system 3
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. mately one minute, we recommend resetting.
When the system detects a malfunction, that you have your Tire Pressure If the light illuminates steadily after
the telltale will flash for approximately one Monitoring System checked at a blinking for approximately one min-
minute and then remain continuously SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- ute, we recommend that you
illuminated. This sequence will continue ble. promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long If this light illuminates while driving, to have the system inspected.
as the malfunction exists. When the never brake suddenly and keep
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the driving straight ahead while gradu-
system may not be able to detect or signal ally reducing speed. Then slowly CAUTION
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS pull off the road to a safe place.
malfunctions may occur for a variety of Otherwise an accident involving The tire pressure monitoring system
reasons, including the installation of re- serious vehicle damage and serious is NOT a substitute for manually
placement or alternate tires or wheels on personal injury could occur. checking tire pressure. The tire
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from pressure should be checked peri-
functioning properly. Always check the If this light still illuminates while odically (at least monthly) using a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing driving after adjusting the tire pres- tire gauge. Change the TPMS mode
one or more tires or wheels on your sure, a tire may have significant according to the specified pressure
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or damage and a fast leak that causes shown on the tire inflation pressure
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have label. After any change to tire pres-
to continue to function properly. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sure(s), the tire pressure monitoring
as soon as possible. system will not re-check tire infla-
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one When a spare tire is mounted or a tion pressures until the vehicle is
minute, we recommend that you have the wheel rim is replaced without the first driven to a vehicle speed of at
system inspected by your nearest original pressure sensor/transmitter least 40 km/h (25 mph). After adjust-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. being transferred, the Low tire pres- ing the tire pressures, increase the
sure warning light will illuminate vehicle speed to at least 40 km/h (25
steadily after blinking for approxi- mph) to start the TPMS re-checking
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (156,1)
of the tire inflation pressures. If the off), the ABS function shuts voltage such as when the engine is jump
tire pressures are now above the down. However, the conventional started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
severe low pressure threshold, the brake system continues to oper- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
low tire pressure warning light ate normally. and does not indicate a malfunction.
should turn off a few minutes later. When the battery becomes fully charged,
Therefore, be sure to install the The ABS warning light illuminates to- the light will turn off.
specified size for the front and rear gether with the brake system warning light
tires. if the EBD system malfunctions. For & Vehicle Dynamics
further details of the EBD system mal- Control warning light/
function warning, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Dynamics Con-
& ABS warning light Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system trol operation indicator
warning” F3-25. light
CAUTION
NOTE
. If any of the following conditions If the warning light behavior is as ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
occur, we recommend that you shown in the following, the ABS sys- light
have the ABS system repaired at tem may be considered normal.
the first available opportunity by . The warning light illuminates when CAUTION
your SUBARU dealer. the ignition switch is turned to the
– The warning light does not “ON” position and turns off approxi- The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
illuminate when the ignition mately 2 seconds after the engine has tem provides its ABS control
switch is turned to the “ON” started. through the electrical circuit of the
position. . The warning light illuminates right ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
after the engine is started but turns off is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
– The warning light illuminates Control system becomes unable to
when the ignition switch is immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi- provide ABS control. As a result, the
turned to the “ON” position, Vehicle Dynamics Control system
but it does not turn off even nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off during driving. becomes inoperative, causing the
after starting the vehicle. warning light to illuminate. Although
. The warning light illuminates during
– The warning light illuminates both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
driving, but it turns off immediately and
during driving. and ABS systems are inoperative in
remains off.
. When the warning light is on (and this case, the ordinary functions of
When driving with an insufficient battery the brake system are still available.
the brake system warning light is

Black plate (157,1)
You will be safe while driving with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
this condition, but drive carefully may be considered normal. tion indicator light
and we recommend that you have . The warning light illuminates when The indicator light flashes during activa-
your vehicle checked at a SUBARU the ignition switch is turned to the tion of the skid suppression function and
dealer as soon as possible. “ON” position and turns off approxi- during activation of the traction control
mately 2 seconds after the engine has function. 3
started.
NOTE . The warning light illuminates right NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle after the engine is started but turns off . The light may remain illuminated for
Dynamics Control system itself mal- immediately and remains off. a short period of time after the engine
functions, the warning light only illumi- . The warning light illuminates after has been started, especially in cold
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock the engine has started and turns off weather. This does not indicate the
Brake System) remains fully opera- while the vehicle is subsequently being existence of a problem. The light
tional. driven. should turn off as soon as the engine
. The warning light illuminates when . The warning light illuminates during has warmed up.
the electronic control system of the driving, but turns off immediately and . The indicator light illuminates when
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system remains off. the engine has developed a malfunc-
malfunctions. . The warning light illuminates when tion and the malfunction indicator light/
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is the engine has stalled and continues to CHECK ENGINE warning light is on.
probably inoperative under any of the illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
following conditions. We recommend that probably malfunctioning under the follow-
you have your vehicle checked at a the vehicle starts moving.
ing condition. We recommend that you
SUBARU dealer immediately. have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU
. The warning light does not illuminate dealer as soon as possible.
when the ignition switch is turned to the . The light does not turn off even after
“ON” position. the lapse of several minutes (the engine
. The warning light illuminates while the has warmed up) after the engine has
vehicle is running. started.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)
& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/Traction mode ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
indicator light / dicator light
The indicator light shows the activated/deactivated conditions as follows. This light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is operated
Activated/deactivated status for each function to select the traction mode or the Vehicle
Vehicle Dynamics Dynamic Control OFF mode. For details,
Traction Control Control system ABS refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem” F7-34.
Turn off Activated Activated Activated NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for
a while after the engine has been
Indicator light started, especially in cold weather. This
Deactivated Activated Activated does not indicate the existence of a
problem. The light should turn off as
soon as the engine has warmed up.
Deactivated Deactivated Activated
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
For details about the Traction Control and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, refer to and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” F7-34. malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing conditions. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

Black plate (159,1)
. The light does not turn off even after vehicle towed to the nearest The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the lapse of several minutes (the engine SUBARU dealer for repair. the brake system warning light and ABS
has warmed up) after the engine has warning light illuminate simultaneously
started. This light has the following functions. during driving.
! Traction mode indicator light ! Brake fluid level warning
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
3
The light illuminates when the brake fluid
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed level has dropped to near the “MIN” level However, the rear wheels will be more
briefly to select the traction mode. For of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition prone to locking when the brakes are
details, refer to “Traction mode” F7-37. switch in the “ON” position and with the applied harder than usual and the vehi-
parking brake fully released. cle’s motion may therefore become some-
& Brake system warning what harder to control.
light (red) If the light should illuminate while driving
(with the parking brake fully released and If the brake system warning light and ABS
The light illuminates with the parking with the ignition switch positioned in warning light illuminate simultaneously,
brake applied while the ignition switch is “ON”), it could be an indication of leaking take the following steps.
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
parking brake is fully released. occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the flat place.
nearest safe place and check the brake 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
WARNING fluid level. For details, refer to “Brake fluid” parking brake, and then restart it.
F11-28. If the fluid level is below the 3. Release the parking brake. If both
. Driving with the brake system
“MIN” mark in the reservoir, do not drive warning lights turn off, the EBD system
warning light on is dangerous.
the vehicle. We recommend that you have may be malfunctioning.
This indicates your brake system
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU We recommend that you drive carefully to
may not be working properly. If
dealer for repair. For details, refer to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the light remains illuminated, we
“Towing” F9-13. system inspected.
recommend that you have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution 4. If both warning lights illuminate again
dealer immediately. (EBD) system warning and remain illuminated after the engine
. If at all in doubt about whether The brake system warning light also has been restarted, shut down the engine
the brakes are operating prop- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the again, apply the parking brake, and check
erly, do not drive the vehicle. We EBD system. In that event, it illuminates the brake fluid level. For details, refer to
recommend that you have your together with the ABS warning light. “Brake fluid” F11-28.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be NOTE WARNING

malfunctioning. We recommend that you This light does not turn off unless the
drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU tank is replenished up to an internal When the Hill start assist warning
dealer and have the system inspected. fuel quantity of approximately 17 liters light illuminates, we recommend
6. If the brake fluid level is below the (4.5 US gal, 3.7 Imp gal). that you have the vehicle inspected
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. at an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Instead, we recommend that you have the CAUTION
vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
dealer for repair. For details, refer to Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
“Towing” F9-13. ever the low fuel warning light While the Hill start assist system is
illuminates. Engine misfires as a deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
& Vacuum pump system result of an empty tank could cause indicator light illuminates continuously to
inform the driver that the Hill start assist
warning light (yellow) damage to the engine.
system is not operational.
(except STI)
This light illuminates when a malfunction & Windshield washer & Door open warning
is detected in the vacuum pump system. fluid warning indicator light
NOTE This indicator appears when the fluid level The warning light illuminates if any door or
in the windshield washer fluid tank de- the trunk lid is not fully closed. This
The vacuum pump system assists the
creases to the lower limit (approximately function is effective even if the ignition
boost pressure when driving at high
1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt). switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
altitudes while the engine is cold.
position, or the key is removed from the
& Low fuel warning light & Hill start assist warning ignition switch.
light/Hill start assist Always make sure this light is not illumi-
The low fuel warning light illuminates OFF indicator light nated before you start to drive.
when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi-
mately 9.0 liters (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp gal).
It only operates when the ignition switch is ! Hill start assist warning light
in the “ON” position. When this light While the engine is running, if there are
illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately. any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
system, the warning light will illuminate.

Black plate (161,1)
& All-Wheel Drive warn- & Power steering warn- . The steering wheel remains in the
ing light (if equipped) ing light (except STI) fully turned position for a long period
of time.
WARNING While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis-
Continued driving with the AWD been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is 3
warning light flashing can lead to ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering
powertrain damage. If the AWD force will be restored after the steering
warning light flashes, promptly park CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and
in a safe location and then check the power steering control system has
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
whether all four tires are the same
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a
diameter and whether any of the
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
tires has a puncture or has lost air
wheel is operated. We recommend assist limitation to occur too fre-
pressure for some other reason.
that you drive carefully to the near- quently, this may result in a malfunc-
est SUBARU dealer and have the tion of the power steering control
NOTE vehicle inspected immediately. system.
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of NOTE & Automatic headlight
the temporary spare tire should there- beam leveler warning
If the steering wheel is operated in the
fore be restricted to the minimum time light (models with LED
following ways, the power steering
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
control system may temporarily limit headlights)
the power assist in order to prevent the
soon as possible. This light illuminates when the automatic
system components, such as the con-
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven headlight beam leveler does not operate
trol computer and drive motor, from
with tires of different diameters fitted on its normally.
overheating.
wheels or with the air pressure exces- If this light illuminates while driving or does
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
sively low in any of its tires. not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
quently and turned sharply while the
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
position, we recommend that you have
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
ing the steering wheel during parallel
dealer.
parking.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)
& LED headlight warning When the warning chime sounds and/or NOTE
light (if equipped) the warning indicator appears, take the . Even when the access key is within
appropriate action. the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
This light illuminates if the LED headlights the access key warning for engine start
malfunction. We recommend that you WARNING may be provided depending on the
have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU status of the access key and the
dealer as soon as possible. Never drive the vehicle if the indi- environmental conditions.
cator on the push-button ignition . When the access key is taken out of
& Warning chimes and warning switch is flashing in green when the vehicle through an open window,
indicator of the keyless ac- starting the engine. This indicates the access key takeout warning or
cess with push-button start the status that the steering wheel is passenger access key takeout warning
not released and could result in an
system (if equipped) accident involving serious injury or
will not be provided.
death. ! List of warnings
CAUTION
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
. When starting the engine again occurs even if the access key warn-
after the operation indicator on ing indicator does not appear, take
the push-button ignition switch the appropriate action.
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. We recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer
Access key warning light as soon as possible.
The keyless access with push-button start . When the operation indicator on
system sounds a warning chime and the the push-button ignition switch
access key warning indicator appears on flashes in orange, we recom-
the combination meter in order to minimize mend that you contact a
improper operations and help protect your SUBARU dealer immediately.
vehicle from theft.

Black plate (163,1)
Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

chime chime on push-button igni- Status Action
tion switch
The driver’s door is opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
CVT models, when the select lever is in *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to 3
Ding, switch the push-button ignition switch to
ding ... — — the “P” position). “OFF”.
(intermittent)*
The push-button ignition switch is
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Take out the access key from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Short beep All doors are closed after the locking of *The doors cannot be locked while the
Ding (2 seconds) — all doors was set by using the door lock access key is inside the vehicle.
lever or power door locking switch while *A chirp sound will be heard, and all
the access key is inside the vehicle. doors will be unlocked.
Take out the access key from the trunk,
Trunk lockout warning: and close the trunk.
The trunk is closed with the access key *By pressing the trunk lid opener button
in it while all doors are locked (or during after this warning chime sounds, the
Short beep the automatic lock time period). trunk can be unlocked.
— (2 seconds) —
Access key lock-in warning: Take out the access key from the
The door lock sensor is touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” *If the access key is inside the vehicle,
and the access key is inside the vehicle. the doors cannot be locked.
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while Close the doors securely and lock them.
— Beep, beep ... — *If one of the doors is opened, the doors
(5 beeps) the push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position and another door or the cannot be locked.
trunk is opened.
*: if equipped
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (164,1)

tion switch
Power warning: Open the door and return the access key
The door lock sensor is touched while inside the vehicle, or switch the push-
Ding Long beep (60 — carrying the access key and the push- button ignition switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position *If the push-button ignition switch is not
other than “OFF” (in CVT models, when switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
the select lever is in the “P” position). locked.
Ding, ding ... Access key warning: Carry the access key, and drive the
(7 seconds) — — The vehicle is driven while the access vehicle.
key is not inside the vehicle.
Access key warning for engine start:
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch is Carry the access key, and press the
pressed while the access key is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle.
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
Beep, beep, beep access key and closed the driver’s door Switch the push-button ignition switch to
Ding (3 beeps) — while the push-button ignition switch is in “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
a position other than “OFF” (in CVT
models, when the select lever is in the
“P” position).
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
Beep, beep, beep A fellow passenger exited the vehicle Return the access key to inside the
Ding (3 beeps) — with the access key and closed a door vehicle, or switch the push-button igni-
other than the driver’s door while the tion switch to “OFF”.
push-button ignition switch is in a posi-
tion other than “OFF”.
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key and closed the driver’s door Shift the select lever to the “P” position
Long beep Long beep — while the push-button ignition switch is in (CVT models), switch the push-button
(continuous) (continuous) a position other than “OFF” (all models) ignition switch to “OFF” (all models) and
and the select lever is in a position other exit the vehicle.
than the “P” position (CVT models).

Black plate (165,1)

tion switch
Select lever position warning (CVT
models):
. Case 1: The driver’s door was
. Case 1: Shift the select lever to
the “P” position, switch the push-
3
opened while the push-button igni- button ignition switch to “OFF” and
Long beep tion switch is in a position other than exit the vehicle.
— — “OFF” and the select lever is in a
(continuous) . Case 2: Start the engine, shift
position other than the “P” position. the select lever to the “P” position,
. Case 2: The engine is turned off by switch the push-button ignition
pressing the push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
switch and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Ding — — The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.
While turning the steering wheel right
Ding — Flashes in green (15 Steering lock warning: and left lightly, depress the brake pedal
seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- and press the push-button ignition
formed, but the steering is still locked. switch.
System malfunction warning: We recommend that you contact a
Ding — Flashes in orange A malfunction was detected in the power SUBARU dealer immediately and have
system or steering lock. the vehicle inspected.
NOTE
The select lever position warning chime will not sound while the select lever is in the “R” position. In this case, an electronic
chirp will sound instead.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (166,1)
& Immobilizer indicator immobilizer system may be malfunction- – when the ignition switch is in the
light ing. We recommend that you contact your “ON” position
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
This light begins flashing under any of the . Even if a malfunction occurs, such
following conditions. In the event that an unauthorized key (for as the immobilizer indicator light
For models with “keyless access with example, an unauthorized duplicate) is flashes irregularly, it will not affect the
push-button start system”: used, the immobilizer indicator light illumi- functionality of the immobilizer system.
nates. For details about the immobilizer
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position. & SI-DRIVE indicator (if
. Immediately after the driver’s door is NOTE equipped)
opened or closed when all of the following . The immobilizer indicator light re-
conditions are met. mains off in the following conditions. It
– The push-button ignition switch is in means that the matching of the ID code
the “ON” or “ACC” position. is completed and the immobilizer sys-
– The access key is outside the tem is deactivated, and it does not
vehicle. indicate a malfunction.
– The engine is not running.
Models with “keyless access with
In the event that an unauthorized key is push-button start system”:
used (for example, the key is unregistered – while the engine is running
or the ID code does not match), the power – the push-button ignition switch
is not switched to “ON” and the immobi- has been turned to the “ON” or
lizer indicator light continues blinking. “ACC” position and the driver’s
For models without “keyless access door has not been opened or closed 1) Sport (S) mode
with push-button start system”: 2) Intelligent (I) mode
. Approximately 60 seconds after the Models without “keyless access 3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode
ignition switch is turned from the “ON” with push-button start system”:
– while the engine is running This indicator shows the current SI-DRIVE
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. mode.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out. – for approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-
If the indicator light does not blink in the from the “ON” position to the DRIVE” F7-25.
above conditions, it may indicate that “ACC” or “LOCK” position

Black plate (167,1)
& Shift-up indicator (STI & Select lever/gear position in- ! Gear shift indicator (if equipped)
without gear shift indi- dicator (if equipped) When shifting up is recommended for
cator models) good fuel economy, the upshift indicator
blinks. When shifting down is recom-
mended, the downshift indicator blinks.
3
NOTE
The gear shift indicator cannot be
deactivated.
& Turn signal indicator

lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
1) Upshift indicator If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
2) Downshift indicator rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
While driving, this indicator appears and 3) Select lever/gear position indicator out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
informs the driver about the upshift timing Refer to “Low beam headlight (models
for fuel-efficient driving. This indicator shows the position of the
shift lever (MT models)/select lever (CVT without LED headlights), position light
The shift-up indicator can be activated or models). (models without LED headlights) and front
deactivated. turn signal light” F11-49 or “Rear combi-
For CVT models with manual mode, when nation lights” F11-53.
Refer to “Gear Position Indicator Setting the manual mode is selected, the gear
(MT without gear shift indicator models)” position indicator (which shows the cur- & High beam indicator
F3-46. rent gear selection) and the upshift/down- light
shift indicator appear. Refer to “Selection
of manual mode” F7-22. This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (168,1)
& High Beam Assist in- commend that you have your vehi- “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
dicator light (green) (if cle inspected at a SUBARU dealer nate automatically (models with auto on/
equipped) as soon as possible. off headlights)
This light illuminates when the High Beam & Front fog light indicator
Assist function is activated. For details NOTE light (if equipped)
about the High Beam Assist function, refer If this indicator does not appear even
to “High Beam Assist function” F3-95. when you press the cruise control main This indicator light illuminates while the
button, the cruise control system may front fog lights are illuminated.
& High Beam Assist not operate properly. We recommend
warning indicator that you have your vehicle checked by & Rear fog light indicator
(yellow) (if equipped) your nearest SUBARU dealer. light (if equipped)
This warning indicator appears when the This indicator light illuminates while the
High Beam Assist function malfunctions. & Cruise control set in- rear fog light is illuminated.
When this warning indicator appears, we dicator
recommend that you have your vehicle & Driver’s control center differ-
This indicator appears when vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer. speed has been set to use the cruise
ential auto indicator (STI)
control function. For details, refer to “To
& Cruise control indica- set cruise control” F7-45.
tor
This indicator appears when the cruise & Headlight indicator
control main button is pressed to activate light
the cruise control function. For details, This indicator light illuminates under the
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-45. following conditions.
CAUTION . When the light control switch is turned
to the “ ” or “ ” position (except
If the malfunction indicator light Australia models)
(Check Engine light) illuminates, . When the light control switch is in the
the cruise control indicator flashes “ ” or “ ” position (Australia models)
at the same time. At this time, avoid . When the light control switch is in the This indicator functions while the ignition
driving at high speed and we re- switch is “ON”. When it appears, it

Black plate (169,1)
indicates that the driver’s control center & Driver’s control center differ- ! Warning indicator
differential is set to the auto mode. It ential indicator and warning
disappears when the driver’s control (STI)
center differential is set to the manual
mode. For details, refer to “Driver’s Con- ! Indicator
trol Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) 3
(STI)” F7-15.
! Driver’s control center dif-
ferential auto [+] indicator
(STI)
When the AUTO [+] mode is set, the
AUTO [+] indicator appears.
For details, refer to “Driver’s Control
Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)” All the indicators will flash in the event that
F7-15. the driver’s control center differential has a
! Driver’s control center dif- malfunction. We recommend that you
ferential auto [−] indicator have the vehicle inspected by your
(STI) When you select the manual mode of the SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to
driver’s control center differential, the “Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.
When the AUTO [−] mode is set, the initial limited slip differential (LSD) torque DIFF/DCCD) (STI)” F7-15.
AUTO [−] indicator appears. that is currently selected for the center If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle (for
For details, refer to “Driver’s Control differential is indicated by these indicators. example, when the rear differential oil
Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)”
temperature warning light illuminates), all
F7-15.
of the indicators may disappear and the
setting value for the initial limited slip
differential (LSD) torque of the driver’s
control center differential (DCCD) may be
canceled. However, it does not indicate a
malfunction of the DCCD itself.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)
3-36 Instruments and controls/Multi information display
& REV indicator light Multi information display

(STI)
This indicator light illuminates when the WARNING
engine speed reaches the level that was
previously set. This indicator light also Always pay adequate attention to
flashes when the tachometer needle en- safe driving when operating the
ters the red zone. For details, refer to multi information display while the
“REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)” F3- vehicle is in motion. When operation
13. of the multi information display
interferes with your ability to con-
& SUBARU Rear Vehicle centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
Detection warning indi- before performing operations on the
cator (if equipped) screen. Also, do not concentrate on
This warning indicator appears when the the display while driving. Doing so
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) may cause you to look away from
is malfunctioning. When this indicator the road and could result in an
appears, have your vehicle inspected by accident.
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Various information will be shown on the
& SUBARU Rear Vehicle multi information display. Also, a warning
message will appear on the display if a
Detection OFF indicator malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
(if equipped) several settings for the displayed content
The indicator appears when the SRVD can be performed.
OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Multi information display
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD). 1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-
For details, refer to “SRVD OFF switch” 12.)
F7-55. 2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” F3-38.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-43.)
3) Cruise control information display/DCCD
indicator

Black plate (171,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi information display 3-37

4) Warning indicator toward you. & Welcome screen
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator”
F3-33.) & Basic operation
6) SI-DRIVE indicator (refer to “SI-DRIVE By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
indicator” F3-32.) switch, the screens and selection items
7) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-10.)/ can be switched. When the “ /SET” 3
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
meter” F3-10.)/the settings of TPMS switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen. When the door is unlocked, and the
driver’s door is opened and then closed,
the welcome screen will appear for ap-
proximately 20 seconds.
NOTE
. Once the welcome screen appears,
Control switch it takes a certain period of time to
1) Up (select)
display it again.
2) /SET (enter)
. The welcome screen will disappear
3) Down (select)
when the ignition switch is turned to
The warning screen will return to the the “ON” position while the welcome
original screen after a few seconds. While screen is displayed.
the “ ” information reminder is on the . If any of the doors (including the
display, it may be possible to display the trunk lid) is opened while the welcome
warning screen again. To recall the mes- screen is displayed, the door ajar
sage marked with “ ” on the display, pull warning will appear.
the “ /SET” switch on the steering wheel . The welcome screen can be set to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (172,1)
on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome & Warning screen

Good-bye Screen” F3-46.
& Good-bye screen
Example of warning
If a warning or a malfunction is detected, a
message will appear. Take the appropriate
If the ignition switch is turned to the actions based on the messages indicated.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the “Good-bye”
screen will appear for approximately 3
seconds.

Black plate (173,1)
! Items of display message (for warning message)
Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page
Driver’s seatbelt warning Red 3-14

3
SRS airbag system malfunction warning Red 1-65, 3-17
Engine warning Yellow 3-18
Coolant temperature high warning Red 3-12, 9-12
Engine low oil level warning (except STI) Yellow 3-19
Transmission fluid temperature high warning (CVT models) Red 3-19
Transmission control system malfunction warning (CVT models) Yellow 3-19
Low tire pressure warning (if equipped) Yellow 3-20
TPMS system malfunction warning (if equipped) Yellow 3-20
ABS system malfunction warning Yellow 3-22
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (174,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction warning Yellow 3-22
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection system halt or warning indicator Yellow 3-36
(if equipped)
Parking brake applied warning Red 3-25
Electronic Brake Force Distribution system malfunction warning Red 3-25
Brake fluid level warning Red 3-25
Low fuel warning Yellow 3-26
Windshield washer fluid level warning Yellow 3-26
Hill start assist system malfunction warning Yellow 3-26
Door/trunk lid open warning — 3-26
AWD system malfunction warning (if equipped) Yellow 3-27
Electric power steering system malfunction warning (except STI) Red 3-27

Black plate (175,1)
Automatic headlight beam leveler system malfunction warning Yellow 3-27

(models with LED headlights)
LED low beam headlight system malfunction warning (if equipped) Yellow 3-28 3
High Beam Assist warning indicator (if equipped) Yellow 3-34
The keyless access with push-button start system malfunction — —

warning*
Low battery warning of the access key* — 3-28
Driver’s control center differential system malfunction warning Yellow 3-35
Deactivation of switching SI-DRIVE mode — 7-25
*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (176,1)
! Items of display message (for operation and vehicle condition)

Deactivation of the selection of the SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#) — — 7-25
mode when the engine is cold
Pedal operation for starting engine — 7-9
Select lever into “P” operation — —
Access key warning* (The vehicle was driven while the access key — 3-28
is not inside the vehicle.)
Push-button ignition switch without “OFF” warning* — — 3-28
Access key lock-in warning* — 3-28
Emergency operation of push-button ignition switch* — 9-17
Release operation for steering lock* — 3-28
Power save function operation* — — 2-14

Key in the ignition switch reminder (if equipped) — — 3-5
Headlights ON warning — — 3-92
*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system

Black plate (177,1)
& Basic screens Journey time screen: SI-DRIVE mode screen:
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
Default screen: 3
This screen displays the journey time (the This screen indicates the current SI-DRIVE
time that has elapsed since the ignition switch mode with its throttle angle.
was turned to the “ON” position).
Menu screen entering screen:
Digital speedometer:
While this screen is selected, pull and hold the

“ /SET” switch to enter the menu screen.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)
& Menu screens

Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter
the menu screens when all of the following
conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position
(CVT models).
. The shift lever is in the neutral position
(MT models).
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.

Black plate (179,1)
The menu list is as follows.

Top menu Menu option Possible settings Initial settings
Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen On or Off On
Gauge Initial Movement On or Off On
3
Gear Position Indicator Setting (MT On or Off On
without gear shift indicator models)
Languages Select the display language. The default language settings vary
depending on individual countries.
REV settings (STI) REV Indicator Light On or Off Off
REV Alarm Level Engine Speed 2000 rpm - RED ZONE 2000 rpm
REV Buzzer On or Off Off
SRVD (if equipped) Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min/Off Mid
Default Settings ― Yes or No ―
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the activate display of the shift position in- ! SRVD (Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-
steering wheel, you can select the menu. dicator or “Off” to deactivate it. tion) (if equipped)
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the After entering the “SRVD” menu, select
selected menu. ! Languages the “Warning Volume” menu. You can set
Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch on the the volume of the warning buzzer for
NOTE steering wheel to display the preferred RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You can
If you enter the “Return” menu, the language. Then pull the “ /SET” switch to select “Max”, “Mid”, “Min” or “Off”.
system will return to the previous select the displayed language. ! Default Settings
screen. ! REV settings (STI) Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
! Screen Settings NOTE restore customized settings to the factory
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu, If the setting of the REV Indicator Light default settings. Select “No” to return to
select one of the following menus. is “Off”, the setting menus of the REV the previous screen without restoring to
Alarm Level Engine Speed and the REV the factory default settings.
! Welcome Good-bye Screen Buzzer are not displayed.
The welcome screen/good-bye screens After entering the “REV settings” menu,
can be activated or deactivated. Select select any of the following menus.
“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off”
to deactivate the screens. ! REV Indicator Light
! Gauge Initial Movement Display of the REV indicator light can be
activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
The movement of the meter needles and activate display of the REV indicator light
gauge needles that occurs when the or “Off” to deactivate it.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated. ! REV Alarm Level Engine Speed
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to The alarm-level engine speed can be set
deactivate. (in 100 rpm steps) within the range from
! Gear Position Indicator Setting 2,000 rpm to red zone.
(MT without gear shift indicator ! REV Buzzer
models)
REV buzzer can be activated or deacti-
Display of the shift position indicator can vated. Select “On” to activate the REV
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to buzzer or “Off” to deactivate it.

Black plate (181,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi function display 3-47
Multi function display The multi function display has the follow-
ing functions.
WARNING Description Page

Displays useful messages, such
Always pay adequate attention to as warning information, etc. 3-50
3
safe driving when operating the Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel
consumption screen, etc.) 3-51
multi function display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation Sets and adjusts maintenance
of the multi function display is notification 3-80
disturbing your awareness and abil- Registers driving history 3-84
ity to concentrate on driving, stop
the vehicle in a safe place before Sets and customizes car opera- 3-85
tion
performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate Also, the multi function display can also be
on the display while driving. Doing used to set and initialize the multi function
so may cause you to look away from display itself.
the road and could result in an
accident. NOTE
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual images may vary depending on
the destinations and specifications.
. For models equipped with the Side
View Monitor system, the button
is used as the button for operating Multi function display
the multi function display. 1) Outside temperature indicator
2) Top display (For the display setting, refer
to “Top display setting” F3-72.)
3) Clock
4) Driving information display (For the dis-
played contents, refer to “Basic screens”
F3-51.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (182,1)
3-48 Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Basic operation & Welcome screen & Date screen

When the door is unlocked and the If you have set the date and time in the
driver’s door is closed, the welcome selection screen, after the welcome
screen will appear for a short time. screen is displayed, the current date will
be displayed for a certain period of time. If
“On/Off setting” is set to “On” in the
“Maintenance settings”, the date will be
displayed after the self-check screen.
! Birthday/anniversary screen
Control switch (may vary according to

model)
1) Up (select)
2) ENTER (push)
3) Down (select) NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
when the ignition switch is turned to
switch, the screens and selection items
the “ON” position while the welcome
can be switched. When the button is
screen is displayed.
pushed, the item can be selected and set.
. The welcome screen can be set to Example of notification on an anniversary
on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass If you have set a birthday or anniversary,
screen setting” F3-77. after the date screen is displayed, the
. For a certain period of time after the notification (reminder) will be displayed for
welcome screen has once appeared, it a certain period of time from 7 days prior
may not appear again even when the to the set date.
driver’s door is closed again. This does
not indicate a malfunction.

Black plate (183,1)

NOTE & Self-check screen
. Displaying the birthday/anniversary When the ignition switch is turned to the
screen can be set to on or off. Refer to “ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
“Bypass screen setting” F3-77. be performed. The screens corresponding
. Up to five items can be set for to the following items will appear one after
birthdays and anniversaries respec- another for several seconds each. 3
tively. Refer to “Selection screen” F3-
57.
& Ending screen

If “Eco Summary” is set to “On” in the
“Bypass screen setting”, the “Fuel con-
sumption results screen” will be displayed Fuel consumption results screen
before the screen turns off when the 1) The average fuel consumption for the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/ entire driving distance, from when the
“OFF” position. ignition switch was turned to the “ON”
position to when it was turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
2) This display shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter
was last reset. It displays the average 1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine
fuel consumption corresponding to the A oil replacement.
trip meter mileage or the one corre- 2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
sponding to the B trip meter mileage. replacement.
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the
interval of inspection and maintenance.
When the checks are performed, the color
of the icon corresponding to the checked
item will turn green.
If there is no warning message, the self-
check will be completed without notifica-
tion.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (184,1)
following conditions. & Interruption screen

– The period of time remaining Useful messages, such as reminder in-
until the registered notification date formation, vehicle information, warning
is 15 days or less. information, etc. may interrupt the current
– The total driving distance remain- screen and appear on the display accom-
ing until the registered notification panied by a beep. Take proper action
distance is approximately 500 km according to the message.
(311 miles) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
Example of notification days or more.
If there is a warning message or a – The total distance driven after the
maintenance notification, the color of the registered notification distance is
icon corresponding to the item will turn approximately 500 km (311 miles) or
yellow and the warning message or the more.
maintenance notification will be displayed.
Take the appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated. The warning screen will return to the
NOTE original screen after a few seconds.
. The self-check screen can be set to
on or off. The default setting is off. For
details, refer to “On/Off setting” F3-82.
. After performing the maintenance,
change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” F3-80.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the

Black plate (185,1)
& Basic screens ! Information bar

These are the basic screens of the multi
function display.
Item Page
Information bar 3-51
3
Boost pressure + accelerator 3-52
opening ratio screen
Fuel consumption screen 3-53
ECO history screen 3-53
Vehicle activation status 3-54
screen
Icy road surface warning screen
Triple meter screen 3-55
1) Information bar When the outside temperature becomes
Guidance screen 3-55 2) Outside temperature indicator 38C (378F) or less, the icy road surface
Clock/calendar screen 3-56 3) Top display warning screen interrupts to inform the
4) Clock driver that the road surface may be frozen.
By operating the “ ” or “ ” of the control While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
switch, you can switch the screen that is NOTE
“ON” position, the outside temperature
always displayed. Also, when the . The outside temperature indicator
indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the
button is pushed and held, the selection shows the temperature around the
information bar.
screen can be displayed. For details about sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
the selection screen, refer to “Selection ! Outside temperature indicator dication may differ from the actual
screen” F3-57. This displays the outside temperature outside air temperature.
between −408C (−408F) and 508C . The icy road surface warning screen
(1228F). should be treated only as a guide. Be
sure to check the condition of the road
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
screen is displayed, it will not be
displayed again unless the outside
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (186,1)
temperature has increased to 58C ! Clock ! Boost pressure + accelerator

(418F) or higher. The clock can be displayed in either 12- opening ratio screen
! Top display hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to “Current date
One of the following items can be dis- and time setting” F3-61.
played on the top display.
. Average fuel consumption correspond- NOTE
ing to the driving distance of each trip If the vehicle battery is disconnected,
meter the clock shown in the information bar
. Current fuel consumption (This may will be reset. Set the time again after
not be displayed when driving at a low the vehicle battery is connected. For
speed.) details about the setting, refer to “Top
. Driving range on remaining fuel display setting” F3-72.
For details about the setting of the top
display, refer to “Top display setting” F3- 1) Boost pressure (digital display)
72. 2) Boost pressure (analog display)
3) Accelerator opening ratio (digital display)
NOTE 4) Accelerator opening ratio (analog dis-
The driving range on the remaining fuel play)
is calculated using the average fuel 5) The peak value of the boost pressure
consumption of the last 30 km (19 (digital display)
miles) driven. This value may be differ- 6) The peak value of the boost pressure
(analog display)
ent from the values calculated using
the average fuel consumption corre- This screen displays the boost pressure,
sponding to the driving distance of the accelerator opening ratio and the peak
each trip meter or the current fuel value of the boost pressure in both digital
consumption. and analog format. The peak value of the
boost pressure is also stored if the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.

Black plate (187,1)
! The peak value of the boost ! Fuel consumption screen ! ECO history screen
pressure resetting
Pressing the button in the “Boost
pressure + accelerator opening ratio
screen” moves to a screen where you
can reset the peak value of the boost 3
pressure.
1) Average fuel consumption corresponding 1) Average fuel consumption per unit time
to the driving distance of each trip meter (bar graph)
2) Current fuel consumption 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
3) Driving range on remaining fuel to the driving distance of each trip meter
(red line)
The displayed location can be custo-
mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump- This screen displays the fuel economy
tion screen setting” F3-73. history for the vehicle using a bar graph.
To reset the peak value, select “Yes”. If
you select “No”, the current peak value is The horizontal scale represents the past
still kept. time range and the vertical scale repre-
sents the fuel consumption. The green
bars show driving with good fuel economy
and the yellow bars show driving with poor
fuel economy.
The time range of the history can be set.
The width of the bar graph is adjusted as
follows depending on the set time range.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (188,1)
Time range Width of bar graph

30 minutes 1 minute
60 minutes 2 minutes
120 minutes 4 minutes
For details about the setting, refer to

“Economy history setting” F3-74.
! Vehicle activation status screen
When the vehicle is being driven regularly When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
1) Power train tem activates, the tires illuminate in yellow
and the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
operating indicator flashes.
1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-
ating indicator (flashing in yellow)
3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
When the vehicle stops

1) Steering axle
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem starts to activate, the tires illuminate in
yellow.
1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation

Black plate (189,1)
! Triple meter screen Item Details

! Guidance screen
Average vehicle speed (Average
vehicle speed for the entire driving
time from when the trip meter was
reset)
Lifetime fuel consumption
3
Engine oil temperature (except
STI)
Accelerator opening ratio
Journey distance (the distance

that has been driven since the
Triple meter screen (display example) ignition switch was turned to the When the button is pushed and held,
“ON” position)
This screen displays up to three optional the selection screen can be displayed.
pieces of information that can be selected Average fuel consumption for the The displayed contents can be set or
entire driving distance from when
from the following items. the ignition switch was turned to customized from the selection screen. For
The items shown in the triple meter screen the “ON” position details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-57.
can be changed. For details, refer to
“Triple meter setting” F3-75. Boost pressure
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (190,1)
! Clock/calendar/screen OFF
Calendar
Clock (type A) 1) Today’s date
2) Birthday/Anniversary/Scheduled mainte-
nance date
In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-
side temperature and average fuel con-
sumption can also be displayed.
You can select clock (type A), clock (type
B) or calendar. The clock/calendar can
also be set so that it is not displayed. For
details, refer to “Clock/calendar screen
setting” F3-76.
Clock (type B)

Black plate (191,1)
& Selection screen

When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating
the “ ” or “ ” switch.
Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page

Time/Date
3
Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 1/1/20XX 12 h 3-61
13:00
Birthday Set a birthday. (max. 5) — 3-62
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. (max. 5) — 3-64
Daylight Saving Time Set the day light saving time. Summer or Winter Winter 3-67
Delivery Date (Austra- Set a delivery date — 3-68
lia models)
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Display Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −5 0 3-69
Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off Off 3-70
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off High 3-70
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (192,1)

Screen Set and customize the top display information Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range
Setting Top Display contents. or Off Avg Cons 3-72
Upper part: Fuel

Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. consumption, 3-73
lower part: Driving
range
Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 30 min 3-74
consumption history.
Left: Lifetime fuel
consumption
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. Center: Average 3-75
fuel consumption
Right: Accelerator
opening ratio
Clock Select the clock format. Type A clock, Type B clock, Analog clock 3-76
Calendar or Off
Welcome screen:
On
Eco Summary: Off
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off Birthday Remin- 3-77
der: On
Anniversary Re-
minder: On
The default lan-
guage settings
Languages Select the display language. vary depending 3-78
on individual
countries.
Side View Monitor (if Set the reverse interlock function. On or Off On 3-79
equipped)

Black plate (193,1)

Mainte- Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. The default va- 3-80
nance lues for the main-
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. tenance settings 3-82
vary depending
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date.
on individual
3-82 3
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. countries. 3-82
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
On/Off activated when the ignition switch is turned to On or Off Off 3-82
the “ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all items to the factory default settings. Yes or No — 3-83
Driving Set Register and overwrite the driving record. — 3-84
History
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (194,1)

Car Hazard Warning
Setting Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off On 3-85
Security Relocking*1 Set and customize the automatic locking 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 seconds or 30 seconds 3-86
operation period. off
Defogger Set and customize the operation of the 15 minutes or Continuous 15 minutes 3-87
defogger.
Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 30 seconds 3-88
timer.
Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No — 3-90
Lifetime Fuel Cons Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No — 3-91
Reset
Go Back — Return to the top menu. —
*1: If equipped

Black plate (195,1)
& Date and time settings

The items in the date and time settings
can be set. To change the items, operate
the “ ” or “ ” switch.
NOTE 3
. The “Time/Date” item must be set to
display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary”
and notifications for vehicle mainte-
nance.
. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”
items can be entered after the “Time/
Date” item has been set.
. Dates that do not exist in the 3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Time/Date” item, and then push
example, April 31). “Time/Date” item. Then, push the the button.
button.
! Preparation for date setting
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” ! Current date and time setting
position. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
2. Push and hold the button to show ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
the selection screen. 61.
3. Select the item to set by operating the

“ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (196,1)
5. After entering the date and time, select

“Set” by operating the “ ” switch and
confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
4. Select a number by operating the “ ” 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

or “ ” switch, and then push the select the “Birthday” item, and then push
button. When “12 h” is selected, the clock the button.
is set to a 12-hour display. When “24 h” is
selected, the clock is set to a 24-hour 6. The system will notify you that the
display. setting is complete.
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
61.
3. Select an entry in the list to set by

operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then
push the button.

Black plate (197,1)
English alphabet (upper case charac-

ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline. 3
4. The selected item will be shown. Push 6. After entering the date by repeating
the button to set the selected item. step 5, you can enter the name.
8. After entering the name by repeating

step 7, select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the button.
5. Select numbers by operating the “ ” 7. Select characters by operating the

or “ ” switch, and then push the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button. button.
– You can select characters of the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (198,1)
be deactivated.
! Anniversary setting
61.
9. The system will notify you that the From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday
setting is complete.
If a birthday is approaching, the following

screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position. This function 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
can be set to on or off. For details, refer to select the “Anniversary” item, and then
“Bypass screen setting” F3-77. push the button.
On a birthday
NOTE
If “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the birthday notification will

Black plate (199,1)
3. Select an entry in the list to set by 5. Select numbers by operating the “ ” 7. Select characters by operating the
operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then or “ ” switch, and then push the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
push the button. button. button.
– You can select characters of the
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
4. The selected item will be shown. Push 6. After entering the date by repeating
the button to set the selected item. step 5, you can enter the name.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (200,1)
If an anniversary is approaching, the

following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off. For details,
refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-77.
8. After entering the name by repeating On an anniversary

step 7, select “Set” by operating the “ ” NOTE
switch and confirm the setting by pushing If “_ _” is selected for either the
the button. “Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the anniversary notification
From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary will be deactivated.
! Clearing birthday or anniversary
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-61
and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on
the screen.
2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-
sary.
3. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,
the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary”
9. The system will notify you that the will be cleared.

Black plate (201,1)

! Daylight saving time setting
61.
3. The current setting will be displayed. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

Push the button to enter the selection switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
mode. the button.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Day Light Saving Time” item,
and then push the button.
4. Select “Summer” or “Winter” by oper- 6. The system will notify you that the
ating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then setting is complete.
push the button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (202,1)
! Delivery date setting (Australia

models)
61.

Push the button to enter the setting switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
mode. the button.

select the “Delivery Setting” item, and then
push the button.
4. Select a number by operating the “ ” 6. The system will notify you that the
or “ ” switch, and then push the setting is complete.
button.

Black plate (203,1)
& Image quality and volume ! Contrast setting

settings 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
The items in the image quality and volume ing to “Preparation for image quality and
settings can be set. To change the items, volume settings” F3-69.
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch.
3
! Preparation for image quality and
volume settings
position.
2. Push and hold the button to show
the selection screen.
When you turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position on the set delivery date, a
special welcome message will be dis-
played only on that vehicle delivery date. It
is displayed every time you turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position that 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
day. select the “Contrast” item, and then push
the button.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
“Display” item. Then, push the button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (204,1)
3. Select a contrast level by operating the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. The screen will be turned off.
“ ” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting select the “Screen OFF” item, and then
by pushing the button. push the button. Restoring the screen
When the “ ”, “ ” or button is
! Screen OFF setting pushed after the ignition switch is turned
1. Perform the preparation steps accord- to the “ON” position, the screen will be
ing to “Preparation for image quality and restored. The screen will be restored with
volume settings” F3-69. the basic screen that was displayed when
the screen was turned off. While the
screen is off, a warning message will be
displayed if necessary, but other screens
will not be displayed.
! Beep volume setting
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
3. Push the button once more. volume settings” F3-69.

Black plate (205,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Beep” item, and then push the “ ” switch, and then push the button. setting is complete.
button.
& Screen settings
The items in the screen settings can be
set. To change the items, operate the “ ”
or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
! Preparation for screen settings
position.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

3. Push the button. switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (206,1)
3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Top Display” item, and then “ ” switch, and then push the button.
“Screen Setting” item. Then, push the push the button.
button.
! Top display setting

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.

3. Push the button once more. switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the button.

Black plate (207,1)
6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the displayed configuration by
setting is complete. select the “Cons” item, and then push the operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then
button. push the button.
! Fuel consumption screen setting
F3-71.
3. Push the button once more. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (208,1)
6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the time of the logged fuel
setting is complete. select the “Eco History” item, and then consumption history by operating the
push the button. “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
! Economy history setting button.
F3-71.
3. Push the button once more.

5. Select “Go Back” by operating “ ”
switch.

Black plate (209,1)

! Triple meter setting
F3-71.
6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Select the setting location (left, center
switch and confirm the setting by pushing or right) by operating the “ ” or “ ”
the button. switch, and then push the button.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to NOTE

select the “Triple Meter” item, and then The same item cannot be selected for
push the button. the left, center or right location.
7. The system will notify you that the

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (210,1)

the button.
4. Select the preferred item by operating 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the select the “Clock” item, and then push the
button. 6. The system will notify you that the button.
If you also want to change the setting for setting is complete.
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
! Clock/calendar screen setting
F3-71.
3. Push the button once more.

Black plate (211,1)
4. Select “Type A clock”, “Type B clock”, 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
“Calendar” or “OFF” by operating the “ ” setting is complete. select the “Bypass Screen” item, and then
switch and then push the button. push the button.
! Bypass screen setting
F3-71.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Select the item to set by operating the
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
the button. button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (212,1)
“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by

pushing the button.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

“ ” or “ ” switch, and push the select the “Languages” item, and then
button. 6. The system will notify you that the push the button.
If you want to change setting for another setting is complete.
item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
! Language setting
F3-71.
3. The current language setting will be

displayed. Push the button to enter
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or the language selection mode.

Black plate (213,1)
4. Select the preferred language by 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then setting is complete. select the “Side View Monitor” item, and
push the button. then push the button.
! Side View Monitor function setting
(if equipped)
You can select “On” or “Off” of a function
that enables the multi function display to
be switched automatically to the Side
View Monitor display when the shift lever
(MT models) or select lever (CVT models)
is set to the “R” position.
F3-71.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Push the button.

the button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (214,1)
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the 3. After the selection screen is displayed,
“ ” switch, and then push the setting is complete. operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
button. “Maintenance” item. Then, push the
& Maintenance settings button.
The items in the maintenance settings can
! Engine oil setting
be set. To change the items, operate the
“ ” or “ ” switch. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
! Preparation for maintenance settings” F3-80.
tings
position.

the button.

Black plate (215,1)
“ ” switch and confirm the setting by

pushing the button.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

select the “Engine Oil” item, and then push or “ ” switch, and then push the
the button. button. 6. The system will notify you that the
If you also want to change the setting for setting is complete.
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE
. The notification will be displayed
with information of both date and
distance or either date or distance in
accordance with the setting.
. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication will be deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system will display
3. Select the setting location (month, day, “_ _” on the screen.
year or distance) by operating the “ ” or . When the distance announcement
“ ” switch, and then push the button. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or reaches 0 km, the display will show
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)
“0000” for the next 500 km (311 miles).

After exceeding 500 km (311 miles), “_
_ _ _” will be displayed.
! Oil filter setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-80, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-80, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
! Maintenance schedule setting 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
The setting procedure is the same as select the “On/Off” item, and then push the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
“Engine oil setting” F3-80, but select the button. button.
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
tings” F3-80.

mode. the button.

Black plate (217,1)
operating the “ ” switch.
6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
setting is complete. select the “Clear All Settings” item, and 4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
then push the button. button.
! Clear setting
tings” F3-80.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No 5. The system will notify you that the
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To clear setting is complete.
all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (218,1)
& Driving history registration

The items in the driving history can be
registered. To change the items, operate
the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
position.
4. Push the button once more to 6. Select one of the registration lines by
enter the setting mode. operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then
push the button.

“Driving History” item. Then, push the
button.
5. The system will notify you of the place

to be selected for approximately 2 sec- 7. To overwrite the previous registration,
onds. push the button. When registration is
performed the first time, it will be regis-

Black plate (219,1)
tered directly without a notification. ! Hazard warning flasher setting 3. The current setting will be displayed.
8. The system will notify you that the 1. Perform the preparation steps accord- Push the button to enter the selection
registration is complete. ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85. mode.
& Car settings

The items in the car settings can be set.
3
To change the items, operate the “ ” or
“ ” switch, and then push the button.
! Preparation for car settings
position.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item, “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push the
and then push the button. button.

“Car Setting” item. Then, push the
button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (220,1)
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” then push the button.

the button.
! Security Relocking
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the button to enter the selection
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.
6. The system will notify you that the mode.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
select the “Security Relocking” item, and
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push

Black plate (221,1)
the button. If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” select the “Defogger” item, and then push
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.
the button.
! Defogger setting
3. The current setting will be displayed.

6. The system will notify you that the Push the button to enter the selection
setting is complete. mode.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (222,1)
! Interior light off delay timer setting

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push setting is complete.
the button. If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
perform the setting procedure again. select the “Interior Light” item, and then
push the button.

the button.

Black plate (223,1)

mode. the button.
& Initialize
Items that have been set to your pre-
4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the ference can be initialized. To select an
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then push setting is complete. initialization menu, operate the “ ” or “ ”
the button. switch as follows.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case, ! Preparation for initialization
perform the setting procedure again. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (224,1)
by operating the “ ” switch.
3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Reset to Defaults” item, and 4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
“Initialize” item. Then, push the button. then push the button. button.
! Reset to factory default settings

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
89.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No 5. The system will notify you that the
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return setting is complete.
to the factory default settings, select “Yes”

Black plate (225,1)

! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting
ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
89.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No 5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If

dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset you are sure you want to proceed, select
the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes” “Yes” by operating the “ ” switch.
by operating the “ ” switch.
select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption
Resetting” item, and then push the
button.
6. Confirm the setting again by pushing

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the the button.
button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (226,1)
3-92 Instruments and controls/Light control switch
Light control switch Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
CAUTION the ignition switch.
. Use of any lights for a long period NOTE
of time while the engine is not The light control switch can be oper-
running can cause the battery to ated (except auto on/off headlights),
discharge. even under the following conditions.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make . when the key is not inserted into the
sure that the light control switch ignition switch (models without “key-
is turned to the off position. If the less access with push-button start
vehicle is left unattended for a system”)
7. The system will notify you that the long time with the light control . when the push-button ignition
setting is complete. switch set to a position other switch is turned off (models with “key-
than the off position, the battery less access with push-button start
may be discharged. system”)
Models with “keyless access with If the driver’s door is opened while the
push-button start system”: headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, the chirp sound will inform
The light control switch operates when the
the driver that the lights are illumi-
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
nated.
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Black plate (227,1)
Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-93
& Headlights Auto position: auto on/off headlights (if

equipped):
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the headlights, front position
lights, tail lights and license plate lights
are automatically on or off depending on 3
the level of the ambient light.
Off position:
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
Australia models lights can be changed by your
1) Second position SUBARU dealer. We recommend that
Except Australia models
2) First position you contact your SUBARU dealer for
1) Second position
2) First position
3) Auto position (if equipped) details.
4) Off position
3) Auto position (if equipped)
4) Off position To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
Second position:
Headlights, front position lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are on.
First position:
Front position lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (228,1)
! Headlight off delay setting illuminate as follows. ! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
The headlight off delay function turns on . Illuminates for 30 seconds after the lights (rain light sensor) (if
the headlights, etc. for smooth exiting from driver’s door is closed. equipped)
the vehicle at night or in a dark place. . Illuminates until you press the lock
button on the access key/transmitter two
NOTE times successively.
The factory setting (default setting) of . Illuminates until you touch the door lock
the operation duration of the headlights sensor on the door handle two times
and the exterior lights is 30 seconds. successively (models with “keyless ac-
This setting can be changed to OFF (no cess with push-button start system”).
operation), 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or
90 seconds at SUBARU dealers. For NOTE
more details, we recommend that you . While the headlight off delay func-
contact a SUBARU dealer. tion is operating, if you perform any of
the following operations, the head-
lights and exterior lights will turn off.
– Turn the ignition switch to the The sensor is on the windshield glass as
“ON” position. shown in the illustration.
– Pull the turn signal lever toward
you. CAUTION
– Set the light control switch to a
position other than the “AUTO” (if If any object is attached on or near
equipped) or “OFF” position. the sensor, the sensor may not
detect the level of ambient light
. If the driver’s door is not opened
correctly and the auto on/off head-
and closed, these lights will turn off in 3
lights may not operate properly.
minutes.
When the ignition switch is turned off and

the light control switch is in the “AUTO” (if
equipped) or “OFF” position, if you pull the
turn signal lever toward you, the headlight
low beams and some exterior lights will

Black plate (229,1)
& High/low beam change headlight mode manually if necessary. mirror and camera.
(dimmer) . Observe the following points in – Do not carry excessive luggage.
order to operate the High Beam Assist – Do not modify the vehicle.
function properly. – Always replace the windshield
glass with genuine SUBARU parts
(or equivalent products). 3
To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high – Do not attach labels or stickers to
beam indicator light “ ” on the combina- the windshield glass near the cam-
tion meter is also on. era. 1) Camera for High Beam Assist function
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever – Do not attach any accessories
near the inside mirror and camera. The high beam assist function automati-
back to the center position. cally changes the headlight from high
– Do not place any objects over the
beam to low beam (or vice versa). When
& High Beam Assist function (if dashboard.
all of the following conditions are met, the
equipped) – Do not touch the lens of the
headlight will change to high beam.
camera.
NOTE . When the vehicle speed increases to
– Do not touch the camera.
. Do not overestimate the capacity of or above the preset level.
– Do not apply any strong impact
the High Beam Assist function. The to the camera or the inside mirror. . There is no preceding vehicle.
driver always has the responsibility to – Do not disassemble the camera . The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
understand the surrounding situation, and inside mirror.
to drive safely, and to change the When any of the following conditions is
– Do not spill liquid on the inside
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (230,1)
met, the headlight will change to low ! How to use the High Beam Assist Malfunction of the High Beam Assist
beam. function function:
. When the vehicle speed decreases to The High Beam Assist function will be
or below the preset level. activated when all the following conditions
. When the forward area of the vehicle is are met.
bright. . The light control switch is in the
. When there is a preceding or oncoming “AUTO” position and the low beam head-
vehicle. lights are on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
NOTE
. The preset vehicle speed varies
depending on the models.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. High Beam Assist warning indicator (yel-
low)
For more details, we recommend that
you contact a SUBARU dealer. When the High Beam Assist function
malfunctions, the High Beam Assist warn-
ing indicator (yellow) on the combination
meter will appear. In this case, we
recommend that you have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer.
High Beam Assist indicator (green)
Temporary stop of High Beam Assist
When the High Beam Assist function is function:
activated, the High Beam Assist indicator If the High Beam Assist function stops
(green) on the combination meter will temporarily due to poor visibility or abnor-
illuminate. mal temperature, the message appears
on the combination meter. When the
condition is canceled, the system will be
restored.

Black plate (231,1)

NOTE NOTE or fogged
Even when the operation conditions of After manually changing the headlight – When the windshield is cracked or
the High Beam Assist function are met, mode to the high beam, if you turn on damaged
there may be a case in which the High the High Beam Assist function, return – When the inside mirror or the
Beam Assist indicator does not illumi- the light control switch to the “AUTO” camera is deformed or dirty
nate and an abnormal condition warn- position. – If there are lights similar to the 3
ing is given. In this case, turn the headlights or the tail lights in the
ignition switch to “OFF” position and ! Tips for the High Beam Assist surrounding area
then “ON” position again. Check if the system
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
High Beam Assist indicator illuminates. . The High Beam Assist function recog- hicle ahead is driven without its head-
If the indicator does not illuminate, we nizes the condition surrounding the vehi- lights and tail lights on
recommend that you have the vehicle cle based on the brightness of illumination – If the headlights of an oncoming
inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
headlight mode may switch in some ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
! How to change the headlight mode situations that do not match to the driver’s
manually light beams are not aimed correctly
sense. – When a rapid change of brightness
Change to the low beam: . A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be continues while driving
When you return the turn signal lever to detected. – When driving on a road with many
the center position, the high beam assist . Under the following situations, the ups and downs or uneven surfaces
function will turn off and the High Beam brightness of ambient illumination may – When driving on a road with many
Assist indicator will turn off. not be detected correctly and the High curves
Change to the high beam: Beam Assist function may not work – When there are some objects that
When you turn the light control switch to properly. As a result, the glare of the high reflect light strongly, such as a road
the “ ” position, the headlight mode will beam may disturb the driving of an sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead
be changed to the high beam. At this time, oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, – When the rear part of the vehicle
the High Beam Assist function will turn off, the low beam mode may continue ahead, such as a container, reflects
the High Beam Assist indicator will turn off although there are no oncoming vehicles light strongly
and the high beam indicator light will turn and vehicles ahead. In the such cases,
– When the headlights of your vehicle
on. change the headlight mode manually.
are damaged or dirty
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
storm, heavy rain, etc.)
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
– When the windshield glass is dirty being towed
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (232,1)
. In the following conditions, the head- ahead illuminate on only one side & Headlight flasher
light mode will not be automatically chan- – When the oncoming vehicle or
ged from the high beam to the low beam. vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
– When your vehicle passes an on- – Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind road surface, etc.)
curve – Number of passengers and weight
– When another vehicle passes in of loaded cargo
front of your vehicle . The range recognizable for the camera
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve- is +15 degrees in both directions (30
hicle ahead comes in and out of view degrees in total) from the vehicle front.
because of continuous curves, median The recognizable distance differs depend-
strips, roadside trees, etc. ing on the situation in the surrounding
. If the camera detects the light of the area.
front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the . This function can be disabled at
headlight mode may change from the high SUBARU dealers. For more details, we
beam to the low beam automatically. recommend that you contact a SUBARU CAUTION
. The headlight mode may change from dealer.
the high beam to the low beam, or the low Do not hold the lever in the flashing
beam mode may continue, when affected position for more than just a few
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination seconds.
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard. To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
. The timing of the change of headlight
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
mode may differ due to the following
the lever. The headlight flasher works
factors.
even though the lighting switch is in the
– Color or brightness of the head- off position.
lights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail
lights of a vehicle ahead When the headlights are on high beam,
– Movement and direction of an on- the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead combination meter is also on.
– When the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

Black plate (233,1)
Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever 3-99
& Daytime running light system Turn signal lever NOTE

(if equipped) For models with a turn signal lever on
the right side of the steering wheel, the
WARNING pushing direction of the turn signal
lever is the opposite of that described
The light switch must always be here. 3
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside. & One-touch lane changer
The daytime running light will automati- To flash the turn signal and turn signal
cally illuminate at reduced brightness indicator light three times, push the turn
when the following conditions are fulfilled. signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
. The engine is running.
. The light control switch is in the The operational/non-operational setting of
“AUTO” (if equipped) or off position. the one-touch lane changer’s can be
To activate the right turn signal, push the changed by a SUBARU dealer. We
NOTE turn signal lever up. To activate the left recommend that you contact the nearest
. If the parking brake is applied when turn signal, push the turn signal lever SUBARU dealer for details.
you start the engine, the daytime run- down. When the turn is finished, the lever
ning light will illuminate when the will return automatically. If the lever does
parking brake is released. not return after cornering, return the lever
. When the headlight switch is in the to the neutral position by hand.
“ ” or “ ” position, the daytime
To signal a lane change, push the turn
running light system is deactivated.
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
. For models with the auto on/off
during the lane change. The turn signal
headlights, while the headlight switch
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
is in the “AUTO” position and the
the turn or lane change. The lever will
headlights turn on automatically, the
return automatically to the neutral position
daytime running light is deactivated.
when you release it.

Black plate (234,1)
3-100 Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
Illumination brightness con- celed even when the ignition switch is Headlight beam leveler (if
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
trol equipped)
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (models with LED
headlights)
The LED headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare when your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
You can adjust the illumination brightness load being carried by the vehicle.
of the combination meter, multi function
display, the climate control panel, etc. by
turning the control dial.
. To brighten, turn the control dial up-
ward.
. To darken, turn the control dial down-
ward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-

Black plate (235,1)
Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler 3-101
& Manual headlight beam leve-

ler (models without LED
headlights)
1) Raises the level of the headlight beam

2) Lowers the level of the headlight beam
Adjust the headlight beam level with the
following dial positions according to the
number of passengers and load condition.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (236,1)
3-102 Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler
Number of front seat Number of rear seat Load in the luggage

Dial position occupants occupants compartment area
0 1 or 2 0 No load
1 2 3 No load
2 2 3 Full load*
2 3 Full load*
1 0 Full load*
1 0 Full load*
3, 4 and 5 Use in special case Use in special case Use in special case
*: Up to the maximum permissible weight
NOTE
. Please use the appropriate dial position according to the above table. Otherwise, your vehicle may not light the road in
front of your vehicle sufficiently or the surrounding area may experience too much glare.
. The “Use in special case” position should only be used in cases such as when driving on a sloped road and the headlights
of your vehicle are lighting the mirror of vehicles in front of you or the windshield of oncoming vehicles.

Black plate (237,1)
Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-103
Fog light switch switch back down to the following posi-

tions.
& Front fog light switch (if . “ ” position (except Australia models)
equipped) . “OFF” position (Australia models)
3
Front fog light operating condition

(Australia models)
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
Front fog light operating condition The front fog lights will turn on when the
(except Australia models) fog light switch is placed in the “ ” The indicator light on the combination
1) Headlight switch position while the headlights are in either meter will illuminate when the front fog
2) Fog light switch of the following conditions. lights are illuminated.
. when the headlight switch is in the
“ ” or “ ” position (except Australia
models)
. when the headlight switch is in the “ ”
or “ ” position (Australia models)
. for models with the auto on/off head-
lights, while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn
on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (238,1)
3-104 Instruments and controls/Fog light switch
& Rear fog light switch (if position when released.

equipped) . “ ” position (models with front fog
lights)
. “ ” position (models without front fog
lights)
To turn off the rear fog light, perform either
of the following procedures.
. Turn the fog light switch upward back
to the “ ” position again (all models)
. Turn the fog light switch downward to
the “ ” position (models with front fog
lights)
Rear fog light operating condition (Austra-
lia models)
1) Headlight switch
Rear fog light operating condition (except 2) Fog light switch
Australia models)
1) Headlight switch The rear fog light will turn on when the fog
2) Fog light switch light switch is turned to the “ ” position
while the headlights are in either of the
following conditions.
. when the headlight switch is in the
“ ” or “ ” position (except Australia
models)
. when the headlight switch is in the “ ”
or “ ” position (Australia models)
. for models with the auto on/off head- The indicator light on the combination
lights, while the headlight switch is in the meter will illuminate when the rear fog
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn light is illuminated.
on automatically
The switch will return to the following

Black plate (239,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-105

NOTE Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that
To prevent switching off the rear fog the wiper blades are not frozen to
light from being forgotten, the rear fog the windshield or rear window
light circuit is designed so that it turns WARNING before switching on the wipers.
off whenever one of the following Attempting to operate the wiper
operations is performed. In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the 3
. The headlight switch is set to either windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
the “ ” or “ ” position. shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be
. The headlight switch is set to the defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo-
“AUTO” position and the headlights Otherwise the washer fluid can tor to burn out. If the wiper
turn off (models with auto on/off head- freeze on the windshield, blocking blades are frozen to the window
lights). your view. glass, be sure to operate the
. The key is removed from the ignition defroster, windshield wiper dei-
switch (models without the “keyless cer (if equipped) or rear window
access with push-button start sys- CAUTION defogger before turning on the
tem”). wiper.
. The push-button ignition switch is . Do not operate the washer con- . If the wipers stop during opera-
turned off (models with the “keyless tinuously for more than 10 section because of ice or some other
access with push-button start sys- onds, or when the washer fluid obstruction on the window, the
tem”). tank is empty. This may cause wiper motor could burn out even
overheating of the washer motor. if the wiper switch is turned off. If
However, this does not mean that the Check the washer fluid level this occurs, promptly stop the
rear fog light illuminates when the frequently, such as at fuel stops. vehicle in a safe place, turn the
headlight switch is set to “ ” position . Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
or the ignition switch is turned to “ON” the windshield or rear window is “OFF” position and clean the
position again. So, if you want to dry. This may scratch the glass, window glass to allow proper
reilluminate the rear fog light, turn the damage the wiper blades and wiper operation.
fog light switch to the “ ” position. cause the wiper motor to burn . Use clean water if windshield
out. Before operating the wiper washer fluid is unavailable. In
on a dry windshield or rear areas where water freezes in
window, always use the wind- winter, use SUBARU Windshield
shield washer. Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (240,1)
3-106 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
Refer to “Windshield washer they may operate unexpectedly and the wiper blades using a sponge or
fluid” F11-41. and car wash brushes could soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
Also, when driving the vehicle become tangled around them. mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
when there are freezing tempera- rinse the window glass and wiper
tures, use non-freezing type wi- blades with clean water. The glass is
NOTE clean if no beads form on the glass
per blades.
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- when you rinse with water.
. Do not clean the wiper blades tected against overloads by a circuit . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
with fuel or a solvent, such as breaker. If the motor operates continu- even after following this procedure,
paint thinner or benzine. This will ously under an unusually heavy load, replace the wiper blades with new
cause deterioration of the wiper the circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions,
blades. motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
For models with automatic rain sen- your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-42.
sing windshield wipers: wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
. When the wiper switch is in the mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker NOTE
“AUTO” position, do not touch will reset itself, and the wipers will For models with automatic rain sensing
the windshield near the rain light again operate normally. windshield wipers:
sensor and do not place a wet . Clean your wiper blades and win- . When the wiper switch is turned to
cloth on the windshield near the dow glass periodically with a washer the “AUTO” position while the ignition
rain light sensor. Doing so may solution to prevent streaking, and to switch is in the “ON” position, the
result in unexpected wiper opera- remove accumulations of road salt or wipers will operate once. This indicates
tion and cause injury. road film. Operate the windshield that the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”
washer for at least 1 second so that
. When washing the vehicle, make position.
washer solution will be sprinkled all . When the wiper switch is in the
sure that the wiper is turned off.
over the windshield or rear window. “AUTO” position, the following situa-
Otherwise, the wipers may oper-
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate- tions may occur.
ate unexpectedly and cause in-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
jury. – The wipers may operate if the
blade results in jerky wiper operation
. When havi ng your vehicle rain light sensor or the windshield
and streaking on the glass. If you
washed in an automatic car is vibrated or objects such as,
cannot remove those streaks after
wash, make sure that the wiper insects, dirt, mud, etc. are covering
operating the washer or if the wiper
is turned off. Otherwise, the wi- them. Turn off the wiper unless it is
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
pers may be damaged because raining or snowing.
face of the windshield or rear window

Black plate (241,1)
– The wipers do not operate if the high speed position. & Windshield wiper and washer
rain light sensor does not detect – The wipers may not operate if the switches
rain or snow. If necessary, push the temperature around the rain light
wiper control lever down to the low The wiper operates only when the ignition
sensor is more than 808C (1768F)
speed position or high speed posi- switch is in the “ON” position.
because the system cannot detect
tion. the amount of raindrops under ! Windshield wipers (models with 3
– The wipers may not operate these temperatures. automatic rain sensing windshield
properly if the rain light sensor . This system is also equipped with wipers)
does not detect the amount of rain- the vehicle speed interlocking intermit-
drops because of the water-repel- tent wiper function. When the vehicle
lent coating on the windshield, or stops, the wiper operation interval will
dirt or ice on the upper half of the become longer compared with that
windshield. while driving.
– The rain light sensor may be . This system may malfunction in a
malfunctioning if the wiper intermit- location with strong radio waves or
tent operation does not vary de- noise.
pending on the amount of rainfall. If
necessary, turn the wiper switch to
any position except for the “AUTO”
position. We recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer and
have the system inspected as soon Except Australia models
as possible.
– The wipers stop operation if the
ambient temperature decreases to
−158C (58F) or lower. The wipers
resume operation when the ambient
temperature increases to −108C
(148F) or higher. If you need to
operate the wipers under −158C
(58F), push the wiper control lever
down to the low speed position or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (242,1)
NOTE ! Sensor sensitivity control

The automatic adjusting mode of the
wiper timing can be changed from the
rain-sensing mode to the vehicle speed
interlocking mode. The setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. For
more details, we recommend that you
contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Rain light sensor
Australia models
/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
1) Except Australia models
/ OFF: Off
2) Australia models
/ AUTO: Automatic operation
/ LO: Low speed Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the
/ HI: High speed rain light sensor for wiper control. Turn the
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper dial downward to increase the sensitivity.
control lever down. With the wiper switch Turn the dial upward to decrease the
in the “AUTO” position, the wipers operate sensitivity.
automatically when the rain light sensor
detects falling rain. The wiper timing is The rain light sensor is on the windshield
automatically adjusted depending on the glass.
amount of rain.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF”/“ ” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.

Black plate (243,1)
! Windshield wipers (models without ! Wiper intermittent time control

automatic rain sensing windshield
wipers)
Australia models
/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
/ OFF: Off
2) Australia models
/ INT: Intermittent
Except Australia models
/ LO: Low speed When the wiper switch is in the “ ”/“INT”
/ HI: High speed position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper ing interval of the wiper. The operating
control lever down. interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ”/“OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (244,1)
! Windshield washer NOTE NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight washer, pulling the wiper
control lever for more than 1 second
also causes the headlight washer to
operate when the headlight switch is in
the “ ” position. For further details,
refer to “Headlight washer” F3-111.

2) Australia models
The windshield washer fluid warning
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper indicator appears when the washer
control lever toward you. The washer fluid fluid level in the tank has dropped to
sprays until you release the lever. The the lower limit. If the warning indicator
wipers operate while you pull the lever. appears, refill the tank with fluid. For
the refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-41.

Black plate (245,1)
Instruments and controls/Headlight washer 3-111
Headlight washer (if washer fluid as soon as you release the Mirrors
wiper control lever. The headlight washer
equipped) sprays the washer fluid for approximately
Always check that the inside and outside
1 second and then stops automatically.
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
CAUTION start driving.
3
Do not operate the washer if the & Inside mirror
washer fluid tank is empty. This may
cause overheating of the washer
motor. Check washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
NOTE
When the area around the nozzle cover
of the headlight washer is frozen,
If you pull the wiper control lever toward remove the ice before using.
you and hold it for more than 1 second
with the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, the headlight washer operates
together with the windshield washer in the
The inside mirror has a day and night
following conditions.
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
. when the light switch is in the “ ” mirror toward you for the night position.
position (except Australia models) Push it away for the day position. The
. when the light switch is in the “ ” night position reduces glare from head-
position (Australia models) lights.
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically (models with auto on/off
headlights)
The windshield washer stops spraying
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (246,1)
3-112 Instruments and controls/Mirrors
& Auto-dimming mirror (if ! How to use the auto-dimming mir- . Even with the mirror in the auto-
equipped) ror matic dimming mode, the mirror sur-
face turns bright if the shift lever (MT
WARNING models) or select lever (CVT models) is
shifted into the “R” position. This is to
To ensure safety, always adjust the ensure good rearward visibility during
mirrors and operate the switch be- reversing.
fore driving the vehicle. Perform the
automatic dimming on/off operation & Outside mirrors
only when necessary. Otherwise, an ! Convex mirror (passenger side)
unexpected accident may occur.
WARNING
CAUTION Objects look smaller in a convex
. When cleaning the mirror, use a mirror and farther away than when
paper towel or similar material
1) LED indicator viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
2) Automatic dimming on/off switch the convex mirror to judge the
dampened with glass cleaner. Do 3) Sensor
not spray glass cleaner directly distance of vehicles behind you
on the mirror because that may when changing lanes. Use the inside
1. Move the main body of the auto-
cause the liquid cleaner to enter mirror (or glance backwards) to
dimming mirror and adjust the position
the mirror housing and damage determine the actual size and dis-
so that you can view the rearward direc-
the mirror. tance of objects that you view in
tion sufficiently.
convex mirror.
. Sensors detecting brightness are 2. By pressing the automatic dimming
located in front of and behind the on/off switch, the automatic dimming
mirror. Do not attach any object function is turned on or off. When the
such as a sticker on the sensor automatic dimming function is on, the LED
areas or put any object over the indicator will illuminate.
mirror.
NOTE
. Sensors are located in front of and
behind the mirror.

Black plate (247,1)
Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-113
! Remote control mirror switch ! Power folding mirror switch work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
ate the switch again after waiting for a
short period of time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors 3
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
. When you fold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may not unfold
when the switch is pressed, even
though the motor operating sound is
heard. When this happens, operate the
: Select side to adjust The power folding mirror switch operates
power folding mirror switch again.
: Direction control only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
The remote control mirrors operate only or “ACC” position.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or To fold the outside mirrors, press the
“ACC” position. power folding mirror switch. To unfold the
1. Turn the control switch to the side that mirrors, press the switch again.
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror, NOTE
“R” is for the right mirror.
. When the temperature is low, the
2. Move the control switch in the direction
outside mirrors may stop during switch
you want to move the mirror.
operation. If that occurs, push the
3. Return the control switch to the neutral switch again. When the outside mirrors
position to prevent unintentional opera- do not work by switch operation, move
tion. them several times manually. This
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- makes it possible to operate them by
ally. switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not

Black plate (248,1)
3-114 Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
Defogger and deicer vated only when the ignition switch is in outside mirrors have been cleared and the
the “ON” position. windshield wiper blades have been deiced
completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
It is possible for the defogger and deicer
system to be set to continuous operation
mode by a SUBARU dealer. We recom-
mend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with a
multi function display, it is possible to set
the defogger and deicer system for the
continuous operation mode. For details,
To activate the defogger and deicer refer to “Defogger setting” F3-87.
system, press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The If the battery voltage drops below the
rear window defogger, outside mirror permissible level, continuous operation of
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are the defogger and deicer system is can-
activated simultaneously. The indicator celed and the system stops operating.
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti- CAUTION
vated.
. To prevent the battery from being
To turn them off, press the control switch discharged, do not operate the
again. They also turn off when the ignition defogger and deicer system con-
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/ tinuously for any longer than
1) Rear window defogger “OFF” position. necessary.
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system will . Do not use sharp instruments or
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
automatically shut off after approximately window cleaner containing abra-
The defogger and deicer system is acti- 15 minutes. If the rear window and the sives to clean the inner surface

Black plate (249,1)
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 3-115
of the rear window. They may Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

damage the conductors printed
on the window.
WARNING
NOTE . Do not adjust the steering wheel 3
. Turn on the defogger and deicer tilt/telescopic position while driv-
system if the wipers are frozen to the ing. This may cause loss of
windshield. vehicle control and result in
. If the windshield is covered with personal injury.
snow, remove the snow so that the . If the lever cannot be raised to
windshield wiper deicer works effec- the fixed position, adjust the
tively. steering wheel again. It is dan-
. While the defogger and deicer sys- gerous to drive without locking 1) Tilt adjustment
tem is in the continuous operation the steering wheel. This may 2) Telescopic adjustment
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at cause loss of vehicle control
15 km/h (9 mph) or lower for 15 1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
and result in personal injury.
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer “Front seats” F1-2.
automatically stops operating, though 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
the rear window defogger and outside 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
mirror defogger maintain continuous level.
operation in this condition. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
. While the defogger and deicer sys- wheel in place.
tem is in the continuous operation 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
mode, if the battery voltage drops securely locked by moving it up and down,
below the permissible level, continu- and forward and backward.
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating.

Black plate (250,1)
3-116 Instruments and controls/Horn
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Black plate (9,1)
Climate control
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air

Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-2 conditioner ...................................................... 4-10
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-10
Type A ................................................................ 4-3 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
Type B ................................................................ 4-4 sunlight ........................................................... 4-10
Automatic climate control operation ................. 4-5 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-10 4
Sensors .............................................................. 4-6
Checking air conditioning system before summer
Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-6 season ............................................................ 4-10
Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-6 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Temperature control ............................................ 4-7 low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10
Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8 is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-10
Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-11
Defrosting ............................................................ 4-9 Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11
Type A ................................................................ 4-9 Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-12
Type B ................................................................ 4-9

Black plate (254,1)
4-2 Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Center ventilators To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
1) Open To open or close the ventilator, turn the
2) Close thumb-wheel up or down.

Black plate (255,1)
Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3

1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
Climate control panel “Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
& Type A selection” F4-6.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-114.)
4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
5) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.) 4
6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation” F4-5
and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)
8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” F4-5.)
9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation” F4-5.)
! For regional specification

The illustration on the left is a typical
example for left-hand drive models. For
right-hand drive models, the locations of
some buttons/dials are different to that
shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (256,1)
4-4 Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type B matic climate control operation” F4-5
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-114.)
4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”
mode (type B)” F4-8.)
5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
6) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
matic climate control operation” F4-5
10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” F4-5.)
11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation” F4-5.)
! For regional specification

The illustration on the left is a typical
right-hand drive models, the locations of
some buttons/dials are different to that
shown in the illustration.

Black plate (257,1)
Climate control/Automatic climate control operation 4-5
Automatic climate control . When the climate control system

turns off, the air inlet is fixed to the
operation outside air mode.
When this mode is selected, the fan To turn off the climate control system,
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, press the “OFF” button.
and air conditioner compressor operation
are automatically controlled. To activate
this mode, perform the following. 4
NOTE
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres- 1. Press the “AUTO” button. The indica-
sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- tor “FULL AUTO” on the display illumi-
cator on the control panel illuminates. nates.
. The air conditioner may not operate 2. Set the preferred temperature using
in the following cases: the temperature control dial.
– when the cabin temperature is NOTE
low
. If you operate any of the buttons on
– when the ambient temperature
the control panel other than the “OFF”
decreases close to 08C (328F)
button, rear window defogger button
. The controllable temperature range
and temperature control dial(s) during
may vary depending on the regional
FULL AUTO mode operation, the
specifications of the vehicle.
“FULL” indicator on the control panel
will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
will remain illuminated. You can then
manually control the system as desired
using the button you operated. To
change the system back to the FULL
AUTO mode, press the “AUTO” button.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (258,1)
4-6 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
& Sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- Manual climate control op-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
eration
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Airflow mode selection
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact. To select the airflow mode:
– Keep water away from the sensors. . Type A: Turn the airflow mode selec-
tion dial.
– Do not cover the sensors.
. Type B: Press the airflow mode selec-
The sensors are located as follows. tion button.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield To select the defrost mode:
defroster grille Press the defroster button.
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to
the steering column Airflow modes are as follows.
– Outside temperature sensor: near the
front bumper opening
1) Interior air temperature sensor (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated

Black plate (259,1)
Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-7
both side windows to prevent fogging.) and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-9.)
NOTE
When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. At the
same time, the air inlet selection is
4
automatically set to the outside air
mode.
& Temperature control

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets (Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets, NOTE
foot outlets and both side outlets of the The controllable temperature range
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” may vary depending on the regional
F4-9.) specifications of the vehicle.
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
system automatically adjusts the tempera-
ture of air supplied from the outlets so that
the preferred temperature is achieved and
maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of clockwise, the system provides maximum
the instrument panel and some through heating performance.
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and (Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)
4-8 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
! “DUAL” mode (type B) pressing the “DUAL” button. NOTE

When the “DUAL” mode is selected: For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
Turn the driver’s side dial to set the conditioner. However, if the ambient
driver’s side temperature. Turn the front temperature decreases to approxi-
passenger’s side dial to set the front mately 08C (328F), the air conditioner
passenger’s side temperature. compressor will stop operating.
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled:
Set the desired temperature by turning the & Air inlet selection
driver’s side dial. Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled, only selection button.
the driver’s side temperature is displayed.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
& Fan speed control recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
a) Driver’s side temperature (right-hand air inlet selection button to the ON position
models)/Front passenger’s side tem- The fan operates only when the ignition
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
perature (left-hand models) switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
b) Driver’s side temperature (left-hand mod-
when driving on a dusty road.
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
els)/Front passenger’s side temperature speed control dial. OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
(right-hand models)
drawn into the passenger compartment.
You can change the setting of the driver’s & Air conditioner control Press the air inlet selection button to the
side and front passenger’s side tempera- The air conditioner operates only when OFF position when the interior has cooled
ture independently by selecting the the engine is running. to a comfortable temperature and the road
“DUAL” mode. is no longer dusty.
Press the air conditioner button while the
You can select the “DUAL” mode by fan is in operation to turn on the air WARNING
performing either of the following proce- conditioner. When the air conditioner is
dures. on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. Continued operation in the ON posi-
. Press the “DUAL” button To turn off the air conditioner, press the tion may fog up the windows. Switch
. Turn the passenger’s side temperature button again. to the OFF position as soon as the
control dial outside conditions are no longer
dusty.
The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by

Black plate (261,1)
Climate control/Defrosting 4-9

NOTE Defrosting mode.
When the battery is disconnected or
the battery voltage drops, the air inlet NOTE
selection operation indicator light may
blink. This does not indicate a malfunc- When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-
tion. However, if the indicator light lected, the air conditioner compressor
blinks every time you start the engine, automatically operates to more quickly
a malfunction may occur in the elec- defrost the windshield. At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automa-
4
trical circuit. We recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected at the tically set to the outside air mode.
nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Type A
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
by turning the airflow mode selection dial
to defroster or to dehumidify the wind-
shield and front door windows.
If the defroster button is pressed while the
“ ” mode is selected, it will return to the
previous mode before selecting the “ ”
mode.
& Type B
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
by pressing the airflow mode selection
button to defroster or to dehumidify the
windshield and front door windows.
If the defroster button is pressed while the
“ ” mode is selected, it will return to the
previous mode before selecting the “ ”

Black plate (262,1)
4-10 Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
Operating tips for heater and allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
heated interior. This results in quicker system.
air conditioner cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
& Cleaning ventilation grille windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and fuel con-
& Lubrication oil circulation in sumption, the air conditioner compressor
the refrigerant circuit is designed to temporarily shut off during
Operate the air conditioner compressor at air conditioner operation whenever the
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving accelerator pedal is fully depressed such
speeds) a few minutes each month during as during rapid acceleration or when
the off-season to circulate its oil. driving up a steep incline.
& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-
son
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. We recommend
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. that you have your SUBARU dealer per-
Since the condenser is located in front of form this check.
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in
by any accumulation of insects and leaves high humidity and low tem-
on the condenser. perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
& Efficient cooling after parking relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
in direct sunlight small amount of water vapor emission
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate

Black plate (263,1)
Climate control/Air filtration system 4-11
& Refrigerant for your climate Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Air filtration system
control system refrigerant HFO-1234yf or HFC134a.
Therefore, the method for adding, chan-
Replace the filter element according to the
ging or checking the refrigerant is different
maintenance schedule. Refer to “Mainte-
from the method for CFC12 (freon). Also,
nance schedule” F11-3. The schedule
the methods for adding, changing or
should be followed to maintain the filter’s
checking HFO-1234yf and HFC134a re-
dust collection ability. Under extremely
frigerant are different. Before adding,
dusty conditions, the filter should be 4
changing or checking the refrigerant,
replaced more frequently. It is recom-
check the air conditioner label in the
mended that you have your filter checked
location shown in the illustration to confirm
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
which type of refrigerant is used in your
replacement, we recommend that you use
vehicle. We recommend that you consult
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs
needed as a result of using the wrong CAUTION
refrigerant are not covered under the
warranty. We recommend that you contact
your SUBARU dealer if the following
occurs, even if it is not yet time to
change the filter:
– Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
Example of air conditioner label
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
1) Air conditioner label
A) Name of refrigerant
mance if not properly maintained.
B) Name of compressor oil
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)
4-12 Climate control/Air filtration system
& Replacing an air filter and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
1. Remove the glove box. the hinge.
NOTE
We recommend that you take mea-
sures to protect the center console
with masking tape first, so that you
avoid scratching the center console
with the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
1) Stopper
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inside to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will 2. Remove the air filter according to the
go. following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Push in the four stoppers to
unlock, and then slowly pull out the
air filter 10 cm (4 in) from the housing.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the (2) Completely pull out the air filter by
glove box. gently tilting the front side of the air
filter downward.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

Black plate (265,1)
Climate control/Air filtration system 4-13
3. Replace the air filter element with a 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
new one. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.

Black plate (11,1)
Audio
Antenna................................................................ 5-2 Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone ......... 5-49

Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2 Using the phone switch/microphone................... 5-49
Audio set ............................................................. 5-2 How to change the hands-free phone system ..... 5-50
Base display audio set (for Europe) ..................... 5-3 Making a call ..................................................... 5-50
Base display audio set (except for Europe) .......... 5-5 Receiving a call ................................................. 5-53
Tips for operating the audio/visual system ........... 5-6 Talking on the phone ......................................... 5-54
Basic information before use .............................. 5-13 Phone settings .................................................. 5-55
Basic operation .................................................. 5-16 What to do if....................................................... 5-58
Unit settings ...................................................... 5-17 Troubleshooting................................................. 5-58 5
SUBARU STARLINK (for Europe) ........................ 5-25 Voice command system .................................... 5-62
AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-26 Using the voice command system...................... 5-62
CD ..................................................................... 5-29 Voice command system operation ...................... 5-63
USB memory...................................................... 5-31 Command list .................................................... 5-65
iPod................................................................... 5-32 Appendix ............................................................ 5-67
Bluetooth audio.................................................. 5-34 Certification ....................................................... 5-67
AUX ................................................................... 5-37 Certification for UAE models .............................. 5-68
Steering switches for audio .............................. 5-39 Certification for Paraguay models ...................... 5-68
Bluetooth® settings ............................................ 5-42 Certification for MAROC models......................... 5-68
Regulatory information ....................................... 5-42 Certification for Russia and Kazakhstan
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device........... 5-42 models ............................................................ 5-68
Setting Bluetooth details .................................... 5-45 Certification for Europe models for Declaration of
Conformity ...................................................... 5-68
Hands-free phone system ................................. 5-47
Control screen ................................................... 5-48

Black plate (268,1)
5-2 Audio/Antenna
Antenna Audio set . Some functions may not be avail-

able depending on the market and
& Roof antenna Your vehicle may be equipped with one of
specifications of your vehicle.
. The images shown in this Owner’s
the following audio sets. Refer to the
Manual are sample images. The actual
pages indicated in this section for operat-
images may vary depending on the
ing details.
market and specifications of your ve-
CAUTION hicle.
. Always consult your SUBARU

dealer before installing a citizen
band radio or other transmitting
device in your vehicle. Such
devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if
they are incorrectly installed or if
The roof antenna is installed in the center they are not suited for the vehi-
at the rear of the roof. cle.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the
audio/visual system on when
the engine is not running.
NOTE
. If a cell phone is placed near the
audio set, it may cause the audio set to
emit noise when the phone receives
calls. This noise does not indicate an
audio set malfunction. Note that a cell
phone should be placed as far as
possible from the audio set.

Black plate (269,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-3
& Base display audio set (for Europe) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to
“Basic operation” F5-16.
. S U B A R U S TA R L I N K : r e f e r t o
“SUBARU STARLINK (for Europe)” F5-
25.
. Radio operation: refer to “AM/FM radio”
F5-26. 5
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to “CD” F5-29.
. USB storage device: refer to “USB
memory” F5-31.
. iPod operation: refer to “iPod” F5-32.
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to “Bluetooth
audio” F5-34.
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to “AUX” F5-
37.
. Hands-free system: refer to “Hands-
free phone system” F5-47.
NOTE
. The illustration on the left is a typical
1) Power/VOLUME knob 7) SEEK/TRACK buttons
right-hand drive models, some of the
2) Eject button switch locations are the opposite of
3) AUDIO/TUNE knob those shown in the illustration.
4) HOME button
5) APPS button
6) Display
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (270,1)
5-4 Audio/Audio set
. If your vehicle is equipped with an

audio set other than the type shown in
the illustration, refer to the separate
Navigation Owner’s Manual or Display
Owner’s Manual for details.

Black plate (271,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-5
& Base display audio set (except for Europe) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to
“Basic operation” F5-16.
. Radio operation: refer to “AM/FM radio”
F5-26.
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to “CD” F5-29.
. USB storage device: refer to “USB 5
memory” F5-31.
. iPod operation: refer to “iPod” F5-32.
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to “Bluetooth
audio” F5-34.
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to “AUX” F5-
37.
. Hands-free system: refer to “Hands-
free phone system” F5-47.
NOTE
. The illustration on the left is a typical
right-hand drive models, some of the
switch locations are the opposite of
those shown in the illustration.
1) Power/VOLUME knob 7) SEEK/TRACK buttons
2) Eject button
3) AUDIO/TUNE knob
4) HOME button
5) PHONE button
6) Display
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (272,1)
5-6 Audio/Audio set
. If your vehicle is equipped with an ! Radio there is another strong station nearby on
audio set other than the types shown in Usually, a problem with radio reception the FM band, the radio may tune in the
the illustration, refer to the separate does not mean there is a problem with the second station until the original signal can
Navigation Owner’s Manual or Display radio — it is just the normal result of be picked up again.
Owner’s Manual for details. conditions outside the vehicle. ! AM
For example, nearby buildings and terrain Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
& Tips for operating the audio/ can interfere with FM reception. Power the upper atmosphere — especially at
visual system lines or phone wires can interfere with AM night. These reflected signals can inter-
signals. And of course, radio signals have fere with those received directly from the
CAUTION a limited range. The farther the vehicle is radio station, causing the radio station to
from a station, the weaker its signal will sound alternately strong and weak.
. To avoid damage to the audio/
be. In addition, reception conditions Station interference: When a reflected
visual system:
change constantly as the vehicle moves. signal and a signal received directly from
– Be careful not to spill bev- a radio station are very nearly the same
erages over the audio/visual Here, some common reception problems
frequency, they can interfere with each
system. that probably do not indicate a problem
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
with the radio are described.
– Do not put anything other than cast.
an appropriate disc into the ! FM Static: AM is easily affected by external
disc slot. Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the sources of electrical noise, such as high
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 tension power lines, lightening or electrical
miles). Once outside this range, you may motors. This results in static.
NOTE
notice fading and drifting, which increase
The use of a cell phone inside or near with the distance from the radio transmit-
the vehicle may cause a noise from the ter. They are often accompanied by
speakers of the audio/visual system distortion.
which you are listening to. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction. Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and

Black plate (273,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-7
! CD player and disc be playable on your player: Transparent/translucent discs

. This CD player is intended for use with – SACD
12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. – dts CD
. Extremely high temperatures can keep – Copy-protected CD
the CD player from working. On hot days, – Video CD
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the Special shaped discs
player.
. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip. 5
. If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries. Low quality discs
WARNING
CD players use an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
radiation exposure if directed out-
side the unit. Be sure to operate the
player correctly.
Audio CDs
. Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (274,1)
5-8 Audio/Audio set
Labeled discs . Do not use printable discs. The cases away from moisture, heat and direct
use of such discs may damage sunlight.
the player, or it may be impossi-
ble to eject the disc.
CAUTION
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-
. Do not use special shaped, trans- free cloth that has been dampened with
parent/translucent, low quality or 1) Correct water. Wipe in a straight line from the
labeled discs such as those 2) Wrong center to the edge of the disc (not in
shown in the illustrations. The circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free
use of such discs may damage . Handle discs carefully, especially when cloth. Do not use a conventional record
the player, or it may be impossi- inserting them. Hold them on the edge and cleaner or anti-static device.
ble to eject the disc. do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-
prints on them, particularly on the shiny ! CD-R/RW discs
. This system is not designed for side. . CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
use of Dual Discs. Do not use subject to the “finalizing process” (a
. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or
Dual Discs because they may process that allows discs to be played
other disc damage could cause the player
cause damage to the player. on a conventional CD player) cannot be
to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
. Do not use discs with a protec- see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the played.
tion ring. The use of such discs light.) . It may not be possible to play CD-R/
may damage the player, or it may . Remove discs from the players when CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
be impossible to eject the disc. not in use. Store them in their plastic recorder or a personal computer because

Black plate (275,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-9
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on ! iPod els or software versions etc., some mod-
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod els might be incompatible with this sys-
lens of the unit. classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices tem.
. It may not be possible to play discs can be used with this system. ! File information
recorded on a personal computer depend- Made for Compatible compressed files (Audio)
ing on the application settings and the
. iPod touch (5th generation)*
environment. Record with the correct Item USB DISC
format. (For details, contact the appropri- . iPod touch (4th generation)
ate application manufacturers of the ap- . iPod touch (3rd generation) Compatible MP3/WMA/AAC
file format
. iPod touch (2nd generation)
plications.)
Folders in the Maximum Maximum 5
. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged . iPod touch (1st generation) device 512 255
by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem- . iPod classic
peratures or other storage conditions. The Files in the Maximum Maximum
. iPod nano (7th generation)* device 8000 512
unit may be unable to play some damaged . iPod nano (6th generation)*
discs. Files per Maximum —
. iPod nano (5th generation) folder 255
. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the
. iPod nano (4th generation)
player, playback will begin more slowly
than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc. . iPod nano (3rd generation)
. iPod nano (2nd generation)* Corresponding sampling frequency
. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot (Audio)
be played using the DDCD (Double . iPod nano (1st generation)*
Density CD) system. . iPhone 5s* File type Frequency (kHz)
! USB memory device . iPhone 5c* MP3 files: 32/44.1/48
. USB communication formats: USB . iPhone 5* MPEG 1 LAYER 3
1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps) . iPhone 4s MP3 files:
. iPhone 4 MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24
. File formats: FAT 16/32
. Correspondence class: Mass storage . iPhone 3GS WMA files: 32/48/64/80/96/128/
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) 160/192
class . iPhone 3G
. iPhone AAC files: 48/44.1/32/24/22.05/
MPEG4/AAC-LC 16/12/11.025/8
*: iPod video not supported
Depending on differences between mod-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (276,1)
5-10 Audio/Audio set
Corresponding bit rates (Audio) and playback errors, use the appropriate . M3u playlists are not compatible with
file extension. the audio device.
File type Bit rate (kbps) . This system can play only the first . MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
MP3 files: 32 - 320 session when using multi-session compa- formats are not compatible with the audio
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 tible CDs. device.
MP3 files: . MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 . The player is compatible with VBR
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 (Variable Bit Rate).
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192 formats. This system cannot display disc . When playing back files recorded as
WMA files:
title, track title and artist name in other VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR 32 - 192 formats. will not be correctly displayed if the fast
AAC files: . WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/ forward or reverse operations are used.
16 - 320 AAC tag that is used in the same way as . It is not possible to check folders that
MPEG4/AAC-LC
an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa- do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible) tion such as track title and artist name. . MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8
. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA . The emphasis function is available only levels deep can be played. However, the
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad- when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at start of playback may be delayed when
vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres- 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. using discs containing numerous levels of
sion standards. . This system can play back AAC files folders. For this reason, we recommend
. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC encoded by iTunes. creating discs with no more than 2 levels
files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem- . The sound quality of MP3/WMA files of folders.
ory, and Bluetooth device. generally improves with higher bit rates. In
. This system can play disc recordings order to achieve a reasonable level of
compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-
system. mended.
. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, . The MP3/WMA player does not play
add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/ back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded
.wma/.m4a). using packet write data transfer (UDF
. This system plays back files with .mp3/ format). Discs should be recorded using
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/ “pre-mastering” software rather than pack-
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise etwrite software.

Black plate (277,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-11
! ID3 tag . Level 2: The file name can have up to

. This is a method of embedding track- 31 characters (including the separation
related information in an MP3 file. This mark “.” and file extension). Each folder
embedded information can include the must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year ! MP3
of production, comments, cover art and . MP3 is an audio compression standard
other data. The contents can be freely determined by a working group (MPEG) of
edited using software with ID3 tag editing the ISO (International Standard Organiza-
functions. Although the tags are restricted tion). MP3 compresses audio data to 5
to a number of characters, the information about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
can be viewed when the track is played discs.
back.
. The play order of the compact disc with ! WMA
the structure shown above is as follows: ! WMA tag . WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an
. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that audio compression format developed by
is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
WMA tags carry information such as track smaller than that of MP3 files. The
. The order changes depending on the title and artist name. decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.
personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC 7, 8 and 9.
encoding software you use. ! ISO 9660 format . This product is protected by certain
! Terms . This is the international standard for intellectual property rights of Microsoft
the formatting of CD-ROM folders and Corporation and third parties. Use or
! Packet write files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 distribution of such technology outside of
levels of regulations. this product is prohibited without a license
. This is a general term that describes
. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
the process of writing data on-demand to
(8 character file names, with a 3 character subsidiary and third parties.
CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs. file extension. File names must be com-
posed of one-byte capital letters and ! AAC
numbers. The “_” symbol may also be . AAC is short for Advanced Audio
included.) Coding and refers to an audio compres-
sion technology standard used with
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (278,1)
MPEG2 and MPEG4. ! Error messages
Mode Message Explanation

. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
are included in the disc.
“Disc read error.” . This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged,
or it was inserted upside down. Clean the
CD disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc
which is not playable is inserted.
“Please eject disc.” There is a trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or
“Media not connected. Press its connection. Refer to “Connecting and dis-
AUDIO/TUNE knob to exit.” connecting a USB memory/portable device”
F5-15.
USB This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
“No audio file.” included in the USB memory.
“Unplayable file” This indicates that the accessed file cannot play
back.
“Media not connected. Press This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not
AUDIO/TUNE knob to exit.” connected to the system.
iPod “No audio file” This indicates that there is no audio file in the
connected iPod.
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play
“Unplayable file” back.
NOTE
If the malfunction is not rectified: We recommend that you take your vehicle to
your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (279,1)
& Basic information before use ! Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
WARNING
Operation method Outline Main use
When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running, always apply the
parking brake for safety. Failure to Touch Changing and selecting various
do so may result in loss of control of Quickly touch and release settings
once.
your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
5
Drag*
CAUTION Touch the screen with your Scrolling the lists
finger, and move the screen
. To prevent damaging the screen, to the desired position.
touch the screen keys with your
finger lightly.
. Wipe off fingerprints using a Flick*
glass cleaning cloth. Do not use Quickly move the screen by Scrolling the main screen page
chemical cleaners to clean the flicking with your finger.
screen, as they may damage the
touch screen.
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
NOTE
There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high
altitudes.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (280,1)
! Touch screen operation ! Entering letters and numbers/list No. Function

This system is operated mainly by the screen operation
keys on the screen. ! Entering letters and numbers &
5
Delete a character/number entered
into the window.
When a screen key is touched, a beep
sounds. You can set the beep sound. When entering the Bluetooth device name
or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters ! List screen
Refer to “Unit settings” F5-17.
and numbers can be entered via the
NOTE screen.
. If the system does not respond to
touching a screen key, move your
finger away from the screen and touch
it again.
. Grayed-out screen keys cannot be
operated.
. The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
. In extremely cold conditions, the
screen may not be displayed correctly. Multimedia playlists (example: iPod play-
list)
Also, the screen keys may be less
responsive than usual when pressed. Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device
setting) No. Function
. When you look at the screen
through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen may No. Function &
1
Select a category that wants to play
back.
be dark and hard to see. If so, look at
the screen from different angles, adjust &
1
Enter the desired characters (alpha-
bet key mode). &
2
Select to return to the playback
display of each mode.
the screen settings or take off your
sunglasses. Refer to “Unit settings”
&
2 Switch to the screen for characters. &
3
Select to skip to the next or previous
page.
F5-17. &
3 Enter a space.
&
4
Set the characters/numbers entered
into the window.

Black plate (281,1)
! Initial screen
1. When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the initial screen
will be displayed and the system will begin
operating.
Except for Europe

! Connecting and disconnecting a
. For Europe: When using the USB memory/portable device
SUBARU STARLINK function, the dis-
The USB port and the AUX jack are
play screen may be different from the
located as shown in the following illustra-
screen above.
tion.
For Europe . After a few seconds, the caution
screen will be displayed.
. After about 5 seconds, the caution
screen automatically switches to the
next screen.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (282,1)
NOTE NOTE ! Selecting an audio source

. This unit does not support commer- Some functions can also be operated 1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.
cially available USB hubs. by using the voice command system.
. Turn on the power of the device For details, refer to “Voice command
when it is not turned on. system” F5-62.
. This device has a USB port for USB
memory/portable device. ! Turning the system on and off
. For compatible USB memory de-
vices, refer to “USB memory device”
F5-9.
. For compatible iPod models, refer to
“iPod” F5-9.
. If a USB hub is plugged in, only the
most recently connected USB device
will be recognized.
& Basic operation 2. Select the desired source.

This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/visual system. Some
information may not pertain to your sys-
tem. Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn
the audio/visual system on and off. When
Your audio/visual system works when the the system turns on, the mode that was in
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or use the last time the system was turned off
“ON” position. will be displayed. Press and hold the knob
to turn the display to off.
CAUTION
Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/
visual system on longer than neces-
sary when the engine is not running.

Black plate (283,1)

NOTE ! Selecting a function menu & Unit settings
. If the audio control screen appears, Press the HOME button to display home Sound quality adjustment, screen adjust-
select the “Source” key on the audio screen. ment, and information of the audio unit are
screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob displayed.
again. 1. Press the HOME button.
. When you push the AUDIO/TUNE
knob while any screen other than the
audio control screen is displayed, the
display will return to the audio control
screen.
. When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is
5
pushed and held, the graphic equalizer
screen will be displayed. Refer to
““Graphic Equaliser”” F5-22.
Item Function
Select to display the main 2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key.
AUDIO screen of the audio source that 3. Select the items to be set.
was selected previously.
Select to display the hands-free Available setting:
PHONE function using your cell phone. . General settings: Select the tab to
Refer to “Hands-free phone check the system software update infor-
system” F5-47.
mation. Refer to “General settings” F5-18.
Select to display the functions . Bluetooth settings: Select the tab to
APPS (if linked with a smartphone. Refer
equipped) to “SUBARU STARLINK (for set the Bluetooth settings. Refer to “Blue-
Europe)” F5-25. tooth settings” F5-18.
Select to display the functions . Sound settings: Select the tab to set
SETTINGS for performing various settings. the sound quality settings. Refer to
Refer to “Unit settings” F5-17. “Sound settings” F5-19.
. Display settings: Select the tab to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (284,1)
set the screen settings. Refer to “Display ! Bluetooth settings

! General settings
settings” F5-23. Touch the tab for the audio unit basic
Touch the tab to set Bluetooth.
. SUBARU STARLINK settings (if settings.
equipped): Select the tab to set the
SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to
“SUBARU STARLINK settings (for Eur-
ope)” F5-24.
Item Function
Item Function BT De- Select to pair/connect the Blue-
vices Con- tooth devices.
System nection
Language Select to change the language.
(if equipped) In-Car-De- Select to enter the Bluetooth
vice setting device name or PIN-code.
Button Select to set the sound beeps
Beeps/But- on/off. For details, refer to “Bluetooth® settings”
ton sounds
F5-42.
System Select to update software ver-
Software sions. This menu is not used in
usual operation.
Select to reset the device to
Reset to factory settings. This menu is
Factory not used in usual operation.
Setting When reset to factory setting,
turn ignition off and on again.

Black plate (285,1)
! Sound settings Item Function

Touch the tab to set the sound quality.
Vocal Im- Select to pick-up vocal sound
age Con- signal from the sound data, and
trol adjust it to right/left or front/rear.
Item Function
Balance/ Select to adjust speaker volume
Fader balance (right/left and front/rear).
Speed Vo- Select to adjust speaker volume
lume Con- coupled to vehicle speed.
trol
Graphic Select to adjust sound quality in
Equaliser each frequency band.
Sound Re- Select to add high-pitched tone
storer to the compressed audio file.
Volume Select to adjust volume differ-
Smoother ence between audio sources.
Virtual Select to add harmonic tone so

Bass that low-pitched tone is
strengthened.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (286,1)
Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and ! “Balance/Fader”
default value. A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
Item Step Default
levels is important for good quality audio
Volume Balance Balance L9-R9 0 (Center) program listening.
Control Fader F9-R9 0 (Center) Keep in mind that when listening to a
Except for Australia:
stereo recording or broadcast, changing
– LHD: R3 the right/left balance will increase the
Balance/Fader – RHD: L3 volume of 1 group of sounds while
Vocal Image Balance L9-R9 decreasing the volume of another.
Control For Australia:
R3
Touch the “Set” key of the “Balance/Fader”
key. The “Balance/Fader” screen will
Fader F9-R9 0 (Center) appear.
Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low
Graphic Equaliser −6-+6 0 (Flat)
Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON
Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid
Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid
Example

Black plate (287,1)
. Volume Balance setting . Vocal image setting ! “Speed Volume Control”

1. Select the “Volume Balance Control” 1. Select the “Vocal Image Control” key. The system adjusts to the optimum
key. volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed to compensate for in-
creased vehicle noise.
1. Touch the right side key of the “Speed
Volume Control” key.
2. Select the desired item. The “High”
key comes to have a bigger effect. When
the “OFF” key is selected, the speed
5
volume control function is cancelled.
2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or

2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or “ ” key.
“ ” key. 3. Adjust the fader by pressing “ ” or
3. Adjust the fader by pressing “ ” or “ ” key.
“ ” key.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (288,1)
! “Graphic Equaliser” ! “Sound Restorer”

You can adjust the sound quality by You can play compressed audio data with
increasing/decreasing the gain for each a sound quality that is close to the original
frequency range. sound.
1. Touch the “Set” key of the “Graphic Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the right
Equaliser” key. side key of the “Sound Restorer” key.
4. Adjust the level of each frequency

band by pressing “ ” or “ ” key.
2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer

patterns (the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Acoustic”,
“Impact”, “Smooth” and “Flat” key) and 3
customized patterns (“SET 1” - “SET 3”
key) are available.
3. When customizing the equalizer pat-
tern, touch among “SET 1”, “SET 2” or
“SET 3” and then touch the “Adjust” key.

Black plate (289,1)
! “Volume Smoother” ! “Virtual Bass” ! Display settings

This function reduces the difference in This function enables you to adjust the Touch the tab to set display.
volume among the sound sources to be bass tone.
played. 1. Touch the right side key of the “Virtual
1. Touch the right side key of the “Volume Bass” key.
Smoother” key. 2. Select the “OFF”, “Low”, “Mid” or
2. Select the “OFF”, “Low”, “Mid” or “High” key. The “High” key comes to have
“High” key. The “High” key comes to have a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is
a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is selected, the virtual bass function is
selected, the volume smoother function is cancelled. 5
cancelled.
Item Function
The “Auto”, “Day”, or “Night” key
can be selected on the pop-up
Day/Night screen.
Mode When the “Auto” key is selected,
the screen changes to day or
night mode depending on the
position of the headlight switch.
Example Touch the “+” or “−” key to adjust
Brightness the brightness.
! “Vocal Image Control” NOTE

Refer to ““Balance/Fader”” F5-20. . When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-
tern may appear on the screen due to
optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disruptive, please operate the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (290,1)
screen without polarized sunglasses. ! SUBARU STARLINK settings (for

. If the screen is set to “Day” mode Europe)
with the headlight switch turned on, Touch the tab to change the SUBARU
this condition is memorized even with STARLINK settings.
the engine turned off.
! How to adjust the rear view
image
In Camera display (if equipped), the
brightness, tint, colour, and black level of
the screen can be adjusted.
1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop
the vehicle.
2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the Camera display
shift lever (MT models) or select lever
(CVT models) in the “R” position, and then WARNING
touch the display.
When adjusting the camera display
3. Touch the “Display Adjustment” key.
screen, make sure to depress the
4. Touch the items to adjust the rear brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle Item Function
camera screen. from moving. Failure to do so may Select to initialize cache files
lead to a serious accident. that the browser stores. If the
Browser confirmation screen appears
cache and the “OK” key is selected, the
cache files will be deleted.
NOTE
The Camera display can be accessed
when the rear camera monitor is dis-
played.

Black plate (291,1)
& SUBARU STARLINK NOTE

No. Function
(for Europe) The SUBARU STARLINK connection
The SUBARU STARLINK function allows error screen will be displayed due to &
4
Select to go to the iHeartRadio
APPS screen.
the system to link with a smartphone using one of the following possible reasons.
Bluetooth. . Your smartphone and the system &
5
Select to go to the Weather APPS
screen.
has not been connected via USB (for
! How to use SUBARU STARLINK iPhone) or Bluetooth (for Android). NOTE
1. Connect to the audio system. Use a . SUBARU STARLINK APPS has not . The error screen will be displayed
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and been activated. while using SUBARU STARLINK due to
Bluetooth for Android devices. one of the following possible reasons. 5
. For details about connecting an ! APPS main screen – When your smartphone has no
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect- service or the Bluetooth communi-
ing and disconnecting a USB memory/ cation is not possible.
portable device” F5-15. – When your smartphone is turned
. For details about registering or con- off.
necting an Android device: Refer to – When the SUBARU STARLINK
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth® APPS is quit.
device” F5-42. – When connection to the SUBARU
2. Press the HOME button, and then STARLINK server is not possible.
touch the “APPS” key on the home – When a problem occurs other
screen, or press the APPS button. The than a server error.
APPS screen is displayed. . When using the SUBARU STARLINK
3. Touch “SUBARU STARLINK” on the function, a disclaimer screen will be
APPS screen, the disclaimer screen or the displayed. Be sure to fully read the
error screen is displayed. contents before using the function.
4. Touch the “Check” key on the disclai- No. Function
. Supported devices
mer screen and then the APPS main
screen will appear. If you touch the &
1
Select to go to the Music APPS
screen.
– iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/
iPhone 5 (iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)/
“Cancel” key, the disclaimer screen dis-
appears and the previous screen will be &
2
Select to go to the News APPS
screen.
iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s
– Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)
displayed again.
&
3
Select to go to the Calendar APPS
screen.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (292,1)
& AM/FM radio No. Function

! Control screen and panel For Europe and Australia:
Select to search for stations stored in
the preset channels in the direction
of a higher frequency. When a
receivable station is found, the sys-
tem tunes in to the frequency for 10
seconds. The preset scan ends once
all the preset channels have been
scanned.
&
4 Except for Europe and Australia:
Select to scan radio channels.
This function enables searching for
receivable stations automatically,
and tunes in to a frequency for 5
seconds if a station is found. When
the 5-second period has elapsed, the
system searches for the next recei-
vable station again, and tunes in to
the frequency for 5 seconds.
No. Function No. Function
For Europe and Australia: &
5 Select to open the Option screen.
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen. . TA icon: If you touch a key, the system tunes
It is displayed when turning the to the stored frequency.
&
2 Select to change the FM band. TA setting ON on the FM Op-
tions screen. It is not displayed &
6
If you touch and hold a key, the
system stores the frequency to the
when turning the TA setting OFF.
&3 . NEWS icon:
selected preset channel. Refer to
“Presetting a station” F5-27.
It is displayed when turning the
News setting ON on the FM Select to display the sound setting
Options screen. It is not dis- &
7 screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
17.
played when turning the News
setting OFF.
Turn to adjust volume.
&
8 Press to turn the audio system on/
off.

Black plate (293,1)
When a station name has been acquired, gram when driving across several loca-
No. Function
the station name will be displayed instead tions.
Turn to step up/down frequencies. of the frequency.
! Selecting a desired options
&
9
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to “Selecting an audio source” 1. Tune in the desired station. screen
F5-16. 2. If you touch and hold a key, the system
stores the frequency to the selected 1. Select the tab. The “Options”
&
10
Press to seek for a station/channel.
Press and hold for continuous seek. preset channel. screen will be displayed.
NOTE
. Although FM is normally static free, 5
reception can be affected by the sur-
rounding area, atmospheric conditions,
station strength and transmitter dis-
tance. Buildings or other obstructions
may cause momentary static, flutter or
station interference. If reception con-
tinues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a
stronger station.
. The radio automatically changes to
stereo reception when a stereo broad-
cast is received. Example: Options screen (FM radio for
Europe)
! How to change the source ! Radio data system (for Europe and
Australia)
Select the “AM” or “FM” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio RDS (Radio Data System) is an FM
source” F5-16. multiplex broadcasting system, and it
transmits digital information as subcarrier
! Presetting a station signals on FM radio. RDS broadcasts
The radio mode has a preset function. program information and text information,
In total 18 stations can be set for the FM etc.
band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and The transmitted data of RDS contains the
12 stations can be set for the AM band (6 control data so that the system can
each for AM1 and AM2). continue to receive the same radio pro-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (294,1)
No. Function
For FM radio:
Select to turn the TA (Traffic An-
nouncement) interrupt function ON
&
4 and OFF. If the setting is ON, when
the current station broadcasts TA,
the system will automatically switch
the audio source to the radio (TA).
Select to adjust the volume when
&
5 interrupting (Alarm/TA/News) be-
tween 0 and 40.
Select to start the Auto Store func-
&
6 tion. Refer to “Selecting a desired
auto store” F5-28.
For Europe: 3. If you select the “OK” key, the Auto
No. Function Select to switch the sensitivity setting Store screen will be displayed. If you
between LO and DX during the seek select the “Cancel” key, the screen will
For FM radio: function (Default setting: DX). The
Select to turn the news interrupt &
7 set value is applied both to FM and
AM. If you change the setting from
go back to the Options screen.
function ON and OFF. If the setting is
&1 ON, when the current station broad-
casts a news program, the system
DX to LO for FM (Options screen),
the setting for AM (Options screen)
will automatically switch the audio will be also changed to LO.
source to the radio (News).
For FM radio: ! Selecting a desired auto store
&
2 Select to turn the AF (Alternative
Frequency) setting ON and OFF. Select to detect radio stations automati-
cally and to store them in the order of radio
For FM radio: wave strength.
Select to turn the REG (Regional)
setting ON and OFF. If the setting is 1. Touch the tab.
&
3
ON, the system will automatically
search the station of which the PI 2. Touch the right side key of the “Auto
code matches completely. If the AF Store” key.
setting is OFF, the button is disabled
and turning ON/OFF is not possible.

Black plate (295,1)
& CD No. Function

! Control screen and panel Turn to select a track/file.
&
11
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-16.
Press to select a track/file.
&
12 Press and hold to fast forward/re-
wind.
NOTE
. Depending on the compression data 5
format of the inserted CD, some keys
may not be displayed on the screen.
. If a disc contains CD-DA files and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA
files can be played back.
. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the
No. Function No. Function title of the disc and track will be
displayed. Up to 32 characters can be
&
1
selection screen. &
6
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Select to choose a folder. displayed.
. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,
Select to display the play mode Select to display the sound setting
&
2 currently selected. Refer to “Select
play mode” F5-30.
&
17.
only the track number would be dis-
played on the screen.
Audio CD: Turn to adjust volume.
Select to display a track list. &
8 Press to turn the audio system on/
&
3
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
off.
Select to display a folder list.
&9 Press to eject a disc.
&
4 Shows progress.
&
10 Disc slot
The tracks in the disc are played
&
5 back for 10 seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (296,1)
! Loading a disc ! Unloading a disc ! Select play mode

Press the eject button and remove the The play mode settings display will appear
CAUTION disc. when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
Never try to disassemble the audio items.
kit or lubricate any part of the CD
player. Do not insert anything other Icon Function
than a disc into the slot.
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Insert a disc into the disc slot. After
insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.
Touch to start repeat all.
Touch to start folder repeat.
! How to change the source Touch to start shuffle all.
The CD operation screen can be reached

by the following methods: Touch to start shuffle folder.
. Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading a disc”
F5-30.
Return to the control screen.
. Select the “DISC” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
NOTE source” F5-16. NOTE
When inserting a disc, gently insert it Depending on the compression data
with the label facing up. formant of the inserted CD, the dis-
played play mode may differ from the
illustration shown here.

Black plate (297,1)
& USB memory ! Control screen and panel

Audio files on the USB memory can be
played back.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the USB memory while
driving. Doing so may result in
losing control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
5
CAUTION
. Do not leave your USB memory
in the car. In particular, high No. Function No. Function
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the USB memory.
&
1
selection screen. &
8
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
. Do not push down on or apply Select to display the play mode Turn to select a file/track.
unnecessary pressure to the &
play mode” F5-32. &
9
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
USB memory while it is con- F5-16.
nected as this may damage the &
3 Select to display Folders List.
USB memory or its terminal. &
10
Press to select a file/track.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
. Do not insert foreign objects into &
4 Shows progress.
the port as this may damage the The tracks in the disc are played back NOTE
USB memory or its terminal. &
5 10 seconds each from the beginning
of the track.
If you press the mute switch on the
steering wheel during playback, the
&
6 Select to choose a folder. audio will be muted. If you press the
mute switch once again, the volume
Select to display the sound setting will return.
&
17.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (298,1)
! Connecting a USB device ! Select play mode & iPod

You can connect a USB device to the The play mode settings display will appear Audio files on the iPod can be played.
vehicle USB port. Refer to “Connecting when play mode key is touched. Select
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta- the preferred play mode from the following WARNING
ble device” F5-15. items.
! How to change the source Icon Function or connect the iPod while driving.
The USB Audio playback screen can be Doing so may result in losing con-
reached by the following methods: Touch to start 1 track repeat. trol of your vehicle and cause an
. Connect a USB memory. Refer to accident or serious injury.
“Connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-15. Touch to start repeat all.
. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the CAUTION
source select screen. Refer to “Selecting
Touch to start folder repeat. . Do not leave your portable player
an audio source” F5-16.
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
Touch to start shuffle all. may damage the portable player.
. Do not push down on or apply
Touch to start shuffle folder. unnecessary pressure to the por-
table player while it is connected
as this may damage the portable
Return to the control screen. player or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.

Black plate (299,1)
! Control screen and panel or displayed properly.

! Connecting the iPod
You can connect an iPod to the vehicle
USB port using the USB cable. Refer to
memory/portable device” F5-15.
! How to change the source
The iPod operation screen can be
reached by the following methods: 5
. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-15.
. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the
source select screen. Refer to “Selecting
No. Function No. Function
an audio source” F5-16.
&
1
selection screen. &
8
Press to select a track/file.
Select to display the play mode NOTE
&
play mode” F5-34. . When an iPod is connected using a
genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts
&
3
Select to display iPod List. Refer to
“iPod settings” F5-34. charging its battery.
. When an iPod is connected and the
&
4 Shows progress. audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
&
5
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-17. same point it was last used.
. Depending on the iPod that is con-
&
6
Press to turn the audio system on/off. nected to the system, certain functions
Turn to select a track/file.
may not be available.
&
7 Press to select an audio source. Refer . Files/tracks selected by operating a
to “Selecting an audio source” F5-16. connected iPod may not be recognized
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (300,1)
! Select play mode ! iPod settings & Bluetooth audio

The play mode settings display will appear You can choose the following items from The Bluetooth audio system enables
when play mode key is touched. Select the list screen after touching the tab users to enjoy listening to music that is
the preferred play mode from the following on the screen. played on a portable player on the vehicle
items. speakers via wireless communication.
Icon Function
Icon Function This audio system supports Bluetooth, a
Select to display the play list. wireless data system capable of playing
Touch to start 1 track repeat. portable audio music without cables. If
your device does not support Bluetooth,
Select to display tracks list. the Bluetooth audio system will not func-
Touch to start repeat all. tion.
Select to display artists list. WARNING
Touch to start shuffle all.
. Do not operate the player’s con-
Select to display albums list. trols or connect to the Bluetooth
Touch to turn off shuffle. audio system while driving.
Select to open other list (“Gen- Doing so may result in loss of
res”, “Composers”, “Audiobooks”
Touch to start shuffle album. and “Podcast”). control of your vehicle and cause
an accident or serious injury.
Select to open “Genres” list. . Your audio unit is fitted with
Return to the control screen. Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
Select to open “Composers” list. cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
Select to open “Audiobooks” list.
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Select to open “Podcasts” list. Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.

Black plate (301,1)
. Before using Bluetooth devices, ! Control screen and panel

users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-
synchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardiover-
ter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its opera-
tion under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
5
unexpected effects on the opera-
tion of such medical devices.
CAUTION No. Function No. Function

Do not leave your portable player in
the vehicle. In particular, high tem- &
1
selection screen. &
7
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
peratures inside the vehicle may Select to display the play mode Turn to select a track.
damage the portable player. &
play mode” F5-36.
&
8 Press to select an audio source. Refer
to “Selecting an audio source” F5-16.
&
3
Select to display as a list (for the
models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high- &
9
Press to select a track.
er).
Select to play back or pause a track.
&
4
The track pauses when pressed dur-
ing playback and plays back when
pressed during pause.
Select to open Bluetooth Settings.
&
5 Refer to “Setting Bluetooth details”
F5-45.
&
6
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-17.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (302,1)
NOTE . Bluetooth device information is re- NOTE

. Depending on the Bluetooth device gistered when the Bluetooth device is Depending on the type of portable
that is connected to the system, the connected to the Bluetooth audio sys- player connected, some functions
music may start playing when selecting tem. When selling or disposing of the may not be available and/or the screen
while it is paused. Conversely, the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio may look differently than shown in this
music may pause when selecting information from the system. Refer to manual.
while it is playing. “Bluetooth® settings” F5-42.
. In the following conditions, the sys- ! Select play mode
tem may not function: ! Connecting a Bluetooth device The play mode settings display will appear
– The Bluetooth device is turned To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is when play mode key is touched. Select
off. necessary to register a Bluetooth device the preferred play mode from the following
– The Bluetooth device is not con- with the system. items.
nected. . Registering an additional device
1. Select the “Add” key on the BT Icon Function
– The Bluetooth device has a low
battery. Devices Connection screen.
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
. It may take time to connect the 2. For more information: Refer to “Regis-
phone when Bluetooth audio is being tering/connecting Bluetooth® device” F5-
played. 42. Touch to start repeat all.
. For operating the portable player, . Selecting a registered device
see the instruction manual that comes
with it. 1. Select the “Select” key on the BT Touch to repeat the tracks in the
Devices Connection screen. group.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon-
nected due to poor reception from the 2. For more information: Refer to “BT
Bluetooth network when the ignition Devices Connection screen” F5-45. Touch to start shuffle all.
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion, the system will automatically ! How to change the source Touch to play tracks in the order
in which they are registered in
reconnect to the portable player. Select the “BT Audio” key on the source the audio device.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon- select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
nected on purpose, such as it was source” F5-16. Touch to start shuffle group.
turned off, this does not happen.
Reconnect the portable player manu-
ally.

Black plate (303,1)
terminal.
Icon Function
. Do not insert foreign objects into
Return to the control screen. the port as this may damage the
portable audio device or its term-
inal.
NOTE
If the connected device does not sup-
port the group repeat mode, the group
functions are not available.
& AUX 5
WARNING
or connect the portable audio device
while driving. Doing so may result in
loss of control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave portable audio de-
vice in the vehicle. The tempera-
ture inside the vehicle may be-
come high, resulting in damage
to the player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table audio device while it is
connected as this may damage
the portable audio device or its
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)
! Control screen and panel ! Connecting a portable audio device

You can connect a portable audio device
to the vehicle’s AUX jack. Refer to
! How to change the source
The AUX operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connect a portable audio device. Refer
to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB
. Select the “AUX” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-16.
No. Function ! Audio level settings
&
1
selection screen.
You can set the audio gain level.
1. Select the tab on the screen, and
&
2
Select to open the Options screen. then touch the right side key of the “Audio
Refer to “Audio level settings” F5-38.
Level” key.
Press to display the sound setting 2. Select the audio level from the follow-
&
17. ing items.
. Low
&
4
Press to turn the audio system on/off. . Mid
. High
&
5 Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-16.

Black plate (305,1)
Audio/Steering switches for audio 5-39
Steering switches for audio

Some parts of the audio/visual system can
be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
1) +/− switch
2) / switch
3) Mute/Enter switch
4) List switch
5) Back switch
6) Source switch
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (306,1)
5-40 Audio/Steering switches for audio
. +/− switch
Mode Operation Function
Press Volume up/down
Except list screen
Press and hold Volume up/down continuously
List screen Press Move cursor up/down
. / switch
Press Preset channel up/down
AM/FM Radio Seek up/down continuously while the switch is
Press and hold being pressed
Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, Press Select a track/file

BT audio Press and hold Fast forward/rewind
List screen Press Move cursor left/right

Black plate (307,1)
Audio/Steering switches for audio 5-41
. Mute/Enter switch
List screen Press Select cursor entry
CD, USB, iPod, BT audio Press Pause or play back
AM/FM radio, AUX Press Mute or cancel mute
. Back switch
5
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen
All Press and hold Return to the HOME screen
. List switch
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Show list screen
. Source switch
All Press Change audio modes
NOTE
For Europe: In the SUBARU STARLINK mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS.

Black plate (308,1)
5-42 Audio/Bluetooth® settings
Bluetooth® settings & Registering/connecting

Bluetooth® device
You can register up to five devices,
WARNING
regardless of whether they are Bluetooth
phones or audio devices.
Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe
location before connecting or oper- NOTE
ating a Bluetooth phone or audio . Once the phone has been regis-
device. Failure to do so may result tered, it is possible to use the hands-
in loss of control of your vehicle and free system or Bluetooth audio.
cause an accident or serious injury. . This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
NOTE ! Registering a Bluetooth phone for Settings (When the tab is selected)
The images shown in this Owner’s the first time 4. To register a device, touch the “Set”
Manual are sample images. The actual To use the hands-free system, it is key on the “BT Devices Connection” key.
images may vary depending on the necessary to register a Bluetooth phone
market and specifications of your ve- with the system.
hicle.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
& Regulatory information device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
Audio device for the first time” F5-43.
1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting
of your cell phone on.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are . This function is not available when
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth connection setting of your
SIG, Inc. cell phone is set to off.
2. Press the HOME button and select the
“SETTINGS” key.
3. Touch the tab and then the “SET- “BT Devices Connection” screen (At the
TINGS” screen will appear. initial startup and when no device is
registered)

Black plate (309,1)
Audio/Bluetooth® settings 5-43
5. Touch the “Add” key. 7. Check that the screen is displayed type of Bluetooth device being con-
when registration is complete. nected, a message confirming regis-
. The system waits for connection tration may be displayed on the Blue-
requests coming from the registered tooth device’s screen. Respond and
device. operate the Bluetooth device accord-
. At this stage, the Bluetooth func- ing to the confirmation message.
tions are not yet available. 4. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de- . The system waits for connection
vice for the first time requests coming from the registered 5
To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary device.
to register an audio device with the . At this stage, the Bluetooth func-
system. tions are not yet available.
When the “Add” key is selected (Waiting The device registration procedure is the
for the connection request from a device) same for both the hands-free system and
. For details about operating the Blue- Bluetooth audio.
tooth device, see the manual that 1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
comes with it. screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
. To cancel the registration, select the phone for the first time” F5-42.
“Cancel” key. 2. Select the “Add” key.
6. Register the Bluetooth device using The “Add” key is not displayed when five
your Bluetooth device. devices are already registered.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP To add another device, you need to delete
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible one of the registered devices.
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the Press and hold the key for the device to
type of Bluetooth device being con- be deleted, and then select the “OK” key.
nected, a message confirming regis- 3. Register the Bluetooth device using
tration may be displayed on the Blue- your Bluetooth device.
tooth device’s screen. Respond and . A PIN-code is not required for SSP
operate the Bluetooth device accord- (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
ing to the confirmation message. Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (310,1)
! Profiles
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations
Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth Bluetooth Specification Registering a Bluetooth de- Ver. 1.1 Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Audio Device vice
Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1
PBAP (Phone Book Access Transferring the contacts Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
Bluetooth Phone profile)
MAP (Message Access Bluetooth phone message — Ver. 1.0
Profile)
SPP (Serial Port Profile) Connecting a Bluetooth — Ver. 1.1

phone
A2DP (Advanced Audio Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2
Distribution Profile)
Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth audio system
AVRCP (Audio/Video Re- Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.4
mote Control Profile)
NOTE
. If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles
individually will not be possible.
. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may
not work properly.
. Contact your local dealer to arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the
vehicle.

Black plate (311,1)
Audio/Bluetooth® settings 5-45
& Setting Bluetooth details No. Function

. All icons are dimmed when Blue-
tooth is set to off or when the connec-
! BT Devices Connection screen Show the status of the device connection cannot be made with the device.
1. Press the HOME button on the audio &
3 tion profile. (The icon illuminates while
connected.)
panel. NOTE
2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key, and then &
4
Delete the registered device. Refer to
“Deleting a Bluetooth device” F5-46. . It may take time if the device con-
touch tab. nection is carried out during Bluetooth
Switch to connect/disconnect the Blue-
3. Select the desired device to register. &
5 tooth communication. Refer to “Blue-
tooth ON/OFF” F5-45.
audio playback.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
device being connected, it may be 5
! Connecting a Bluetooth device necessary to perform additional steps
Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (Phones and on the device.
audio devices) can be registered. . It is not possible to establish a
Bluetooth connection with iOS devices
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been currently connected with a USB cable.
registered, select which device to connect . Supported profile icons of the un-
to. selected devices are not displayed if
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection” several Bluetooth devices have been
screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection registered.
screen” F5-45.
! Bluetooth ON/OFF
2. Select the device to be connected.
“BT Devices Connection” screen (One . Supported profile icons will be dis- 1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
device is registered.) played. screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection
– : Phone screen” F5-45.
No. Function – : Audio device 2. Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the
– : Smartphone Application right side of the “Connect with Bluetooth”
Register the device. Refer to “Regis-
key. The “ON” key establishes a connec-
&
1 tering/connecting Bluetooth® device”
F5-42.
(for Europe)
tion, and the “OFF” key disconnects the
. Supported profile icons for currently
connection.
&
2
Make the connection to the registered
device.
connected devices will illuminate.
. The audio icon illuminates only
when in the Bluetooth audio mode.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)
NOTE
No. Function
The setting is fixed as “OFF” when no
device is registered. &
7 Switch the screen to input characters.
! Deleting a Bluetooth device

! Editing the Bluetooth device
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection” name
screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection
The device name can be set or changed.
screen” F5-45.
1. Touch the “Name” key.
2. Select the desired device.
2. Enter a name and then select the “Set”
3. Touch the key for the device to be
key.
deleted, and then select the “OK” key.
! Editing the PIN-Code
NOTE The PIN-code can be set/changed.
When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the No. Function
1. Select the “PIN” key.
contact data will be deleted at the same
time. &
1
Display the Bluetooth device address
of the in-vehicle equipment. 2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the
“Set” key.
Display the Bluetooth device name of
! “In-Car-Device setting” screen the in-vehicle equipment. The default
The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed &
2 name is “SUBARU BT”, which can be
changed by selecting it and entering
NOTE
and changed. alphanumeric characters. If the “PIN” key is already selected, the
1. Display the “SETTINGS” screen. Refer “ABC” key is cross-hatched and dis-
Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle
to “BT Devices Connection screen” F5- abled.
45. &
3
equipment. The default code is
“1234”, which can be changed by
2. On the “SETTINGS” screen for In-Car- selecting it and entering numbers.
Device setting, select the “Set” key. Delete one character from the cur-
&
4 rently selected item (BT device name
or the PIN code).
&
5
Save the current BT device name and
PIN code.
&
6 Numeric input keys.

Black plate (313,1)
Audio/Hands–free phone system 5-47
Hands-free phone system cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re- same time, the following problems may
synchronization therapy-pace- occur:
The hands-free system enables calls to be makers or implantable cardiover- – The Bluetooth connection may
made and received without having to take ter defibrillators should consult be cut.
your hands off the steering wheel. the manufacturer of the device – Noise may be heard when play-
for information about its opera- ing back voice with the Bluetooth
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth tion under the influence of radio function.
is a wireless data system that enables cell waves. Radio waves could have . The other party’s voice will be heard
phones to be used without being con- unexpected effects on the opera- from the front speakers. The audio/
nected by a cable or placed in a cradle. tion of such medical devices. visual system will be muted during 5
phone calls or when hands-free voice
The operating procedure of the phone is
commands are used.
explained here. CAUTION . Talk alternately with the other party
WARNING Do not leave your cell phone in the on the phone. If both parties speak at
vehicle. The temperature inside may the same time, the other party may not
. While driving, do not use a cell rise to a level that could damage the hear what has been said. (This is not a
phone or connect the Bluetooth phone. malfunction.)
phone. . Keep call volume down. Otherwise,
. Your audio unit is fitted with the other party’s voice may be audible
Bluetooth antennas. People with NOTE outside the vehicle and voice echo may
implantable cardiac pacemakers, . If your cell phone does not support increase. When talking on the phone,
cardiac resynchronization ther- Bluetooth, this system cannot function. speak clearly towards the microphone.
apy-pacemakers or implantable . In the following conditions, the sys- . The other party may not hear you
cardioverter defibrillators should tem may not function: clearly when:
maintain a reasonable distance – The cell phone is turned off. – Driving on an unpaved road.
between themselves and the – The current position is outside (Making excessive traffic noise.)
Bluetooth antennas. The radio the communication area. – Driving at high speeds.
waves may affect the operation – The cell phone is not connected. – The roof or windows are open.
of such devices. – The cell phone has a low battery. – The air conditioning vents are
. Before using Bluetooth devices, . When using the hands free function pointed towards the microphone.
users of any electrical medical and other Bluetooth functions at the – The sound of the air conditioning
device other than implantable
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (314,1)
5-48 Audio/Hands–free phone system
fan is loud. & Control screen No. Function

– There is a negative effect on
sound quality due to the phone &
1
Open the Incoming Calls screen.
Refer to “By incoming calls” F5-50.
and/or network being used.
. When another phone is connected, &
2
Open the Outgoing Calls screen.
the following registered data cannot be Refer to “By outgoing calls” F5-51.
read:
– Contact data
&
3
Open the Contacts screen. Refer to
“By contacts list” F5-51.
– Call history data Changes the screen from the Menu
– All phone settings &
4 screen to the dialpad screen. Refer to
“By dialpad” F5-52.
. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to Open the phone volume setting
“Unit settings” F5-17. &
5 screen. Refer to “Phone volume set-
tings” F5-55.
. Once initialized, the data and set- Use to make a phone call. You cannot
tings will be erased. Take extra caution Phone (menu) screen
when initializing the data. &
6
press this key until you open the
dialpad screen and enter a phone
number.
. The voice command system sup-
ports phone commands, so dialing a Open the BT Devices Connection
phone number using your voice is &
7 screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth
details” F5-45.
possible. Refer to “Voice command
system” F5-62. &
8
Enter the phone number that you
want to call.
. The images shown in this Owner’s
Manual are sample images. The actual &
9
Switch the screen to the Phone
(Menu) screen.
images and displayed messages may
vary depending on the market and NOTE
specifications of your vehicle. When the cell phone is not registered
and the Bluetooth setting is off, a
Phone (dialpad) screen message is displayed instead of menu
items.

Black plate (315,1)
& Registering/connecting a & Using the phone switch/mi- . Microphone

Bluetooth phone crophone The microphone is used when talking on
To use the hands-free system for cell . Steering switch the phone.
phones, it is necessary to register a cell
phone with the system. Refer to “Register- By pressing the phone switch, a call can
ing/connecting Bluetooth® device” F5-42. be received or ended without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
! Bluetooth phone condition display
The condition of the Bluetooth phone
appears on the upper right side of the 5
screen.
Type A
1) Volume control switch

2) Off hook switch
3) On hook switch
Type B
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)
& How to change the hands- Item Function

free phone system
Incoming Display the history of incoming
The phone (menu) screen can be used to calls. Refer to “By incoming
Calls calls” F5-50.
make a phone call. To display the hands-
free operation screen, press the HOME Display the history of outgoing
button and then select the “PHONE” key, Outgoing calls. Refer to “By outgoing calls”
Calls F5-51.
or press the off hook switch on the
steering wheel. Display the phonebook. Refer to
Contacts “By contacts list” F5-51.
& Making a call Dialpad/ Dial a phone number. Refer to
Keypad “By dialpad” F5-52.
There are several methods by which a call
can be made, as described below. NOTE
1. Press the HOME button on the audio Incoming Calls screen
You can also make a call by using the
panel. following functions.
2. Touch the “PHONE” key. . Make a call using the off hook
No. Function
3. Select the desired key to make a call switch on the steering wheel. Refer to &
1 Opens the “Outgoing Calls” screen.
from the following list. “By off hook switch” F5-53.
. Make a call using voice operation. &
2 Opens the “Contacts” screen.
Refer to “Voice command system” F5- Deletes all incoming call history data.
62. &
3 The “Delete All” key is disabled when
there is no incoming call history.
! By incoming calls
On the PHONE screen, select “Incoming When you select an item in the history list
Calls” to open the Incoming Calls screen. on the “Incoming Calls” screen, the out-
You can make a call by selecting an item going call screen opens.
in the incoming call history list. NOTE
If there is no incoming call history, a . Up to 10 items in the incoming call
message appears to indicate that there history are listed. Scroll the screen to
is no incoming call history data. see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same

Black plate (317,1)
number continuously, only the most number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history. recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in . When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is the contact list is received, the name is
displayed. displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also . Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system. memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be . International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cell made depending on the type of cell
phone you have. phone you have.
. The list should group together con- . The list should group together con- 5
secutive entries with the same phone secutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type. number and same call type.
Outgoing Calls screen
! By outgoing calls ! By contacts list
On the phone (menu) screen, select the No. Function On the phone (menu) screen, select the
“Outgoing Calls” key to open the “Out- “Contacts” key to open the phone number
going Calls” screen. &
1 Open the “Incoming Calls” screen. list screen.
You can make a call by selecting an item
in the outgoing call history list.
&
2 Open the “Contacts” screen. You can make a call by selecting an item
in the phone number list (up to five phone
If there is no outgoing call history, a Delete all outgoing call history data. numbers are listed).
message appears to indicate that there &
3 The “Delete All” key is disabled when
there is no outgoing call history. If there is no contact data, a message is
is no outgoing call history data. displayed to indicate that there is no
When you select an item in the history list contact data.
on the “Outgoing Calls” screen, the out-
going call screen opens.
NOTE
. Up to 10 items in the outgoing call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to
see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (318,1)
list of contacts. ! By dialpad

When you select a phone number on the Input the phone number manually using
screen, the outgoing call screen opens. the keypad displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Up to 1000 items in the contact data are
listed. Scroll the screen to see items
that are not on the screen.
! When the contact is empty
For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-
patible Bluetooth phones
Contacts screen On the “Contacts” screen, select the
“Download Contacts” key. A screen where
No. Function you can select how to download contacts
opens.
&
1 Open the “Incoming Calls” screen. You can select to download all items or
Phone (dialpad) screen
download one item. For details, refer to
&
2 Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.
“Update contacts from phone” F5-56. No. Function
Open a pop-up screen for starting the Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to
&
3 download of contact data. Refer to ! Delete contacts &
1 9 and *, #, and +. To enter “+”, press
“Update contacts from phone” F5-56. When the “Delete All” key is selected, all and hold the “0” key.
Delete all contact data. The “Delete contact data downloaded into the in-
&
2
Delete one character from the entered
characters.
&
4
All” key is disabled when there is no
contact data. Refer to “Deleting the
vehicle equipment will be deleted. Refer
to “Deleting the contact data” F5-57.
contact data” F5-57. &
3
Switch the screen to the phone
(menu) screen.
Open a list of contacts that starts with
the selected character. This key is Open the Outgoing Calls screen and
&
5 cross-hatched and cannot be se-
lected if there is no contact data that
dials the entered phone number. This
is the same as pressing the off hook
starts with the selected character, &
4 switch on the steering wheel. This key
is cross-hatched and cannot be se-
lected until the phone number is
Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the entered.

Black plate (319,1)
! Outgoing screen . The , , and keys are disabled

No. Function
on the outgoing call screen.
&
5
Open the Options screen. Refer to
“Phone volume settings” F5-55. & Receiving a call
Open the BT Devices Connection
&
6 screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth ! Incoming calls
details” F5-45. When a call is received, the incoming call
screen is displayed with a sound.
When you enter a phone number on the
screen and select the key, the “Out- When you receive a phone call while the
cell phone is connected, the screen
going Call” screen opens.
changes to the incoming call screen. 5
! By off hook switch
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.
1. Press the off hook switch on the Outgoing call screen
steering wheel to display the phone top
screen. No. Function
2. Check that the call screen is dis-
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
played. &
1 “Phone volume settings” F5-55.
Abort the call. The screen returns to
&
2
the phone (menu) screen. This is the
same as pressing the on hook switch
on the steering wheel.
NOTE Incoming call screen

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone being connected, it may be No. Function
necessary to perform additional steps Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
on the phone. &
. When you are on the outgoing call
screen, the screen changes to the call
screen when the other party answers
the call.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)
No. Function
! By off/on hook switch
When you receive a call, you can also
Put the incoming call on hold. This
function may not work on some cell answer it by pressing the off hook switch
on the steering wheel. To end a call, press
&
2
phone models. This function is the
same as pressing the on hook switch the on hook switch.
on the steering wheel for a short
period of time.
& Talking on the phone
Open the call screen. This function is
&
3 the same as pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel.
The call screen opens when you perform
the following operations.
Reject the incoming call. This function . When you accept a call on the incom-
&
4
is the same as pressing and holding
the on hook switch on the steering
ing call screen (by selecting the key),
wheel. the call screen opens.
. When you are on the outgoing call Call screen
NOTE screen, the screen changes to the call
. During international phone calls, the screen when the other party answers the
other party’s name or number may not call.
be displayed correctly depending on
the type of cell phone you have. While talking on the phone, this screen is
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth displayed. The operations outlined below
phone, both the system and Bluetooth can be performed on this screen.
phone may sound simultaneously . When the incoming call screen is
when there is an incoming call. Refer displayed and you accept the call, the
to “Phone volume settings” F5-55. screen changes to the call screen. The
screen stays on the incoming call screen if
you reject the call.
. The and keys are disabled on
the incoming call screen. Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)
No. Function
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
&

Black plate (321,1)
. For the operation of the cell phone, ! Phone volume settings

No. Function
see the manual that comes with it. The call and ringtone volume can be
Mute your voice to the other party. . The sound quality of the voice heard adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
&
2
Touch the key again to deactivate
the Mute mode. This key is disabled in
from the other party’s speaker may be
1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
the private mode. negatively impacted.
“How to change the hands-free phone
Change the mode to private mode. system” F5-50.
&
3
The other party’s voice emits from the & Phone settings 2. Touch key.
cell phone. Touch the key again to
deactivate the private mode. You can transfer the phonebook informa- 3. Select the desired item to be set.
tion and adjust the volume of your phone
End the call. You return to the phone
(menu) screen when ending outgoing using the Bluetooth phone system. . On the “PHONE” screen, the screen 5
changes to the “Options” screen when you
&
4
calls and the previous screen when
ending incoming calls. This function is NOTE select the key.
the same as pressing and holding the
on hook switch on the steering wheel. . The ringer volume for outgoing and
incoming calls, as well as the volume
&
5
Open the call (dialpad) screen. Refer
to “By dialpad” F5-52.
while on hold or during a call are
controlled independently from the vo-
&
6
Switch the screen to the phone
(menu) screen.
lume of the audio source. The volume
setting in the phone setting is applied.
Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone . When making a call, receiving a call
&
7 Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers
you enter are sent as tone signals.
or while talking on the phone, you can
adjust the volume by using the power/
NOTE Volume knob on the audio panel or the
. When cell phone call is changed to volume control switch on the steering
hands-free call, the hands-free screen wheel.
will be displayed and its functions can
be operated on the screen.
. Changing between cell phone call
and hands-free call can be performed
by operating the cell phone directly.
. Transferring methods and opera-
tions will be different depending on
the type of cell phone you have.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (322,1)
NOTE
. Depending on the type of phone,
certain functions may not be available.
. Contact data is managed indepen-
dently for every registered phone.
When one phone is connected, another
phone’s registered data cannot be
read.
! Update contacts from phone
Operation methods differ between PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile) compatible
and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object
Options (volume settings) screen Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth Contacts screen (Download selection)
phones.
No. Function 1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to No. Function
Adjust the ringtone volume. The “-” “How to change the hands-free phone Open the download confirmation
key lowers the volume, and the “+” system” F5-50. screen. Confirm whether or not to
&
1 key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume 2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then &
1
download. If the downloaded
contact(s) already exist(s), confirm
levels) select the “Download Contacts” key. whether or not to overwrite the exist-
ing data.
Adjust the receive volume. The “-” key
lowers the volume, and the “+” key Download one set of contact data. To
&
2 increases the volume. (Default vo-
lume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
&
2 download the data, you need to
operate from the connected device.
levels)
Adjust the transmit volume. The “-” &
3
Cancel the download. The screen
returns to the “Contacts” screen.
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
&
3 key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume
NOTE
levels) . If your cell phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-
not be transferred.
. If you transfer the contacts data, you

Black plate (323,1)
have to operate a cell phone depending . To cancel this function, select the transferring contact data.
on the type of cell phone. “Cancel” key.
. Depending on the type of cell phone, 3. Check that a confirmation screen is
there is a function that may not be displayed when the operation is complete.
supported.
! For PBAP compatible Bluetooth NOTE
phones To download all items, you may need to
1. Select the “Download Contacts” or change the settings in your cell phone
“Download a single entry” key. Contacts beforehand.
are transferred automatically.
5
! Deleting the contact data
2. Check that a confirmation screen is
You can delete the phonebook data stored
displayed when the operation is complete.
in the audio set.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cell phone. 1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
“How to change the hands-free phone
. If another Bluetooth device is con-
system” F5-50.
nected when transferring contact data,
depending on the phone, the con- 2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then
nected Bluetooth device may need to select the “Delete All” key.
be disconnected. 3. Select the “OK” key when the con-
firmation screen appears.
! For PBAP incompatible but OPP
compatible Bluetooth phones NOTE
This operation cannot be performed while . Manual transfer operation cannot be
driving. performed while driving.
1. Select the “Download a single entry” . If your cell phone is neither PBAP
key. nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-
2. Transfer the contact data to the sys- not be transferred.
tem using a Bluetooth phone. . Depending on the type of Bluetooth
. This operation may be unnecessary phone:
depending on the type of cell phone. – It may be necessary to perform
additional steps on the phone when

Black plate (324,1)
5-58 Audio/What to do if...
What to do if...
& Troubleshooting
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

Page
Symptom Likely cause Solution Cell This
phone system
The connected device may not be a Contact your local dealer to arrange a
compatible Bluetooth cell phone. demonstration in order to confirm whether or * —
The hands-free system or Bluetooth not the device can be paired with the vehicle.
device does not work. The Bluetooth version of the connected Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or
cell phone may be older than the higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or * 5-44
specified version. higher).
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

Black plate (325,1)
Audio/What to do if... 5-59
When registering/connecting a cell phone

Page
phone system
An incorrect passcode was entered Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone. * —
on the cell phone.
The registration operation has not Complete the registration operation on the cell
A cell phone cannot be registered. been completed on the cell phone phone (approve registration on the phone). * —
side.
5
Old registration information remains Delete the existing registration information from
on either this system or the cell both this system and the cell phone, then register * 5-45
phone. the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.
Another Bluetooth device is already Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to — 5-45
connected. this system.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be Bluetooth function is not enabled on Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. * —
made. the cell phone.
Automatic Bluetooth connection on Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system

this system is set to off. to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” — 5-45
or “ON” position.
Bluetooth function is not enabled on Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. * —
“Unable to dial. Please check your the cell phone.
phone. (Unable to dial. Please Old registration information remains Delete the existing registration information from
check your phone.)” on either this system or the cell both this system and the cell phone, then register * 5-45
phone. the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)
5-60 Audio/What to do if...
When making/receiving a call

Page
phone system
A call cannot be made/received. Your vehicle is in a “No Service (No Move to where “No Service (No Service)” no — —
Service)” area. longer appears on the display.
When using the phonebook

Page
phone system
The profile version of the connected cell Contact your local dealer to arrange a
phone may not be compatible with demonstration in order to confirm whether or * —
Phonebook data cannot be trans- transferring phonebook data. not the device can be paired with the vehicle.
ferred manually.
Transfer operation on the cell phone has Complete transfer operation on the cell phone * —
not completed. (approve transfer operation on the phone).
Phonebook data cannot be edited. Editing function is not available on this — — 5-57
system.

Black plate (327,1)
Audio/What to do if... 5-61
In other situations
Page
phone system
The cell phone is not close enough to Bring the cell phone closer to this system. — —
this system.
Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall
the battery pack, and then restart the cell * —
phone.
Even though all conceivable mea- 5
sures have been taken, the symptom Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth connection. * —
status does not change. The cell phone is the most likely cause
of the symptom. Stop the cell phone’s security software and * —
close all applications.
Before using an application installed on the
cell phone, carefully check its source and how * —
its operation might affect this system.

Black plate (328,1)
5-62 Audio/Voice command system
Voice command system Action Function
Press Start the voice command sys-

The voice command system enables the tem.
audio, hands-free systems, etc. to be
Press and Cancel voice recognition.
operated using voice commands. hold
Refer to the “Command list” F5-65 for
samples of voice commands. ! Microphone
The voice command system supports a
number of languages. For details about
setting language, refer to “General set-
tings” F5-18.
& Using the voice command Type B

system It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
! Steering switch microphone when giving a command.
NOTE
. Wait for the confirmation beep be-
fore speaking a command.
. Voice commands may not be recog-
Type A nized if:
– Spoken too quickly.
– Spoken at a low or high volume.
– The roof or windows are open.
– Passengers are talking while
voice commands are spoken.
– The air conditioning speed is set
high.
1) Talk switch – The air conditioning vents are
turned towards the microphone.
. In the following conditions, the sys-

Black plate (329,1)
Audio/Voice command system 5-63
tem may not recognize the command & Voice command system op- 2. Say the command.
properly and using voice commands eration
may not be possible:
– The command is incorrect or 1. Press the talk switch on the steering
unclear. Note that certain words, wheel.
accents or speech patterns may be After the voice command top screen has
difficult for the system to recognize. been displayed, speech guidance will
– There is excessive background commence.
noise, such as wind noise.
5
Example (Say “Help” and “Phone”)
NOTE
. Commands related with each func-
tion are displayed on the screen of the
each function tab. Some commonly
used commands are displayed on the
NOTE screen of the main tab. Even if any tab
When the voice command mode is is selected, all commands can be
audio mode, voice guidance for the operated.
voice command system can be skipped . Saying “Help” prompts guidance to
by pressing the talk switch. offer examples of commands and op-
eration methods.
. To cancel voice recognition, select
“6”, or press and hold the talk switch.
. If the system does not respond or
the confirmation screen does not dis-
appear, press the talk switch and try
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (330,1)
again. on the screen. If the desired name is NOTE

not displayed on the top of the screen, . When the system recognizes multi-
! Voice command example: Call say or select the number of the name ple phone numbers, a phone number
name from the candidate list (number 1, candidate list will be displayed on the
1. Press the talk switch. number 2, etc.) to select a name from screen. Pressing the off hook switch on
2. Say “Call <contacts>”. the candidate list. the steering wheel makes a call to the
. A confirmation screen will be dis- . When a contact has multiple phone top entry on the list. If the desired
played showing the recognition re- numbers registered in the contacts list, phone number is not displayed on the
sults. If multiple matching items are a candidate list will be displayed. If the top of the screen, say the number of
found, a selection screen will be desired phone number is not displayed the desired phone number from the
displayed. Say “<number>” or select on the top of the screen, say or select candidate list to select a phone number
the number. the number of the desired phone from the candidate list.
number from the candidate list (num- . As the system cannot recognize
ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone additional numbers, say the complete
NOTE number from the candidate list. number without stopping.
. In the same manner as it is dis-
played on the screen, “Call <con- ! Voice command example: Dial
number ! Casual speech recognization
tacts>” (Call <contacts>), after saying
“Call a contact” say the name of a 1. Press the talk switch. Due to natural language speech recogni-
contact. For example: “Call a contact”, 2. Say “Dial number”.
tion technology, this system enables re-
“John Smith” or “Call a contact”, cognition of a command when spoken
3. Say “Dial <number>”.
“Mary Davis” naturally. However, the system cannot
. Short or abbreviated names in the For example, if the phone number is recognize every variation of each com-
contacts list may not be recognized. 2345678: mand. In some situations, it is possible to
Change names in the contacts list to Say “two three four five six seven omit the command for the procedure and
full names. eight” directly state the desired operation. Not all
. Sometimes a voice recognition re- Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty voice commands are displayed in the
sult confirmation screen will be dis- seven eight” function menu.
played. After confirming the result, say 4. Say “Dial” or press the off hook switch
“Yes” or “No”. on the steering wheel.
NOTE
. When the system recognizes multi- If the command cannot be recognized
ple names from the contacts list, a completely, the command input screen
name candidate list will be displayed will be displayed. (Search results will

Black plate (331,1)
Audio/Voice command system 5-65
be shown based on the part of the . The notations used in the com- ! Commands for changing the audio
command that was recognized.) mands are as follows. mode
– < >: Numbers, titles, or
! Expression examples for each names to be spoken Voice command Function
function – ( ): There is no need to Change to AM Switch to AM mode
speak the command, the voice
Command Expression examples command system will recognize Change to AM1 Switch to AM mode
band 1
“Dial <phone num- Phone <phone num- the content.
ber>” ber>. Switch to AM mode
Change to AM2
! Basic command band 2
5
& Command list Change to FM Switch to FM mode
Voice command Function
Recognizable voice commands and their Change to FM1 Switch to FM mode
actions are shown below. Go back one hierar- band 1
chy or cancel the
Back voice recognition Change to FM2 Switch to FM mode
NOTE (voice command top band 2
. Some voice commands may not be screen) Switch to FM mode
Change to FM3 band 3
available depending on the vehicle Ask for help with the
Help
specifications or the device connection current task Switch to Bluetooth
status. Change to BT Audio Audio mode
Cancel, Close Cancel the current
. Frequently used commands are task Change to CD Switch to CD mode
listed in the following tables. Yes
. For devices that are not installed in Change to USB Switch to USB mode
the vehicle, the related commands will No Change to iPod Switch to iPod mode
not be displayed in the screen. Also, Display OFF Turns the display off Change to AUX Switch to AUX mode
according to conditions, other com- Turns the audio sys-
mands may not be displayed on the Audio ON tem on
screen.
Turns the audio sys-
. The functions available may vary Audio OFF tem off
according to the system installed.
. Voice recognition language can be Switch to APPS mode
STARLINK (if equipped)
changed. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
17.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (332,1)
! Commands for AM/FM control

! Commands for Hands Free ! Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC,
USB control
Tunes in the higher Voice command Function
Dial Number ? <0-9, Seek Up frequency direction
+, *, #> ? Change Track Up Select the next track
number, Dial Places a call to the Tunes in the lower
said phone number Seek Down frequency direction Select the current
Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ? Track Down track
Change number, Dial Switch to the scan
Scan mode Plays from the start of
Contacts, Phonebook Folder Up the next folder
? <Name> ? <1-5> Designate the fre-
? Dial Make a call by using Tune to <Frequency> quency to switch to a Plays from the start of
the phonebook specific radio station Folder Down the previous folder
Call <Name> ?
<1-5> ? Dial Designate the preset Switch to the scan
Preset <preset num- channel to switch to Scan mode
Call History ? In- ber> specific radio station
coming call, Outgoing Make a call by using Repeat ? 1 Track
call ? Next (page), the call history Repeat, Repeat Select a repeat mode
Previous (page) ? ! Commands for CD control Folder, Repeat All
<1-5> ? Dial
1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Incoming Calls Display the call his- Voice command Function
tory screen Repeat Folder Repeat of the folder
Track Up Select the next track
Display the call his- Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Outgoing Calls tory screen Select the current
Track Down track Shuffle ? Shuffle Select a random play
Places a call to the Folder, Shuffle All mode
Redial phone number of the Scan Switch to the scan
latest outgoing call mode Shuffle Folder Plays randomly of the
folder
Places a call to the Repeat ? 1 Track Select a repeat mode
Callback phone number of the Repeat, Repeat All Shuffle All Plays randomly
latest incoming call
1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Select Phone ? Display the phone
<1-5> select screen Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Display the hands Shuffle Plays randomly
Phone Menu free top screen

Black plate (333,1)
Audio/Appendix 5-67
! Commands for iPod Control ! Commands for Bluetooth audio Appendix

control
Voice command Function & Certification
Track Up Select the next track Voice command Function . Bluetooth
Select the current Pause Pause play
Track Down track
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
Track Up Select the next track registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,
Repeat ? Repeat Select a repeat mode Select the current Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion
One, Repeat All Track Down track Co., Ltd. is under license.
Repeat One Repeat single track Repeat ? 1 track
Repeat, Repeat All, Select a repeat mode
5
Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Group Repeat
Shuffle ? Shuffle . iPod
Track, Shuffle Album, Select
mode
a random play 1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Shuffle OFF Repeat All Repeat all tracks “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
Shuffle Track Shuffle all tracks Repeat tracks on mean that an electronic accessory has
Group Repeat group
Shuffle Album Shuffle all tracks been designed to connect specifically to
Shuffle OFF Turn off shuffle Shuffle ? Shuffle All, Select a random play iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
Group Shuffle, Shuf- mode certified by the developer to meet Apple
fle OFF performance standards. Apple is not
Shuffle All Shuffle all tracks responsible for the operation of this device
Shuffle tracks on or its compliance with safety and regula-
Group Shuffle group tory standards. Please note that the use of
Turn off shuffle
this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
Shuffle OFF
affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (334,1)
5-68 Audio/Appendix
. How to get the source code using & Certification for Paraguay & Certification for Europe
the open source models models for Declaration of
This system implements software using Record Number: 2014-08-I-000219 Conformity
the open source. For customers who Manufacturer: Clarion Co., Ltd. Refer to “Bluetooth® module” F13-21.
would like to get the source code of the Paraguay Distributor:
software, it is available by downloading it Tokyo Motors S.A.
from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd. Avda. Eusebio Ayala 4649 kg 5 1/2
For details, refer to the following web site. Asuncion, Paraguay
For Europe:
http://www.clarion.com/xe/en/open- & Certification for MAROC
source/index.html models
For Australia: PF-3680
http://www.clarion.com/au/en/open- AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
source/index.html Numéro d’agrément: MR 9314 ANRT
2014
For South America:
Date d’agrément: 28/05/2014
http://www.clarion.com/xl/en/open-source/
index.html
& Certification for Russia and
For Asia: Kazakhstan models
http://www.clarion.com/my/en/open- “Uniservis” Ltd.
source/index.html 1st Vladimirovskaya street, building 20A,
1st floor, premises 1, room 17, Moscow
& Certification for UAE models 111123, Russia. OGRN 5107746076873.
PF-3738
ООО «Юнисервис»
TRA
Россия, 111123, г. Москва, ул. 1-ая
REGISTERED No: ER0133354/14 Владимировска, д. 20А, этаж 1 пом. 1,
DEALER No: DA0054309/10 комн. 17, ОГРН 5107746076873.

Black plate (13,1)
Interior equipment
Interior light ......................................................... 6-2 USB power supply............................................... 6-9

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-10
Map lights ........................................................... 6-2 Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-11
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3 Coat hook........................................................... 6-11
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3 Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-12
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-4 Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-13
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-4 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-14
Glove box ........................................................... 6-4 Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-14
Center console.................................................... 6-5 Help line............................................................ 6-15
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-5 Side View Monitor (if equipped) ....................... 6-17
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-5 6
How to bring up the Side View Monitor............... 6-18
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-6 How to cancel the Side View Monitor.................. 6-18
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-7 Range of image on screen ................................. 6-19
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-7 Guiding lines ..................................................... 6-20
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) .............................. 6-8 Handling of camera............................................ 6-20

Black plate (338,1)
6-2 Interior equipment/Interior light
Interior light DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors is opened.
CAUTION . The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
When leaving your vehicle, make Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
sure the lights are turned off to “keyless access” entry function” F2-11.
avoid battery discharge. . The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-18.
& Dome light . The ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
Type B
& Map lights
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
! Automatic illumination (type A map
lights)
The map lights illuminate automatically in
the following cases.
1) ON
2) DOOR . Any of the doors is opened.
3) OFF . The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
The dome light switch has the following Type A Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
positions. “keyless access” entry function” F2-11.
ON: The light remains on continuously. . The doors are unlocked using the
OFF: The light remains off. remote keyless entry system. Refer to

Black plate (339,1)
Interior equipment/Sun visors 6-3
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-18. setting can be changed by operating the Sun visors
. The ignition switch is turned from the multi function display. For details, refer to
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- “Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-
tion. 88.
& OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light (when the dome light switch
is in the “DOOR” position)
. map light (type A)
After being illuminated automatically,
6
these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off after all doors
are closed. To block out glare, swing down the visors.
While the lights are illuminated, if any of To use the sun visor at a side window,
the following operations are performed, swing it down and move it sideways.
the lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. All doors are locked using the keyless
access function (if equipped).
. All doors are locked using the remote
keyless entry system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. We
recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (340,1)
6-4 Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Vanity mirror with light Storage compartment & Glove box
CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the vehicle is being driven to . Always keep the storage com-
avoid being blinded by glare. partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment. To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward. When
the light control switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position (or when the headlight
indicator light illuminates in the
combination meter if the light control
switch is in the “AUTO” position), the
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the glove box light will illuminate if the lid is
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. opened.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the mirror cover is opened. Models with key cylinder on the glove
box handle:
NOTE To lock the glove box, insert the key and
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
period of time while the engine is not insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
running can cause battery discharge.

Black plate (341,1)
Interior equipment/Cup holders 6-5

NOTE Cup holders ! Except STI
The mechanical key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is CAUTION
facing and insert it again.
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
& Center console if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder 6

CAUTION Two cup holders are built into the center
console, beside the parking brake lever.
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder ! STI
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
The dual cup holder is built into the center
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (342,1)
6-6 Interior equipment/Cup holders
console near the parking brake lever. cups of different sizes to be held.
A dual cup holder is located at the back of

To access the cup holder, pull the lid NOTE the center console. To use the cup holder,
toward the rear. open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
With the divider taken out, the cup
holder can be used as a storage box.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION
When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a sudden stop or an accident.
The divider in the cup holder can be pulled

out and inserted in a different position
(further toward the front or rear) to enable

Black plate (343,1)
Interior equipment/Bottle holders 6-7
Bottle holders The bottle holder equipped on each door Accessory power outlets
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage 6
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn Power outlet below the climate control
you and/or your passengers. dials
Power outlet in the center console

Accessory power outlets are provided
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (344,1)
6-8 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
below the climate control dials and in the appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical
center console. Electrical power (12V DC) is 120W. Do not use an appliance appliance while driving.
from the battery is available at any of the which exceeds the indicated wat-
outlets when the ignition switch is in either tage for each outlet.
the “ACC” or “ON” position. When using appliances con- & Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
You can use an in-vehicle electrical nected to two or more outlets A cigarette lighter may be installed in
appliance by connecting it to an outlet. simultaneously, the total power place of an accessory power outlet. The
The maximum power rating of an appli- consumed by them must not cigarette lighter assembly is available
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do exceed 120W. Overloading the from your SUBARU dealer.
not use an appliance which exceeds the accessory power outlet can The cigarette lighter operates only when
indicated wattage for each outlet. cause a short circuit. Do not use the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
When using appliances connected to two double adapters or more than position.
or more outlets simultaneously, the total one electrical appliance. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
power consumed by them must not . If the plug on your electric appli- knob and wait a few moments. It will
exceed 120W. ance is either too loose or too automatically spring up when ready for
tight for the accessory power use.
CAUTION outlet, this can result in poor
contact or cause the plug to get WARNING
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly. To avoid being burned, never grasp
outlets. the lighter by the end with the
. Do not place any foreign objects, . Use of an electric appliance in the heating element. Doing so could
especially metal ones such as accessory power outlet for a long result in injury and could also
coins or aluminum foil, into the period of time while the engine is damage the heating element.
accessory power outlet. That not running can cause battery
could cause a short circuit. Al- discharge.
ways put the cap on the acces- . Before driving your vehicle, make CAUTION
sory power outlet when it is not sure that the plug and the cord
in use. on your electrical appliance will . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
not interfere with your shifting because it will overheat.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC. gears and operating the accel- . Do not use non-genuine cigarette
erator and brake pedals. If they lighter plugs in the socket. Doing
The maximum power rating of an

Black plate (345,1)
Interior equipment/USB power supply 6-9
so may cause a short-circuit and USB power supply malfunction of the connected
overheating, resulting in a fire. device.
. If the socket is ever used for a . If a device is connected for a long
plug-in accessory such as a cell CAUTION time when the engine is not
phone, that may damage the . The specification of a USB term- running, doing so may cause
portion of the socket’s internal inal that can be used is the A- the risk of a discharged battery.
mechanism that causes a cigar- type. If a different specification of Even when the engine is running,
ette lighter plug to “pop out” terminal is connected, power we recommend that you do not
after its lighter element is heated. supply or charging may not be connect a device for an unneces-
Therefore, do not place a cigar- possible, or the device may mal- sarily long time.
ette lighter plug in a socket that function. . Do not connect a malfunctioning
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing . There is no guarantee even when device. Doing so may cause the 6
a connected device malfunctions risk of smoke and fire.
so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential or data is damaged. The connec-
fire hazard. tion of a device shall be per- NOTE
formed at your responsibility.
. The USB power supply is designed
. To avoid an electric shock or a to supply a maximum rated power of
malfunction, observe the follow- 5.25V/1A. Before connecting a device,
ing precautions. be sure to read the instruction manual
– Do not connect a USB hub. of the device and check whether or not
– Do not insert any metal or this specification of the output is
other foreign object into the supported by the device. If a device
USB terminal. that requires power exceeding the
maximum rating is connected, power
– Do not spill water or other supply or charging may not be possi-
liquid on the USB terminal. ble. Even if charging could be com-
. When you have connected a pleted, the time required for charging
cable, pay attention not to pull may be longer than when the genuine
on the connected cable with your charger for that device is used.
legs. Otherwise, it may result in . Depending on the device, charging
injury to you by falling over, or a may be possible only when a special
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (346,1)
6-10 Interior equipment/Ashtray
cable is used. In this case, be sure to Ashtray (if equipped)

connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates CAUTION
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible. . Do not use ashtrays as waste
. When connect a device for charging, receptacles or leave a lighted
disconnect the device promptly after cigarette in an ashtray. This
charging is completed. could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
. Do not put flammable material in holders” F6-5. For the locations of the
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-
7.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
Front seat USB power supply (An audio
device can be connected and used) NOTE
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
“ON” position and a USB electronic device mulate around the hinges of the ash-
is connected to the USB terminal, 5V DC tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
power can be supplied to the device. Use toothbrush or another narrow-ended
the USB terminal to use or charge an implement.
electronic device.

Black plate (347,1)
Interior equipment/Floor mat 6-11
Floor mat (if equipped) . Do not use more than one floor Coat hook
mat.
A coat hook is attached to the rear

CAUTION Retaining pins are located on the driver’s passenger’s hand grip.
side floor.
If the floor mat slips forward and The driver’s floor mat should be properly
interferes with the movement of the secured using the built-in grommets, by
pedals during driving, it could cause placing the grommets over the pins and
an accident. Observe the following pushing them downward.
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (348,1)
6-12 Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment
WARNING Under-floor storage compart- CAUTION

ment
Do not hang coat hangers or other . Always keep the lid of the storage
hard or pointed objects on the coat compartment closed while driv-
hooks. If such items were hanging ing to reduce the risk of injury in
on the coat hooks during deploy- the event of sudden stop or an
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, accident.
they could cause serious injuries by . Do not store spray cans, contain-
coming off the coat hooks and being ers with flammable or corrosive
thrown through the cabin or by liquids or any other dangerous
preventing correct airbag deploy- items in the storage compart-
ment. Before hanging clothing on ment.
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
The storage compartment is located under
the floor of the trunk and can be used to
CAUTION store small items. Pull the strap to open
the trunk floor lid, and then remove the lid.
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s NOTE
view or that could cause injury in . The shape of the storage compart-
sudden stops or in a collision. Also, ment may be different depending on
do not hang items on the coat hook the model.
that weigh 5 kg (11 lbs) or more. . When storing a flat tire, put the
storage tray in the trunk.

Black plate (349,1)
Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-13
Rear view camera (if the monitor is limited, you should fire or electric shock may occur.
equipped) always check the rear view and . If mud or snow sticks to or is
the surrounding area with your frozen on the camera, you must
eyes and mirrors, and move be very careful when removing it.
backward at a slow speed. Mov- Otherwise, damage to the camera
ing backward only by checking may cause a fire or electric
the rear view image from the shock. Pour water or lukewarm
camera could cause an accident. water over the camera to remove
. Do not disassemble or modify the mud and ice, and wipe it with a
camera, switch or wiring. If soft, dry cloth.
smoke comes out or you smell . Do not put a flame close to the
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- 6
mage or fire may occur.
We recommend that you contact
your SUBARU dealer for an in- . When replacing the fuse, be sure
spection. Continued use may to use a fuse with the specified
result in accident, fire or electric rating. Use of a fuse with a
A rear view camera is attached to the
different rating may result in a
trunk lid. When the ignition switch is “ON” shock.
malfunction.
and the shift lever (MT models) or select
lever (CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear . If the rear view camera is used for
view camera automatically displays the CAUTION a long time while the engine is
rear view image behind the vehicle on the not operated, the battery may
monitor of the navigation system or the . If your vehicle is washed with a become completely discharged.
audio display. high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
WARNING directly. Entry of water into the NOTE
camera lens may result in con- . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
. Since the rear view camera uses densation, malfunction, fire or benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
a wide-angle lens, the image on electric shock. discoloration may occur. To remove
the monitor is different from the . Since the camera is a precision contamination, wipe the camera with a
actual view in terms of distance. device, do not subject it to strong cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
. Since the range of the image on impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (350,1)
6-14 Interior equipment/Rear view camera
dry cloth. image before setting to “R” is displayed. are vertical lines on the screen).
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful 1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it 2. Set the shift lever (MT models) or & Viewing range on the screen
comes in contact with the camera, select lever (CVT models) to “R”.
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted CAUTION
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to NOTE The range that can be viewed with
help prevent scratches. However, when . For models with the genuine the rear view camera is limited.
washing the vehicle or cleaning the SUBARU navigation system or audio Always be sure to check with your
camera lens, be careful not to scratch system, the image of the rear view eyes when moving backward and
the camera lens. Do not use a washing camera has priority over other screen proceed slowly.
brush directly on the camera lens. The displays. However, while the navigation
image quality of the rear view camera system is activated, the image of the
may deteriorate. rear view camera is not displayed.
. Strong light shined on the camera . The image of the rear view camera is
lens may develop vertical lines around horizontally reversed as is the case
the light source. This is not a malfunc- with the vehicle rear view mirror or the
tion. side view mirror.
. Under the fluorescent light, the dis- . It may be difficult to see the image of
play may flicker. However, this is not a the rear view camera in the following
malfunction. cases. This is not a malfunction of the
. The image of the rear view camera camera.
may be slightly different from the – The vehicle is in a dark place (at
actual color of the objects. night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
Range of view
& How to use the rear view or cold place.
camera – An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
When the shift lever (MT models) or select view of the rear view camera sticks
lever (CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear to the lens of the camera.
view camera automatically displays the
– Strong light shined directly on
rear view image from the vehicle. When
the camera lens (occasionally, there
the lever is set to other positions, the

Black plate (351,1)
Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-15
Also, the image from the rear view camera wide projection on its upper part such as a
looks shorter than the actual distance. sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen image.
6
Range of view
Range of view
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 3 m (10 feet) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 1 m (3 feet) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
4) Approx. 0.5 m (1.5 feet) from the bumper
Image from camera (red horizontal line)
5) Vehicle centerline
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the Image from camera When the shift lever (MT models) or select
bumper and areas just under the bumper The area above the camera cannot be lever (CVT models) is set to position “R”,
cannot be viewed. viewed. If there is an object that has a the monitor screen displays the help lines
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (352,1)
6-16 Interior equipment/Rear view camera
together with the rear view image. NOTE ! When there is an upward slope at
If you shift to the “R” range within the back
CAUTION several seconds after turning on the
ignition switch, the warning message
. When moving backward, always may not be displayed. Wait for several
check the back with your eyes seconds after turning on the ignition
without relying on the help lines. switch before shifting to the “R” range.
. The actual position may be dif- The warning message will then be
ferent from the indication of the displayed.
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to ! Difference between screen image
number of passengers or loaded and actual road
cargo. The distance markers show the distance
. When the vehicle is on a slope or for a level road when the vehicle is not
when the vehicle is inclined loaded. It may be different from the actual
against the road, the indication distance depending on the loading condi- 1) 1 m (3 feet)
is different from the actual positions or road conditions.
The distance on the screen looks farther
tion. than the actual distance.
. Be sure to observe the displayed
warning message of “Check Sur-
roundings Before Backing Up”.

Black plate (353,1)
Interior equipment/Side View Monitor 6-17
! When there is a downward slope ! Feature of distance marker Side View Monitor (if
at the back equipped)
1) 1 m (3 feet) line
1) 1 m (3 feet) 2) 3 m (10 feet) line
1) Camera
The distance on the screen looks nearer The distance marker shows the distance
than the actual distance. on the road. If there is a car or other object The image of the camera mounted on the
close behind, distance cannot be correctly bottom of the left outside mirror is dis-
NOTE displayed. played in the multi function display. This
When cargo is loaded, the rear view eliminates blind spots and allows the
distance on the screen looks farther driver to check the forward direction of
than the actual distance as in an the front passenger side.
upward slope.
WARNING
. Always check the safety in the
forward and right/left directions
with your eyes while driving the
vehicle.
. Due to the characteristic of the
camera lens, the image of a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (354,1)
6-18 Interior equipment/Side View Monitor
person or object on the screen is or disappear from the screen. does not switch to the camera image.
different from the actual view in You must always check the *2: The reverse interlock function can be
terms of position and distance. safety around the vehicle directly switched on or off. Refer to “Side View
. Do not place too much confi- with your eyes when driving it. Monitor function setting” F3-79.
dence in the Side View Monitor
system. Drive the vehicle care- & How to cancel the Side View
fully and as you would do with a & How to bring up the Side Monitor
vehicle without the Side View View Monitor
Monitor. ! When the Side View Monitor is
activated using the SVM/ENTER
. Never rely on only the Side View button
Monitor when driving the vehicle.
The image on the monitor screen ! Manual cancellation of the Side
may be different from the actual View Monitor
situation. If you drive the vehicle Press the SVM/ENTER button
by viewing only the monitor im- again.
age, a collision or an unexpected
accident may occur. When driv- ! Automatic cancellation of the
ing the vehicle, always check the Side View Monitor
safety around the vehicle directly If any of the following conditions are met,
with your eyes and the mirrors. the Side View Monitor is canceled auto-
. Do not use the Side View Monitor 1) SVM/ENTER button
matically.
in the following situations. . Approximately 3 minutes have passed
– The outside mirrors are re- When the ignition switch is in the “ON” since the last operation.
tracted. position, perform the following operations . Vehicle speed becomes 20 km/h (12.5
to change over to the camera screen. mph) or more*.
– The passenger side door is
. Press the SVM/ENTER button.*1 . The select lever (CVT models) is
not fully closed.
. Set the shift lever (MT models)/select shifted to the “P” position.
. If the outside temperature is low, lever (CVT models) to the “R” position
the monitor screen may become . The parking brake is applied.
when the reverse interlock function is on.*2
dark or the image may become *: The Side View Monitor can be activated
dim. In particular, the image of a *1: When the multi function display shows when the SVM/ENTER button is
moving object may be distorted screens other than the basic screen, it

Black plate (355,1)
pressed, regardless of the vehicle speed. & Range of image on screen always check the safety around the
! When the image is turned on using vehicle directly with your eyes when
the reverse interlock function driving the vehicle.
! Manual cancellation of the Side

View Monitor NOTE
Press the SVM/ENTER button . The range of the displayed image
again. may differ depending on the vehicle
status or the road surface status.
! Automatic cancellation of the . Because the Side View Monitor
Side View Monitor system uses a specially designed lens,
If any of the following conditions are met, the sense of distance in the displayed
the Side View Monitor is canceled auto- image is different from the actual 6
matically. distance.
. The parking brake is applied. . The camera image may be difficult
to view in the following situations. This
. Vehicle speed becomes 8 km/h (5
is not a malfunction.
mph) or more.
– Dark place (at night)
. The select lever (CVT models) is
– High or low temperature around
shifted from the “R” position to the “P”
the lens
position.
– Water contacts lens or in high
. Approximately 9 seconds have passed
humidity (rainy weather)
since shifting the shift lever from the “R”
position (MT models), or the select lever – There is foreign materials (such
from the “R” position to a position other as mud) around the camera
than the “P” position (CVT models). – Sunlight or headlight beam di-
rectly shines towards the camera
lens
Range of displayed image
. Under an artificial light such as a
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp
WARNING or mercury lamp, the lighted portion
may look like it is flickering (flicker
Because the range of the image
phenomenon).
captured by the camera is limited,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (356,1)
6-20 Interior equipment/Side View Monitor
. While the display has cooled down, & Guiding lines NOTE
the image may leave traces or become The turn signal light may overlap with
darker than usual, causing a difficulty the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a
in viewing the screen. Always check malfunction.
the safety around the vehicle directly
with your eyes while driving the vehi-
cle. & Handling of camera
. The following incidents should not
be deemed a malfunction. CAUTION
– The camera lens may become Observe the following instructions.
foggy when the humidity is high Otherwise, the system may malfunc-
on a rainy day. tion.
– The light from a vehicle or build-
. Do not apply any strong impact
ing located ahead may be reflected
to the camera such as banging it
towards the camera image during 1) The front-of-vehicle line or hitting it with an object. The
driving at night. 2) The center-of-front-tire line
mounting angle may change.
– In a dark place or during driving 3) The side-of-vehicle line
at night, the camera image may be . The camera unit is a waterproof
Guiding lines that indicate the width and structure. Do not attempt to re-
adjusted to make noises less visi- the front end of the vehicle are displayed
ble. Therefore, the image may look move, disassemble or modify the
on the monitor. unit.
like a monochromatic image or the
image colors may differ from the . The front-of-vehicle line: . Do not rub strongly or polish the
actual colors. The camera image The line shows the front part of the camera lens with a hard brush or
may be deteriorated in regard to vehicle. abrasive compounds. The lens
sharpness at the center and four . The center-of-front-tire line: may be scratched resulting in an
corners of the screen. This is not a The line indicates the center of the front adverse effect to the camera
malfunction. tire. image.
. The side-of-vehicle line: . The camera lens is made of glass
The line shows the vehicle width including or plastic. Do not allow any
the outside mirrors. organic solvent, body wax, oil
film remover or glass coating
agent to become attached on

Black plate (357,1)
the lens surface. If any becomes NOTE

attached, remove it immediately. If the camera lens is contaminated, no
. Do not expose the camera lens to sharp image is available. When the
any sudden temperature change, camera is contaminated with water
for example, spraying hot water drops, snow or mud, wash it with water
on it in cold weather. and wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with
. Do not apply the water jet of a
a neutral detergent.
high pressure washer to the
camera or the surrounding area
when cleaning the vehicle. The
impact by the strong water pres-
sure may cause the camera to 6
come off. Also, water may enter
inside the camera and cause a
malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any
impact, it may lead to malfunc-
tion of the camera. Have the
camera inspected by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. Do not use a steam cleaner under
any circumstances. Some types
of steam cleaners inject hot
steam.
. The camera surface may be da-
maged by a flying stone.

Black plate (15,1)
Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Driving tips........................................................ 7-25

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 SI-DRIVE (if equipped)....................................... 7-25
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3 Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-25
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-6 Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-26
Starting and stopping engine (models Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-26
without push-button start system).................. 7-6 SI-DRIVE selector (STI) ...................................... 7-27
General precautions when starting/stopping SI-DRIVE switches (except STI) .......................... 7-27
engine .............................................................. 7-6 Limited slip differential (LSD) (if
Starting engine.................................................... 7-7 equipped) ........................................................ 7-28
Stopping engine .................................................. 7-8 Power steering................................................... 7-28
Starting and stopping engine (models with STI .................................................................... 7-28
push-button start system) ............................... 7-9 Except STI......................................................... 7-29
Safety precautions .............................................. 7-9 Braking ............................................................... 7-30 7
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 7-9 Braking tips....................................................... 7-30
Starting engine.................................................... 7-9 Brake system .................................................... 7-30
Stopping engine ................................................. 7-11 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-31
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-11 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-32
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-12 ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-32
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-13 ABS warning light.............................................. 7-32
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/ system ............................................................. 7-33
DCCD) (STI) ..................................................... 7-15 Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-33
To change mode of driver’s control center Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-34
differential........................................................ 7-16 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-36
Auto mode ......................................................... 7-16 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-36
Manual mode ..................................................... 7-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
Temporary release.............................................. 7-19 equipped) ........................................................ 7-38
Continuously variable transmission ................. 7-19 TPMS mode setting............................................ 7-39
Select lever ........................................................ 7-20 Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-40
Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-22
Parking brake .................................................... 7-41
Shift lock function .............................................. 7-23

Black plate (16,1)
Starting and operating
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-41 Cruise control indicator ..................................... 7-48

Hill start assist system ...................................... 7-42 Cruise control set indicator ................................ 7-48
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) (if
system............................................................. 7-43 equipped) ........................................................ 7-48
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF System features................................................. 7-49
indicator light................................................... 7-45 System operation............................................... 7-51
Cruise control..................................................... 7-45 SRVD approach indicator light/warning
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-45 buzzer ............................................................. 7-52
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-46 SRVD warning indicator ..................................... 7-54
To turn off the cruise control .............................. 7-47 SRVD OFF switch .............................................. 7-55
To change the cruising speed ............................. 7-47 Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-56

Black plate (361,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3
Fuel ! STI
Your engine is designed to provide satis-
& Fuel requirements factory performance by using unleaded
petrol with an octane rating of 98 or
CAUTION higher. This octane rating is the Research
Octane number.
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate Use of petrol with an octane rating lower
fuel additive may cause damage than 98 will detract from engine perfor-
to the engine and/or fuel system. mance and driveability.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior ! Except STI
surfaces of the vehicle. Because Your engine is designed to use only
fuel may damage the paint, be unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel 95 or higher. This octane rating is the
quickly. Paint damage caused by Research Octane number.
7
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. & Fuel filler lid and cap
. The neck of the fuel filler pipe is
designed to accept only an un- ! Refueling
leaded petrol filler nozzle. Under Only one person should be involved in
no circumstances should leaded refueling. Do not allow others to approach
petrol be used because it will the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
damage the emission control pipe while refueling is in progress.
system and may impair driveabil- Be sure to observe any other precautions
ity and fuel economy. Also, this that are posted at the service station.
can increase maintenance costs.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
of the driver’s seat.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (362,1)
7-4 Starting and operating/Fuel
WARNING slowly counterclockwise.
Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING

first touch the vehicle body or a
. Fuel vapor is highly flammable.
metal portion of the fuel pump or
Before refueling, always first
similar object to discharge any
stop the engine and close all
static electricity that may be present
vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry-
Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark
or electrical sparks in the adja-
could ignite the fuel, which could
cent area. Only handle fuel out-
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
doors. Quickly wipe up any
static electric charge, do not get
spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling 3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
is in progress. . When opening the cap, grasp it inside the fuel filler lid.
firmly and turn it slowly counter-
clockwise. Do not remove the WARNING
cap quickly. Fuel may be under
pressure and spray out of the . When refueling, insert the fuel
fuel filler neck, especially in hot nozzle securely into the fuel filler
weather. If you hear a hissing pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
sound while you are removing fully inserted, its automatic stop-
the cap, wait for the sound to ping mechanism may not func-
stop and then slowly open the tion, causing fuel to overflow the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying tank and creating a fire hazard.
out and creating a fire hazard.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

Black plate (363,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5
. Stop refueling when the auto- NOTE sion control system may be da-
matic stop mechanism on the You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel maged. It could also lead to fuel
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler spillage and a fire.
tinue to add fuel, temperature door (lid) is located on the right side of . Immediately put fuel in the tank
changes or other conditions the vehicle. whenever the low fuel warning
may cause fuel to overflow from light illuminates. Engine misfires
the tank and create a fire hazard. CAUTION as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler . Never add any cleaning agents to gine. Continuing to operate your
pump automatically stops. Do not add any the fuel tank. The addition of a vehicle at an extremely low fuel
more fuel. cleaning agent may cause da- level may result in a reduction of
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise mage to the fuel system. engine performance.
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain . After refueling, turn the cap
not to catch the tether under the cap while clockwise until it clicks to ensure
tightening. that it is fully tightened. If the cap 7
is not securely tightened, fuel
CAUTION may leak out while the vehicle is
being driven or fuel spillage
Make sure that the cap is tightened could occur in the event of an
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage accident, creating a fire hazard.
in the event of an accident.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
CAUTION sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
If you spill any fuel on the painted spilled fuel is not covered under
surface, rinse it off immediately. the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Otherwise, the painted surface . We recommend that you always
could be damaged. use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler
cap. If you use the wrong cap, it
may not fit or have proper vent-
ing and your fuel tank and emis-

Black plate (364,1)
7-6 Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
Preparing to drive CAUTION Starting and stopping engine

(models without push-button
Trapping small animals in the cool-
You should perform the following checks
ing fan and belts of the engine may
start system)
and adjustments every day before you
result in a malfunction. Check that
start driving.
no small animal enters the engine
& General precautions when
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
compartment and under the vehicle starting/stopping engine
lights are clean and unobstructed.
before starting the engine.
2. Check the appearance and condition WARNING
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation. NOTE . Never start the engine from out-
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, side the vehicle. It may result in
leaks and check that no small animal is washer fluid and other fluid levels an accident.
under the vehicle. should be checked daily, weekly or at . Do not leave the engine running
4. Check that no small animal enters the fuel stops. in locations with poor ventilation,
engine compartment. such as a garage and indoors.
5. Check that the hood and trunk lid are The exhaust gas may enter the
fully closed. vehicle or indoors, and it may
6. Check the adjustment of the seat. result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors. . Do not start the engine near dry
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your foliage, paper, or other flam-
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. mable substances. The exhaust
pipe and exhaust emissions can
9. Check the operation of the warning create a fire hazard at high
and indicator lights when the ignition temperatures.
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine. CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.

Black plate (365,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models without push–button start system) 7-7
. When starting the engine, be sure & Starting engine The starter motor will only operate when
to sit in the driver’s seat. the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the
CAUTION floor.
NOTE Do not operate the starter motor position and check the operation of the
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- continuously for more than 10 sec- warning and indicator lights. Refer to
eration immediately after the engine onds. If the engine fails to start after “Warning and indicator lights” F3-14.
has started. operating the starter for 5 to 10 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
. For a short time after the engine has seconds, wait for 10 seconds or position without depressing the accelera-
started, the engine speed is kept high. more before trying again. tor pedal. Release the key immediately
When the warm-up is completed, the after the engine has started.
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult NOTE If the engine does not start, try the
to start the engine depending on the It may be difficult to start the engine following procedure.
fuel and the usage condition (repeated when the battery has been discon- (1) Turn the ignition switch to the 7
driving of a distance in which the nected and reconnected (for mainte- “LOCK” position and wait for at least
engine has not warmed up sufficiently). nance or other purposes). This diffi- 10 seconds. After checking that the
In such a case, it is recommended that culty is caused by the electronically parking brake is firmly set, turn the
you change to a different brand of fuel. controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis ignition switch to the “START” position
. On rare occasions, transient knock- function. To overcome it, keep the while depressing the accelerator pedal
ing may be heard from the engine when ignition switch in the “ON” position slightly (approximately a quarter of the
the accelerator is operated rapidly for approximately 10 seconds before full stroke). Release the accelerator
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid starting the engine. pedal as soon as the engine starts.
acceleration. This is not a malfunction. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
. The engine starts more easily when ! MT models the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
the headlights, air conditioner and rear 1. Apply the parking brake. position and wait for at least 10
window defogger are turned off. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
cessories. erator pedal and turn the ignition
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor switch to the “START” position. If the
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold engine starts, quickly release the
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting accelerator pedal.
the engine. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (366,1)
7-8 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models without push–button start system)
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK” (1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
position. After waiting for 10 seconds “LOCK” position and wait for at least sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the 10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
“START” position without depressing parking brake is firmly set, turn the applied.
the accelerator pedal. ignition switch to the “START” position
(4) If the engine still does not start, we while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
CAUTION
nearest SUBARU dealer for assis- full stroke). Release the accelerator If you restart the engine while the
tance. pedal as soon as the engine starts. vehicle is moving, shift the select
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn lever into the “N” position. Do not
lights have turned off after the engine has the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” attempt to place the select lever of a
started. The fuel injection system auto- position and wait for at least 10 moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
matically lowers the idle speed as the seconds. Then fully depress the accel- tion.
engine warms up. erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
! CVT models engine starts, quickly release the & Stopping engine
accelerator pedal. The ignition switch should be turned off
1. Apply the parking brake.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn only when the vehicle is stopped and the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- the ignition switch again to the “LOCK” engine is idling.
cessories. position. After waiting for 10 seconds
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” or longer, turn the ignition switch to the WARNING
position (preferably “P” position). “START” position without depressing
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal. Do not stop the engine when the
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still does not start, we vehicle is moving. This will cause
warning and indicator lights. Refer to recommend that you contact your loss of power to the power steering
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-14. nearest SUBARU dealer for assis- and the brake booster, making steer-
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” tance. ing and braking more difficult. It
position without depressing the accelera- could also result in accidental acti-
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator vation of the “LOCK” position on the
tor pedal. Release the key immediately lights have turned off after the engine has
after the engine has started. ignition switch, causing the steering
started. The fuel injection system auto- wheel to lock.
If the engine does not start, try the matically lowers the idle speed as the
following procedures. engine warms up.

Black plate (367,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system) 7-9
Starting and stopping engine The steering wheel is still locked, then push the push-button igni-
(models with push-button and it may result in an accident. tion switch to start the engine.
start system)
CAUTION NOTE
Once you enter the vehicle carrying the . When the push-button ignition
access key, the power can be switched . When the operation indicator on switch is pressed while depressing
and the engine can be started. the push-button ignition switch is the clutch pedal (MT models) or the
flashing in orange, there may be brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
& Safety precautions a malfunction with the vehicle. starter operates for a maximum of 10
We recommend that you contact seconds and after starting the engine,
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-8. a SUBARU dealer immediately. the starter stops automatically.
& Operating range for push- . If the indicator on the push- . When the push-button ignition
button ignition switch is flashing switch is pressed while depressing
button start system in green after the engine has the clutch pedal (MT models) or the 7
Refer to “Operating range for push-button started, it means that the steering brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
start system” F3-6. is still locked. Depress the brake can be started regardless of the status
pedal while moving the steering of the push-button ignition switch.
& Starting engine wheel to the right and left, and . If the immobilizer indicator light
press the push-button ignition illuminates when you attempt to start
WARNING switch. the engine but the engine does not
. Do not continue pushing the start, press the push-button ignition
. There are some general precau- push-button ignition switch for switch to switch the power to “OFF”
tions when starting the engine. more than 10 seconds. Doing so and then try to start the engine again.
Carefully read the precautions could cause a malfunction. If the . If the engine does not start, press
described in “General precau- engine does not start, stop push- the push-button ignition switch without
tions when starting/stopping en- ing the push-button ignition depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
gine” F7-6. switch. Instead, press the push- els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to
. If the indicator on the push- button ignition switch without switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while
button ignition switch flashes in depressing the brake pedal to depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
green after the engine has switch the power status to els) or the brake pedal (CVT models)
started, never drive the vehicle. “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and more forcefully, press the push-button
ignition switch.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (368,1)
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
. The engine start procedures may press the push-button ignition switch.
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In NOTE
such a case, refer to “Starting engine”
F9-18. In case the engine does not start by the
. If the vehicle battery is discharged, normal engine start procedure, move
the steering cannot be unlocked. the shift lever to the neutral position,
Charge the battery. and switch the power to “ACC”. De-
. After the engine starts, the engine press the clutch pedal, and press the
speed will be kept high until the engine push-button ignition switch for at least
has warmed up sufficiently. 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
Right-hand drive models ! CVT models
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch 1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the clutch pedal 2. Apply the parking brake.
(MT models)/brake pedal (CVT models), 3. Shift the select lever in the “P” posi-
the engine will start. The start procedure tion. The engine can also start when the
of the engine is as follows. select lever is in the “N” position, however,
for safety reasons, start in the “P” position.
! MT models 4. Depress the brake pedal until the
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the operation indicator on the push-button
Left-hand drive models driver’s seat. ignition switch turns green. When starting
2. Apply the parking brake. with the select lever in the “N” position, the
3. Shift the shift lever in neutral. indicator does not turn green.
4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. While depressing the brake pedal,
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the press the push-button ignition switch.
indicator on the push-button ignition
switch turns green.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal,

Black plate (369,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system) 7-11
NOTE WARNING CAUTION
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button . Do not touch the push-button For CVT models:
ignition switch will not turn green even ignition switch during driving. . Do not stop the engine while the
when the select lever is in the “P” When the push-button ignition select lever is in a position other
position. switch is operated as follows, than the “P” position.
. In case the engine does not start by the engine will stop.
the normal engine start procedure, . If the engine is stopped while the
move the select lever to the “P” posi- – The switch is pressed and held select lever is in a position other
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. for 3 seconds or longer. than the “P” position, the power
Depress the brake pedal, and press the – The switch is pressed briefly 3 will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
push-button ignition switch for at least times or more in succession. left in this condition, the battery
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only may be discharged.
When the engine stops, the brake
use this engine start procedure in case booster will not function. A great-
of emergency. er foot pressure will be required NOTE 7
. When the engine is not started, the on the brake pedal. Although you can stop the engine by
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
The power steering system will operating the push-button ignition
case, depress the brake pedal more
not operate either. A greater switch, do not stop the engine during
forcefully than usual. Check that the
force will be required to steer, driving except in an emergency.
operation indicator on the push-button
and it may result in an accident.
ignition switch turns green, and press
. If the engine stops during driving, & When access key does not
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine. do not operate the push-button operate properly
ignition switch or open any of the Refer to “Access key – if access key does
& Stopping engine doors until the vehicle is stopped not operate properly” F9-17.
in a safe location. It is dangerous
1. Stop the vehicle completely. because the steering lock may be
2. Move the select lever to the “P” activated. Stop the vehicle in a
position (CVT models). safe location, and we recom-
3. Press the push-button ignition switch. mend that you contact a
The engine will stop, and the power will be SUBARU dealer immediately.
switched to “OFF”.

Black plate (370,1)
7-12 Starting and operating/Manual transmission
Manual transmission WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) sud-
denly when starting the vehicle.
1) Slider
By doing so the vehicle might
You must raise the slider and hold it in that unexpectedly accelerate or the
This manual transmission is a completely position before you can move the shift transmission could malfunction.
synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re- lever to the “R” position.
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift To change gears, fully depress the clutch CAUTION
lever knob. pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal. Shift into reverse ONLY when the
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the vehicle has completely stopped. It
transmission in neutral, release the clutch may cause damage to the transmis-
pedal momentarily, and then try again. sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.

Black plate (371,1)
Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-13
& Shifting speeds ! Gear shift indicator (if equipped) ! Shift-up indicator (STI without gear
shift indicator models)
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up km/h (mph)
1st to 2nd 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 64 (40)
4th to 5th 72 (45)
5th to 6th 80 (50) 1) Upshift indicator 7
2) Downshift indicator
The shift-up indicator illuminates to inform
When shifting up is recommended for the driver about the upshift timing.
good fuel economy, the upshift indicator
blinks. When shifting down is recom- The shift-up indicator can be activated or
mended, the downshift indicator blinks. deactivated. For details, refer to “Shift-up
indicator (STI without gear shift indicator
NOTE models)” F3-33.
The gear shift indicator cannot be
deactivated.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (372,1)
7-14 Starting and operating/Manual transmission
! Maximum allowable speeds speed exceeding the Maximum Al- When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
The following table shows the maximum lowable Speed for the gear which is speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
speeds that are possible with each differ- about to be selected. Failure to or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will observe this precaution can lead to lower gear before the engine starts to
enter the red area if these speeds are engine over-revving and this in turn labor.
exceeded. can result in engine damage. In
On steep downgrades, downshift the
With the exception of cases where sudden addition, sudden application of en-
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
acceleration is required, the vehicle gine brakes when the vehicle is
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
should not be driven with the tachometer’s travelling on a slippery surface can
speed and to extend brake pad life.
needle inside the red area. Failure to lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may In this way, the engine provides a braking
observe this precaution can lead to
be lost and the risk of an accident effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
excessive engine wear and poor fuel the brakes while descending a hill, they
economy. increased.
may overheat and not work properly.
STI Except STI The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
Gear km/h (mph) km/h (mph) & Driving tips when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
1st 50 (31) 46 (28) rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
2nd 82 (51) 81 (50) CAUTION phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
3rd 116 (72) 116 (72) If the accelerator and brake pedals
4th 163 (101) 155 (96) are depressed at the same time,
driving torque may be restrained.
5th 208 (129) 193 (120) This is not a malfunction.
6th 262 (162) 239 (148)
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
NOTE clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
Never exceed posted speed limits. hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
WARNING cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
When shifting down a gear, ensure shift lever. This may cause wear on the
that the vehicle is not travelling at a transmission components.

Black plate (373,1)
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI) 7-15
Driver’s Control Center Dif- tion. We recommend that you

ferential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI) have the vehicle inspected by
your SUBARU dealer.
. If a malfunction occurs in the
WARNING vehicle (for example, when the
rear differential oil temperature
Always use the utmost care when warning light illuminates), all of
driving. Being overconfident be- the indicators may disappear and
cause you are driving a vehicle with the setting value for the initial
a driver’s control center differential limited slip differential (LSD) tor-
could easily lead to a serious acci- que of the driver’s control center
dent. differential (DCCD) may be can-
celed. However, it does not in-
dicate a malfunction of the DCCD 1) LSD torque
itself. 2) Traction torque 7
3) Initial LSD torque (maximum)
4) Initial LSD torque (minimum)
The driver’s control center differential A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable)
allows you to freely change the degree B) Mechanical LSD torque
of limitation of the differential action
(limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of The driver’s control center differential has
your vehicle’s center differential. an auto mode and a manual mode. In the
By using the center differential control auto mode, the system automatically
switch, you can set an initial LSD torque to adjusts the initial LSD torque. In the
match the road surface conditions, driving manual mode, you can change to the
conditions and your driving style. desired mode manually by using the
center differential control switch.
CAUTION NOTE
If you rapidly depress and release the
. All the indicators will flash in the accelerator pedal while driving at low
event that the driver’s control speed, you may hear a knocking sound
center differential has a malfunc- from the vicinity of the center differen-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (374,1)
7-16 Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
tial and rear differential. This sound & Auto mode Mode Operation
occurs because of the structure of the
center differential. It does not indicate a AUTO [+] This mode emphasizes traction
control and strengthens the
problem. limitation of differential action
that is suitable for driving on
& To change mode of driver’s slippery roads for vehicle stabi-
lity.
control center differential
AUTO This mode is suitable for most
driving situations.
AUTO [−] This mode is suitable when you
seek quick response from the
steering wheel and smooth
driving.
! Mode setting method

In the auto mode, the system estimates In most situations, it is recommended that
the driving and road conditions using the “AUTO” mode is selected.
signals from the wheel speed sensor,
throttle position sensor, steering angle
sensor and brake switch, etc. According
to the result, it electronically and auto-
Press the “AUTO-MANU” switch on the matically controls the degree of limitation
center console to switch from auto mode of the differential action (LSD torque) to
to manual mode or vice versa. When you optimize the differential action of the
select the auto mode, the “AUTO” indica- center differential. When the ignition
tor appears. When you select the manual switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator
mode, the “AUTO” indicator disappears. on the combination meter appears.
The auto mode has 3 modes as follows.
Push the control switch forward to select

the “AUTO [+]” mode. After setting the

Black plate (375,1)
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI) 7-17
mode, “AUTO [+]” appears. & Manual mode ! Center differential control switch
and indicator
Pull the control switch rearward to select In the manual mode, you can use the 7
the “AUTO [−]” mode. After setting the center differential control switch to adjust The control switch is located beside the
mode, “AUTO [−]” appears. the initial LSD torque as desired. When parking brake lever. By pushing the
When the “AUTO [+]” mode is selected, this mode is selected, the “AUTO” indica- control switch forward or pulling it rear-
pull the control switch rearward to change tor disappears. ward, it is possible to change the initial
to the “AUTO” mode. When the “AUTO LSD torque.
[−]” mode is set, push the control switch The center differential indicator on the
forward to change to the “AUTO” mode. combination meter gives six levels of
indication. The indicator and control
switch are linked; when the switch is
pushed or pulled to change the initial
LSD torque, the indicator changes accord-
ingly.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (376,1)
7-18 Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
– When a temporary spare tire

is installed
– When your vehicle is towed
– When the vehicle is stopped
with the manual mode se-
lected
NOTE
. A higher initial LSD torque setting
gives the vehicle greater traction when
driving straight ahead but makes cor-
nering more difficult. Remember this
Push the switch forward to increase the Pull the switch rearward to reduce the when adjusting the initial LSD torque.
initial LSD torque; when the “LOCK” initial LSD torque. When the lowest posi- In general, higher initial LSD torque
indicator appears, the initial LSD torque tion of the driver’s control center differen- settings assist driving on slippery
setting is maximum. The center differential tial indicator is displayed, the initial LSD roads and lower settings for non-slip-
will then be almost completely locked. torque will be minimum. Under this condi- pery roads. When the vehicle is stuck
tion, only the Mechanical LSD torque will in snow or mud, setting the initial LSD
limit the differential action. torque to the maximum will help to free
the vehicle.
CAUTION
. The setting of the initial LSD torque
. Do not operate the control switch will remain even when the auto mode is
when a wheel slippage occurs. selected or the ignition switch is turned
Wait until the wheelspin has been to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. How-
brought under control. ever, the initial LSD torque will be
minimized when the battery is discon-
. Under any of the following con-
nected and reconnected.
ditions after setting to the man-
. During cornering or when making
ual mode, pull the center differ-
turns (especially when going into the
ential control switch to minimize
garage), the rotational difference be-
the initial LSD torque:
tween the front and rear wheels may

Black plate (377,1)
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-19
cause a braking effect accompanied by Continuously variable trans- by inertia with the select lever set
vibration and noise. This does not in a forward driving position or
indicate a problem. The phenomenon
mission
move the vehicle forward by
will disappear when setting the initial inertia with the select lever set
LSD torque to the minimum. The continuously variable transmission is in the R position. Doing so may
In the auto mode, it controls the initial electronically controlled and provides an result in an unexpected accident
LSD torque automatically. While in the infinite number of forward speeds and 1 or malfunction.
auto mode, this phenomenon some- reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
times occurs depending on the driving forward driving positions into the
condition, however, it does not indicate
WARNING
“R” position or vice versa until
a problem. Do not shift from the “P” or “N” the vehicle has completely
. Use the center differential indicator position into the “D” or “R” position stopped. Such shifting may
only as a rough indication of the initial while depressing the accelerator cause damage to the transmis-
LSD torque. pedal. This may cause the vehicle sion.
. If you operate the center differential to lurch forward or backward. . When parking the vehicle, first
7
control switch while quickly accelerat-
securely apply the parking brake
ing or turning a tight corner, you may
and then place the select lever in
feel slight shocks. This is due to CAUTION the “P” position. Avoid parking
differential action by the center differ-
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position for a long time with the select
ential and does not indicate a problem.
only after the vehicle is comple- lever in any other position as
tely stopped. Shifting while the doing so could result in a dead
& Temporary release vehicle is moving may cause battery.
When the driver stops the vehicle and damage to the transmission.
pulls the parking brake lever after manu-
. Do not race the engine for more NOTE
ally setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD
than 5 seconds in any position . When the engine coolant tempera-
torque is temporarily minimized. However
except the “N” or “P” position ture is still low, the transmission will
the indicator on the combination meter
when the brake is applied or upshift or downshift at higher engine
continues to show the driver’s selected
when chocks are used in the speeds than when the coolant tempera-
initial LSD torque. When the driver re-
wheels. This may cause the ture is sufficiently high in order to
leases the parking brake lever, the initial
transmission fluid to overheat. shorten the warm-up time and improve
LSD torque set by the driver is restored.
. Never move the vehicle rearward driveability. The gearshift timing will
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (378,1)
7-20 Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
automatically shift to the normal timing times, depending on varying driving

after the engine has warmed up. conditions, a chain operating noise
. Immediately after transmission fluid may be heard that is characteristic of
is replaced, you may feel that the this type of system.
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation & Select lever
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in the memory
to allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a vehicle that is 1) Left-hand drive models
equipped with CVT under continuous 2) Right-hand drive models
heavy load conditions such as climb- : With the brake pedal depressed, shift
ing a long or steep hill, the engine while pressing the select lever button
in.
speed or the vehicle speed may auto-
: Shift while pressing the select lever
matically be reduced. This is not a button in.
malfunction. This phenomenon results : Shift without pressing the select lever
1) Select lever button
from the engine control function main- button.
taining the cooling performance of the
vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed The select lever has four positions, “P”,
will return to a normal speed when the “R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “M” gate.
engine is able to maintain the optimum NOTE
cooling performance after the heavy
For some models, to protect the engine
load decreases. Driving under a heavy
while the select lever is in the “P” or
load must be performed with extreme
“N” position, the engine is controlled
care.
so that the engine speed may not
. The continuously variable transmis-
become too high even if the accelerator
sion is a chain type system that
pedal is depressed hard.
provides superior transmission effi-
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

Black plate (379,1)

! D (Drive)
! P (Park) ! N (Neutral)
This position is for normal driving. The
This position is for parking the vehicle and This position is for restarting a stalled
transmission shifts automatically and con-
starting the engine. In this position, the engine. In this position, the transmission is
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
transmission is mechanically locked to neutral, meaning that the wheels and
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. transmission are not locked. Therefore,
you require. Also, while driving up and
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
When you park the vehicle, first apply the down a hill, the transmission assists and
slightest incline unless the parking brake
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P” or foot brake is applied.
controls the driving performance and
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only engine braking while corresponding to
the mechanical friction of the transmis- Avoid coasting with the transmission in the road grade.
sion. neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
When more acceleration is required in the
this condition.
To shift the select lever from the “P” “D” position, depress the accelerator
position to any other position, you should WARNING pedal fully to the floor and hold that
depress the brake pedal fully then move position. The transmission will automati-
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle Do not drive the vehicle with the cally downshift. If the Intelligent (I) mode 7
from lurching when it is started. select lever in the “N” (neutral) or the Sport (S) mode has been selected,
! R (Reverse) position. Engine braking has no the transmission will operate like a con-
effect in this condition and the risk ventional automatic transmission. When
This position is for backing the vehicle. To you release the pedal, the transmission
of an accident is consequently in-
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the will return to the original gear position.
creased.
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select If one of the shift paddles behind the
lever button in. NOTE steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
When the ignition switch has been turned If the select lever is in the “N” position
temporarily switch to the manual mode.
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement when you stop the engine for parking,
In this mode, you can shift into any gear
of the select lever from the “N” to “R” you may not subsequently be able to
position using the shift paddles. For de-
position is possible for a limited time move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If
tails about the manual mode, refer to
period by depressing the brake pedal, this happens, turn the ignition switch to
“Selection of manual mode” F7-22. Once
and then it becomes impossible. For the “ON” position. You will then be able
the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmis-
details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-23. to move the select lever to the “P”
sion will switch from the manual mode
position.
back to the “D” position for normal driving.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (380,1)
& Selection of manual mode nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
and let the engine idle until the warning
CAUTION light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on . By selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
the shift paddles. Doing so may upshifting will not occur automatically.
result in accidental gear shifting. According to the road conditions, shift
change manually so that the tach-
ometer needle does not enter the red
NOTE zone. Also, if the engine revolutions
Please read the following points care- reach the specified number, the fuel
fully and bear them in mind when using supply will be cut. In this case, perform
the manual mode. shift up operation.
Right-hand drive models
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when With the vehicle either moving or station-
a downshift would push the tachometer ary, move the select lever from the “D”
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will position to the “M” position to select the
be emitted to warn you that the down- manual mode.
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se- Left-hand drive models
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-

Black plate (381,1)
“ ” appears, downshifting is possible. ! To deselect the manual mode

When both indicators appear, upshifting To deselect the manual mode, return the
and downshifting are both possible. When select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic position.
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
! Gear shift indicator (if equipped)
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
When shifting up is recommended for
improper operation of the select lever.
good fuel economy, the upshift indicator
blinks. When shifting down is recom- . The select lever cannot be operated
mended, the downshift indicator blinks. unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
! To upshift/downshift depressed.
1) Upshift indicator
Gearshifts can be performed using the . The select lever cannot be moved from
shift paddle behind the steering wheel. the “P” position to any other position
2) Downshift indicator
before the brake pedal is depressed. 7
3) Gear position indicator
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
When the manual mode is selected, the operate the select lever.
gear position indicator and upshift indica- . Only the “P” position allows you to turn
tor and/or downshift indicator on the the ignition switch from the “ACC” position
combination meter illuminate. to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove
The gear position indicator shows the the key from the ignition switch.
currently selected gear in the following . If the ignition switch is turned to the
range. “LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
. 1st-to-8th-gear range (when the Sport lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
Sharp (S#) mode is selected (if equipped)) may not be moved to the “P” position after
. 1st-to-6th-gear range (in other situa- a period of time. Therefore, move the
tions) select lever to the “P” position with the
To upshift to the next higher gear position, brake pedal depressed soon after the
The upshift and downshift indicators show pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
when a gear shift is possible. When the on it. To downshift to the next lower gear “OFF” position.
upshift indicator “ ” appears, upshifting is position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
possible. When the downshift indicator indicated on it.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (382,1)
! Shift lock release using the shift

! Shift lock release
lock release button
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
Perform the following procedure to release
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
the shift lock.
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
pressed and brake pedal depressed. engine.
If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-24. 3. While depressing the brake pedal,
. When the select lever cannot be insert a screwdriver into the hole, press
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”: the shift lock release button using a
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni- screwdriver, and then move the select
tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the lever.
select lever to the “P” position with the If the select lever does not move after
select lever button pressed and brake 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
performing the above procedure, the shift
pedal depressed. with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
lock system may be malfunctioning. We
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
If you must perform the above procedure, recommend that you contact a SUBARU
release button is located under the shift
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control dealer for an inspection as soon as
lock cover.
system) may be malfunctioning. We re- possible.
commend that you contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection as soon as
possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-24.

Black plate (383,1)
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE 7-25
& Driving tips SI-DRIVE (if equipped) acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
CAUTION SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) situations that do not require full power
works to maximize engine performance, output. It provides better control in difficult
If the accelerator and brake pedals driving conditions, such as slippery roads
control and efficiency.
are depressed at the same time, or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
driving torque may be restrained. This system consists of three modes:
response.
This is not a malfunction. Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
(S#). By adjusting the SI-DRIVE selector STI:
. Always apply the foot or parking brake (STI) or SI-DRIVE switches (except STI),
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or the character of the power unit changes.
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when & Intelligent (I) mode
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the ! For smooth, efficient performance
vehicle with only the mechanical friction driving 7
of the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
When the Intelligent (I) mode is selected,
This phenomenon does not indicate a
a shift-up indicator “ ” on the combina-
malfunction.
tion meter will blink to signal the best time
to shift gears for maximum fuel efficiency.
Except STI:
The linear acceleration characteristic of
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well- the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal
balanced performance with greater fuel driving usage.
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (384,1)
7-26 Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE
& Sport (S) mode & Sport Sharp (S#) mode position.
! For all-around performance driving ! For maximum performance driving When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
the following controls will be applied.
. Uphill control
Prevents unnecessary shift-up/shift-down
during ascent.
. Cornering control
While turning, if there is a large centrifugal
force, shift-up will not occur: during re-
acceleration.
. Braking control
At the beginning of corners etc., heavy
application of the brake pedal will cause
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine For sports-minded drivers, the Sport automatic downshift and gently re-accel-
power desired by those who want to make Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating erate.
the driving experience their own personal level of engine performance and control.
adventure. The throttle becomes more responsive . Sudden acceleration return control
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering During acceleration, if acceleration pedal
STI: maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is is returned suddenly (for example, at
The linear acceleration characteristic of ideal for tackling twisting roads and for corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied.
this versatile mode is ideal for normal merging or overtaking other vehicles on
driving use. the freeway with confidence.
Except STI:
When you select the Sport Sharp (S#)
mode while the select lever is in the “D”
position, the transmission gear ratio will
shift from variable speed to eight-speed.
The select lever/gear position indicator
display will change from “D” to the gear

Black plate (385,1)
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE 7-27
& SI-DRIVE selector (STI) the same mode as when the engine & SI-DRIVE switches (except
When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to was turned off. STI)
the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode . While the engine is running, if the
changes to Sport (S) mode. When you malfunction indicator light (CHECK
rotate it to the right, the mode changes to ENGINE light) illuminates, the SI-DRIVE
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, and when you mode changes to the Sport (S) mode. In
push it, the mode changes to Intelligent (I) this case, it is not possible to change to
mode. After performing this operation, the the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or Intelligent
switch returns to its original location. (I) mode.
. If there is a possibility that the
engine could overheat because of a
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, 7
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when SI-DRIVE switches
the engine coolant temperature in-
creases. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators either of the following procedures.
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be . Press the “S/I” switch when the Sport
malfunctioning. We recommend that (S) mode is selected
you contact your SUBARU dealer. . Press the “S#/I” switch when the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode is selected
NOTE
. The next time you turn on the To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S/
engine, after you turned off the engine I” switch when any mode other than Sport
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI- (S) mode is selected.
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
mode. press the “S#/I” switch when any mode
. The next time you turn on the other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is
engine, after you turned off the engine selected.
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (386,1)
7-28 Starting and operating/Limited slip differential (LSD)
NOTE Limited slip differential (LSD) Power steering

. The next time you turn on the (if equipped)
engine, after you turned off the engine & STI
in the Sport (S) mode or Sport Sharp The vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic
(S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes The LSD provides optimum distribution of
power according to the difference in power steering system. The power steer-
to the Intelligent (I) mode. ing system operates only when the engine
. While the engine is running, if the revolutions between the right and left
wheels that may be caused by certain is running. If you lose power steering
malfunction indicator light/CHECK EN- assist because the engine stops or the
GINE warning light illuminates, the SI- driving conditions, thereby improving driv-
ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or system fails to function, you can steer but
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) it will take much more effort.
mode. In this case, it is not possible to other slippery roads or when high speed
change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or driving.
CAUTION
Intelligent (I) mode.
. If there is a possibility that the
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
engine could overheat because of a . Never start the engine while a tire fully locked position left or right for
temperature increase of the engine on one side is jacked up, as the more than 5 seconds. This may
coolant, it is not possible to change to vehicle may move. damage the power steering pump.
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, . If one tire is spinning in mud,
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when avoid continued spinning at high NOTE
the engine coolant temperature in- speed as this could adversely Right after the engine has been started
creases. affect the LSD. and before it has warmed up, you may
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators . If you use a temporary spare tire hear a noise coming from areas adja-
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be to replace a flat tire, be sure to cent to the power steering pump which
malfunctioning. We recommend that use the original temporary spare is located at the right-front area of the
you contact your SUBARU dealer. tire stored in the vehicle. Using engine compartment. This noise is
other sizes will adversely affect normal. It does not indicate power
the LSD. steering system trouble.

Black plate (387,1)
Starting and operating/Power steering 7-29
& Except STI more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
This vehicle is equipped with an electric wheel is operated. We recommend assist limitation to occur too fre-
power steering system. The power steer- that you drive carefully to the near- quently, this may result in a malfunc-
ing system operates only while the engine est SUBARU dealer and have the tion of the power steering control
is running. vehicle inspected immediately. system.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating. 7
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
Power steering warning light speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
When the ignition switch is turned to the parking.
“ON” position, the power steering warning . The steering wheel remains in the
light on the combination meter illuminates fully turned position for a long period
to inform the driver that the warning of time.
system is functioning properly. Then, if
the engine started, the warning light turns At this time, there will be more resis-
off to inform the driver that the steering tance when steering. However this is
power assist is operational. not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
While the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a

Black plate (388,1)
7-30 Starting and operating/Braking
Braking ! Braking when a tire is punctured harder than normal and the braking dis-
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly tance will increase.
& Braking tips when a tire is punctured. This could cause ! Brake assist system
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
WARNING driving straight ahead while gradually WARNING
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
Never rest your foot on the brake road to a safe place. Do not be overconfident about the
pedal while driving. This can cause brake assist. It is not a system that
dangerous overheating of the & Brake system brings more braking ability to the
brakes and needless wear on the vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
brake pads and linings. ! Two separate circuits ity. Always use the utmost care
Your vehicle has two separate circuit when driving regarding vehicle
! When the brakes get wet brake systems. Each circuit works diag- speed and safe distance.
When driving in rain or after washing the onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails, CAUTION
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle the brake pedal will go down much closer
When you need to brake suddenly,
at a safe speed while lightly depressing to the floor than usual and you will need to
continue depressing the brake pedal
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. press it down much harder. And a much
strongly to obtain the effect of the
longer distance will be needed to stop the
! Use of engine braking vehicle.
brake assist.
Remember to make use of engine braking ! Brake booster Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
The brake booster uses engine manifold It assists the brake power when the driver
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
the brakes may start working improperly
turn off the engine while driving because and the brake power is insufficient.
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To that will turn off the brake booster, result- Brake assist generates the brake power
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to ing in poor braking power. according to the speed at which the driver
get stronger engine braking. The brakes will continue to work even depresses the brake pedal.
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much

Black plate (389,1)
Starting and operating/Braking 7-31

NOTE ! Operating condition & Disc brake pad wear warning
When you depress the brake pedal The Emergency Stop Signal activates indicators
strongly or suddenly, the following when all of the following conditions are
phenomena occur. However, even met.
though these occur, they do not indi-
. The hazard warning flasher is off.
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly. . The vehicle speed is 60 km/h (37 mph)
or more.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener- . The system judges that sudden braking
ates a greater braking force. has occurred based on the vehicle decel-
. You might hear the sound of the eration when the brake pedal is de-
ABS operating from the engine compressed.
partment.
! Automatic cancel
! Emergency Stop Signal The Emergency Stop Signal is canceled in 7
The Emergency Stop Signal is a function either of the following circumstances. The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
that automatically blinks the hazard warn- . The hazard warning flasher is turned tors on the disc brakes give a warning
ing flasher in short intervals when the on. noise when the brake pads are worn.
brake pedal is depressed suddenly. The . The brake pedal is released. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
rapid flashing of the hazard warning . The system judges that sudden braking from the disc brakes while braking, we
flasher cautions the vehicles behind and has ended, based on the vehicle decel- recommend that you immediately have
reduces the possibility of a collision. eration. your vehicle checked by your SUBARU
CAUTION dealer.
The operational/non-operational setting of
the Emergency Stop Signal can be chan-
The Emergency Stop Signal is acti- ged by a SUBARU dealer. For details, we
vated in priority over the turn signal. recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (390,1)
7-32 Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- following distance from other also hear the sound of the ABS working
vehicles. from the engine compartment. This is
tem) caused by an automatic functional test of
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or the ABS system being carried out and
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of does not indicate any abnormal condition.
wheels which may occur during sudden over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
braking or braking on slippery road sur-
er for a vehicle with the ABS & ABS warning light
faces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability system than one without. When Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-22.
caused by wheel lock-up. driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
When the ABS system is operating, you leave ample distance from other
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vehicles.
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal . When tire chains are installed,
when the ABS operates. stopping distances may be long-
The ABS system will not operate when the er for a vehicle with the ABS
vehicle speed is below approximately 10 system than one without. Be sure
km/h (6 mph). to reduce your speed and main-
tain a safe distance from the
WARNING vehicle in front.
. When you feel the ABS system
Always use the utmost care in operating, you should maintain
driving – overconfidence because constant brake pedal pressure.
you are driving with an ABS Do not pump the brake pedal
equipped vehicle could easily lead since doing so may defeat the
to a serious accident. operation of the ABS system.
CAUTION & ABS system self-check

. The ABS system does not always Just after the vehicle is started, you may
decrease stopping distance. You feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
should always maintain a safe to when the ABS operates, and you may

Black plate (391,1)
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 7-33
Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system warning light illuminate simultaneously,
fails take the following steps.
tribution (EBD) system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the engine.
the braking force. It functions by adjusting 3. Restart the engine.
the distribution of braking force to the rear 4. Release the parking brake.
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
Even if both warning lights turn off:
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
We recommend that you drive carefully to
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system’s components to perform its func-
system inspected.
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak- 7
ing force. If any of the ABS components If both warning lights illuminate again
used by the EBD system malfunction, the If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, and remain illuminated after restarting
EBD system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake the engine:
system warning light and ABS warning 1. Turn off the engine again.
When the EBD system is operating, you light illuminate simultaneously.
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight 2. Apply the parking brake.
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal The EBD system may be malfunctioning if 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
and does not indicate a malfunction. the brake system warning light and ABS about checking the brake fluid level, refer
warning light illuminate simultaneously to “Checking the fluid level” F11-28.
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the . If the brake fluid level is not below the
conventional braking system will still func- “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
tion. However, the rear wheels will be malfunctioning. We recommend that you
more prone to locking when the brakes drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
are applied harder than usual and the dealer and have the system inspected.
vehicle’s motion may therefore become . If the brake fluid level is below the
somewhat harder to control. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
If the brake system warning light and ABS Instead, we recommend that you have the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (392,1)
7-34 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU Vehicle Dynamics Control when driving the vehicle in such
dealer for repair. a condition.
system
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
WARNING namics Control system is an
. Driving with the brake system WARNING indication that the road being
warning light illuminated is dan- travelled on has a slippery sur-
gerous. This indicates your brake Always use the utmost care in face; since having Vehicle Dy-
system may not be working driving – overconfidence because namics Control is no guarantee
properly. If the light remains you are driving a vehicle with the that full vehicle control will be
illuminated, we recommend that Vehicle Dynamics Control system maintained at all times and under
you have the brakes inspected could easily lead to a serious acci- all conditions, its activation
by a SUBARU dealer immedi- dent. should be seen as a sign that
ately. the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. If at all in doubt about whether CAUTION
the brakes are operating prop- . Whenever suspension compo-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. We . Even if your vehicle is equipped nents, steering components, or
recommend that you have your with Vehicle Dynamics Control, an axle are removed from a
vehicle towed to the nearest winter tires or snow chains vehicle, we recommend that you
SUBARU dealer for repair. should be used when driving on have an inspection of that sys-
snow-covered or icy roads; in tem performed by an authorized
addition, vehicle speed should SUBARU dealer.
be reduced considerably. Simply . The following precautions should
having a Vehicle Dynamics Con- be observed in order to ensure
trol system does not guarantee that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
that the vehicle will be able to trol system is operating properly:
avoid accidents in any situation. – All four wheels should be
. When a vehicle is fitted with fitted with tires of the same
snow chains, the effectiveness size, type, and brand. Further-
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control more, the amount of wear
system is reduced and this should be the same for all
should be taken into account four tires.

Black plate (393,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-35
– Keep the tire pressure at the the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
proper level as shown on the adjusts the engine’s output and the
label attached to the vehicle’s wheels’ respective braking forces to help
door pillar. maintain traction and directional control.
– Use only the special tempor- . Traction Control Function
ary spare tire to replace a flat The traction control function is designed to
tire. With a temporary spare prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
tire, the effectiveness of the slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
Vehicle Dynamics Control maintain traction and directional control.
system is reduced and this Activation of this function is shown by
should be taken into account flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
when driving the vehicle in operation indicator light.
such a condition.
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-
. If non-matching tires are used, . Skid Suppression Function
the Vehicle Dynamics Control The skid suppression function is designed
cator light 7
system may not operate cor- to help maintain directional stability by NOTE
rectly. suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sideways during steering operations. Acti- tem may be considered normal when
system helps prevent unstable vation of this function is shown by flashing the following conditions occur.
vehicle motion such as skidding of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation – Slight twitching of the brake
using control of the brakes and indicator light. pedal is felt.
engine power. Do not turn off the – The vehicle or steering wheel
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- shakes to a small degree.
tem unless it is absolutely ne- – An operating sound from the
cessary. If you must turn off the engine compartment is heard
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- briefly when starting the engine
tem, drive very carefully accord- and when driving off after starting
ing to the road surface condition. the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding when driving off after starting the
on a slippery road surface and/or during engine.
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (394,1)
7-36 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
. In the following circumstances, the & Vehicle Dynamics Control

vehicle may be less stable than it feels system monitor
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
Such operation does not indicate a ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
system malfunction. tion indicator light” F3-22 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/
– on gravel-covered or rutted
Traction mode indicator light” F3-24.
roads
– on unfinished roads
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
OFF switch
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (left-
hand drive models)
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
1) Traction mode indicator light

2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(right-hand drive models)
1) Models with seat position memory switch
2) Models without seat position memory
switch

Black plate (395,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-37
When the switch is pressed briefly or for Dynamics Control system, the traction NOTE
more than approximately 2 seconds dur- mode indicator light and the Vehicle . When the switch has been pressed
ing engine operation, the mode of the Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turn to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Vehicle Dynamics Control System will be off. Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
changed. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Control system automatically reacti-
! Vehicle Dynamics Control mode mode vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
When the ignition switch is on, this mode This mode allows only the ABS control.
position and the engine is restarted.
is selected. When the switch is pressed for more than . If the switch is held down for 30
This mode enables all controls for ABS, approximately 2 seconds during engine seconds or longer, the Vehicle Dy-
the Traction Control System, and the operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control namics Control OFF indicator light
Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Select OFF indicator light on the combination turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
this mode for most driving situations. meter illuminates. When the switch is system is activated, and the system
When this mode is selected, both indicator pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle ignores any further pressing of the
lights on the combination meter turn off. Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle switch. To make the switch usable 7
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
! Traction mode again, turn the ignition switch to the
turns off. “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
This mode restricts the functions of the
Traction Control System and Vehicle Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by engine.
Dynamics Control system and thus delays deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control . When the Vehicle Dynamics Control
utilizing their functions as a reaction to system temporarily may help to escape OFF mode is selected, the vehicle’s
vehicle behavior in comparison with the from the following situations. Use the running performance is comparable
Vehicle Dynamics Control mode. This Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as with that of a vehicle that does not
mode should be used in driving situations necessary. have a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
where the vehicle dynamic performance . a standing start on a steeply sloping tem. Do not deactivate the Vehicle
will improve without decreasing engine road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or Dynamics Control system except when
torque control. otherwise slippery surface absolutely necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
When the switch is pressed briefly during . extrication of the vehicle when its
Control OFF mode is selected, compo-
engine operation, the traction mode in- wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
nents of the brake control system may
dicator light and the Vehicle Dynamics still activate. When the brake control
Control OFF indicator light on the combi- You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
nation meter illuminate. When the switch namics Control operation indicator
is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle the above-mentioned situations.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (396,1)
7-38 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
light illuminates. Tire pressure monitoring WARNING

system (TPMS) (if equipped)
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
to the COLD tire pressure
vides the driver with a warning message
shown on the vehicle placard
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
on the door pillar on the
installed in each wheel when the tire
driver’s side.
pressure is severely low relative to the
selected TPMS mode. Even when the vehicle is driven a
The tire pressure monitoring system will very short distance, the tires get
activate only when the vehicle is driven at warm and their pressures in-
speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). Also, crease accordingly. Be sure to
this system may not react immediately to a let the tires cool thoroughly be-
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, fore adjusting their pressures to
a blow-out caused by running over a the standard values shown on
sharp object). the tire placard. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” F11-34. The tire
pressure monitoring system
does not function when the ve-

Black plate (397,1)
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) 7-39
hicle is stationary. After adjusting . When a tire is repaired with liquid & TPMS mode setting
the tire pressures, increase the sealant, the tire pressure warning Before driving your vehicle, make sure
vehicle speed to at least 40 km/h valve and transmitter may not that the TPMS mode is set to the most
(25 mph) to start the TPMS operate properly. If a liquid sea- appropriate one based on the loading
rechecking of the tire inflation lant is used, we recommend that condition of the vehicle.
pressures. If the tire pressures you contact your nearest
Set a mode under the following conditions.
are now above the severe low SUBARU dealer or other qualified
pressure threshold, the low tire service shop as soon as possi- . when the vehicle is stationary
pressure warning light should ble. Make sure to replace the tire . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
turn off a few minutes later. pressure warning valve and position
If this light still illuminates while transmitter when replacing the
There are two types of TPMS mode
driving after adjusting the tire tire. You may reuse the wheel if
settings.
pressure, a tire may have signifi- there is no damage to it and if the
cant damage and a fast leak that sealant residue is properly TPMS1: Normal mode
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. cleaned off. If the light illumi- 7
nates steadily after blinking for TPMS2: Loading mode
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as approximately one minute, we
recommend that you promptly ! TPMS mode selection
possible.
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
. When a spare tire is mounted or a the system inspected.
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low CAUTION
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking Do not place metal film or any metal
for approximately one minute. parts in the trunk. This may cause
This indicates the TPMS is un- poor reception of the signals from
able to monitor all four road the tire pressure sensors, and the
wheels. We recommend that you tire pressure monitoring system will
contact your SUBARU dealer as not function properly.
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys- 1) TPMS set switch
tem resetting.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (398,1)
7-40 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
1. Press and hold the TPMS set switch Parking your vehicle
(for approximately 3 seconds). The current
TPMS mode will be displayed in the trip
meter display, and the TPMS mode can be WARNING
changed.
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
After the TPMS mode is displayed, the trip cause severe or possibly fatal
meter will appear again. injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
NOTE flammable materials such as dry
If no operations are performed while grass, waste paper or rags, as
the TPMS mode selection is activated, they may burn easily if they come
2. Briefly press the TPMS set switch to the display will return to the trip meter near hot engine or exhaust sys-
change the mode. The mode will change after approximately 10 seconds. tem parts.
in the following sequence.
Change the TPMS mode according to . Be sure to stop the engine if you
the specified pressure shown on the take a nap in the vehicle. If
3. When the desired mode is displayed, tire inflation pressure label. engine exhaust gas enters the
press and hold the switch (for approxi- passenger compartment, occu-
mately 3 seconds) to confirm the setting. pants in the vehicle could die
Once the setting is complete, the con- from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
firmation message will be displayed (for tained in the exhaust gas.
example, if you select TPMS2, “TPMS2
SET” will be displayed).

Black plate (399,1)
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-41
& Parking brake CAUTION

To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until Never drive while the parking brake
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up. is set because this will cause un-
necessary wear on the brake lin-
ings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, always turn the
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the steering wheel. When the vehicle is 7
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a headed up the hill, the front wheels should
downgrade. be turned away from the curb.
To release the parking brake, perform the . For CVT models, put the select lever in
following procedure. the “P” (Park) position.
1. Pull the lever up slightly. Never rely on the mechanical friction of
2. Press the release button. the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
3. Lower the lever while keeping the
button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”
F3-25. When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.

Black plate (400,1)
7-42 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
Hill start assist system ditions.

. when the clutch pedal is depressed
while the brake pedal is also depressed
WARNING (MT models)
. when the vehicle has stopped with the
. The Hill start assist system is a
brake pedal depressed (CVT models)
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill Braking power is maintained temporarily
grade. To prevent accidents (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
when the vehicle is parked on a start assist system after the brake pedal is
slope, be sure to firmly set the released. The driver is therefore able to
parking brake. When setting the start the vehicle in the same way as on a
parking brake, make sure that the level grade, just using the clutch pedal
vehicle remains stationary when (MT models only) and accelerator pedal
the clutch pedal (MT models) and (all models).
brake pedal (both MT and CVT
models) is released. If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
is released, apply more braking power by
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
depressing the brake pedal again.
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist The Hill start assist system may not
system will be deactivated, caus- operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
ing an accident. start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
1) Starting forward facing uphill
easier.
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-

Black plate (401,1)
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-43
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is NOTE

illuminated If an incorrect operation is performed,
When starting in reverse and using the Hill place the ignition switch in the
start assist system, a braking effect may “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then start
be felt even after the brake pedal has over again.
been released. However, this braking ! To deactivate
effect should disappear once the clutch
pedal is released. 1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
NOTE 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
A slight jolt may be felt when the “OFF” position.
vehicle begins to move forward after 3. Restart the engine.
being reversed.
7
& To activate/deactivate the Hill
start assist system
CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
maintained if the brake pedal is
released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
. when starting backward facing uphill 4. Confirm the following items.
. when starting forward facing downhill You can activate/deactivate the Hill start (1) The Brake system warning light
. while the parking brake is applied assist system according to the following illuminates.
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” procedure. (2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position warning light turns off.
. while the Hill start assist warning light/ (3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (402,1)
7-44 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
OFF indicator light turns off.

(4) The ABS warning light turns off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch Hill start assist OFF indicator light
(right-hand drive models)
1) Models with seat position memory switch 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch 2) Models without seat position memory Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch,
(left-hand drive models) switch press the Vehicle Dynamics Control mode
switch once again. Then the Hill start
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
mode switch and hold it until the Vehicle 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on “OFF” position. The hill start assist system
the combination meter illuminates for has now been deactivated.
several seconds and then turns off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light NOTE
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics While the Hill start assist system is
Control mode switch. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light illuminates continuously.

Black plate (403,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-45
! To activate Cruise control & To set cruise control

When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the Cruise control enables you to maintain a
system is activated. When the Hill start constant vehicle speed without holding
assist system is activated, the Hill start your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
assist OFF indicator light turns off. operative when the vehicle speed is 40
& Hill start assist warning light/ km/h (25 mph) or more.
Hill start assist OFF indicator WARNING
light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill Do not use the cruise control under
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-26. any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade Cruise control main button 7
. driving on slippery or winding 1. Press the cruise control main button.
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
The cruise control indicator on the combi-

nation meter will appear.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (404,1)
7-46 Starting and operating/Cruise control
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the appears in the combination meter.
vehicle reaches the desired speed. The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
NOTE
For CVT models, when you set the . Press the “CANCEL” button.
desired speed while the Sport Sharp
(S#) mode is selected, the select lever/ . Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the gear position indicator will change . Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
“SET” side and release it. Then release from the current gear position indica- only).
the accelerator pedal. tion to the “D” indication.
WARNING
& To temporarily cancel the For CVT models, you can cancel the
cruise control cruise control by shifting the select
The cruise control can be temporarily lever into the “N” position. However,
canceled in the following ways. do not shift the lever into the “N”
position while driving except in case
of emergency. If the select lever is
shifted into the “N” position, the
engine brake will no longer work.
This could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator in the

combination meter disappears when the
At this time, the cruise control set indicator

Black plate (405,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-47
cruise control is canceled. vehicle is completely stopped). Except U.K. models:

The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
& To change the cruising speed (0.6 mph) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “RES” side quickly.
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch) ! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
To resume the cruise control after it has erator pedal. 7
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 30 km/h (20 NOTE
mph) or more, press the “RES/SET” CVT models:
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” . If you depress the accelerator pedal
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is
The cruise control set indicator in the selected, the select lever/gear position
combination meter will automatically ap- the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment indicator may change from the “D”
pear at this time. indication to the current gear position
will be memorized and treated as the new
indication.
& To turn off the cruise control set speed.
. If you depress the accelerator pedal
There are two ways to turn off the cruise U.K. models: fully while the Intelligent (I) mode or the
control: The set speed can be increased 1 mph Sport (S) mode is selected, the trans-
. Press the cruise control main button (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the mission will operate like a conventional
again. “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side automatic transmission.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or quickly.
“LOCK/OFF” position (but only when the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (406,1)
7-48 Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)
! To decrease the speed (by the ! To decrease the speed (by brake Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-
“RES/SET” switch) pedal) tion (SRVD) (if equipped)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily. The Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection
2. When the speed decreases to the (SRVD) consists of rear radar with Blind
desired speed, press the “RES/SET” Spot Detection, Lane Change Assist, and
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the Rear Cross Traffic Alert.
desired speed is set and the vehicle will These functions enable the system to
keep running at that speed without de- detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
pressing the accelerator pedal. and alert the driver when changing lanes
or reversing the vehicle.
& Cruise control indicator
Refer to “Cruise control indicator” F3-34. WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET” & Cruise control set indicator safely. Always be sure to check the
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches Refer to “Cruise control set indicator” F3- surroundings with your eyes when
the desired speed. Then, release the 34. changing lanes or reversing the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment vehicle.
will be memorized and treated as the new The system is designed to assist the
set speed. driver by monitoring the rear and
U.K. models: side areas of the vehicle during a
The set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 lane change or reversing. However,
km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/ you cannot rely on this system
SET” switch to the “SET” side quickly. alone in assuring the safety during
a lane change or reversing. Over-
Except U.K. models: confidence in this system could
The set speed can be lowered 1 km/h (0.6 result in an accident and lead to
mph) each time by pressing the “RES/ serious injury or death. Since the
SET” switch to the “SET” side quickly. system operation has various limita-
tions, the flashing or illumination of
the SRVD approach indicator light

Black plate (407,1)
Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) 7-49
may be delayed or it may not ! Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
operate at all even when a vehicle
is present in a neighboring lane or
approaching from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System features

SRVD consists of the following functions:
. to detect a vehicle in a blind spot in an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
1) Operating range 1) Operating range 7
Spot Detection and Lane Change Assist)
. to detect a vehicle approaching from The system notifies the driver of vehicles The system notifies the driver of vehicles
right or left while reversing the vehicle existing in the blind area. If the system approaching at a high speed in the
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) detects a vehicle existing in the blind area, neighboring lanes. If the system detects
it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat- a vehicle approaching at a high speed in
The system uses radar sensors for the ing the SRVD approach indicator light(s) the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver
following features. on the outside mirror(s). If the driver of dangers by illuminating the SRVD
operates the turn signal lever in the approach indicator light(s) on the outside
NOTE direction where the SRVD approach in- mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn
The SRVD radar sensor is approved dicator light is illuminating, the system signal lever in the direction where the
under the radio wave related laws of warns the driver of dangers by flashing the SRVD approach indicator light is illuminat-
each country. Refer to chapter 13. SRVD approach indicator light. ing, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the SRVD approach
indicator light.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (408,1)
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
1) The detection range of the radar sensors 1) The detection range of the radar sensors
1) Operating range A) Vehicle that may be detected 2) The out of detection range of the radar
sensors
The system notifies the driver of another B) Vehicle that may not be detected
vehicle approaching from either side when
WARNING
driving in reverse. This feature helps the In parking areas in which parking WARNING
driver check the rear and side areas of the lots are located diagonally to driving
vehicle when moving backward. lanes as indicated in the illustration The approaching vehicle (B) may
above, the system may detect a not be detected because the vehicle
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
vehicle (A) that is coming across reversing is blocked by a parked
ing from either side while moving back-
the front of your vehicle in some vehicle. Always be sure to check the
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
cases. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when
following way.
surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle, because the
. The SRVD approach indicator light(s) detectability of RCTA is limited.
on the outside mirror(s) flashes. reversing the vehicle, because the
detectability of RCTA is limited.
. A warning buzzer sounds.

Black plate (409,1)
& System operation stop operating) and the SRVD warning – When the vehicle battery voltage
indicator will appear. The SRVD will lowers
! Operating conditions resume operation once these condi- – When the vehicle battery be-
The SRVD will operate when all of the tions are corrected, and the SRVD comes overvoltage
following conditions are met. warning indicator will disappear. How- . The detectability of the radar sen-
. The ignition switch is in the “ON” ever, if the SRVD warning indicator has sors is restricted. The SRVD detection
position. appeared for a prolonged time, we may be impaired and the system may
. The SRVD warning indicator and recommend that you have the system not operate properly under the follow-
SRVD OFF indicator are turned off. inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon ing conditions.
as possible. – When the rear bumper around
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph) (except when reversing). – When the radar sensor becomes the radar sensors is distorted
significantly misaligned (If the or- – When ice, snow or mud adheres
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R” ientation of the radar sensor is
position (RCTA only). to the rear bumper surface around
shifted for any reason, readjust- the radar sensors
The SRVD will not operate in the following ment is required. We recommend – When stickers, etc. are affixed on 7
situations. that you have the sensor adjusted the areas of the radar sensors on
. The SRVD OFF indicator appears. at a SUBARU dealer.) the rear bumper
. The vehicle speed is below 10 km/h (6 – When a large amount of snow or – During adverse weather condi-
mph) even when the SRVD OFF indicator ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- tions such as rain, snow or fog
does not appear (except when reversing). face around the radar sensors – When driving on wet roads such
– When the vehicle is driven on a as snow-covered roads and
NOTE snow-covered road or in an envir- through puddles
. When a malfunction occurs in the onment in which there are no . The radar sensors may not detect or
system (including the SRVD approach objects around (such as in a desert) may have difficulty detecting the fol-
indicator light), the SRVD will stop for a long time lowing vehicles and objects.
operating and the SRVD warning in- – When the temperature around – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
dicator will appear. If the SRVD warning the radar sensors increased exces- destrians, stationary objects on the
indicator appears, we recommend that sively due to long driving on uphill road or road side and etc.
you have your vehicle inspected at a grades in summer, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. – When the temperature around the radar may not reflect (vehicles
. In the following cases, the SRVD will the radar sensors becomes extre- with lower body height such as a
temporarily stop operating (or may mely low trailer with no cargo and sports
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (410,1)
cars) & SRVD approach indicator signal lever is operated toward the side
– Vehicles that are not approach- light/warning buzzer in which this light turned on, the indicator
ing your vehicle even though they light flashes to warn the driver of dangers.
While the SRVD is active, the following When reversing the vehicle, the indicator
are in the detection area (either on a
item(s) will operate to alert the driver. light flashes when the system detects a
neighboring lane to the rear or
beside your vehicle when rever- . The SRVD approach indicator light vehicle approaching from either side.
sing) (The system determines the (when there are vehicles in the neighbor-
ing lanes) ! SRVD approach indicator light
presence of approaching vehicles
. The SRVD approach indicator light and dimming function
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.) warning buzzer (when a vehicle is ap- When the headlights are turned on, the
– Vehicles traveling at significantly proaching from the left or right side while brightness of the SRVD approach indica-
different speeds reversing) tor light will be reduced.
– Vehicles driving in parallel at NOTE
almost the same speed as your ! SRVD approach indicator light
. When affected by direct sunlight,
vehicle for a prolonged time
you may have difficulty recognizing
– Oncoming vehicles the SRVD approach indicator light.
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the . When affected by the headlight
neighboring lane beams from the vehicles behind, you
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi- may have difficulty recognizing the
cantly lower speed that you are SRVD approach indicator light.
trying to overtake . While the illumination brightness
. On a road with extremely narrow control dial is in the fully upward
lanes, the system may detect vehicles position, even if the headlights are
driving in a lane next to the neighbor- turned on, the brightness of the SRVD
ing lane. approach indicator light will not be
reduced. For details about the illumina-
SRVD approach indicator light tion brightness control dial, refer to
“Illumination brightness control” F3-
It is mounted in each side of the outside 100.
mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle
approaching from behind is detected. If an
indicator light illuminates and the turn

Black plate (411,1)
! SRVD approach warning buzzer when making turns at an intersection)

(only when reversing) – When there is a difference in height
A warning buzzer sounds along with between your lane and the neighbor-
flashing of the SRVD approach indicator ing lane
light to warn the driver of dangers. – Immediately after the SRVD is
activated by pressing the SRVD OFF
The setting of the warning buzzer volume switch
can be changed by operating the multi – Immediately after the shift lever/
information display of the combination select lever is shifted to the “R”
meter. For details, refer to “SRVD (Subaru position
Rear Vehicle Detection)” F3-46. – When extremely heavy cargo is
! Safety tips regarding the SRVD loaded in the trunk
approach indicator light/warning . During reversing, operation of the
buzzer SRVD approach indicator light and the . The SRVD approach indicator light
. In the following cases, operation of the warning buzzer may be delayed or the may illuminate when driving close to solid 7
SRVD approach indicator light and the system may fail to issue these warnings objects on the road or road side (such as
warning buzzer may be delayed or the under the following conditions. guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
system may fail to issue these warnings. – When backing out of an angled . When turning at an intersection in
– When a vehicle moves to the parking space urban areas or an intersection in a multi-
neighboring lane from a lane next to – When a large-sized vehicle is lane road, the SRVD approach indicator
the neighboring lane parked next to your vehicle (That light may flash.
– When driving on a steep incline or vehicle prevents the propagation of . If a building or a wall exists in the
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill radar waves.) reversing direction, the SRVD approach
grades – When reversing on sloped roads indicator light may flash and the warning
– When going beyond a pass – When reversing at a high speed buzzer may sound.
– When both your vehicle and a . In the following cases, the system may
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
are driving on the far side of each lane. from your vehicle.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve- – When your vehicle drives on the
hicles are approaching in a row near side of its lane from the corre-
– In low radius bends (tight bends or sponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (412,1)
away drives on the near side of its lane played for a prolonged time, we recom- ! System malfunction indicator
from your vehicle mend that you have the system inspected
at a SUBARU dealer.
& SRVD warning indicator ! System temporary stop indicator
! System temporary stop indicator due to reduced radar sensitivity
System malfunction indicator

1) At first, this message will appear
2) Then this message will appear
This indicator appears when a malfunction
System temporary stop indicator System temporary stop indicator due to occurs in the system. We recommend that
reduced radar sensitivity you contact a SUBARU dealer and have
This indicator appears when the system is the system inspected.
This indicator appears when the detect-
used under the following conditions.
ability of the radar sensors is reduced.
. Extremely high or low temperatures Once the condition is corrected, the
. When abnormal voltage exists for the system will recover from the temporary
vehicle battery stop condition and the indicator will
. When the radar sensor is significantly disappear. If the indicator remains dis-
misaligned played for a prolonged time, we recom-
mend that you have the system inspected
Once these conditions are corrected, the at a SUBARU dealer.
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will
disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

Black plate (413,1)
& SRVD OFF switch – When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
SRVD deactivated, the SRVD remains
deactivated the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
. If the vehicle battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery
SRVD OFF indicator terminal or fuse replacement, after the
SRVD OFF switch (left-hand drive models) If the SRVD OFF switch is pressed, the battery is reconnected, the SRVD will 7
SRVD OFF indicator appears on the multi be activated.
information display of the combination
meter, and the SRVD is deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the
SRVD. The SRVD OFF indicator disap-
pears.
NOTE
. In the following cases, press the
SRVD OFF switch to deactivate the
system. The system may not operate
properly due to blocked radar waves.
– When a bicycle carrier or other
SRVD OFF switch (right-hand drive mod- item is fitted to the rear of the
els) vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (414,1)
& Handling of radar sensors NOTE

. To ensure correct operation of the
SRVD, observe the following precau-
tions.
– Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
– Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors.
– Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
– Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
– Do not expose the bumper near
Radar sensors the radar sensors to strong im-
The radar sensors, one on each side of pacts. If a sensor becomes misa-
the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear ligned, a system malfunction may
bumper. occur, including the inability to
detect vehicles entering the detec-
tion areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to
contact your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
– Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
. If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.

Black plate (17,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Winter driving ...................................................... 8-6
1,600 km (1,000 miles) ..................................... 8-2 Operation during cold weather ............................. 8-6
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-8
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 Corrosion protection............................................ 8-9
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Snow tires ........................................................... 8-9
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 Tire chains ........................................................ 8-10
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-10
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-10
Driving precaution............................................... 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-11

Black plate (418,1)
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles)
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,600 km (1,000 monoxide)
miles) The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
WARNING
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,600 km (1,000 miles): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not allow the engine speed to maintain that speed for as long as gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emer- possible. . Always properly maintain the en-
gency. . Do not pump the accelerator pedal and gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or avoid racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be tire wear and fuel consumption. vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly . Use the air conditioner only when the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or necessary. unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. . Keep the front and rear wheels in lation fan to force fresh air into
proper alignment. the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
. The indication of the ECO gauge or other obstructions to ensure
shows a reference for saving fuel. For that the ventilation system al-
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-12. ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

Black plate (419,1)
Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have t he probl em gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded petrol. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the trunk lid closed while catalytic converter.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
. Never start the engine by pushing or
from entering the vehicle.
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
NOTE . Never turn off the ignition switch while
Due to the expansion and contraction the vehicle is moving.
of the metals used in the manufacture . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the exhaust system, you may hear a the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
crackling sound coming from the ex- STI firing or incomplete combustion), we re-
haust system for a short time after the commend that you have your vehicle 8
engine has been shut off. This sound is checked and repaired by an authorized
normal. SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Except STI or park the vehicle anywhere
The catalytic converter is installed in the near flammable materials (e.g.
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to grass, paper, rags or leaves),
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (420,1)
8-4 Driving tips/Periodic inspections
because the catalytic converter Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries

operates at very high tempera-
tures. To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
. Keep everyone and flammable at all times, always have the recom- another country:
materials away from the exhaust mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
pipe while the engine is running. the maintenance schedule performed at fuel. Refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
The exhaust gas is very hot. the specified time or mileage intervals. . Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.

Black plate (421,1)
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models 8-5
Driving tips for AWD models printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
bottom of driver’s door pillar.
WARNING If all of four tires are not the same
. Always maintain a safe driving for items (a) to (h), there is a
speed according to the road and possibility that serious mechan-
weather conditions in order to ical damage could occur to the
avoid having an accident on a drive train of your car, and affect
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the following.
ing or under other similar condi- — Ride
tions. — Handling
. Always use the utmost care in — Braking
driving – overconfidence be- — Speedometer/Odometer All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
cause you are driving an All- calibration power to all four wheels. AWD models
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily provide better traction when driving on
— Clearance between the body
lead to a serious accident.
and tires
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and 8
. When you replacing or installing when moving out of mud, sand or dirt.
tire(s), all four tires must be the It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control, For safety purpose as well as to avoid
same for following items. damaging the AWD system, you should
and it can lead to an accident.
(a) Size keep the following tips in mind:
(b) Circumference . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
(c) Speed symbol CAUTION steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a front wheel drive vehicle.
(d) Load index If you use a temporary spare tire to There is little difference in handling,
(e) Construction replace a flat tire, be sure to use the however, during extremely sharp turns or
(f) Manufacturer original temporary spare tire stored sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may down a slope or turning corners, be sure
(g) Brand (tread pattern) result in severe mechanical damage to reduce your speed and maintain an
(h) Degrees of wear to the drive train of your vehicle. ample distance from other vehicles.
For the items (a) to (d), you must . Always check the cold tire pressure
obey the specification that is before starting to drive. The recom-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (422,1)
8-6 Driving tips/Driving precaution
mended tire pressure is provided on the Driving precaution Winter driving

tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
Water entering the engine air intake or the & Operation during cold
. Tire chains should always be placed on exhaust pipe or water splashing onto weather
the front wheels only. electrical parts may damage your vehicle Carry some emergency equipment, such
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of
under hard-driving conditions such as drive through rushing water; regardless of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate its depth, it can wash away the ground cables.
more frequent replacement of the follow- from under your tires, resulting in possible
ing items than that specified in “Mainte- loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. Check the battery and cables. Cold
nance schedule” F11-3. temperatures reduce battery capacity.
– Engine oil The battery must be in good condition to
– Brake fluid provide enough power for cold winter
– Rear differential gear oil starts.
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod- It normally takes longer to start the engine
els) in very cold weather conditions. Use an
– Continuously variable transmission engine oil of a suitable grade and viscosity
fluid (CVT models) for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
– Front differential gear oil (CVT will make it harder to start the engine.
models)
Keep the door locks from freezing by
. There are some precautions that you
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detail information, refer to “Towing” Forcing a frozen door open may damage
F9-13. or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of

Black plate (423,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-7
the vehicle. CAUTION ! Parking in cold weather

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% Adjust the washer fluid concentra- WARNING
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- tion appropriately for the outside
perature varies according to how much it temperature. If the concentration is Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
is diluted, as indicated in the following inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid gases under your vehicle. Keep
table. may freeze on the windshield and snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
obstruct your view, and the fluid from around your vehicle if you park
Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Tempera- may freeze in the reservoir tank. the vehicle in snow with the engine
centration ture running.
30% −128C (10.48F) ! Before driving your vehicle
50% −208C (−48F) Before entering the vehicle, remove any CAUTION
100% −458C (−498F) snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and . Do not use the parking brake
In order to prevent freezing of washer driving dangerous. when parking for long periods in
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in cold weather since it could freeze
the table above when adjusting the fluid
While warming up the vehicle before in that position. 8
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
concentration to the outside temperature. brake pedal, and all other controls operate . When the vehicle is parked in
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with smoothly. snow or when it snows, raise the
a different concentration from the one wiper blades off the glass to
used previously, purge the old fluid from Clear away ice and snow that has prevent damage to them.
the piping between the reservoir tank and accumulated under the fenders to avoid . When the vehicle has been left
washer nozzles by operating the washer making steering difficult. During severe parked after use on roads heavily
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if winter driving, stop when and where it is covered with snow, or has been
the concentration of the fluid remaining in safe to do so and check under the fenders left parked during a snowstorm,
the piping is too low for the outside periodically. icing may develop on the brake
temperature, it may freeze and block the system, which could cause poor
nozzles. braking action. Check for snow
or ice buildup on the suspension,
disc brakes and brake hoses
underneath the vehicle. If there
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (424,1)
8-8 Driving tips/Winter driving
is caked snow or ice, remove it, & Driving on snowy and icy CAUTION
being careful not to damage the roads
disc brakes and brake hoses and To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid Avoid prolonged continuous driving
ABS harness. sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
speed driving, and sharp turning when engine’s intake system and may
When parking for long periods in cold hinder the airflow, which could re-
driving on snowy or icy roads.
weather, you should observe the following sult in engine shutdown or even
tips. Always maintain ample distance between
breakdown.
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models, ! Wiper operation when snowing
place the select lever in the “P” position. To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the Before driving in cold weather, make sure
2. Use tire stops under the tires to the wiper blades are not frozen to the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
prevent the vehicle from moving. windshield or rear window.
when necessary.)
! Refueling in cold weather Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- If the wiper blades are frozen to the
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly windshield or rear window, perform the
To help prevent moisture from forming in leading to loss of vehicle control.
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, following procedure.
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- . To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
tank is recommended during cold weather. hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- use the defroster and set the temperature
Use only additives that are specifically mance on snowy and icy roads. For for maximum warmth until the wiper
designed for this purpose. When an information about braking on slippery blades are completely thawed. Refer to
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake “Defrosting” F4-9.
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the System)” F7-32 and “Vehicle Dynamics . If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
fuel level reaches half empty. Control system” F7-34. deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
If your SUBARU is not going to be used WARNING ger and deicer” F3-114.
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity. Do not use the cruise control on When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
slippery roads such as snowy or icy to stick on the surface of the windshield
roads. This may cause loss of despite wiper operation, use the defroster
vehicle control. and set the temperature for maximum
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed

Black plate (425,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9
enough to melt the frozen snow on it, NOTE the same for items (a) to (h), there
wash it away using the windshield washer. When the season requiring non-freez- is a possibility that serious me-
Refer to “Windshield washer” F3-110. ing type wiper blades is over, replace chanical damage could occur to
them with standard wiper blades. the drive train of your car, and
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
affect the following.
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to & Corrosion protection — Ride
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4. — Handling
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard — Braking
warning flasher to alert other drivers. & Snow tires — Speedometer/Odometer
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.
calibration
We recommend use of non-freezing type WARNING — Clearance between the body
wiper blades (winter blades) during the and tires
seasons you could have snow and freez- . When you replacing or installing
ing temperatures. winter tire(s), all four tires must It also may be dangerous and
be the same for following items. lead to loss of vehicle control,
Blades of this type give superior wiping
and it can lead to an accident.
performance in snowy conditions. Be sure (a) Size 8
to use blades that are suitable for your (b) Circumference . Do not use a combination of
vehicle. radial, belted bias or bias tires
(c) Speed symbol since it may cause dangerous
CAUTION (d) Load index handling characteristics and lead
(e) Construction to an accident.
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not (f) Manufacturer In winter, it may be possible to enhance
perform as well as standard wiper (g) Brand (tread pattern) performance through use of tires designed
blades. If this happens, reduce the (h) Degrees of wear specifically for winter driving conditions. If
vehicle speed. you choose to install winter tires on your
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
printed on the tire placard. The and type. All four tires must be of the same
tire placard is located on the size, construction, brand and load index
bottom of driver’s door pillar. and you should never mix radial, belted
bias or bias tires since this may result in
If all of four winter tires are not
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (426,1)
8-10 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
dangerous handling characteristics. Re- & Rocking the vehicle Loading your vehicle
member to drive with care at all times If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
regardless of the type of tires on your snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
vehicle. erator pedal slightly and move the shift
When using winter tires (speed symbol Q, lever/select lever back and forth between
T or H) never exceed 160 km/h (99 mph), “1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
190 km/h (118 mph) or 210 km/h (130 engine. For the best possible traction,
mph), respectively. avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
& Tire chains When the road surface is extremely
If it is necessary to use the tire chains for slippery, you can obtain better traction by
driving on snowy grades or icy roads, starting the vehicle with the transmission
observe the following precautions: in 2nd than 1st (MT models and CVT
. Put the chains on the front wheels only. models with manual mode).
. Use only chains that are of the correct If your vehicle is a CVT model with manual
size for your tires so as not to damage the mode, for information about holding the
WARNING
vehicle body or suspension. transmission in the 2nd position, refer to . Never stack luggage or other
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary “Selection of manual mode” F7-22. cargo higher than the top of the
spare tire.
seatback because it could tumble
. When driving with tire chains, drive at forward and injure passengers in
speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph). the event of a sudden stop or
Always use the utmost care when driving accident. Keep luggage or cargo
with tire chains – overconfidence because low, as close to the floor as
you are driving with tire chains could possible.
easily lead to a serious accident. . Stow cargo and luggage in the
trunk whenever possible.
. To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during brak-
ing, do not stack anything in the
enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and

Black plate (427,1)
Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-11
luggage low, as close to the floor – On the front passenger or rear Trailer towing
as possible. seats (when stacking items)
. Never allow passengers to ride – On the rear shelf Your vehicle is neither designed nor
on a folded rear seatback or in – On the instrument panel intended to be used for trailer towing.
the trunk. Doing so may result in Therefore, never tow a trailer with your
serious injury. – On the dashboard
vehicle.
. When you carry something inside SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
the vehicle, secure it whenever CAUTION injuries or vehicle damage that may result
you can to prevent it from being from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
thrown around inside the vehicle Do not carry spray cans, containers equipment or from any errors or omissions
during sudden stops, sharp turns with flammable or corrosive liquids in the instructions accompanying such
or in an accident. or any other dangerous items inside equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
. Do not pile heavy loads on the the vehicle. apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
roof. These loads raise the vehi- caused by trailer towing.
cle’s center of gravity and make it NOTE
more prone to tip over.
For better fuel economy, do not carry 8
. Secure lengthy items properly to unneeded cargo.
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Do not place cargo or luggage in
or on the following locations as
the item may get under the
clutch, brake, or accelerator ped-
al and prevent the pedals from
being depressed properly, block
the driver’s vision, or hit the
driver or passengers, causing
an accident:
– At the feet of the driver

Black plate (19,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an If no steam is coming from the engine
emergency ........................................................ 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-12
Temporary spare tire (if equipped) .................... 9-2 Towing ................................................................ 9-13
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-13
Flat tires............................................................... 9-5 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16
Changing flat tire ................................................ 9-5 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-16
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if Access key – if access key does not
equipped).......................................................... 9-8 operate properly ............................................. 9-17
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9 Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-17
Battery Precautions!............................................ 9-9 Switching power status...................................... 9-17
Precautions when jump starting! ........................ 9-10 Starting engine .................................................. 9-18
How to jump start............................................... 9-10 Sunroof (if equipped) – if the sunroof does
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12 not close.......................................................... 9-18
If steam is coming from the engine If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-19
compartment.................................................... 9-12

Black plate (432,1)
9-2 In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire (if

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, equipped)
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. We recommend that
The hazard warning flasher should be you contact your SUBARU dealer as
used in day or night to warn other drivers soon as possible for tire and sensor
when you have to park your vehicle under replacement and/or system reset-
emergency conditions. ting.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
CAUTION
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch . Never use any temporary spare
position. tire other than the original. Using
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing other sizes may result in severe
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it mechanical damage to the drive
off by pushing the switch again. train of your vehicle.
. Always conform to the following
instructions when using the tem-
porary spare tire. Otherwise, a

Black plate (433,1)
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-3
seriously dangerous situation Maintenance tools

may occur.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
The temporary spare tire is smaller and maintenance tools:
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re- . Jack
move the temporary spare tire and re- . Jack handle
install the conventional tire as soon as . Screwdriver
possible because the spare tire is de-
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
signed only for temporary use.
. Wheel nut wrench
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. For the correct pres- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
sure, refer to “Tires” F12-8. 2) Indicator location mark
When using the temporary spare tire, note . When the wear indicator appears on
the following. the tread, replace the tire.
. Drive with caution when the temporary . The temporary spare tire must be used
spare tire is mounted. Avoid hard accel-
eration and braking, or fast cornering, as
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire 9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
control of the vehicle may be lost. rear wheel and install the temporary spare
. Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary . Always set the driver’s control center
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, differential to the manual mode and adjust
a tire chain will not fit properly. the initial LSD torque to the minimum. 1) Jack handle
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (434,1)
9-4 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
1) Under-floor storage compartment (if 1) Wheel nut wrench Example of jack label
equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage 2) Screwdriver 1) Jack label
compartment” F6-12.) 3) Jack A) CAUTION
2) Tool bucket 4) Towing hook (eye bolt) B) WORKING LOAD LIMIT
3) Spare tire
A jack handle is stored under the floor of
the trunk. A jack and a towing hook are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel. A
screwdriver and a wheel nut wrench are
stored in the vinyl bag. These tools can
also be stored in the tool bucket.
NOTE
. For how to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-5.
. The following items may be different
depending on the model.
– The shape of the storage com-
partment

Black plate (435,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-5
– The locations of some mainte- Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before
nance tools raising the flat tire off the ground
. For information about the Machinery using the jack. Never swing or
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
Directive of the jack, refer to “Declara- push the vehicle supported with
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
tion of conformity in accordance with the jack. The jack can come out
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
the safety of machinery 2006/42/EC” of the jacking point due to a jolt
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
F13-27. and this can result in a serious
place.
accident.
& Changing flat tire
! Australia and New Zealand mod-
! Safety precautions els
WARNING WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an For Australia and New Zealand, the
incline or a loose road surface. following instructions are supplied
The jack can come out of the by the Australian/New Zealand Stan-
jacking point or sink into the dardTM (AS/NZS 2693:2007). Be sure
ground and this can result in a
serious accident.
to obey the following instructions
for your safety.
9
. Use only the jack provided with . That the jack should be used on
your vehicle. The jack supplied level firm ground wherever pos-
with the vehicle is designed only sible.
for changing a tire. Never get . That it is recommended that the
under the vehicle while support- wheels of the vehicle be
ing the vehicle with this jack. chocked, and that no person
. Before using the jack, be sure should remain in a vehicle that
that there are no occupants or is being jacked.
cargo in the vehicle. . That no person should place any
portion of their body under a
vehicle that is supported by a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (436,1)
9-6 In case of emergency/Flat tires
jack. NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
! Procedure cated before using it.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever in the “P” (Park) position
(CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, read carefully
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench. Jack-up points
Refer to “Maintenance tools” F9-3. 8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.

Black plate (437,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-7
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat . Clean the threaded parts with a
tire. cloth and check conditions of there.
CAUTION
If the threaded part was damaged,
you should immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack Do not use oil or grease on the
head engages firmly into the jack-up point. wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
9
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, per-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire form the following steps.
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle . Clean the mounting surface of the
higher than necessary. wheel and hub with a cloth.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (438,1)
9-8 In case of emergency/Flat tires
to set the rear seatback to the

upright position. If you fold down
the seatback, an accident or
injury may occur when the flat
tire suddenly moves.
& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely Except STI

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified 15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
torque, following the tightening order in the compartment. For except STI models, put
illustration. the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer firmly.
to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension nut wrench in their storage locations.
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut WARNING
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility. . Never place a flat tire or tire WARNING
changing tools in the passenger
compartment after changing a When a spare tire is mounted, the
flat tire. In a sudden stop or low tire pressure warning light will
collisions, loose equipment illuminate steadily after blinking for
could strike occupants and approximately one minute. This in-
cause injury. Store the tire and dicates the TPMS is unable to
all tools in the proper place. monitor all four road wheels. We
. When you store a flat tire, be sure recommend that you contact your

Black plate (439,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-9
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible Jump starting and protective gloves when inspect-
for system resetting. Refer to “Tire ing your vehicle’s battery. Avoid
pressure monitoring system & Battery Precautions! tipping the battery and subjecting it
(TPMS)” F7-38. to shocks since this could cause
When a tire is repaired with liquid WARNING fluid to spill.
sealant, the tire pressure warning Under no circumstances allow bat-
valve and transmitter may not oper- Read these instructions care- tery fluid to make contact with your
ate properly. If a liquid sealant is skin, eyes, or clothing since this can
used, we recommend that you con- fully: cause blindness and burns. If bat-
tact your nearest SUBARU dealer or tery fluid splashes onto your skin,
To ensure safe and correct handling
other qualified service shop as soon eyes or clothing, wash it away
of your battery, read the following
as possible. Make sure to replace immediately with plenty of water. If
precautions carefully before using
the tire pressure warning valve and battery fluid splashes into your
the battery or inspecting it.
transmitter when replacing the tire. eyes, seek medical attention imme-
You may reuse the wheel if there is diately.
no damage to it and if the sealant Wear eye protection:
If battery fluid is accidentally swal-
residue is properly cleaned off. lowed, immediately drink a large
Always wear eye protection when
If the light illuminates steadily after working near your vehicle’s battery. amount of milk or water, and seek
blinking for approximately one min- Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid, medical attention immediately. 9
ute, we recommend that you so it can cause blindness if Battery fluid is corrosive. If it
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer splashed into your eyes. Also, bat- splashes onto your vehicle’s paint-
to have the system inspected. teries emit highly flammable, explo- work or fabrics, wash it away im-
sive hydrogen gas. Eye protection is mediately with plenty of water.
vital for protection in the event that
this gas ignites. Keep children away:
Battery fluid contains sulfuric Batteries must be handled only by

acid: persons who are aware of the po-
tential hazards. Take particular care
Since battery fluid contains sulfuric to keep children away from your
acid, be sure to wear eye protection vehicle’s battery. Improper handling
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (440,1)
9-10 In case of emergency/Jump starting
can cause blindness and burns. gen gas. To prevent an explosion, for jump starting, consult a com-
charge your vehicle’s battery in a petent mechanic.
Keep flames away: well ventilated area and keep flames
away.
Before working on or near your CAUTION
vehicle’s battery, extinguish all ci- The battery used for boosting must
garettes, matches, and lighters. & Precautions when jump
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless
Also, keep the battery away from starting! you are sure that the booster battery
flammable items and electrical is correct.
sparks. Since batteries emit highly WARNING
flammable, explosive hydrogen gas, When your vehicle does not start due to a
any flames or sparks in the vicinity . Never attempt jump starting if the
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
could cause an explosion. discharged battery is frozen. It
may be jump started by connecting your
When working near your vehicle’s could cause the battery to burst
battery to another battery (called the
battery, take care that metal tools do or explode.
booster battery) with jumper cables.
not short-circuit the battery’s (+) and . Be sure the jumper cables and
(−) terminals or connect the bat- clamps on them do not have & How to jump start
tery’s (+) terminal to the vehicle’s loose or missing insulation.
body. A short circuit could create 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
Do not jump start unless cables
electrical sparks and lead to an volts and the negative terminal is
in suitable condition are avail-
explosion. grounded.
able.
2. If the booster battery is in another
To prevent electrical sparks, all . A running engine can be danger- vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
rings, wristwatches, and other metal ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
accessories must be taken off be- 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
clothing, hair and tools away
fore work is carried out on or near accessories.
from the cooling fan, belts and
the battery. any other moving engine parts. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
Removing rings, watches and the sequence illustrated.
Prevent explosions: ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
While being charged, batteries emit done incorrectly. If you are un-
highly flammable, explosive hydro- sure about the proper procedure

Black plate (441,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery. 9
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

Black plate (442,1)
9-12 In case of emergency/Engine overheating
Engine overheating engine compartment. Refer to “Engine been fully released, remove the cap by
hood” F11-12. pressing down and turning it.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
WARNING the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
Never attempt to remove the radia- dealer for repair.
tor cap until the engine has been 3. After the engine coolant temperature
shut off and has fully cooled down. has dropped, turn off the engine.
When the engine is hot, the coolant If the temperature gauge stays in the
is under pressure. Removing the overheated zone, turn off the engine.
cap while the engine is still hot Refer to “Temperature gauge” F3-12.
could release a spray of boiling hot 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
coolant, which could burn you very check the coolant level in the reserve
seriously. tank. If the coolant level is below the
“LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the mark.
road and stop the vehicle in a safe
location. NOTE
For details about how to check the
& If steam is coming from the coolant level or how to add coolant,
engine compartment refer to “Engine coolant” F11-20.
. Turn off the engine and get everyone 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
away from the vehicle until it cools down. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
. We recommend that you contact an Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
authorized SUBARU dealer. radiator with coolant.
& If no steam is coming from If you have to remove the radiator cap
the engine compartment from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth
around the radiator cap, then turn the cap
1. Keep the engine running at idling counterclockwise slowly without pressing
speed. down until it stops. Release the pressure
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the from the radiator. After the pressure has

Black plate (443,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-13
Towing & Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in
If towing is necessary, it is best done by an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial from mud, sand or snow).
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
hook, do not apply excessive with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
lateral load to the towing hook. scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
screwdriver into the cutout of the cover
and pry open the cover.
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and 9
wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.
WARNING
Never tow AWD models (both CVT
and MT) with the front wheels raised
off the ground while the rear wheels
are on the ground, or with the rear
wheels raised off the ground while
the front wheels are on the ground.
This will cause the vehicle to spin
away due to the operation or dete-
rioration of the center differential.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (444,1)
9-14 In case of emergency/Towing
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. . Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and
wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

4. Tighten the towing hook securely threaded hole until its thread can no
using the wheel nut wrench. longer be seen.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and return it to its storage
position.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook 2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
except when towing your vehicle. using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the wheel nut wrench.

Black plate (445,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-15
After towing, remove the towing hook from Front tie-down hooks: Rear tie-down holes:
the vehicle and return it to its storage
position.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hooks mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut-off function when the vehi- The front tie-down hooks are located
cle is struck from behind. between each of the front tires and the
. For vehicles equipped with the front bumper.
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection
(SRVD), turn off the SRVD before
towing a trailer. A trailer will
9
block the system’s radar waves
and cause the SRVD not to func-
tion correctly.
1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (446,1)
9-16 In case of emergency/Towing
the plugs. After using the rear tie-down into “1st” for MT models. WARNING
holes, return the plugs to their original 2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
places. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier . Never turn the ignition switch to
properly with safety chains. Each of safety the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
WARNING chain should be equally tightened and the vehicle is being towed be-
care must be taken not to pull the chains cause the steering wheel and the
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. direction of the wheels will be
downward anchoring. If they are
locked.
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out & Towing with all wheels on the . Remember that the brake booster
of the holes, possibly causing a ground and power steering do not func-
dangerous situation. tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
& Using a flat-bed truck effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. For CVT models, the traveling
speed must be limited to less
1. Release the parking brake and put the than 30 km/h (20 mph) and the
transmission in neutral. traveling distance to less than 50
2. The ignition switch should be in the km (31 miles). For greater speeds
This is the best way to transport your “ON” position while the vehicle is being and distances, transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to towed. vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
ensure safe transportation. 3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” prevent damage to the vehicle.
position for CVT models or the shift lever

Black plate (447,1)
In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly 9-17
Access key – if access key & Locking and unlocking 3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)
or brake pedal (CVT models).
does not operate properly
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
1) Release button
The following functions may be inoperable 2) Mechanical key 4. Hold the access key with the buttons
because of strong radio signals in the facing you, and touch the push-button
While pressing the release button of the
surrounding area or the access key ignition switch with it.
access key, take out the mechanical key.
battery being low.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
When the communication between the 9
. Locking/unlocking doors access key and the vehicle is completed,
mechanical key.
. Switching power status a chime (ding) will sound, and the opera-
. Starting engine NOTE tion indicator on the push-button ignition
After locking or unlocking, be sure to switch illuminates in green. At the same
In such cases, perform the following reinsert the mechanical key into the time, the status of the push-button ignition
procedure. When the battery of the access access key. switch changes to either of the following.
key is discharged, replace it with a new . When the keyless access with push-
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access button start system is deactivated:
key” F11-57. & Switching power status “ACC”
1. Apply the parking brake. . Under other conditions: “ON”
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT 5. When the keyless access with push-
models) or the select lever into the “P” button start system is deactivated, press
position (CVT models). the push-button ignition switch with the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (448,1)
9-18 In case of emergency/Sunroof – if the sunroof does not close
clutch pedal (MT models) or brake pedal 5. Hold the access key with the buttons Sunroof (if equipped) – if the
(CVT models) released. The status of the facing you, and touch the push-button
push-button ignition switch then changes ignition switch with it.
sunroof does not close
to “ON”. When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed, If the sunroof does not close, we recom-
a chime (ding) will sound, and the opera- mend that you have the system checked
NOTE by a SUBARU dealer.
If the power does not switch even tion indicator on the push-button ignition
though the above procedure was fol- switch illuminates in green. At the same
lowed precisely, we recommend that time, the push-button ignition switch turns
you contact your SUBARU dealer. to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
6. Within 5 seconds after the operation
& Starting engine indicator illuminates in green, while de-
pressing the brake pedal (all models) and
1. Apply the parking brake. the clutch pedal (MT models), press the
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT push-button ignition switch.
models) or the select lever into the “P”
position (CVT models).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even
4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, we recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (449,1)
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident 9-19
If your vehicle is involved in Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:
an accident
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
If your vehicle is involved in an Models with “keyless access with

accident, be sure to inspect the push-button start system”:
ground under the vehicle before 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
restarting the engine. If you find that the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
fuel has leaked on the ground, do 2. Restart the engine.
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut-off

system. To minimize the risk of fire due to
9
fuel leakage when your vehicle is subject
to impact from an accident or another
factor, the system stops supplying fuel.
However, depending on the impact condi-
tions at the time of collision, the fuel pump
shut-off system may not operate.
Perform the following procedures to re-
start the engine after the system is
activated.

Black plate (21,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-4 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-6
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 panel, console panel, switches, combination
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 meter, and other plastic surfaces ..................... 10-6
Monitor.............................................................. 10-6
10

Black plate (452,1)
10-2 Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care gent with water. Otherwise, the the vehicle with hot water and in direct
surface may be damaged. sunlight.
& Washing . Models with automatic rain sen- Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sing windshield wipers: When sap, and bird droppings should be washed
CAUTION washing the vehicle, turn off the off by using a light detergent, as required.
wiper. If the wiper switch is in the If you use a light detergent, make certain
. When washing the vehicle, the “AUTO” position, the wipers may that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
brakes may get wet. As a result, operate unexpectedly while strong soap or chemical detergents. All
the brake stopping distance will washing the vehicle and cause cleaning agents should be promptly rinsed
be longer. To dry the brakes, injury. off of the surface and not allowed to dry
drive the vehicle at a safe speed there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
while lightly depressing the plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
brake pedal to heat up the NOTE remaining water off with a chamois or soft
brakes. When having your vehicle washed in cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
. Do not wash the engine compart- an automatic car wash: brush when washing down underbody,
ment and area adjacent to it. If . Make sure beforehand that the car inner fenders and suspension to effec-
water enters the engine air intake wash is of suitable type. tively remove mud and dirt off.
or electrical parts, it will cause . When washing a vehicle equipped
engine trouble or a malfunction with automatic rain sensing windshield ! Washing the underbody
of the power steering. wipers, make sure that the wiper is Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
. When washing inner fenders, turned off. If the wiper switch is in the deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
underbody, bumpers and pro- “AUTO” position, the wipers may oper- rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
truding objects such as exhaust ate unexpectedly while washing the derbody components, such as the exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be vehicle and the wiper blades could be system, fuel and brake lines, brake
careful to prevent injuries from damaged. cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
contacting sharp ends. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
. Do not use organic solvents beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
when washing the surface of the
contamination by road grime. water at frequent intervals to reduce the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
harmful effects of such agents.
a detergent with organic solvents Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
is used to wash the surface, of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
completely rinse off the deter-

Black plate (453,1)
Appearance care/Exterior care 10-3
components may accelerate their corro- resin parts such as moldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with
sion. water to leak into the vehicle. a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
After driving off-road or on muddy or & Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody. Always wash and dry the vehicle before in doubt, we recommend that you always
waxing and polishing. contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to Use a good quality polish and wax and paint specialist.
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a apply them according to the manufac-
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when CAUTION
the painted surface is cool.
Do not use any agents with organic
CAUTION Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, solvents on the surface of the bulb
. Be careful not to damage brake as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of assembly cover. However, if a polish
hoses, sensor harnesses, and wax on a painted surface leads to loss of or wax with organic solvents is
other parts when washing sus- the original luster and also quickens the applied to the cover surface, com-
pension components. deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical
parts. If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
ished to the point where the luster or tone
! Using a warm water washer
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
10
surface with a fine-grained compound.
. Keep a good distance of 30 cm (12 in) the vehicle.
Never polish just the affected area, but
or more between the washer nozzle and include the surrounding area as well.
the vehicle. Always polish in only one direction. A
. Do not wash the same area continu- No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
ously. mended. Never use a coarse-grained
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash compound. Coarser grained compounds
by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and
of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing
type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (454,1)
10-4 Appearance care/Corrosion protection
& Cleaning aluminum wheels Corrosion protection vehicle remains for a long time, even
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels though other parts of the vehicle may be
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt dry.
Your SUBARU has been designed and
is left on too long, it may be difficult to built to resist corrosion. Special materials . High temperatures will cause corrosion
clean off. and protective finishes have been used on to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
. Do not use soap containing grit to most parts of the vehicle to help maintain quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral fine appearance, strength, and reliable
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly operation. & To help prevent corrosion
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed & Most common causes of corrosion of the body and suspension
washing device. corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi- The most common causes of corrosion
promptly after driving on any of the
num wheels) with water as soon as following surfaces:
are:
possible when it has been splashed with . roads that have been salted to prevent
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or them from freezing in winter
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
driven on roads treated with salt or other
cavities, and other areas. . mud, sand, or gravel
agents. . coastal roads
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone After the winter has ended, it is recom-
chips or minor accidents. mended that the underbody be given a
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle very thorough washing.
when: Before the beginning of winter, check the
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control condition of underbody components, such
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
there is more salt in the air, or in areas lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
where there is considerable industrial system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
pollution. them are found to be rusted, they should
. It is driven in areas of high humidity, be given an appropriate rust prevention
especially when temperatures range just treatment or should be replaced. We
above freezing. recommend that you contact your
. Dampness in certain parts of the SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of

Black plate (455,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-5
maintenance and treatment if you need Cleaning the interior CAUTION

assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate When cleaning the seat, do not use
soon as you find them. control panel, audio equipment, instru- benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
ment panel, center console, combination materials. Doing so could damage
Check the interior of the vehicle for water meter panel, and switches. (Do not use the surface and cause the color to
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats organic solvents.) deteriorate.
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to & Seat fabric
make sure the area is dry. & Leather seat materials
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the The leather used by SUBARU is a high
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated quality natural product which will retain its
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. distinctive appearance and feel for many
be caused by dampness. If you wash the years with proper care.
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
into the garage when wet or covered with surface can cause the material to become
snow, that can cause dampness. thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke- brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather warm water then dry thoroughly. cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
and/or in areas where road salts and other cloth should be performed monthly, taking
corrosive materials are used, the door If the stain does not come out, try a care not to soak the leather or allow water
hinges and locks and hood latch should commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
to penetrate the stitched seams. 10
be inspected and lubricated periodically. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. woolen fabrics may be used to remove
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
tions. cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
covered, or the windows shaded, to
prevent fading or shrinkage. Seat covers
and head restraint covers should be
removed before operating the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (456,1)
10-6 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches & Climate control panel, audio & Monitor
may be treated with a commercial leather panel, instrument panel, To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
spray lacquer. You will discover that each console panel, switches, tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
leather seat section will develop soft folds combination meter, and other cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather. plastic surfaces extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
& Synthetic leather upholstery control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the CAUTION
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum- . Do not spray neutral detergent
CAUTION directly onto the monitor. Doing
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such so could damage the monitor’s
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or components.
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con- . Do not wipe the monitor with a
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so hard cloth. Doing so could
necessary. could damage the surface and scratch the monitor.
cause the color to deteriorate. . Do not use cleaning fluid that
CAUTION
. Do not use chemical solvents contains thinner, fuel, or any
Strong cleaning agents such as that contain silicone on the vehi- other volatile substance. Such
solvents, paint thinners, window cle audio system, electrical com- cleaning fluid could erase the
cleaner or fuel must never be used ponents of the air-conditioner or lettering on the switches at the
on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres bottom of the monitor.
terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
deteriorate. nents.

Black plate (23,1)
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-26
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-7 Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
Before checking or servicing in the engine rear differential gear oil................................ 11-27
compartment.................................................... 11-7 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-27
When checking or servicing in the engine Power steering fluid (STI) ............................... 11-27
compartment.................................................... 11-8 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-27
When checking or servicing in the engine Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-28
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-8
When replacing parts ......................................... 11-9
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-28
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-28
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-9
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-29
Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-9
Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-29
Engine hood ..................................................... 11-12
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-29
Engine compartment overview........................ 11-14 Brake booster .................................................. 11-30
STI................................................................... 11-14
Except STI ....................................................... 11-15
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-31
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-31
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-16
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-31
Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-16
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-16
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-31
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-31
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-18
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-32
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-18
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-18 Hill start assist system.................................... 11-32
Cooling system ................................................ 11-19 Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-32 11
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-19 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-33
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-20 Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-33
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-22 Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-34
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-22 Types of tires................................................... 11-34
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-24 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
equipped) ...................................................... 11-34
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-25 Tire inspection................................................. 11-35
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-26 Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-36
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-26 Wheel balance ................................................. 11-38

Black plate (24,1)
Maintenance and service
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-38 High beam headlight ........................................ 11-48

Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-39 Low beam headlight (models without LED
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-39 headlights), position light (models without
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-39 LED headlights) and front turn signal light ..... 11-49
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-40 Front fog light and daytime running light (if
equipped) ...................................................... 11-51
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-41
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-53
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-41 License plate light ........................................... 11-53
Adding the windshield washer fluid .................. 11-41 Rear fog light (if equipped)............................... 11-54
Windshield washer fluid ................................... 11-41 Map light ......................................................... 11-55
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-42 Dome light....................................................... 11-55
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-43 Trunk light ....................................................... 11-56
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-43 Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-56
Battery............................................................... 11-44 Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-56
Battery Precautions!......................................... 11-44 Replacing battery............................................. 11-57
Fuses ................................................................ 11-46 Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-57
Installation of accessories............................... 11-47 Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-58
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-47
Headlights (models with LED headlights) .......... 11-48

Black plate (461,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-3
Maintenance schedule
To keep your vehicle in proper operating condition and to assure peak performance at all times, the recommended maintenance
service should be performed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
NOTE
. The frequency of scheduled inspection and maintenance services as set forth is minimal. However, it may be necessary
that they be performed more frequently depending on road conditions, weather, atmospheric conditions and vehicle usage.
These conditions may differ from one country to another. Therefore there may be special requirement in your country. We
recommend that you ask your authorized SUBARU dealer for the actual maintenance schedule applied to your vehicle.
. For models with a multi function display, you can set a reminder to be displayed when a scheduled maintenance item is
almost due. For details, refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-80.
Continue periodic maintenance beyond 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 96 months by returning to the third column of the maintenance
schedule and adding 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 96 months to the column headings.
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspect, and then adjust, correct or replace if necessary.
P: Perform
(I): Recommended service for safe vehicle operation
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
(Number of months or km (miles), whichever occurs first)
MAINTENANCE ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 REMARKS
11
6 1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
6 1,000 miles 9 19 28 38 47 56 66 75
1 Engine oil R R R R R R R R See NOTE 1)
2 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R See NOTE 1)
3 Drive belt(s) I I I I I I I I
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (462,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
6 1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
6 1,000 miles 9 19 28 38 47 56 66 75
4 Camshaft drive belt (timing belt) Replace every 105,000

I I I R I km (66,000 miles)
5 Cooling system, hoses and connections I I I I
1st replacement: 132 months (11 years)/220,000 km (137,500 miles)
6 Replace engine coolant (SUBARU Super From the 2nd replacement: 72 months (6 years)/120,000 km (75,000
Coolant or equivalent)
miles)
7 Fuel system, lines and connections I I I I See NOTE 2)
For Europe* Replace every 120,000

R km (75,000 miles)
8 Fuel filter
For General Replace every 90,000
R km (56,000 miles)
9 Air cleaner element Replace every 45,000

I I R I I R I I km (28,000 miles)
10 Spark plugs Replace every 105,000

R km (66,000 miles)
11 Transmission/differential (front & rear) lubri-

cants (gear oil) I R I R
*: Excluding Russia models or Israel models

Black plate (463,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-5
6 1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
6 1,000 miles 9 19 28 38 47 56 66 75
12 Continuously variable transmission fluid I I I I
13 Brake fluid R R R R See NOTE 3)
14 Disc brake pads and discs/Front and rear axle See NOTE 2)
boots and axle shaft joint portions I I I I I I I I
15 Brake lining and drums (including parking See NOTE 2)

brake linings and drums) I I I I
16 Inspect brake lines and check operation of See NOTE 2)

parking and service brake system P P P P
Adjust pedal free play

17 Clutch system I I I I at 1,600 km (1,000
miles)
18 Steering and suspension system I I I I See NOTE 2)
19 Front and rear wheel bearing (I)
20 Air filter element for the climate control system I R I R I R I R See NOTE 4)
11
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (464,1)
11-6 Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
NOTE
1) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned in the following examples*, the engine oil and oil
filter should be changed more frequently.
2) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned in the following examples*, inspection should be
performed at every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) or 12 months whichever occurs first.
3) When the vehicle is used under following areas, change fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) or 12 months whichever
occurs first.
(1) High humidity areas
(2) Mountainous areas
4) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned in the following examples*, the air cleaner element
and air filter should be replaced more frequently.
* Examples of severe driving conditions:

(1) Operating in extremely cold weather (items 1, 2 and 18 only)
(2) Repeated short trips (items 1, 2, 14 and 15 only)
(3) Driving in dusty roads (items 9, 14, 15 and 20 only)
(4) Driving in rough and/or muddy roads (items 14, 15 and 20 only)
(5) Driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials (items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)
(6) Living in coastal areas (items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)

Black plate (465,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions 11-7
Maintenance precautions may result to persons not experi- system or it can render it inop-
enced in servicing vehicles. erative when it should be opera-
When maintenance and service are re- . Always use the proper tools and tive. NEVER use a circuit tester
quired, it is recommended that all work be make certain that they are well for this wiring. If your SRS airbag
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. maintained. or seatbelt pretensioner needs
service, we recommend that you
If you perform maintenance and service . Never get under the vehicle sup- consult your nearest SUBARU
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use dealer.
with the information provided in this safety stands to support the
section on general maintenance and vehicle.
service for your SUBARU. . Never keep the engine running in & Before checking or servicing
a poorly ventilated area, such as in the engine compartment
Incorrect or incomplete service could a garage or other closed areas.
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open WARNING
maintenance and service performed by flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire. . Always stop the engine and set
you are not eligible for warranty coverage. the parking brake firmly to pre-
. Because the fuel system is under
vent the vehicle from moving.
WARNING pressure, we recommend that
you have your SUBARU dealer . Always let the engine cool down.
. Always select a safe area when perform the replacement of the Engine parts become very hot
performing maintenance on your fuel filter. when the engine is running and
vehicle. remain hot for some time after
. Wear adequate eye protection to
. Always be very careful to avoid the engine has stopped.
guard against getting oil or fluids
injury when working on the vehi- in your eyes. If something does . Do not spill engine oil, engine 11
cle. Remember that some of the get in your eyes, thoroughly coolant, brake fluid or any other
materials in the vehicle may be wash them out with clean water. fluid on hot engine components.
hazardous if improperly used or This may cause a fire.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
handled, for example, battery the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always remove the key from the
acid. belt pretensioner system, or at- ignition switch or turn the push-
. Your vehicle should only be ser- tempt to take its connectors button ignition switch to the
viced by persons fully competent apart, as that may activate the “OFF” position. When the igni-
to do so. Serious personal injury tion switch is in the “ON” posi-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (466,1)
11-8 Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
tion, the cooling fan may operate Doing so may cause your hand to
suddenly even when the engine slip off the drive belt cover and
is stopped. result in an injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
& When checking or servicing tely. Doing so may result in a
in the engine compartment burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine is running and re-
mains hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
. Do not apply force on the fender
insulator by placing your hands
on it, etc. Deformation of the
insulator and its mount may
occur.
& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
CAUTION hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
. For models with the drive belt engine parts. Removing rings,
cover, do not contact the cover watches and ties is advisable.
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.

Black plate (467,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips 11-9
Maintenance tips 3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Some clips and fender linings must be ! Type B clips

removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling

clips
! Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
1) Safety stand ! Type A clips
For any maintenance and inspection
performed on AWD models which requires
a running engine and wheels turning, jack ! Type C clips
up all four wheels or use free rollers to
prevent the vehicle from moving. Never
race the engine or brake suddenly.
& When replacing parts

For information about replacement parts
for maintenance, we recommend that you
11
contact your SUBARU dealer.
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
screwdriver using leverage.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (468,1)
11-10 Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in ! Type E clips ! Type F clips

the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
! Type D clips
1. Push the center portion of the clip 1. Pull out the head of the clip using a
using a Phillips screwdriver until the clip is flat-head screwdriver as shown in the
raised. illustration.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up. 2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

Black plate (469,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips 11-11
! Reinstalling clips ! Type C clips ! Type E clips

! Type A clips
! Type D clips Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of
! Type B clips the clip into the hole.
! Type F clips
11
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (470,1)
11-12 Maintenance and service/Engine hood
Insert the clip without the head first and Engine hood
then push the head of the clip into the
hole.
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
2. Pull the hood lock release knob under mately 30 cm (11.8 in) above its closed
the instrument panel. position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.

Black plate (471,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-13
WARNING than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine
Always check that the hood is hood becomes too heavy, the
properly locked before you start stay may not be able to support
driving. If it is not, it might fly open holding it open.
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
CAUTION
. When you open the engine hood,
do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to 11
close it. It could deform the
metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other

Black plate (472,1)
11-14 Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
1) Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine compartment overview (page 11-27)
2) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
& STI (page 11-28)
4) Battery (page 11-44)
5) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)
6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-16)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-20)
8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-16)
9) Coolant filler tank cap (page 11-19)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-22)
The illustration above is for left-hand drive models. The location of item No. 2 (Brake fluid
reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir) for right-hand drive models is the opposite of that shown
here.

Black plate (473,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-15

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
& Except STI (page 11-28)
3) Battery (page 11-44)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-16)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-20)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-20)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-18)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-16)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-22)
11
The illustration above is for left-hand drive models. The location of item No. 1 (Brake fluid
reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir) for right-hand drive models is the opposite of that shown
here.

Black plate (474,1)
11-16 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil . When engine braking is employed

. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds
CAUTION . When the engine is operated under
heavy loads
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right . When the engine idles for long periods
and left, then pull it out. Other- of time
wise, you may be injured acci- . When the vehicle is operated in stop
dentally straining yourself. and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. Use only engine oil with the . When the vehicle is used under severe
recommended grade and vis- thermal conditions
cosity. . When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the Under these or similar conditions, you
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad should check your oil at least every 2nd
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
engine oil gets on the exhaust more frequently. If your oil consumption
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. rate is greater than 1 liter every 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you con-
tact your SUBARU dealer who may per-
& Engine oil consumption form a test under controlled conditions.
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. Under the following conditions, oil & Checking the oil level
consumption can be increased and thus Check the engine oil level at each fuel
require refilling between maintenance stop. STI
intervals: 1) Oil level gauge
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
. When the engine is new and within the stop the engine. If you check the oil level
2) Oil filler cap
break-in period 3) Oil viscosity
just after stopping the engine, wait a few A) ENGINE OIL
. When the engine oil is of lower quality minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil B) SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used pan before checking the level.

Black plate (475,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-17
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, and then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acciden-
tally straining yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
Except STI
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. STI:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
Except STI: 11
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
Except STI STI level gauge. The engine oil level must be
1) Oil level gauge 1) Notch
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
2) Oil filler cap 2) Full level
the oil level is below the low level mark,
3) Oil filter 3) Low level
4) Approximately 1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9
add oil so that the full level is reached.
4) Oil viscosity
A) ENGINE OIL Imp qt) from low level to full level
B) SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (476,1)
11-18 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
CAUTION the maintenance schedule, when short NOTE

trips are frequently made, when towing a Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
For models except STI, be careful trailer, or when driving in extremely cold fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
not to touch the engine oil filter weather. provide better fuel economy. However,
when removing the oil filler cap. in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
Doing so may result in a burn, a NOTE required to properly lubricate the en-
pinched finger, or may cause some . Changing the engine oil and oil filter gine.
other injury. should be performed by a well-trained
expert. We recommend that you con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for changing & Synthetic oil
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil the engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained You can use synthetic engine oil that
through the filler neck. After pouring oil mechanics are on standby at a meets the same requirements given for
into the engine, you must use the level SUBARU dealer to utilize the special conventional engine oil. When using
gauge to confirm that the oil level is tools, spare parts and recommended synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
correct. oil for this work, and also, used oils are classification, viscosity and grade shown
For STI, just after driving or while the properly disposed of. in this Owner’s Manual.
engine is warm, the engine oil level . If performing oil replacement your- Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. Also, you
reading may be in a range between the self, observe the local regulations and must follow the oil and filter changing
upper level and the notch mark. This is dispose of waste oil properly. intervals shown in the maintenance sche-
caused by thermal expansion of the dule. Refer to “Maintenance schedule”
engine oil. & Recommended grade and F11-3.
NOTE viscosity NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
CAUTION noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
not add any additional oil above the full
level when the engine is cold. Use only engine oil with the recommended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
mended grade and viscosity.
& Changing the oil and oil filter used with no detriment to engine dur-
Change the oil and oil filter according to Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. ability or driveability.
the maintenance schedule.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in

Black plate (477,1)
Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-19
Cooling system sure to always use genuine If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
SUBARU Super Coolant or an even when the engine coolant tempera-
equivalent (non-amine type cool- ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
WARNING ant). range, the cooling fan circuit may be
. If the coolant requires water dilu- defective. Refer to “Temperature gauge”
. Never attempt to remove the F3-12.
radiator cap until the engine has tion, be sure to use soft water (or
been shut off and has cooled clear and drinkable water) and to Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
down completely. Since the cool- follow the required dilution ratio. Refer to “Fuses” F11-46 and “Fuse panel
ant is under pressure, you may . Mixing with a different coolant located in the engine compartment” F12-
suffer serious burns from a spray and/or hard water may result in 12.
of boiling hot coolant when the problems including, but not lim- If the fuse is not blown, we recommend
cap is removed. ited to, shortened engine compo- that you have the cooling system checked
. Be careful of the rotating cooling nent life, cooling system clog- by your SUBARU dealer.
fan when the engine hood is ging, coolant leaks and engine
damage from overheating. There- If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
open. When the engine tempera- sary, there may be a leak in the engine
ture is high, the cooling fan in the fore, never mix different kinds of
coolant and/or hard water even if cooling system. It is recommended that
engine compartment may oper- the cooling system and connections be
ate when the ignition switch is freezing temperatures are not
expected. checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
turned to the “ON” position, even
if the engine is stopped. Touch- . Do not splash the engine coolant
ing the cooling fan while it is over painted parts. The alcohol
rotating may result in injury. contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface. 11
CAUTION
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
. The cooling system has been nections
filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
year-around coolant which pro- fan which is thermostatically controlled to
vides protection against freezing operate when the engine coolant reaches
down to −368C (−338F). Make a specific temperature.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (478,1)
11-20 Maintenance and service/Cooling system
& Engine coolant Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
! Checking the coolant level of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, open the reservoir cap
and add coolant up to the “FULL” level
mark. If the reservoir is empty, perform the
following steps.
STI
A) Coolant filler tank cap
B) Radiator cap
1) “FULL” level mark Label on the radiator cap
2) “LOW” level mark a) WARNING
A) COOLANT b) NEVER OPEN WHEN HOT.
B) SEE OWNER’S MANUAL c) 137 kPa

Black plate (479,1)
Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-21

d) 108 kPa
3. STI:
Remove the coolant filler tank cap.
NOTE
The cap (without tabs) on top of the
radiator does not need to be removed.
To add coolant, remove the cap (with
tabs) on the coolant filler tank on top of
the engine.
Except STI:
Remove the radiator cap.
4. Slowly pour coolant and refill up to just STI 6. Reinstall the coolant filler tank cap
below the filler neck as shown in the 1) Fill up to this level (STI), radiator cap (except STI) and
following illustration. Do not pour the reservoir cap. At this time, check that the
coolant too quickly, as this may lead to rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are
insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in in the proper position.
the system.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may 11
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
Except STI
1) Fill up to this level
5. Pour coolant in the reservoir until it

reaches the “FULL” level mark.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (480,1)
11-22 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
. Do not splash the engine coolant Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner
over painted parts. The alcohol element
contained in the engine coolant The air cleaner element functions as a Replace the air cleaner element according
may damage the paint surface. filter screen. When the element is perfo- to the maintenance schedule. Refer to
rated or removed, engine wear will be “Maintenance schedule” F11-3. Under
! Changing the coolant excessive and engine life shortened. extremely dusty conditions, replace it
It may be difficult to change the coolant. more frequently. It is recommended that
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
We recommend that you have the coolant cleaner element.
changed by your SUBARU dealer if ! STI
necessary. WARNING
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
air cleaner element removed. The air
“Maintenance schedule” F11-3.
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele- 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
ment, we recommend that you use a the air intake duct, then remove the air
genuine SUBARU air cleaner ele- intake duct.
ment. If it is not used, there is the
possibility of causing a negative
effect to the engine.

Black plate (481,1)
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element 11-23
cleaner case cover. ! Except STI
4. Open the air cleaner case and remove 1) Clips

the air cleaner element.
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case cleaner case cover.
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
6. Install the removed or loosened parts
in the reverse order of removal.
11
1) Connector cable
2) Guides
3) Clips
2. Remove the connector cable from the

guides of the air cleaner case.
3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (482,1)
11-24 Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case Spark plugs

and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. We recommend that you have the
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule.
Refer to “Maintenance schedule” F11-3.
NOTE
For the recommended spark plugs,
1) Air cleaner case refer to “Electrical system” F12-8.
2) Air cleaner case cover
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up. 5. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the projections on the air cleaner
case cover into the slits on the air cleaner
case. The illustration above shows an
example in which the projections are not
fitted into the slits correctly.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.

Black plate (483,1)
Maintenance and service/Drive belts 11-25
Drive belts side belt and if there is any loosen-

ess, cracks, wear or unusual noise
NOTE on the front side belt, we recom-
m e n d t h a t y o u co n t a c t y o u r
For models except STI, it is unneces- SUBARU dealer.
sary to check the deflection of the drive
Continuing to use the vehicle with
belt periodically because your engine
the belt outside of the specification
is equipped with an automatic belt
may cause the engine to malfunc-
tension adjuster. However, replace-
tion and the above components to
ment of the belt should be done
malfunction.
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Maintenance schedule” F11-3.
We recommend that you consult your To check the deflection of the front side
SUBARU dealer for replacement. STI belt, place a straightedge (ruler) across
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or 1) Power steering oil pump pulley two adjacent pulleys (alternator pulley and
worn, contact your SUBARU dealer. 2) Front side belt crank pulley) and apply a force of 98 N (10
3) Alternator pulley kgf, 22 lbf) midway between the pulleys by
4) Air conditioner compressor pulley using a spring scale. The belt deflection
5) Rear side belt should be the amount specified. If the front
6) Crank pulley side belt is loose, cracked or worn, we
A) 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION mm (in)
The front side belt, which runs in

Deflection 11
conjunction with the following com- New belt Used belt
ponents, must be used within the 7.0 – 9.0 9.0 – 11.0
A (0.28 – 0.35) (0.35 – 0.43)
specified deflection.
. Power steering oil pump pulley The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,
. Alternator pulley therefore the deflection and tension do not
. Crank pulley need to be checked. If there are cracks or
wear confirmed on the belts and a
Check the deflection of the front
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (484,1)
11-26 Maintenance and service/Manual transmission oil
squeaking noise is heard from them, we Manual transmission oil Continuously variable trans-
SUBARU dealer.
mission fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no There is no fluid level gauge. It is
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the unnecessary to check the continuously
oil inspection should be performed ac- variable transmission fluid level. However,
cording to the maintenance schedule in if necessary, we recommend that you
the “Maintenance schedule” F11-3. We consult your SUBARU dealer for inspec-
recommend that you consult your tion.
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

Black plate (485,1)
Maintenance and service/Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil 11-27
Front differential gear oil Power steering fluid (STI) the surface of the reservoir tank.
(CVT models) and rear differ- When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
ential gear oil & Checking the fluid level run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
There is no oil level gauge. To check the 3. If the fluid level is lower than the
differential gear oil level, we recommend applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
that you consult your SUBARU dealer. mended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. We recom-
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
mend that you consult your SUBARU
oils and additives. Never use different
dealer for an inspection.
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential WARNING
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
The power steering fluid expands greatly Be careful not to burn yourself
CAUTION as its temperature rises; the fluid level because the fluid may be hot.
differs according to fluid temperature.
Using a differential gear oil other
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two
than the specified oil may cause a CAUTION
different checking ranges for hot and cold
decline in vehicle performance.
fluids.
. When power steering fluid is
Check the power steering fluid level being added, use only clean fluid, 11
monthly. and be careful not to allow any
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, dirt into the tank. And never use
and stop the engine. different brands together.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir . Be careful not to spill power
tank. steering fluid when adding it. If
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has power steering fluid touches the
been run: Check that the oil level is exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (486,1)
11-28 Maintenance and service/Brake fluid
power steering fluid gets on the Brake fluid WARNING

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off. & Checking the fluid level . Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
& Recommended fluid harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance. For ve-
hicles with manual transmission,
the brake fluid in the brake fluid
1) “MAX” level line reservoir is also used as the
2) The fluid level must be checked in this clutch fluid for the clutch system.
area. Therefore, moisture-absorbed
3) “MIN” level line brake fluid may interfere with
Check the fluid level monthly. the proper operation of the clutch
Check the fluid level on the outside of the system.
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used . If the vehicle requires frequent
for both the brake and clutch systems and refilling, there may be a leak. If
has chambers for each system, be sure to you suspect a problem, we re-
check the fluid level for the brake system commend that you have the
at the front part of the reservoir (shaded vehicle checked at your SUBARU
area in the illustration). If the level is below dealer.
“MIN”, add the recommended brake fluid
to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.

Black plate (487,1)
Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models) 11-29
CAUTION Clutch fluid (MT models)

. When adding brake fluid, be care- & Checking the fluid level
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Right-hand drive models
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the 1) “MAX” level line
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it 2) “MIN” level line
off. 3) The fluid level must be checked in this
Left-hand drive models area.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line Check the fluid level monthly.
& Recommended brake fluid 3) The fluid level must be checked in this Check the fluid level on the outside of the
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. area. reservoir. Because this reservoir is used
for both the brake and clutch systems and
CAUTION has chambers for each system, be sure to
Never use different brands of brake
check the fluid level for the clutch system 11
at the inboard side of the reservoir
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing (shaded area in the illustration). If the level
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if is below “MIN”, add the recommended
they are the same brand. brake fluid (clutch fluid) to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid (clutch fluid) from a
sealed container.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (488,1)
11-30 Maintenance and service/Brake booster
NOTE Brake booster malfunctions, and the brake assist

The fluid level for the clutch system system is operating properly.
must be checked at the inboard side of If the brake booster does not operate as Brake assist is not a system that brings
the reservoir. It cannot be checked at described in the following, we recommend more braking ability to the vehicle
the outboard side of the reservoir. that you have it checked by your SUBARU beyond its breaking capability.
dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, you might feel
that the brake pedal is applied by
lighter force and generates a greater
braking force. However, even though
this occurs, it does not indicate any

Black plate (489,1)
Maintenance and service/Brake pedal 11-31
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play according
reserve distance according to the main- to the maintenance schedule.
tenance schedule.
& Checking the clutch function
& Checking the brake pedal Check the clutch engagement and disen-
free play gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
1) Left-hand drive models: transmission smoothly couple without
More than 83 mm (3.27 in) any sign of slippage.
Right-hand drive models:
More than 96 mm (3.78 in)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
1) 0.5 – 2.7 mm (0.02 – 0.11 in)
the pedal pad and the floor.
Stop the engine and firmly depress the When the measurement is smaller than 11
brake pedal several times. Then, check the specification, or when the pedal does
the amount of free play by pulling up the not operate smoothly, we recommend that
brake pedal with a force of less than 10 N you contact your SUBARU dealer.
(1 kgf, 2 lbf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, we recommend that you
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (490,1)
11-32 Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play and lining
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 4.0 – 11.0 mm (0.16 – 0.43 in)
If the Hill start assist system does not The disc brakes have audible wear
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with
operate as described above, we recom- indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
your finger until you feel resistance, and
mend that you contact your SUBARU pads wear close to their service limit, the
check the free play.
dealer. wear indicator makes a very audible
If the free play is not within proper scraping noise when the brake pedal is
specification, we recommend that you applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, we recommend
that you have the brake pads serviced by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will

Black plate (491,1)
Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke 11-33
result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut Parking brake stroke
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:

& Breaking-in of new brake
7 – 8 notches / 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45 lbf)
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
we recommend that you use only genuine
SUBARU parts. After replacement, the WARNING
new parts must be broken in as follows: A safe location and situation should
! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving.
While maintaining a speed of 50 to 65
km/h (30 to 40 mph), step on the brake CAUTION
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times. Pulling the parking brake lever too Check the parking brake stroke according
! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear to the maintenance schedule. When the
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be parking brake is properly adjusted, brak-
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of certain to pull the lever up slowly ing power is fully applied by pulling the
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph). and gently. lever up 7 to 8 notches gently but firmly
2. With the parking brake release button (approximately 200 N [20.4 kgf, 45 lbf]). If
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever the parking brake lever stroke is not within
SLOWLY and GENTLY. [Pulling with a the specified range, we recommend that
force of approximately 150 N (15 kgf, 33 you have the brake system checked and 11
lbf).] adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
200 meters (220 yards) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified

Black plate (492,1)
11-34 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example,
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out-
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 15.68C (608F).
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example:
! All season tires Tire size: 245/40R18 97W
All season tires are designed to provide & Tire pressure monitoring Standard tire pressures:
an adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) Front: 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi)
and braking performance in year-round Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi)
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
conditions. However all season tires do vides the driver with a warning message Garage temperature: 15.68C (608F)
not offer as much traction performance as by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure Outside Adjusted pressure
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow temperature [kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)]
or on icy roads. is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the Front Rear
All season tires are identified by “ALL
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may 58C (418F) 240 (2.4, 35) 230 (2.3, 33)
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
the tire sidewall. −58C (2.38F) 250 (2.5, 36) 240 (2.4, 35)
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
! Summer tires caused by running over a sharp object). −158C (−58F) 260 (2.6, 38) 250 (2.5, 36)
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
tires best suited for highway driving under If the low tire pressure warning light
garage and will then drive the vehicle in illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire cold outside air after adjusting the tire
Summer tires are inadequate for driving pressures may cause the low tire pressure pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
on slippery roads such as on snow- warning light to illuminate. To avoid this tire pressures using the method described
covered or icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to to at least 40 km/h (25 mph) and check to
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on the see that the low tire pressure warning light
use of winter (snow) tires. tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
When installing winter tires, be sure to extra 10 kPa (1.02 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi) for pressure warning light does not turn off,
replace all four tires. every difference of 108C (188F) between the tire pressure monitoring system may
the temperature in the garage and the not be functioning normally. In this event,

Black plate (493,1)
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-35
we recommend that you go to a SUBARU When a tire is replaced, adjustments are as soon as possible.
dealer to have the system inspected as necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
soon as possible. operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
While the vehicle is driven, friction before, we recommend that you have the
tween tires and the road surface causes being transferred, the low tire pres-
work performed by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any steadily after blinking for approxi-
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature If the low tire pressure warning light the TPMS is unable to monitor all
or by an increase in the temperature in the does not illuminate briefly after the four road wheels. We recommend
tires can cause the low tire pressure ignition switch is turned ON or the that you contact your SUBARU deal-
warning light to turn off. light illuminates steadily after blink- er as soon as possible for tire and
ing for approximately one minute, sensor replacement and/or system
System resetting is necessary when the resetting. If the light illuminates
we recommend that you have your
wheels are changed (for example, a steadily after blinking for approxi-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS mately one minute, we recommend
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
valves are installed on the newly fitted t hat you prom ptly contact a
soon as possible.
wheels. We recommend that you have this SUBARU dealer to have the system
work performed by a SUBARU dealer If this light illuminates while driving, inspected.
following wheel replacement. never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
It may not be possible to install TPMS ally reducing speed. Then slowly
valves on certain wheels that are on the pull off the road to a safe place.
& Tire inspection
market. Therefore, if you change the Check on a daily basis that the tires are
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious free from serious damage, nails, and 11
tires), use wheels that have the same part personal injury could occur. stones. At the same time, check the tires
number as the standard-equipment for abnormal wear.
If this light still illuminates while
wheels. Without four operational TPMS We recommend that you contact your
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS SUBARU dealer immediately if you find
sure, a tire may have significant
will not fully function and the warning light any problem.
damage and a fast leak that causes
on the combination meter will illuminate
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
steadily after blinking for approximately
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
one minute.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (494,1)
NOTE WARNING
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat- Do not let air out of warm tires to
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a adjust pressure. Doing so will result
rough surface, they can suffer damage in low tire pressure.
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not NOTE
to drive over curbs, potholes or on . The air pressure in a tire increases
other rough surfaces. If doing so is by approximately 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2,
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed 4.3 psi) when the tire becomes warm.
down to a walking pace or less, and . The tires are considered cold when
approach the curbs as squarely as the vehicle has been parked for at least
possible. Also, make sure the tires are Tire placard three hours or has been driven less
not pressed against the curb when you Check tire pressure when the tires are than 1.6 km (1 mile).
park the vehicle. cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust tire Incorrect tire pressure detracts from con-
. If you feel unusual vibration while pressure to the values shown on the tire trollability and ride comfort, and it causes
driving or find it difficult to steer the placard. The tire placard is located as tires to wear abnormally.
vehicle in a straight line, one of the shown in the illustration.
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
We recommend that you drive slowly to Driving even a short distance warms up
the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer the tires and increases tire pressure. Also,
and have the vehicle inspected. tire pressure is affected by the outside
temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
& Tire pressures and wear vehicle.
Maintaining the correct tire pressure helps
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
to maximize the tires’ service lives and is
it expands, causing tire pressure to
essential for good running performance.
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
pressure.
at least once a month (for example, during
a fuel stop) and before any long journey.

Black plate (495,1)
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
evenly) worn at shoulders) worn in center)
Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, therefore fuel Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, consumption is also higher. magnifies the effects of road-surface
therefore fuel consumption is also lower. bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressure for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions. 11
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressure can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (496,1)
the tires. The resulting loss of NOTE WARNING

vehicle control could lead to an The suspension system is designed to
accident. hold each wheel at a certain alignment When a tire’s tread wear indicator
(relative to the other wheels and to the becomes visible, the tire is worn
road) for optimum straight-line stability beyond the acceptable limit and
& Wheel balance and cornering performance. must be replaced immediately. With
Each wheel was correctly balanced when a tire in this condition, driving at
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will & Wear indicators high speeds in wet weather can
become unbalanced as the tires become cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes The resulting loss of vehicle control
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at can lead to an accident.
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can NOTE
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
you suspect that the wheels are not and replace the tires before their tread
correctly balanced, we recommend that wear indicators become visible.
you have them checked and adjusted by
your SUBARU dealer. Also have them
adjusted after tire repairs and after tire
rotation.
1) New tread
CAUTION 2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side Each tire incorporates a tread wear
and reduces the vehicle’s running indicator, which becomes visible when
stability. We recommend that you the depth of the tread grooves decreases
contact your SUBARU dealer if you to 1.6 mm (0.063 in). A tire must be
notice abnormal tire wear. replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.

Black plate (497,1)
& Tire rotation direction mark & Tire rotation Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 10,000 km (6,200
miles). Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 1,000 km (600
miles), check the wheel nuts again and
Example of tire rotation direction mark Models equipped with 4 non-unidirectional
retighten any nut that has become loose.
1) Front tires
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation direction & Tire replacement
specification, the tire rotation direction The wheels and tires are important and
mark is placed on its sidewall. integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
When you install a tire that has the tire they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
rotation direction mark, install the tire with tires fitted as standard equipment are
the direction mark facing forward. optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give 11
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
Models equipped with unidirectional tires
those shown on the tire placard.
1) Front Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (498,1)
from controllability, ride comfort, braking For items (a) to (d), you must & Wheel replacement
performance, speedometer accuracy and obey the specification that is When replacing wheels (i.e., due to
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire placard. The damage) make sure the replacement
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- tire placard is located on the wheels match the specifications of the
priately changes the vehicle’s ground driver’s door pillar. wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
clearance. ment. Replacement wheels are available
If all four tires are not the same in
All four tires must be the same in terms of from SUBARU dealers.
items (a) to (h), there is a possi-
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- bility that it may lead to serious
struction, and size. You are advised to WARNING
mechanical damage to the drive
replace the tires with new ones that are train of your car and affect the Use only those wheels that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip- following factors. specified for your vehicle. Wheels
ment.
— Ride not meeting specifications could
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU interfere with brake caliper opera-
recommends replacing all four tires at — Handling
tion and may cause the tires to rub
the same time. — Braking against the wheel well housing dur-
— Speedometer/Odometer ing turns. The resulting loss of
WARNING calibration vehicle control could lead to an
. When replacing or installing — Clearance between the body accident.
tire(s), all four tires must be the and the tires
same for the following items. NOTE
(a) Size It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control, When any of the wheels are removed
(b) Circumference and it can lead to an accident. and replaced for tire rotation or to
(c) Speed symbol change a flat tire, always check the
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-
(d) Load index radial tires together with belted
ing approximately 1,000 km (600 miles).
(e) Construction bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
Doing so can dangerously re-
(f) Manufacturer specified torque.
duce controllability, resulting in
(g) Brand (tread pattern) an accident.
(h) Degrees of wear

Black plate (499,1)
Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels 11-41
Aluminum wheels Windshield washer fluid

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and & Adding the windshield
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to washer fluid
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety. CAUTION
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change Never use engine coolant as washer
a flat, always check the tightness of the fluid because it could cause paint
wheel nuts after driving approximately damage.
1,000 km (600 miles). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts, Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the add windshield washer fluid until it
wheel. reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs. & Windshield washer fluid
. Be sure to fit tire chains uniformly and Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
completely around the tire, otherwise the washer fluid is unavailable, use clean
chains may scratch the wheel. water.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or In areas where water freezes in winter,
the center cap is replaced, we recommend use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
that you replace them with genuine fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid 11
SUBARU parts designed for aluminum When there is only a small amount of contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
wheels. washer fluid remaining, the windshield surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
washer fluid warning indicator will appear. perature varies according to how much it
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as is diluted, as indicated in the following
follows. table.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (500,1)
11-42 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
Replacement of wiper blades . Return the passenger-side wiper

Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature arm to its original position before
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on returning the driver-side wiper
30% −128C (10.48F) arm to its original position.
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
50% −208C (−48F) jerky wiper operation and streaking on the Otherwise, the passenger-side
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks wiper assembly and driver-side
100% −458C (−498F)
after operating the windshield washer or if wiper assembly will touch each
In order to prevent freezing of washer the wiper operation is jerky, clean the other, possibly resulting in
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in outer surface of the windshield (or rear scratches.
the table above when adjusting the fluid window) and the wiper blades using a . While removing the wiper blades
concentration to the outside temperature. sponge or soft cloth with a neutral from the wiper arms, do not
If you fill the reservoir tank with fluid with a detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After return the wiper arms to the
different concentration from the one used cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper original positions. Otherwise,
previously, purge the old fluid from the blades with clean water. The windshield is the windshield surface may be
piping between the reservoir tank and clean if beads do not form when you rinse scratched.
washer nozzles by operating the washer the windshield with water. . When returning the raised wiper
for a certain period of time. If the arms to the original positions,
concentration of the fluid remaining in CAUTION carefully return the wiper arms
the piping is too low for the outside on the windshield by hand. You
temperature, it may freeze and block the . Do not clean the wiper blades
should not return the wiper arms
nozzles. with fuel or a solvent, such as
to the windshield only by the
paint thinner or benzine. This will
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
CAUTION cause deterioration of the wiper
per arms may be deformed and/
blades.
or the windshield surface may be
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- . When you wish to raise the scratched.
tion appropriately for the outside passenger-side wiper arm, first
temperature. If the concentration is raise the driver-side wiper arm. If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid Otherwise, the passenger-side after following this method, replace the
may freeze on the windshield and wiper assembly and driver-side wiper blades using the following proce-
obstruct your view, and the fluid wiper assembly will touch each dures.
may freeze in the reservoir tank. other, possibly resulting in
scratches.

Black plate (501,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-43
& Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
sembly ber
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

1) Support with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
install them in the new blade rubber.
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
1) Open the cover support.
2) Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by 11

opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it into position.
3. Align the claws of the support with the

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (502,1)
11-44 Maintenance and service/Battery
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade Battery and protective gloves when inspect-
rubber assembly into the support until it ing your vehicle’s battery. Avoid
locks. & Battery Precautions! tipping the battery and subjecting it
to shocks since this could cause
WARNING fluid to spill.
Under no circumstances allow bat-
Read these instructions care- tery fluid to make contact with your
skin, eyes, or clothing since this can
fully: cause blindness and burns. If bat-
tery fluid splashes onto your skin,
To ensure safe and correct handling
eyes or clothing, wash it away
of your battery, read the following
immediately with plenty of water. If
precautions carefully before using
battery fluid splashes into your
the battery or inspecting it.
eyes, seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection:
1) Claw
If battery fluid is accidentally swal-
2) Stopper Always wear eye protection when lowed, immediately drink a large
working near your vehicle’s battery. amount of milk or water, and seek
4. Be sure to position the claws at the Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid, medical attention immediately.
end of the support between the stoppers so it can cause blindness if Battery fluid is corrosive. If it
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is splashed into your eyes. Also, bat- splashes onto your vehicle’s paint-
not retained properly, the wiper blade may teries emit highly flammable, explo- work or fabrics, wash it away im-
scratch the windshield. sive hydrogen gas. Eye protection is mediately with plenty of water.
vital for protection in the event that
this gas ignites. Keep children away:
Battery fluid contains sulfuric Batteries must be handled only by

acid: persons who are aware of the po-
tential hazards. Take particular care
Since battery fluid contains sulfuric to keep children away from your
acid, be sure to wear eye protection vehicle’s battery. Improper handling

Black plate (503,1)
Maintenance and service/Battery 11-45
can cause blindness and burns. gen gas. To prevent an explosion, CAUTION
charge your vehicle’s battery in a
Keep flames away: well ventilated area and keep flames Never use more than 10 amperes
away. when charging the battery because
Before working on or near your it will shorten battery life.
vehicle’s battery, extinguish all ci-
garettes, matches, and lighters.
Also, keep the battery away from
flammable items and electrical
sparks. Since batteries emit highly
flammable, explosive hydrogen gas,
any flames or sparks in the vicinity
could cause an explosion.
When working near your vehicle’s
battery, take care that metal tools do
not short-circuit the battery’s (+) and
(−) terminals or connect the bat-
tery’s (+) terminal to the vehicle’s 1) Cap
body. A short circuit could create 2) Upper level
electrical sparks and lead to an 3) Lower level
explosion.
To prevent electrical sparks, all It is unnecessary to periodically check the
rings, wristwatches, and other metal battery fluid level or periodically refill with
accessories must be taken off be- distilled water. 11
fore work is carried out on or near However, if the battery fluid level is below
the battery. the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
Prevent explosions:
While being charged, batteries emit

highly flammable, explosive hydro-

Black plate (504,1)
11-46 Maintenance and service/Fuses
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes. 1) Spare fuses 1) Good
2) Blown
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment. The spare If any lights, accessories or other electrical
fuses are stored in the fuse box cover. controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.

Black plate (505,1)
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories 11-47
Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs

We recommend that you always consult It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We
your SUBARU dealer before installing fog recommend that you have the bulb re-
lights or any other electrical equipment in placed by your SUBARU dealer if neces-
your vehicle. Such accessories may sary.
cause the electronic system to malfunc-
tion if they are incorrectly installed or if WARNING
they are not suited for the vehicle. We
recommend that you install only genuine Bulbs may become very hot while
SUBARU accessories on your vehicle. illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
Also, we recommend that you always
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
consult your SUBARU dealer before
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
installing a radio in your vehicle.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating. CAUTION
6. If the same fuse blows again, this . Replace any bulb only with a new
indicates that its system has a problem. bulb of the specified wattage.
We recommend that you contact your Using a bulb of different wattage
SUBARU dealer for repairs. could result in a fire. For the
specified wattage of each bulb,
refer to “Bulb chart” F12-16.
11
. Do not touch the glass portion of
the light bulb with bare hands.
When holding the glass portion
is unavoidable, hold it using with
a clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and grease on the bulb.
If there is any fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface, wipe
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (506,1)
11-48 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
them away with a soft cloth & High beam headlight

moistened with alcohol. Also, if
the bulb is scratched or dropped,
NOTE
it may blow out or crack. . If headlight aiming is required, we
recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment
& Headlights (models with LED of the headlight aim.
headlights) . It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
We recommend that you have your
vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible. Left-hand side
1. Left-hand side: Use a screwdriver to
remove the secured clip of the washer
tank. To make it easy to access the bulb,
turn the neck of the washer fluid filler pipe
as illustrated.

Black plate (507,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-49
the headlight assembly by turning it clock-

wise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it to the reverse direction
until it clicks.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Left-hand side: Set the washer fluid
filler pipe to the original place and secure it
by clip.
Right-hand side Left-hand side Right-hand side: Install the air intake
duct with clips.
Right-hand side: Use a screwdriver to
undo the clips on the air intake duct, then
remove the air intake duct. & Low beam headlight (models
without LED headlights), po-
sition light (models without
LED headlights) and front
turn signal light
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con- 11
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
Right-hand side bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
3. Left-hand side: Remove the bulb dealer if necessary.
from the headlight assembly by turning it
2. Disconnect the electrical connector counterclockwise. 1. Start the engine and turn the steering
from the bulb as pushing the tab. Right-hand side: Remove the bulb from wheel fully in the opposite direction of the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (508,1)
bulb to be replaced. ! Low beam headlight

2. Stop the engine.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the clips from the mud guard. 3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
4. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reattach the mud guard.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb as pushing the tab.
4. Pull off the mud guard.

Black plate (509,1)
! Position light and front turn signal

light
2) Front turn signal light 1. Remove the clips.

1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
3. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
& Front fog light and daytime

running light (if equipped) 11
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary. 2. Turn over the mud guard.
1) Position light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (510,1)
3. Front fog light: Disconnect the elec-

trical connector from the bulb as pushing
the tab.
Type A Type B
1) Fog light 1) Daytime running light
2) Daytime running light
4. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-
clockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the

Black plate (511,1)
mud guard. 2. Open the rear portion of the trunk trim 6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with
panel as illustrated. the clips.
& Rear combination lights
NOTE & License plate light
Make sure that the “*” part of the trunk
trim in the illustration does not contact
the trunk lid stay. If the “*” part is bent,
the trunk trim may be torn.
1. Remove the clips from the trunk trim

with a flat-head screwdriver. 1. Open the trunk and remove the clips
from the trunk lid trim with a flat-head
screwdriver.
1) Backup light 2. Turn over the trunk lid trim.
2) Rear turn signal light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 11

combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (512,1)
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise 1. Remove the clips from the rear bum- 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
and pull out the socket. per with a flat-head screwdriver. replace it with a new one.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
5. Install a new bulb. clockwise.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket and the trunk
lid trim.
& Rear fog light (if equipped)

WARNING
Do not touch the exhaust pipe.
Touching the exhaust pipe may
cause burns.
2. While pulling open the center rear

bumper, turn the bulb socket counter-
clockwise and remove it.

Black plate (513,1)
& Map light its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb & Dome light
straight downward to remove it.
! Type A 3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
! Type B
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
3. Install a new bulb. 11
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (514,1)
& Trunk light & Vanity mirror light 4. Reinstall the lens.
& Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
1. Remove the cover by squeezing its 1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
sides and pulling it. the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
4. Reinstall the cover.


Black plate (515,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery 11-57
Replacing battery type. & Replacing battery of access

. Batteries shall not be exposed to key
The access key / transmitter battery may excessive heat such as sun-
be discharged under the following condi- shine, fire or the like. CAUTION
tions.
When removing or reinstalling the
. The operation of the keyless access NOTE access key cover, make sure that
function is unstable
. Replace only with the same or the plastic part does not come off or
. The operating distance of the remote become misaligned.
equivalent type of battery recom-
keyless entry system is unstable
mended by the manufacturer.
. The transmitter does not operate prop- . Dispose of used batteries according Battery: Button battery CR2032
erly when used within the standard dis- to the local laws.
tance . Mount the battery in the correct
Replace the battery with a new one. orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
CAUTION may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on should be replaced by a SUBARU
or in the access key/transmitter dealer.
when replacing battery. . Use a new battery.
. Be careful not to touch or da- . After replacing the battery, confirm
mage the printed circuit board in that the access key/transmitter func-
the access key/transmitter when tions properly.
replacing the battery. 11
1) Release button
. Be careful not to allow children to 2) Mechanical key
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could 1. Take out the mechanical key.
swallow them.
. Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (516,1)
11-58 Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
& Replacing transmitter battery

! Models with tire pressure monitor-
ing system
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.
5. Attach the cover to the access key by

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head fitting the projections and recesses to-
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. gether.

Black plate (517,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery 11-59
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 4. Replace the old battery with a new
key head. battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button 2. Remove the three screws and then
six times to synchronize the unit. remove the cover.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing ! Models without tire pressure mon-
the hooks. itoring system
11
3. Create a gap between the battery and

the case by pushing the battery gently
1) Negative (−) side facing up with your finger as shown in the illustra-
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver. tion. Then, insert a flat-head screwdriver
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (518,1)
11-60 Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
that has been wrapped in insulating tape 5. Remove the old battery. on the key side.
into the gap.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
several times to synchronize the unit.
6. Fit a new battery (type CR-1620 or

4. Move the flat-head screwdriver in the equivalent) in the case with its positive (+)
order shown in 1. and 2., and remove the side facing upward.
battery, taking care not to damage the
base panel or terminal.
7. Put the case together by fitting the

mating part of the button side into the hook

Black plate (25,1)
Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Temporary spare tires ........................................ 12-8

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-9
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3 Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Manual transmission, front differential and rear compartment ................................................. 12-10
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-6 Fuse panel located in the engine
Fluids ................................................................ 12-7 compartment ................................................. 12-12
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-7 Bulb chart......................................................... 12-16
Electrical system................................................ 12-8 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-18
Tires .................................................................. 12-8
12

Black plate (522,1)
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
The following specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
mm (in)
Item STI Except STI
Overall length 4,595 (180.9)
Overall width 1,795 (70.7)
Overall height 1,475 (58.1)
Wheel base 2,650 (104.3)
Tread Front 1,530 (60.2)
Rear 1,540 (60.6)
Ground clearance 135 (5.3)

Black plate (523,1)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Model STI Except STI
Engine model EJ25 FA20

(2.5 L, DOHC, turbo) (2.0 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke petrol engine
Displacement cc 2,457 1,998
Bore 6 Stroke mm (in) 99.5 6 79.0 86.0 6 86.0

(3.92 6 3.11) (3.39 6 3.39)
Compression ratio 8.2 : 1 10.6 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
NOTE
Your engine is designed to use only unleaded petrol.
Model Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

STI 98 Octane or higher*
60 liters (15.9 US gal, 13.2 Imp gal)
Except STI 95 Octane or higher*
*: This octane rating is the Research Octane number.

12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (524,1)
& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-16.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

Black plate (525,1)
! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
· 5W-30* STI:
· 5W-40 · Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.3 liters (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil:
Except STI:
· Adding the oil from L to F level:
or 1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
ILSAC (International Lubricant *: equivalent to factory-filled oil
Specification Advisory Commit- · Changing the oil and oil filter:
tee) GF-5, which can be identi- 5.1 liters (5.4 US qt, 4.5 Imp qt)
API (American Petroleum Insti- fied with the ILSAC certification · Changing the oil:
tute) classification SN with the mark (Starburst mark) 4.9 liters (5.2 US qt, 4.3 Imp qt)
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
or
VING”
ACEA (Association des Con-
12
structeurs Europeens d’Automo-
biles) specification A3 or A5
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (526,1)
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT Rear differential gear oil
models)
STI API classification GL-5 —

(75W-90)*3
Oil grade . SUBARU Extra MT* 3
. SUBARU Extra MT*3 API classification GL-5
Except
STI . API classification GL-5 . API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*4 (75W-90)
. 75W-90*
. 90
SAE viscosity No. and — —

applicable temperature
*: recommended
STI 4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt) — 1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
Models with limited 1.0 liter (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
Oil slip differential (LSD)
capacity*1 Except 3.3 liters (3.5 US qt, 2.9 Imp qt) 1.4 liters (1.5 US qt, 1.2 Imp qt) Models without lim-
STI
ited slip differential 0.8 liters (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)
(LSD)
“Manual transmission oil” F11- “Front differential gear oil (CVT “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear
Remarks*2 26 models) and rear differential differential gear oil” F11-27
gear oil” F11-27
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

Black plate (527,1)
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Continuously variable transmis- We recommend that you consult your 12.4 liters (13.1 US qt, 10.9 Imp qt) “Continuously variable transmis-
sion fluid (CVT models) SUBARU dealer. sion fluid” F11-26
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT – “Brake fluid” F11-28
Clutch fluid (MT models) 4 brake fluid – “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-29
· SUBARU ATF
Power steering fluid (STI) · “Dexron III” Type Automatic Trans- 0.7 liters (0.7 US qt, 0.6 Imp qt) “Power steering fluid (STI)” F11-27
mission Fluid
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
STI 7.7 liters (8.2 US qt, 6.8 Imp qt)
MT models 8.2 liters (8.7 US qt, 7.2 Imp qt) SUBARU Super Coolant
12
Except STI
CVT models 8.4 liters (8.9 US qt, 7.4 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-19.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (528,1)
& Electrical system

Battery type 55D23L
Alternator STI 12V-110A
Except STI 12V-130A
Spark plugs STI SILFR6A (NGK)
Except STI ILKAR8H6 (NGK)
& Tires
For the tire specifications (e.g., tire size, load index and speed category), see the tire pressure label located on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
& Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T145/70D17 205/50R17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure 2
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure) 420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi) 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi)
Wheel nut tightening torque 120 N·m (12 kgf·m, 89 lbf·ft)*1 *2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 40 to 50 kgf (88 to 110 lbf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing flat tire” F9-5.

Black plate (529,1)
& Wheel alignment

We recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer check or adjust the wheel alignment.
Item Except STI (models with 17-inch wheel) Except STI (models with 18-inch wheel) STI
Toe Front 0 mm (0 in), Toe angle (sum of both wheels): 08
Rear 3 mm (0.12 in), Toe angle (sum of both wheels): 0816’
Camber Front −0845’
Rear −1830’ −1840’
& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
12

Black plate (530,1)
12-10 Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
1 20A . Rear fog light
2 7.5A . Combination meter
3 15A . Door locking
4 10A . Front wiper deicer relay
5 Empty
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
7 10A . Integrated unit
8 7.5A . Stop light
9 7.5A . Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
12 15A . Transmission control
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A . Accessory power outlet
(center console)
14 10A . Position light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light

Black plate (531,1)
Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-11
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
15 10A . Keyless unit 30 Empty
. Trunk light
31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit
16 7.5A . Illumination . Integrated unit
17 15A . Seat heaters 32 7.5A . Steering lock
18 10A . Back-up light 33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle Dynamics
Control unit
19 Empty
20 10A . Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 10A . Starter relay
22 7.5A . Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 Empty
24 10A . Audio
. Navigation system
25 15A . SRS airbag system
26 7.5A . Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
27 15A . Blower fan
28 15A . Blower fan 12
29 15A . Fog light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (532,1)
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
! STI panel rating
1 30A . ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A . Sub fan (cooling fan)
4 Empty
5 25A . Audio
6 30A . Headlight (low beam)
7 15A . Headlight (high beam)
8 20A . Back-up
9 15A . Horn
10 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A . Fuel pump
unit
13 7.5A . Engine control unit
14 15A . Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A . Tail and illumination re-
lay
16 7.5A . Alternator
A) Main fuse

Black plate (533,1)
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
17 Empty
18 20A . Injection
19 15A . Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
left hand)
21 10A . Secondary air combina-
tion valve
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (534,1)
! Except STI
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
1 30A . ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A . Sub fan (cooling fan)
4 Empty
5 25A . Audio
6 30A . Headlight (low beam)
7 15A . Headlight (high beam)
8 20A . Back-up
9 15A . Horn
10 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A . Fuel pump
unit
13 7.5A . Engine control unit
14 15A . Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A . Tail and illumination re-
A) Main fuse lay
16 7.5A . Alternator

Black plate (535,1)
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
17 Empty
18 20A . Injection
right hand)
left hand)
12

Black plate (536,1)
12-16 Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D and E are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer for
replacement.

Black plate (537,1)
Specifications/Bulb chart 12-17
Wattage Bulb No.* WARNING

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 Bulbs may become very hot while
2) Low beam headlight (models without LED headlights) 12V-55W H11 illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
3) Front position light (models without LED headlights) 12V-5W W5W
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
4) Map light 12V-8W – a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) Licence plate light 12V-5W W5W
CAUTION
7) Trunk light 12V-5W W5W
8) Back-up light 12V-16W W16W Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
9) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W a bulb of different wattage could
10) Rear fog light (if equipped) 12V-21W W21W result in a fire.
11) Vanity mirror light 12V-2W –
12) Front fog light (if equipped)
Models without daytime running light 12V-19W H16
Models with daytime running light 12V-35W H8
Daytime running light 12V-13W P13W
13) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
A) Low beam headlight (models without LED headlights) – –
B) Front position light (models without LED headlights) – –
C) Side turn signal light – – 12
D) High mount stop light – –
E) Stop light/Tail light – –
*: ECE specification

Black plate (538,1)
12-18 Specifications/Vehicle identification
1) Vehicle identification number

Vehicle identification 2) ID label (Europe and Russia models)
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Year of manufacture label (Middle East
models)
5) Model number label (General models)
6) Built date label (Australia models)
7) ADR compliance plate (Australia models)
8) Fuel label
9) Air conditioner label
10) Vehicle identification number plate

Black plate (27,1)
Supplement
ID label (Russia models).................................... 13-4 Keyless access with push-button start

Information for Middle East models ................. 13-4 system .......................................................... 13-29
Year of manufacture and a country of origin ....... 13-4 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-29
Speed limit, maximum torque and maximum Technical information for Dominican
power at rpm ................................................... 13-4 Republic models ........................................... 13-30
Tires .................................................................. 13-5 LF Oscillator.................................................... 13-30
Fuel economy tips.............................................. 13-5 Immobilizer...................................................... 13-30
Declaration of conformity in accordance Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-31
with the radio and telecommunications Technical information for El Salvador
terminal equipment directive 1999/5/EC ........ 13-6 models........................................................... 13-31
Transmitter for TPMS ......................................... 13-6 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-31
Transmitter for the keyless entry system............. 13-7 Technical information for Panama
Receiver for the keyless entry system............... 13-11 models........................................................... 13-31
Immobilizer ...................................................... 13-13 LF Oscillator.................................................... 13-31
LF Oscillator .................................................... 13-18 Immobilizer...................................................... 13-32
Bluetooth® module ........................................... 13-21 Access key...................................................... 13-32
Compressor ..................................................... 13-22 Technical information for Israel models ........ 13-33
Access key ...................................................... 13-23 Tire pressure monitoring system...................... 13-33
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-25 Technical information for Serbia models ....... 13-34
Declaration of conformity in accordance Tire pressure monitoring system...................... 13-34
with the safety of machinery 2006/42/EC .... 13-27 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-34
Jack................................................................. 13-27 Access key...................................................... 13-34
Technical information for Germany Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-35
models ........................................................... 13-28 Technical information for Vietnam
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-28 models........................................................... 13-35
Technical information for Singapore Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-35 13
models ........................................................... 13-28 Technical information for Philippines
Transmitter for the keyless entry system........... 13-28 models........................................................... 13-36
Immobilizer ...................................................... 13-28 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-36
Access key ...................................................... 13-29 Technical information for Jamaica
models........................................................... 13-36

Black plate (28,1)
Supplement
Immobilizer ...................................................... 13-36 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-44

Access key ...................................................... 13-36 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-44
Keyless access with push-button start Technical information for Russia/
system........................................................... 13-36 Kazakhstan models ...................................... 13-45
Technical information for Brazil models......... 13-36 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-45
Immobilizer ...................................................... 13-37 Technical information for Australia/New
LF Oscillator .................................................... 13-38 Zealand models ............................................ 13-45
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-39 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-45
Technical information for Taiwan models....... 13-40 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-46
Tire pressure monitoring system ...................... 13-40 Technical information for Thailand
Access key ...................................................... 13-40 models........................................................... 13-46
Immobilizer ...................................................... 13-40 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-46
Keyless access with push-button start Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-46
system........................................................... 13-41 Technical information for Oman models........ 13-46
Remote keyless entry transmitter...................... 13-41 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-46
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-42 Technical information for UAE models .......... 13-47
Technical information for Jordan models ...... 13-42 Tire pressure monitoring system...................... 13-47
Tire pressure monitoring system ...................... 13-42 Remote keyless entry transmitter ..................... 13-47
Remote keyless entry transmitter...................... 13-42 Technical information for Indonesia
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-43 models........................................................... 13-48
Technical information for Argentina Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-48
models ........................................................... 13-43 Technical information for Lebanon
Technical information for Paraguay Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-48
models ........................................................... 13-43 Technical information for Ukraine
Technical information for Republic of South Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-49
Africa models ................................................ 13-44
Access key ...................................................... 13-44

Black plate (29,1)
Supplement
1
Technical information for Bahrain Technical information for Qatar models ........ 13-49
models ........................................................... 13-49 Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ............. 13-49
Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).............. 13-49

Black plate (544,1)
13-4 Supplement/ID label (Russia models)
ID label (Russia models) Information for Middle East & Speed limit, maximum torque
models and maximum power at rpm
& Year of manufacture and a 2.0 L models 2.5 L
country of origin Model models
MT CVT MT
Speed 215 240 255
limit km/h
Maximum
torque 350 (35.7) / 407 (41.5)
N·m 2,400 - 5,200 / 4,000
(kgf·m)/
rpm
Maximum
power 221 (300)
kW (PS)/ 197 (268) / 5,600 / 6,000
The ID label is located on the left side rpm
center pillar as shown in the illustration.
. The performance data above is the numeric
value measured according to the GSO-ISO-
The calendar year when your vehicle was 1585-2008 quality norm.
manufactured and a country of origin are . The performance data above is the numeric
value measured from petrol with an octane
indicated in the “Year of manufacture rating of 95 (Research Octane number).
label” attached to the driver’s door jam.

Black plate (545,1)
Supplement/Information for Middle East models 13-5
& Tires & Fuel economy tips

Observe the following in order to improve
Tire size*1 245/40R18 97W your vehicle’s fuel economy and reduce
Pressure*1&*2 Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33.3 psi) CO2 emissions.
Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 31.9 psi) . Drive the vehicle appropriately.
. Have your vehicle maintained periodi-
*1
For the information about spare tire, refer to “Temporary spare tires” F12-8.
: cally.
*2
: Pressures listed above are applied for normal condition. When the vehicle is in full load condition,
adjust to the corresponding tire pressure that showing on the tire pressure label located on the . Do not drive recklessly.
driver’s door pillar. . Do not drive at excessively high
speeds.
NOTE . Keep the tires inflated to an appropriate
For the information about wheel nut tightening torque, refer to “Temporary spare tire pressure.
tires” F12-8. . Minimize engine idling.
. Do not carry excessively heavy cargo.
13

Black plate (546,1)
13-6 Supplement/Declaration of conformity in accordance with the radio and telecommunications terminal equipment directive 1999/5/EC
Declaration of conformity in accordance with the radio and telecommunications terminal

equipment directive 1999/5/EC
& Transmitter for TPMS

Black plate (547,1)
Supplement/Declaration of conformity in accordance with the radio and telecommunications terminal equipment directive 1999/5/EC 13-7
& Transmitter for the keyless entry system

! With TPMS
Middle East models
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (548,1)
Except Middle East models

Black plate (549,1)
CAUTION
. There is a danger of explosion if
the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type.
. Do not expose the battery to
excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (550,1)
! Without TPMS

Black plate (551,1)
& Receiver for the keyless entry system

! With TPMS
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (552,1)
! Without TPMS

Black plate (553,1)
& Immobilizer
! Models with “keyless access with push-button start system”
13
Hereby, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., declares that this SSPIMB02 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (554,1)
English framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Español

Hereby, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., de- Dansk Por medio de la presente Fuji Heavy
clares that this SSPIMB02 is in compli- Industries Ltd. declara que el SSPIMB02
ance with the essential requirements and Undertegnede Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
other relevant provisions of Directive erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplica-
1999/5/EC. SSPIMB02 overholder de væsentlige krav bles o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/
Suomi EF. Português
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. vakuuttaa täten Deutsch Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. declara que
että SSPIMB02 tyyppinen laite on direktii- este SSPIMB02 está conforme com os
vin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja Hiermit erklärt Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., requisitos essenciais e outras disposições
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen dass sich das Gerät SSPIMB02 in Über- da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
mukainen. einstimmung mit den grundlegenden An-
forderungen und den übrigen einschlägi- Malti
Nederlands gen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/ Hawnhekk, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
Hierbij verklaart Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. EG befindet. jiddikjara li dan SSPIMB02 jikkonforma
dat het toestel SSPIMB02 in overeen- Ελληνικά mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
stemming is met de essentiële eisen en oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva
de andere relevante bepalingen van richt- ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Fuji Heavy Industries 1999/5/EC.
lijn 1999/5/EG. Ltd. ΔΗΛOΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ SSPIMB02
Σ Υ Μ Μ Ο Ρ Φ O Ν Ε ΤΑ Ι Π Ρ Ο Σ Τ Ι Σ Eesti
Français ΟΥΣΙOΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ Käesolevaga kinnitab Fuji Heavy Indus-
Par la présente Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ tries Ltd. seadme SSPIMB02 vastavust
déclare que l’appareil SSPIMB02 est ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/EK. direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nime-
conforme aux exigences essentielles et Italiano tatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asja-
aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la kohastele sätetele.
directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.
dichiara che questo SSPIMB02 è confor- Magyar
Svenska me ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre Alulírott, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. nyilat-
Härmed intygar Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla diret- kozom, hogy a SSPIMB02 megfelel a
att denna SSPIMB02 står I överensstäm- tiva 1999/5/CE. vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek
melse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírá-
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som sainak.

Black plate (555,1)
Slovenčina mi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrekty- Hrvatski

Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. týmto vyhlasuje, wy 1999/5/EC. Ovim Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., izjavljuje
že SSPIMB02 spĺňa základné požiadavky Íslenska da je SSPIMB02 u sklau s bitnim zahtje-
a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice vima i drugim relevantnim odredbama
1999/5/ES. Hér með lýsir Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. Direktive 1999/5/EC i Pravilnika o RiTT
yfir því að SSPIMB02 er í samræmi við opremi (NN 25/2012).
Čeština grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. tímto prohla- eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Српски/srpski
šuje, že tento SSPIMB02 je ve shodě se Norsk Ovim, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., deklariše
základními požadavky a dalšími přísluš- da je SSPIMB02 u skladu sa osnovnim
nými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. erklærer herved zahtevima i ostalim relevantnim odred-
at utstyret SSPIMB02 er i samsvar med de bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Slovenščina grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. izjavlja, da je ta krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Türkçe
SSPIMB02 v skladu z bistvenimi zahteva- български İşbu belge ile Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
mi in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive bu SSPIMB02 ürününün 1999/5/EC Yö-
1999/5/ES. C настоящето, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., netmeliği’nin temel gerekliliklerine ve diğer
декларира, че SSPIMB02 е в съответ- ilgili hükümlerine uygun olduğunu beyan
Lietuvių ствие със съществените изисквания и eder.
Šiuo Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. deklaruoja, другите приложими разпоредби на
kad šis SSPIMB02 atitinka esminius rei- Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
kalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos Română
nuostatas.
Prin prezenta, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
Latviešu declară că aparatul SSPIMB02 este in
Ar šo Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. deklarē, conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu
ka SSPIMB02 atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/ alte prevederi pertinente ale Directivei
EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to 1999/5/CE.
saistītajiem noteikumiem. Црногорски језик 13
Polski Ovim, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., izjavljuje
Niniejszym Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. da ovaj SSPIMB02 je usklađen sa bitnim
oświadcza, że SSPIMB02 jest zgodny z zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odred-
zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostały- bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (556,1)
! Models without “keyless access övriga relevanta bestämmelser som fram- Español
with push-button start system” går av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Por medio de la presente Tokai Rika Co.,
English Dansk Ltd. declara que el RI-38BFH cumple con
Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
Undertegnede Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. erklæ- otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles
this RI-38BFH is in compliance with the rer herved, at følgende udstyr RI-38BFH
essential requirements and other relevant de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Português
Suomi Deutsch Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. declara que este RI-
Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. vakuuttaa täten että 38BFH está conforme com os requisitos
Hiermit erklärt Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., dass essenciais e outras disposições da Direc-
RI-38BFH tyyppinen laite on direktiivin sich das Gerät RI-38BFH in Übereinstim-
1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä tiva 1999/5/CE.
mung mit den grundlegenden Anforde-
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mu- rungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Malti
kainen. Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG Hawnhekk, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., jiddikjara
Nederlands befindet. li dan RI-38BFH jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet
Hierbij verklaart Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. dat Ελληνικά essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
het toestel RI-38BFH in overeenstemming ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Tokai Rika Co., Ltd.
is met de essentiële eisen en de andere ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ RI-38BFH Eesti
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/ Σ Υ Μ Μ Ο Ρ Φ Ω Ν Ε ΤΑ Ι Π Ρ Ο Σ Τ Ι Σ Käesolevaga kinnitab Tokai Rika Co., Ltd.
EG. ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ seadme RI-38BFH vastavust direktiivi
Français ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud di-
ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ. rektiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohas-
Par la présente Tokai Rika Co., Ltd.
déclare que l’appareil RI-38BFH est Italiano tele sätetele.
conforme aux exigences essentielles et Con la presente Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. Magyar
aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la dichiara che questo RI-38BFH è conforme Alulírott, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. nyilatkozom,
directive 1999/5/CE. ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposi- hogy a RI-38BFH megfelel a vonatkozó
Svenska zioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/
1999/5/CE. EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Härmed intygar Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. att
denna RI-38BFH står I överensstämmelse
med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och

Black plate (557,1)
Slovenčina sownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy Hrvatski

Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. týmto vyhlasuje, že 1999/5/EC. Ovim Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., izjavljuje da je
RI-38BFH spĺňa základné požiadavky a Íslenska RI-38BFH u sklau s bitnim zahtjevima i
všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice drugim relevantnim odredbama Direktive
1999/5/ES. Hér með lýsir Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. yfir því 1999/5/EC i Pravilnika o RiTT opremi (NN
að RI-38BFH er í samræmi við grunnkröf- 25/2012).
Čeština ur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í
Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. tímto prohlašuje, že tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Српски/srpski
tento RI-38BFH je ve shodě se základními Norsk Ovim, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., deklariše da je
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustano- RI-38BFH u skladu sa osnovnim zahte-
veními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. erklærer herved at vima i ostalim relevantnim odredbama
utstyret RI-38BFH er i samsvar med de Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. izjavlja, da je ta RI- krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Shqip
38BFH v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in български Nepermjet kesaj, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd.,
ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive deklaroj qe ky RI-38BFH eshte ne pajtim
1999/5/ES. С настоящето, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., me kerkesat thelbesore dhe dispozitat e
декларира, че RI-38BFH е в съответ- tjera perkatese te Direktives 1999/5/EC.
Lietuvių ствие със съществените изисквания и
Šiuo Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. deklaruoja, kad другите приложими разпоредби на The DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
šis RI-38BFH atitinka esminius reikalavi- Директива 1999/5/EC. (DoC) is available at the following ad-
mus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuosta- dress:
Română http://www.tokai-rika.co.jp/pc/
tas.
Prin prezenta, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., de-
Latviešu clară că aparatul RI-38BFH este în con-
Ar šo Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. deklarē, ka RI- formitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte
38BFH atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būti- prevederi pertinente ale Directivei 1999/5/
skajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistīta- CE.
jiem noteikumiem. Црногорски језик 13
Polski Ovim, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., izjavljuje da
Niniejszym Tokai Rika Co., Ltd. oświad- ovaj RI-38BFH je usklađen sa bitnim
cza, że RI-38BFH jest zgodny z zasadni- zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odred-
czymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi sto- bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (558,1)
& LF Oscillator
! LF Oscillator for models with “Keyless access with push-button start system”
Hereby, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., declares that this SSPLF02 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Black plate (559,1)
English framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Español

Hereby, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., de- Dansk Por medio de la presente Fuji Heavy
clares that this SSPLF02 is in compliance Industries Ltd. declara que el SSPLF02
with the essential requirements and other Undertegnede Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/ erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplica-
EC. SSPLF02 overholder de væsentlige krav bles o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/
Suomi EF. Português
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. vakuuttaa täten Deutsch Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. declara que
että SSPLF02 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin este SSPLF02 está conforme com os
1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä Hiermit erklärt Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., requisitos essenciais e outras disposições
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mu- dass sich das Gerät SSPLF02 in Über- da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
kainen. einstimmung mit den grundlegenden An-
forderungen und den übrigen einschlägi- Malti
Nederlands gen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/ Hawnhekk, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
Hierbij verklaart Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. EG befindet. jiddikjara li dan SSPLF02 jikkonforma
dat het toestel SSPLF02 in overeenstem- Ελληνικά mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
ming is met de essentiële eisen en de oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Fuji Heavy Industries 1999/5/EC.
1999/5/EG. Ltd. ΔΗΛOΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ SSPLF02
Σ Υ Μ Μ Ο Ρ Φ O Ν Ε ΤΑ Ι Π Ρ Ο Σ Τ Ι Σ Eesti
Français ΟΥΣΙOΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ Käesolevaga kinnitab Fuji Heavy Indus-
Par la présente Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ tries Ltd. seadme SSPLF02 vastavust
déclare que l’appareil SSPLF02 est ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/EK. direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nime-
conforme aux exigences essentielles et Italiano tatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asja-
aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la kohastele sätetele.
directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.
dichiara che questo SSPLF02 è conforme Magyar
Svenska ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposi- Alulírott, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. nyilat-
Härmed intygar Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. zioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva kozom, hogy a SSPLF02 megfelel a 13
att denna SSPLF02 står I överensstäm- 1999/5/CE. vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek
melse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírá-
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som sainak.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (560,1)
Slovenčina mi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrekty- Hrvatski

Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. týmto vyhlasuje, wy 1999/5/EC. Ovim Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., izjavljuje
že SSPLF02 spĺňa základné požiadavky a Íslenska da je SSPLF02 u sklau s bitnim zahtje-
všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice vima i drugim relevantnim odredbama
1999/5/ES. Hér með lýsir Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. Direktive 1999/5/EC i Pravilnika o RiTT
yfir því að SSPLF02 er í samræmi við opremi (NN 25/2012).
Čeština grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. tímto prohla- eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Српски/srpski
šuje, že tento SSPLF02 je ve shodě se Norsk Ovim, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., deklariše
základními požadavky a dalšími přísluš- da je SSPLF02 u skladu sa osnovnim
nými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. erklærer herved zahtevima i ostalim relevantnim odred-
at utstyret SSPLF02 er i samsvar med de bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. izjavlja, da je ta krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Türkçe
SSPLF02 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami български İşbu belge ile Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive bu SSPLF02 ürününün 1999/5/EC Yönet-
1999/5/ES. C настоящето, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., meliği’nin temel gerekliliklerine ve diğer
декларира, че SSPLF02 е в съответ- ilgili hükümlerine uygun olduğunu beyan
Lietuvių ствие със съществените изисквания и eder.
Šiuo Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. deklaruoja, другите приложими разпоредби на
kad šis SSPLF02 atitinka esminius reika- Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
lavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos Română
nuostatas.
Prin prezenta, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.,
Latviešu declară că aparatul SSPLF02 este in
Ar šo Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. deklarē, conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu
ka SSPLF02 atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK alte prevederi pertinente ale Directivei
būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to 1999/5/CE.
saistītajiem noteikumiem. Црногорски језик
Polski Ovim, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd., izjavljuje
Niniejszym Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd. da ovaj SSPLF02 je usklađen sa bitnim
oświadcza, że SSPLF02 jest zgodny z zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odred-
zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostały- bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.

Black plate (561,1)
& Bluetooth® module
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (562,1)
& Compressor

Black plate (563,1)
& Access key directive 1999/5/CE. Italiano

. Replace only with the same or equiva- Svenska Con la presente DENSO CORPORATION
lent type recommended by the manufac- dichiara che questo 13CZY/14AHB è
Härmed intygar DENSO CORPORATION conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle
turer. att denna 13CZY/14AHB står I överens-
. Dispose of used batteries according to altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla
stämmelse med de väsentliga egenskaps- direttiva 1999/5/CE.
the local laws. krav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser
som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Español
English
Dansk Por medio de la presente DENSO COR-
Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION de- PORATION declara que el 13CZY/14AHB
clares that this 13CZY/14AHB is in com- Undertegnede DENSO CORPORATION cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
pliance with the essential requirements erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplica-
and other relevant provisions of Directive 13CZY/14AHB overholder de væsentlige bles o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
1999/5/EC. krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF. Português
Suomi
Deutsch DENSO CORPORATION declara que
DENSO CORPORATION vakuuttaa täten este 13CZY/14AHB está conforme com
että 13CZY/14AHB tyyppinen laite on Hiermit erklärt DENSO CORPORATION, os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi-
direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimus- dass sich das Gerät 13CZY/14AHB in ções da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
ten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
ehtojen mukainen. Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlä- Malti
gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie Hawnhekk, DENSO CORPORATION, jid-
Nederlands 1999/5/EG befindet. dikjara li dan 13CZY/14AHB jikkonforma
Hierbij verklaart DENSO CORPORATION mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
dat het toestel 13CZY/14AHB in overeen- Ελληνικά
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva
stemming is met de essentiële eisen en ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ DENSO 1999/5/EC.
de andere relevante bepalingen van richt- CORPORATION ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ 13CZY/
lijn 1999/5/EG. 14AHB ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ Eesti
ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ Käesolevaga kinnitab DENSO CORPO-
Français ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ RATION seadme 13CZY/14AHB vasta- 13
Par la présente DENSO CORPORATION ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ. vust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja
déclare que l’appareil 13CZY/14AHB est nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele
conforme aux exigences essentielles et asjakohastele sätetele.
aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (564,1)
Magyar Latviešu Română

Alulírott, DENSO CORPORATION nyilat- Ar šo DENSO CORPORATION deklarē, Prin prezenta, DENSO CORPORATION,
kozom, hogy a 13CZY/14AHB megfelel a ka 13CZY/14AHB atbilst Direktīvas declară că aparatul 13CZY/14AHB este in
vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu
az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak. ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem. alte prevederi pertinente ale Directivei
1999/5/CE.
Slovenčina Polski
DENSO CORPORATION týmto vyhlasuje, Niniejszym DENSO CORPORATION Црногорски језик
že 13CZY/14AHB spĺňa základné požia- oświadcza, że 13CZY/14AHB jest zgodny Ovim, DENSO CORPORATION, izjavljuje
davky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta- da ovaj 13CZY/14AHB je usklađen sa
Smernice 1999/5/ES. łymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrek- bitnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim
tywy 1999/5/EC. odredbama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Čeština
DENSO CORPORATION tímto prohla- Íslenska Hrvatski
šuje, že tento 13CZY/14AHB je ve shodě Hér með lýsir DENSO CORPORATION Ovim DENSO CORPORATION, izjavljuje
se základními požadavky a dalšími pří- yfir því að 13CZY/14AHB er í samræmi við da je 13CZY/14AHB u sklau s bitnim
slušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odred-
ES. eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC. bama Direktive 1999/5/EC i Pravilnika o
RiTT opremi (NN 25/2012).
Slovenščina Norsk
DENSO CORPORATION izjavlja, da je ta DENSO CORPORATION erklærer herved Српски/srpski
13CZY/14AHB v skladu z bistvenimi at utstyret 13CZY/14AHB er i samsvar Ovim, DENSO CORPORATION, deklariše
zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige da je 13CZY/14AHB u skladu sa osnov-
direktive 1999/5/ES. relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. nim zahtevima i ostalim relevantnim
odredbama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Lietuvių български
Šiuo DENSO CORPORATION deklaruoja, C настоящето, DENSO CORPORATION, The latest “DECLARATION of CONFOR-
kad šis 13CZY/14AHB atitinka esminius декларира, че 13CZY/14AHB е в съ- MITY” (DoC) is available at the following
reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos ответствие със съществените изисква- address:
nuostatas. ния и другите приложими разпоредби http://www.globaldenso.com/en/products/
на Директива 1999/5/ЕС. oem/index.html

Black plate (565,1)
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- Français ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ
tion (SRVD) Par la présente CONTINENTAL déclare ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
The latest “DECLARATION of CONFOR- que l’appareil SRR2-A est conforme aux Italiano
MITY” (DoC) is available at the following: exigences essentielles et aux autres dis-
positions pertinentes de la directive Con la presente CONTINENTAL dichiara
Doc address: 1999/5/CE. che questo SRR2-A è conforme ai requi-
http://continental.automotive-approvals. siti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
de/index.php?produkt=SRR2-A Svenska pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/
Härmed intygar CONTINENTAL att denna CE.
SRR2-A står I överensstämmelse med de Español
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga re-
levanta bestämmelser som framgår av Por medio de la presente CONTINENTAL
English direktiv 1999/5/EG. declara que el SRR2-A cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
Hereby, CONTINENTAL, declares that
Dansk disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la
this SRR2-A is in compliance with the
Undertegnede CONTINENTAL erklærer Directiva 1999/5/CE.
essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. herved, at følgende udstyr SRR2-A over- Português
holder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
Suomi relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. CONTINENTAL declara que este SRR2-A
está conforme com os requisitos essenci-
CONTINENTAL vakuuttaa täten että
Deutsch ais e outras disposições da Directiva
SRR2-A tyyppinen laite on direktiivin
Hiermit erklärt CONTINENTAL, dass sich 1999/5/CE.
1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mu- das Gerät SRR2-A in Übereinstimmung Malti
kainen. mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestim- Hawnhekk, CONTINENTAL, jiddikjara li
Nederlands mungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befin- dan SRR2-A jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet es-
det. senzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn rele-
Hierbij verklaart CONTINENTAL dat het
vanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
toestel SRR2-A in overeenstemming is
Ελληνικά
met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/ ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ CONTINENTAL
Eesti 13
Δ Η Λ Ω Ν Ε Ι Ο Τ Ι S R R 2 - A Käesolevaga kinnitab CONTINENTAL
EG. seadme SRR2-A vastavust direktiivi
Σ Υ Μ Μ Ο Ρ Φ Ω Ν Ε ΤΑ Ι Π Ρ Ο Σ Τ Ι Σ
ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud di-
rektiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohas-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (566,1)
tele sätetele. noteikumiem. Bosanski

Magyar Polski Ovim, CONTINENTAL, izjavljuje da ovaj
SRR2-A je usklađen sa bitnim zahtjevima i
Alulírott, CONTINENTAL nyilatkozom, Niniejszym CONTINENTAL oświadcza, że drugim relevantnim odredbama Direktive
hogy a SRR2-A megfelel a vonatkozó SRR2-A jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wy- 1999/5/EC.
alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/ mogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak. postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Hrvatski
Slovenčina Íslenska Ovim CONTINENTAL, izjavljuje da je
SRR2-A u sklau s bitnim zahtjevima i
CONTINENTAL týmto vyhlasuje, že Hér með lýsir CONTINENTAL yfir því að drugim relevantnim odredbama Direktive
SRR2-A spĺňa základné požiadavky a SRR2-A er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og 1999/5/EC i Pravilnika o RiTT opremi (NN
všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 25/2012).
1999/5/ES. 1999/5/EC.
Čeština Norsk
CONTINENTAL tímto prohlašuje, že tento CONTINENTAL erklærer herved at utsty-
SRR2-A je ve shodě se základními ret SRR2-A er i samsvar med de grunn-
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustano- leggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
veními směrnice 1999/5/ES. direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Slovenščina български
CONTINENTAL izjavlja, da je ta SRR2-A v C настоящето, CONTINENTAL, декла-
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi рира, че SRR2-A е в съответствие със
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES. съществените изисквания и другите
приложими разпоредби на Директива
Lietuvių 1999/5/ЕС.
Šiuo CONTINENTAL deklaruoja, kad šis
SRR2-A atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir Română
kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Prin prezenta, CONTINENTAL, declară că
aparatul SRR2-A este in conformitate cu
Latviešu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte prevederi
Ar šo CONTINENTAL deklarē, ka SRR2-A pertinente ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem

Black plate (567,1)
Supplement/Declaration of conformity in accordance with the safety of machinery 2006/42/EC 13-27
Declaration of conformity in accordance with the safety of machinery 2006/42/EC

& Jack
13

Black plate (568,1)
13-28 Supplement/Technical information for Germany models
Technical information for Technical information for & Immobilizer

Germany models Singapore models ! Models with “keyless access with
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Transmitter for the keyless
tion (SRVD) entry system

Black plate (569,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Singapore models 13-29
! Models without “keyless access & Access key & Keyless access with push-
with push-button start system” button start system
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (SRVD)
13

Black plate (570,1)
13-30 Supplement/Technical information for Dominican Republic models
Technical information for & Immobilizer ! Models without “keyless access

Dominican Republic models with push-button start system”
! Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system” FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
& LF Oscillator
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02 CAUTION
push-button start system” CAUTION FCC WARNING
FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02 FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
CAUTION Changes or modifications not ex- sponsible for compliance could void
pressly approved by the party re- the user’s authority to operate the
FCC WARNING sponsible for compliance could void equipment.
Changes or modifications not ex- the user’s authority to operate the
pressly approved by the party re- equipment.
sponsible for compliance could void NOTE
the user’s authority to operate the This device complies with part 15 of the
NOTE FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the following two conditions: (1) This de-
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the vice may not cause harmful interfer-
NOTE following two conditions: (1) This de- ence, and (2) this device must accept
This device complies with part 15 of the vice may not cause harmful interfer- any interference received, including
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the ence, and (2) this device must accept interference that may cause undesired
following two conditions: (1) This de- any interference received, including operation.
vice may not cause harmful interfer- interference that may cause undesired
ence, and (2) this device must accept operation.
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Black plate (571,1)
Supplement/Technical information for El Salvador models 13-31
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- Technical information for El Technical information for
tion (SRVD) Salvador models Panama models
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & LF Oscillator
CAUTION tion (SRVD)
FCC WARNING FCC ID: OAYSRR2A push-button start system”
Changes or modifications not ex- CAUTION FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02
sponsible for compliance could void FCC WARNING CAUTION
the user’s authority to operate the Changes or modifications not ex- FCC WARNING
equipment. pressly approved by the party re-
Changes or modifications not ex-
sponsible for compliance could void
NOTE the user’s authority to operate the
sponsible for compliance could void
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the the user’s authority to operate the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the equipment.
following two conditions: (1) This de- NOTE
vice may not cause harmful interfer- This device complies with part 15 of the
ence, and (2) this device must accept NOTE
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
any interference received, including This device complies with part 15 of the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
interference that may cause undesired FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
operation. following two conditions: (1) This de-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
operation.
operation.
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (572,1)
13-32 Supplement/Technical information for Panama models
& Immobilizer ! Models without “keyless access & Access key

with push-button start system” FCC ID: HYQ13CZY
push-button start system” FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH HYQ14AHB
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02 CAUTION CAUTION
CAUTION FCC WARNING FCC WARNING
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re- pressly approved by the party re-
Changes or modifications not ex- sponsible for compliance could void sponsible for compliance could void
pressly approved by the party re- the user’s authority to operate the the user’s authority to operate the
sponsible for compliance could void equipment. equipment.
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the This device complies with part 15 of the
NOTE FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
This device complies with part 15 of the following two conditions: (1) This de- following two conditions: (1) This de-
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the vice may not cause harmful interfer- vice may not cause harmful interfer-
following two conditions: (1) This de- ence, and (2) this device must accept ence, and (2) this device must accept
vice may not cause harmful interfer- any interference received, including any interference received, including
ence, and (2) this device must accept interference that may cause undesired interference that may cause undesired
any interference received, including operation. operation.
operation.

Black plate (573,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Israel models 13-33
Technical information for Israel models

& Tire pressure monitoring system
13

Black plate (574,1)
13-34 Supplement/Technical information for Serbia models
Technical information for & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Access key
Serbia models tion (SRVD)
system

Black plate (575,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Vietnam models 13-35
& Remote keyless entry trans- ! Receiver Technical information for

mitter Model: TWD1G776 Vietnam models
! Transmitter
Model: TB1G077 tion (SRVD)
13

Black plate (576,1)
13-36 Supplement/Technical information for Philippines models
Technical information for Technical information for Technical information for

Philippines models Jamaica models Brazil models
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Immobilizer & Access key
tion (SRVD)
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA, Equipment identifier is
placed on the product.
! Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”
& Access key

Jamaica: SMA-13CZY.
Jamaica: SMA-14AHB.
& Keyless access with push-

button start system
Este equipamento está homologado pela

ANATEL de acordo com os procedimen-

Black plate (577,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Brazil models 13-37
tos regulamentados pela Resolução & Immobilizer 242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos
242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos aplicados.
aplicados. ! Models with “keyless access with Este equipamento opera em caráter se-
Este equipamento opera em caráter se- push-button start system” cundário, isto é, não tem direito a prote-
cundário, isto é, não tem direito a prote- ção contra interferência prejudicial, mes-
ção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não
mo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
operando em caráter primário.
13
tos regulamentados pela Resolução
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (578,1)
13-38 Supplement/Technical information for Brazil models
! Models without “keyless access aplicados. & LF Oscillator

with push-button start system” Este equipamento opera em caráter se-
cundário, isto é, não tem direito a prote- ! Models with “keyless access with
ção contra interferência prejudicial, mes- push-button start system”
mo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não
pode causar interferência a sistemas

tos regulamentados pela Resolução Este equipamento está homologado pela
242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos ANATEL de acordo com os procedimen-

Black plate (579,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Brazil models 13-39
242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- aplicados.
aplicados. tion (SRVD) Este equipamento opera em caráter se-
Este equipamento opera em caráter se- cundário, isto é, não tem direito a prote-
cundário, isto é, não tem direito a prote- ção contra interferência prejudicial, mes-
ção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não
mo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.

13
242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos

Black plate (580,1)
13-40 Supplement/Technical information for Taiwan models
Technical information for & Access key & Immobilizer

Taiwan models ! Models with “keyless access with
system

Black plate (581,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Taiwan models 13-41
! Models without “keyless access & Keyless access with push- & Remote keyless entry trans-
with push-button start system” button start system mitter
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (582,1)
13-42 Supplement/Technical information for Jordan models
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- Technical information for & Access key
tion (SRVD) Jordan models
system
& Remote keyless entry trans-

mitter

Black plate (583,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Argentina models 13-43
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- Technical information for Technical information for
tion (SRVD) Argentina models Paraguay models
& Access key & Access key
Vendor: Tokyo Motors S.A.
Address: Av. Eusebio Ayala No. 4649, km.
5 1/2 Asuncion, Paraguay
13

Black plate (584,1)
13-44 Supplement/Technical information for Republic of South Africa models
Technical information for & Remote keyless entry trans- & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-
Republic of South Africa mitter tion (SRVD)
models TF001:
& Access key
GSREU52:

Black plate (585,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Russia/Kazakhstan models 13-45
Technical information for & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- Technical information for
Russia/Kazakhstan models tion (SRVD) Australia/New Zealand mod-
els
& Remote keyless entry trans-
mitter & Remote keyless entry trans-
mitter
MODEL No: TF001 (Keyless Transmitter)

: GSREU52 (Keyless Recei-
ver)
Manufacturer: Calsonic Kansei Corp.
Country of Production: JAPAN
Contact Information:
http://www.calsonickansei.co.jp
Local Contact Person: Subaru Motor LLC
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (586,1)
13-46 Supplement/Technical information for Thailand models
tion (SRVD) Thailand models Oman models
& Remote keyless entry trans- & Remote keyless entry trans-
mitter mitter
This telecommunication equipment con-
forms to NTC technical requirement.

tion (SRVD)
Model No.: TWB1G762

Black plate (587,1)
Supplement/Technical information for UAE models 13-47
Technical information for & Remote keyless entry trans-

UAE models mitter
system
Model No.: TWD1G776
TWB1G762
13
TWD1G776
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (588,1)
13-48 Supplement/Technical information for Indonesia models
tion (SRVD) Indonesia models Lebanon models
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-
tion (SRVD) tion (SRVD)
From the Lebanese Telecommunications
Ministry:
Type Approval Number: 8341/O&M/2011

Black plate (589,1)
Supplement/Technical information for Ukraine models 13-49
Technical information for Technical information for Technical information for

Ukraine models Bahrain models Qatar models
& Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec- & Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-
tion (SRVD) tion (SRVD) tion (SRVD)
The Equipment Identified hereon is ap-
proved for use under the following rules.
1. This equipment must not cause harm-
ful interference to other service.
2. This equipment is subject to harmful
interference, and the owner of this equip-
ment must not claim for protection.
13

Black plate (31,1)
Index
14

Black plate (2,1)
14-2 Index
A AUX...................................................................... 5-37
Abbreviation ................................................................... 2 Base display audio set ....................................... 5-3, 5-5
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-32 Basic operation ...................................................... 5-16
Warning light ......................................................... 3-22 Bluetooth audio ...................................................... 5-34
Access key ................................................................. 2-7 CD ....................................................................... 5-29
Warning light ......................................................... 3-28 iPod...................................................................... 5-32
Accessories.............................................................. 11-47 Set ........................................................................ 5-2
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-7 STARLINK ............................................................. 5-25
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-22 Steering switches for audio ...................................... 5-39
Air conditioner SUBARU STARLINK............................................... 5-25
Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-5 Unit setting ............................................................ 5-17
Manual climate control .............................................. 4-6 USB memory ......................................................... 5-31
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-11 Auto-dimming mirror.................................................. 3-112
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-6 Auto-dimming mirror/compass .................................... 3-112
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-27 Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................... 3-100
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-41 Warning light.......................................................... 3-27
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-4 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Antenna Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-16
Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ............................... 5-2 Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-32 Sensor ................................................................ 3-108
Appendix .................................................................. 5-67 Sensor sensitivity control ....................................... 3-108
Certification ........................................................... 5-67
Certification for MAROC models .............................. 5-68 B
Certification for Paraguay models............................. 5-68 Battery .................................................................... 11-44
Certification for Russia and Kazakhstan models......... 5-68 Disposal and recycling ................................................ 8
Certification for UAE models.................................... 5-68 Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-6
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-10 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-19 Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-57
Audio Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-58
AM/FM radio ......................................................... 5-26 Bluetooth®
Antenna system....................................................... 5-2 Audio .................................................................... 5-34

Black plate (3,1)
Index 14-3
Hands-free phone system ....................................... 5-47 Changing

Bluetooth® settings..................................................... 5-42 Coolant ............................................................... 11-22
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device ................. 5-42 Flat tire .................................................................. 9-5
Setting Bluetooth details ......................................... 5-45 Oil and oil filter..................................................... 11-18
Booster seat.............................................................. 1-34 Charge warning light ................................................... 3-18
Bottle holder................................................................ 6-7 Checking
Brake Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-31
Assist ................................................................... 7-30 Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-31
Booster........................................................ 7-30, 11-30 Clutch function ..................................................... 11-31
Disc ..................................................................... 12-9 Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-32
Fluid............................................................ 11-28, 12-7 Coolant level........................................................ 11-20
Pad ..................................................................... 11-33 Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-28
Parking ........................................................ 7-41, 11-33 Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-29
Pedal .................................................................. 11-31 Fluid level (power steering fluid) ............................. 11-27
System ................................................................. 7-30 Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-41
Brake pedal Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-16
Free play ............................................................. 11-31 Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-22
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-31 Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-34
Brake system ............................................................ 7-30 Installation with seatbelt .......................................... 1-28
Warning light ......................................................... 3-25 ISOFIX anchor bars ................................................ 1-35
Braking ..................................................................... 7-30 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-37
Tips...................................................................... 7-30 Child safety ................................................................... 4
Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................... 11-33 Locks.................................................................... 2-24
Bulb Chime
Chart .................................................................. 12-16 Key........................................................................ 3-5
Replacing............................................................. 11-47 Light ..................................................................... 3-92
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
C Cigarette lighter........................................................... 6-8
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cleaning
Center Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-4
Console .................................................................. 6-5 Interior .................................................................. 10-5

Black plate (4,1)
14-4 Index
Ventilation grille ..................................................... 4-10 Differential gear oil

Climate control system ................................................. 4-3 Front........................................................... 11-27, 12-6
Automatic................................................................ 4-5 Rear ........................................................... 11-27, 12-6
Manual ................................................................... 4-6 Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Clock........................................................ 3-47, 3-61, 3-76 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-31
Clutch Dome light ......................................................... 6-2, 11-55
Fluid.................................................................... 11-29 Door
Pedal .................................................................. 11-31 Locks..................................................................... 2-4
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-11 Open warning light.................................................. 3-26
Compass ................................................................. 3-112 Double locking system ................................................ 2-22
Console ...................................................................... 6-5 Double trip meter........................................................ 3-10
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-19 Drive belts ............................................................... 11-25
Fluid............................................................ 11-26, 12-7 Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD)......... 7-15
Coolant............................................................ 11-20, 12-7 Auto indicator light .................................................. 3-34
Cooling system ......................................................... 11-19 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-35
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4 Driving
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-45 All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-27
Indicator light......................................................... 3-34 AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-34 Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-5 Drinking..................................................................... 6
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-5 Drugs........................................................................ 6
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-6 Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Pets.......................................................................... 7
D Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-8
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-99 Tips ................................................. 7-14, 7-25, 8-2, 8-5
Declaration of conformity in accordance with the radio Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6
and telecommunications terminal equipment directive Winter .................................................................... 8-6
1999/5/EC.............................................................. 13-6
Defogger.................................................................. 3-114 E
Defrosting ................................................................... 4-9 ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12
Deicer ..................................................................... 3-114 Electrical system ........................................................ 12-8

Black plate (5,1)
Index 14-5
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-34
system........................................................... 3-25, 7-33 Fog light switch .................................................... 3-103
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-16 Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Emergency stop signal ............................................... 7-31 Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Engine Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4
Compartment overview .......................................... 11-14 Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-7
Coolant........................................................ 11-20, 12-7 Memory function...................................................... 1-5
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-2 Power seat ............................................................. 1-5
Hood ................................................................... 11-12 Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-19 Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Oil............................................................... 11-16, 12-4 Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Overheating .......................................................... 9-12 Consumption indicator............................................. 3-53
Starting & stopping............................................. 7-6, 7-9 Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2 Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3
Gauge................................................................... 3-11
F Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5 Fuses ..................................................................... 11-46
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-11 Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-28 G
Clutch.................................................................. 11-29 Gear shift indicator ................................................. 8, 3-33
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-26 Glove box................................................................... 6-4
Power steering ..................................................... 11-27
Fog light ................................................................. 3-103 H
Bulb .......................................................... 11-51, 12-16 Hands-free phone system............................................ 5-47
Indicator light......................................................... 3-34 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2
Switch ................................................................ 3-103 Head restraint adjustment
Folding mirror switch ................................................. 3-113 Front seat............................................................... 1-7
Front Rear seat .............................................................. 1-11
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-27, 12-6 Headlight
Fog light .......................................... 3-103, 11-51, 12-16 Beam leveler........................................................ 3-100

Black plate (6,1)
14-6 Index
Bulb replacement .................................................. 11-47 Indicator light

Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-16 Cruise control ........................................................ 3-34
Control switch........................................................ 3-92 Cruise control set ................................................... 3-34
Flasher ................................................................. 3-98 Front fog light......................................................... 3-34
Indicator light......................................................... 3-34 Headlight............................................................... 3-34
Off delay............................................................... 3-94 High beam............................................................. 3-33
Off delay setting..................................................... 3-94 High beam assist.................................................... 3-34
Washer................................................................ 3-111 Hill start assist OFF ................................................ 3-26
High Beam Assist ...................................................... 3-95 Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-32
High beam assist function ........................................... 3-95 Rear fog light ......................................................... 3-34
Indicator light......................................................... 3-34 Rear seatbelt ......................................................... 3-16
Warning indicator ................................................... 3-34 REV...................................................................... 3-36
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-33 Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-33
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-95 Shift-up ................................................................. 3-33
Hill start assist .................................................. 7-42, 11-32 SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-32
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-26 SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection OFF ...................... 3-36
To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-43 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-33
Warning light ......................................................... 3-26 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-24
Hill start assist (MT models) ....................................... 11-32 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-23
Hook Inside mirror ................................................... 3-111, 3-112
Coat ..................................................................... 6-11 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13 Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-28
Horn........................................................................ 3-116 ISOFIX anchor bars .................................................... 1-35
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-19
J
I Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-5
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-4 Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9
Light....................................................................... 3-6
Illumination brightness control.................................... 3-100 K
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3 Key............................................................................ 2-2
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32 Number .................................................................. 2-2

Black plate (7,1)
Index 14-7
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5 Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-10

Replacement ........................................................... 2-3 Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-26
Keyless access entry function...................................... 2-11 Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-20
Keyless access with push-button start system ................. 2-7 LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-28
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-15
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-11 M
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-13 Maintenance
Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 3-28 Precautions ........................................................... 11-7
When access key does not operate properly ............. 9-17 Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-18 Seatbelt................................................................. 1-19
Tips ...................................................................... 11-9
L Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5 Malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light)............... 3-18
License plate light ..................................................... 11-53 Manual
Light Climate control ........................................................ 4-6
Brake/Tail................................................... 11-53, 12-16 Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-22
Control switch........................................................ 3-92 Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Daytime running............................................ 3-99, 11-51 Transmission oil ................................................... 11-26
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-55 Transmission-6 speeds ........................................... 7-12
Front fog.................................................... 3-103, 11-51 Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-55
Front position ............................................... 3-93, 11-49 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-9
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-6 Mirror defogger ........................................................ 3-114
License plate ........................................................ 11-53 Mirrors .................................................................... 3-111
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-55 Multi function display................................................... 3-47
Rear combination.................................................. 11-53 Multi information display .............................................. 3-36
Rear fog .................................................... 3-104, 11-54
Tail...................................................................... 11-53 N
Trunk................................................................... 11-56 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
Turn signal ......................................... 3-99, 11-49, 11-53
Vanity mirror ......................................................... 11-56 O
Limited slip differential (LSD) ....................................... 7-28 Odometer .................................................................. 3-10

Black plate (8,1)
14-8 Index
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-18 Window ................................................................. 2-24

Oil level Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-22, 1-67
Engine................................................................. 11-16 Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-6
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-27 Push-button
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-26 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-27 Starting and stopping engine..................................... 7-9
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-19 R
One-touch lane changer.............................................. 3-99 Rear
Outside Combination lights ................................................ 11-53
Mirror defogger ..................................................... 3-114 Differential gear oil........................................ 11-27, 12-6
Mirrors ................................................................. 3-112 Fog light switch .................................................... 3-104
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-51 Turn signal light.................................................... 11-53
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12 Viscous limited slip differential.................................. 7-28
Rear differential
P Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-20
Parking Rear fog light ................................................. 3-104, 11-54
Brake ................................................................... 7-41 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-34
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-33 Rear seat .................................................................. 1-10
Tips...................................................................... 7-41 Folding down ......................................................... 1-12
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-11
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-13
PIN Code Access ...................................................... 2-17 How to adjust the rear view image............................ 5-24
Power Rear window
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6 Defogger ............................................................. 3-114
Outlets.................................................................... 6-7 Recommended
Outside mirrors ..................................................... 3-112 Brake fluid ............................................................. 12-7
Seat ....................................................................... 1-5 Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-29
Steering ................................................................ 7-28 Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4
Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-27 Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6
Steering warning light ............................................. 3-27 Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-6

Black plate (9,1)
Index 14-9
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8 S

Refueling .................................................................... 7-3 Safety
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-18 Precautions when driving............................................. 3
Replacement Symbol...................................................................... 2
Brake pad ............................................................ 11-32 Warnings ................................................................... 2
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-42 Seat
Replacing Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Access key battery................................................ 11-57 Front...................................................................... 1-2
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-22 Heater.................................................................... 1-9
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery.................. 11-58 Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-47, 12-16 Memory function...................................................... 1-5
Brake/tail light............................................. 11-53, 12-16 Power .................................................................... 1-5
Daytime running light............................................. 11-51 Rear ..................................................................... 1-10
Dome light ........................................................... 11-55 Seatbelt................................................................. 3, 1-14
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-51 Fastening .............................................................. 1-17
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-49 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-19
Headlight ............................................................. 11-48 Pretensioners......................................................... 1-20
High beam headlight ............................................. 11-48 Safety tips ............................................................. 1-14
License plate light ................................................. 11-53 Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-14
Low beam headlight .............................................. 11-49 Security
Map light.............................................................. 11-55 Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Position light......................................................... 11-49 Select lever
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-53 Position indicator .................................................... 3-33
Rear fog light........................................................ 11-54 Shift lock function ................................................... 7-23
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-53 Shift-up indicator light.................................................. 3-33
Tail light ............................................................... 11-53 SI-DRIVE .................................................................. 7-25
Trunk light............................................................ 11-56 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Vanity mirror light .................................................. 11-56 Side View Monitor ...................................................... 6-17
REV indicator light and buzzer..................................... 3-13 Snow tires ......................................................... 8-9, 11-34
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-10 Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-8
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-24, 12-8

Black plate (10,1)
14-10 Index
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Temperature warning light

Speedometer............................................................... 3-9 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-19
SRS Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-20
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-56 Temporary spare tire ............................................ 9-2, 12-8
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-44 Tether (child restraint system) ...................................... 1-37
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-56 Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-13
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 3, 1-38 Tire................................................................. 11-34, 12-8
SRS airbag system Chains .................................................................. 8-10
Monitors................................................................ 1-65 Inspection............................................................ 11-35
Servicing............................................................... 1-66 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-36
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17 Replacement........................................................ 11-39
Starting & stopping engine ...................................... 7-6, 7-9 Rotation .............................................................. 11-39
Steering switches for audio ......................................... 5-39 Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
Steering wheel Types.................................................................. 11-34
Power................................................................... 7-28 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-38, 9-8, 11-34
Tilt/telescopic........................................................ 3-115 TPMS mode setting ................................................ 7-39
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4 Warning light.......................................................... 3-20
SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) ..................... 7-48 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-34
OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-36 Tools.......................................................................... 9-3
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-55 Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-37
SRVD approach indicator light/warning buzzer........... 7-52 Towing ...................................................................... 9-13
Warning indicator ........................................... 3-36, 7-54 All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-16
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-32 Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-16
Sun visors................................................................... 6-3 Hooks ................................................................... 9-13
Sunroof............................................................. 2-30, 9-18 Trailer
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-38 Towing .................................................................. 8-11
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-6 Trip meter.................................................................. 3-10
Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-27
T Release handle ...................................................... 2-28
Tachometer ............................................................... 3-11 Trunk light ............................................................... 11-56
Temperature gauge .................................................... 3-12

Black plate (11,1)
Index 14-11
Turn signal Access key ............................................................ 3-28

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-33 All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-27
Lever.................................................................... 3-99 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-19
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-27
U Brake system......................................................... 3-25
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-12 Charge.................................................................. 3-18
USB power supply ....................................................... 6-9 Door open ............................................................. 3-26
Driver’s Control Center Differential............................ 3-35
V Engine low oil level................................................. 3-19
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-4 High beam assist.................................................... 3-34
Light.................................................................... 11-56 Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-26
Vehicle Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-28
Identification ........................................................ 12-18 LED headlight ........................................................ 3-28
Symbols .................................................................... 3 Low fuel ................................................................ 3-26
Vehicle Dynamics Control Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-20
Mode indicator light ................................................ 3-24 Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-19
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-24 Power steering ....................................................... 3-27
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-36 Rear differential oil temperature................................ 3-20
Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-23 Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
System ................................................................. 7-34 SRS airbag system................................................. 3-17
Warning light ................................................. 3-22, 3-24 SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection.............................. 3-36
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2 Vacuum pump system............................................. 3-26
Voice command system operation ................................ 5-62 Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................ 3-22, 3-24
Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-26
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
W
Washing .................................................................... 10-2
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-14
Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3
Warning chimes
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-38
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-28
What to do if... ........................................................... 5-58
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-14
Troubleshooting...................................................... 5-58
Warning light
ABS ..................................................................... 3-22

Black plate (12,1)
14-12 Index
Wheel
Alignment.............................................................. 12-9
Aluminum............................................................. 11-41
Balance ............................................................... 11-38
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-8
Replacement ........................................................ 11-40
Windows................................................................... 2-24
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-41
Wiper and washer switches................................... 3-107
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-43
Wiper deicer......................................................... 3-114
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-6
Tires............................................................. 8-9, 11-34
Wiper and washer .................................................... 3-105
Wiper deicer............................................................. 3-114

Black plate (2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel: & Engine oil:
! STI Use only the following oils.
. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
Use only unleaded petrol with 98 Octane or higher. SERVING”
This octane rating is the Research Octane number. . or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
! Except STI certification mark (Starburst mark)
Use only unleaded petrol with 95 Octane or higher. . or ACEA specification A3 or A5
This octane rating is the Research Octane number. For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
& Fuel capacity:
60 liters (15.9 US gal, 13.2 Imp gal) & Engine oil capacity:
! STI
! Except STI
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-16.
& Cold tire pressure:

See the label located under the driver’s door latch.

Wrxsti

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wrxsti

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wrxsti

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black plate (1,1)

This manual uses recycled paper.

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 9/ 1

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 9/ 1

Warranties How to use this Owner’s Chapter 4: Climate control

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION & Abbreviation list

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when 0

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

and wheels” F11-34. General information EU Battery directive 2006/66/

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

The following devices utilize batteries that

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

一般Model "A1270GE-A" Edited: 2015/ 9/ 1

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

(Except STI) 1) Center console (page 6-5)

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

A: Models without access key

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Mark Name Page Mark Name Page 0

Low fuel warning light 3-26 REV indicator light 3-36

Intelligent (I) mode in- 3-32

Sport Sharp (S#)

Auto [+] mode indica- 3-35

Auto [−] mode indica- 3-35

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Item Function Possible settings Default setting 0

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats used in the upright position in a

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-3

Secure ALL types of child restraint

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

一般Model "A1270GE-A" EDITED: 2016/ 3/ 10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-5